Home

Avaya Configuring Dial Services User's Manual

1. E j ESA lo Key Remote site C ___ Primary line Backup line DS0020A Figure 1 6 PPP Backup over a PSTN Router Router l L Primary leased line 5 I I I I I I Dial backup line Bea See le eee eee S eR OU Nee ek eee DS0021A Figure 1 7 PPP Backup over an ISDN Network 308621 14 00 Rev 00 1 17 Configuring Dial Services Link backup is a multiple circuit backup which means that the entire interface is backed up To back up all PVCs for a frame relay interface you configure frame relay across the backup circuit Figure 1 8 shows an example of link backup Failure point Central site router R2 Remote site router R1 Frame relay network __ s Group mode PVCs Frame relay h I interface l I I Key Primary PVCs Backup PVCs DS0026A Figure 1 8 Link Backup for a Frame Relay Network In Figure 1 8 if the frame relay link fails at router R1 the router activates a backup connection through the ISDN network then back through the frame relay network to the destination The backup connection to the frame relay network uses a different
2. router DS0012A Figure 5 5 Router in an ISDN Network The following sections explain ISDN operation on your router 5 10 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Implementation Notes for All Dial Services BRI Service on the AN ANH ASN and ARN The AN ANH ASN and ARN support the BRI standard for ISDN using an integrated ISDN BRI net module Note The ARN can use only three B channels If you select 2B D service for one BRI interface you must use 1B D service for the second interface The ISDN BRI module allows you to connect directly to the ISDN network instead of connecting via a terminal adapter With BRI you reduce equipment costs and simplify connections to an ISDN switch The BRI implementation supports all three dial services In addition the implementation supports an ISDN leased line application for Germany and Japan only Subsequent chapters in this guide describe how to configure each service to connect to an ISDN network B Channel Support In keeping with the BRI standard each port on the ISDN BRI module provides two 64 Kb s B channels for data transmission allowing communication with two remote locations simultaneously D Channel Support The router supports full 16 Kb s D channel signaling and call setup and teardown between the router and ISDN switch The D channel implementation complies with the ITU T formerly CCITT 1988 recommendat
3. Topic Page Bandwidth on Demand Terminology 8 2 PPP Multilink 8 2 PPP Bandwidth Allocation Protocol 8 4 Data Compression 8 7 Protocol Prioritization 8 8 Defining the Role of the Router in the Network 8 8 Balancing Traffic Between Lines in a Multilink Bundle 8 8 External Clock Speed Effects on Congestion Thresholds 8 9 Testing the Bandwidth on Demand Connection 8 9 308621 14 00 Rev 00 8 1 Configuring Dial Services Bandwidth on Demand Terminology Table 8 1 lists the terminology that Site Manager and this guide use to describe circuits in a bandwidth on demand configuration Table 8 1 Terminology for Bandwidth on Demand Service Type of Circuit Referred to As Leased circuit Bandwidth circuit Leased multilink circuit You designate a leased circuit as a bandwidth circuit to enable bandwidth on demand service Dial on demand circuit Demand circuit This is a demand circuit for which you can provide bandwidth on demand service You do not designate this as a bandwidth circuit Dial up circuit that helps the Dial up or secondary circuit congested leased circuit PPP Multilink Multilink is a feature of PPP that you can enable for individual PPP links Site Manager automatically configures PPP multilink when you configure circuits for bandwidth on demand service Links are logical communication channels between two routers A typical link includes two ISDN B
4. 2 16 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Starting Dial Services Using Site Manager Specifying the Connection Mode The connection mode determines which router places a call first if both sides of a connection establish a demand circuit at the same time resulting in a collision Both routers in a demand configuration can initiate a call If a collision occurs each router refers to the value of this parameter to determine whether to initiate subsequent calls or whether to wait and receive calls You can also configure a router so that it never initiates a call To configure the connection mode Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the PPP Demand Circuits window scroll down to the Connection Mode parameter Set the Connection Mode parameter Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 37 If this router is set to Collision Master set the router at the other side of the connection to Collision Slave Keep the PPP Demand Circuits window open and go to the next section Enabling a Protocol 308621 14 00 Rev 00 2 17 Configuring Dial Services Enabling a Protocol In this section you enable IP See Configuring IP ARP RARP RIP and OSPF Services for Site Manager window and parameter descriptions To enable a different protocol see Adding Layer 3 Protocols to PPP Demand Circuits on page 12 36 To enable IP for a selected demand circuit
5. cccncsseesesesesenereenees 8 5 Figure A 1 Demand Pool Configuration Window ccecceecceseereeseeeeeeeeeeeeenaetaeeeaeens A 4 Figure A 2 Choose WAN Serial Interface Type Window ere meee peepee eee A 5 Figure A 3 Sync Line Media Type Window cccccccecesteeeeeneeeteteeeeeeeeesteeeteeeees AG Figure A 4 Async Line Media Type Window cccsccceceeeseceeeeeeeeecaeseaeeesaeeeneeeaaes A 6 Figure A 5 Async Hayes Modem Interface Window ccecccceeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee A 9 Figure AS Porn Application WInNdow svceusissnaesasnnsitivetin eiveanpertdnataieeeeee A 18 Figure A 7 ISDN Switch Configuration Window P T ieina err A 20 Figure AB ISDN Logical Lines WINGO cicirine A 24 Figure A 9 BRI Interface Configuration Window c ccceccceeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeetaes A 27 Figure A 10 PPP Demand Circuits Window meuenls ear bana ree ere A 34 Figure A 11 Circuit Time of Day Schedule Window ee eeeeeseeeeeeeeeeereeeeneeeeaees A 55 Figure A 12 Demand Circuit Groups Window eeceeceeseceseeeeseeeeeeeeeeesaeteaeeaeeeaeenee A 62 Figure A 13 Circuit Options Window cc ccscticaccniantacesncetcadsuaninss annie A 67 Figure A 14 Primary Circuit Definition WiNdOW ssssesssesessieriserisriesrrrirerrerierrnrrreres A 69 Figure A 15 FR Interface Window Anian S E ane ARER Hinni E iene A 7 1 Figure A 16 FR Primary Interface Definition Window
6. ccscccceeeeeccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee A 74 Figure A 117 Circuit Options WInNdOw sis ccscescs stan cenctt mavriewetteaanensnieamenansinieeibenieedeadere A 77 Figure A 18 Bandwidth on Demand Circuit Definition Window ee A 80 Figure A 19 BOD Configuration Window s sssirstsassssstousiiiesiasiiedseavenisssatiimonen POS Figure A 20 ISDN Local Phone Numbers Window cescceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenreeaeenee A 90 Figure A 21 Outgoing Phone List WINKOW 0 jssccticcctssetecsccsniiscetcasitatusnebsconncieneseves A 94 Figure A 22 Incoming Phone List WINGOW irsinin A 105 Figure A 23 Caller Resolution Table Window ee E T EET ebia A 107 Figure B 14 Dial on Demand Configuration with PPP ssssssssssssssssssssesrsssrssssrssssessse B 2 Figure B 2 Dial on Demand Across a Frame Relay Network cccceseseeteees B 10 Figure B 3 Dial on Demand for an ISDN Network 06 aai P aanren DI Figure B 4 Hot Standby Connections in a Frame Relay Network sesssesessesese B 21 Figure B 5 Dial Backup Configuration with PPP ccccccscceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeaes B 24 Figure B 6 Dial Backup over an ISDN Network cecceeeceeeeeseeceeeeneeeetenereeeeeeeee B 33 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Table 1 1 Table 1 2 Table 1 3 Table 2 1 Table 3 1 Table 3 2 Table 7 1 Table 8 1 Table 12 1 Table 12 2 Table 12 3 Table 13 1 Table 13 2 Table 14 1 Table 14 2 Table 14 3 Table 15 1
7. 308621 14 00 Rev 00 11 7 Configuring Dial Services Enabling Incoming Call Filtering Incoming call filtering enables you to use caller ID service which identifies the incoming caller By enabling incoming call filtering the router rejects any unauthorized caller For more information about filtering incoming calls see Incoming Call Filtering on page 5 16 Using the BCC To enable incoming call filtering navigate to the isdn switch prompt and enter incoming filter lt state gt state is on or off For example to enable incoming filtering enter isdn switch 2 incoming filter on Using Site Manager To enable incoming call filtering Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window choose Dialup The Dialup menu opens 2 Choose Edit Switch Parameters The ISDN Configured Switches window opens 3 Set the Incoming Filter parameter to Enable Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 22 4 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Customizing ISDN Lines Modifying the Adaption Rate To send and receive data transmitting at a rate of 56 Kb s across a 64 Kb s line you must modify the adaption rate For more information about this feature see Rate Adaption on page 5 17 In accordance with the ITU T V 110 standard configuring the global ad
8. continued 13 20 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Customizing Backup Circuits Site Manager Procedure continued You do this System responds 5 Click on Add The second Circuit Time of Day Schedule window opens 6 Set the following parameters Days Start Time End Time Availability Mode Click on Help or see the parameter descriptions beginning on page A 56 7 Click on OK You return to the completed Circuit Time of Day Schedule window 8 You can revise the schedule by changing the parameters values and clicking on Apply 9 Click on Done You return to the Primary Circuit Definition or the FR Primary Interface Definition window 10 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window Using the BCC Deleting a Backup Circuit Schedule delete For example The following sections explain how to delete a schedule that you configured for a backup circuit To delete a backup circuit s schedule navigate to the schedule prompt and enter schedule backup 8 1 weekday 1000 2100 delete 308621 14 00 Rev 00 13 21 Configuring Dial Services Using Site Manager To delete a backup circuit s schedule Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window choose Dialup The Dialup menu opens 2 Choose Backup Circuits The Backup Circuits menu opens 3 Choose PPP or Frame Relay
9. eerste ere iai PE PEE E Don PE 11 20 Disabling he Leased LING sessir 11 21 Modiiying the BRI FA TIMET suirinsoiinnares isinsin e aE EE 11 21 Modifying the Interframe Time Fill Pattern darahing SE RAE ree EE ETA 11 22 Deleting BR and PRI from ihe Router ssrssisionsnnennan munveesiontass 11 22 Deleting ISDN B Channels from a Pool 2 ccccccecseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeaeeeaeeeeeeeseneeeneees 11 23 Chapter 12 Customizing Demand Circuits Adding Frame Relay Demand Circuits ocicccccessccee au eissuda 12 2 Modifying the Frame Relay Interface ee AN seals rare cine a 12 3 Adding a senice ROCONI roria N a ANAA 12 5 Adding or Moding PVCS austinncmnecn caesarean CRE 12 6 Adding Layer 3 Protocols to Frame Relay Demand Circuits cceseseeeeeeereees 12 7 Gustomizing Demand Circuit OpGration argrnirismin n 12 8 Forcing the Circuit to Activate or Deactivate qs lanes iaia opasa 12 8 Deactivating the Circuit Due to Inactivity siisii inini 12 9 Reiying th CCI cari esas acca dansap ota auth o nasa saein aid aana 12 11 Specifying Which Router Initiates a Call Perr er EE T ina 12 12 Terminating a Failed Connection and Using Another Danneaiidh EEA 12 14 Modifying PPP Authentication Information c cccccceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeereeeeeeeaees 12 15 Changing the Authentication Protocol cccciscccccscctscccccassscctecstietesceheeedaadiatnesenens 12 16 vacate Ub sho Gamers een Petree rrr ter aerreen
10. 5 Set the Connection Mode parameter Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 37 6 Click on Apply then click on Done You return to the Demand Pools window 7 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window 308621 14 00 Rev 00 12 13 Configuring Dial Services Terminating a Failed Connection and Using Another Connection For applications where there are two paths to the same destination you can configure the router to automatically terminate a failed demand circuit and send the data over the other path to the destination Note that the router does not terminate the circuit until it reaches the maximum number of connection attempts which you specify using the retry count parameter BCC or the Retry Max parameter Site Manager Using the BCC To terminate a failed connection and send data across another path to the same destination navigate to the demand circuit prompt and enter auto demand termination enabled The default is disabled Enable this parameter when the router continues to advertise a static route over a demand circuit but cannot establish a connection over that circuit The router terminates the demand circuit which notifies the routing protocol that the static routes associated with this circuit are no longer active The router then uses the alternative path To use the auto demand termination feature you must have already set up an alternative path to
11. Add one or more lines to the pool and for modem lines configure the interface For ISDN lines the interface is defined before adding the line to the pool Line Media Type WAN Serial Interface Type 4 Designate the ISDN switch type Switch Type ISDN only 5 Specify a local phone number Directory Number ISDN only Service Profile ID SPID United States and Canada only 6 Add a demand backup or bandwidth circuit Pool ID 7 Specify the leased line connection type backup and bandwidth only Circuit Type Backup Pool ID or Bandwidth on Demand Pool ID Specify authentication protocol information CHAP is the default protocol CHAP Local Name CHAP Secret Specify the circuit connection mode Connection Mode demand Backup Mode backup Bandwidth Mode bandwidth 10 Add protocols This chapter uses IP as an example demand only IP Address 11 Create an outgoing phone list Outgoing Phone Number Outgoing Phone Ext SubAddr 12 Set up the caller resolution table Caller Name CHAP Secret 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Starting Dial Services Using Site Manager To see a parameter description click on Help in the Site Manager window or see Appendix A of this guide The menu from which you configure any dial service is the Dialup menu Figure 2 1 Configuration Mode local SNMP Agent LOCAL FILE File Name tmp_mnt usr10 p Mode
12. The Dialup menu opens 2 Choose Demand Circuits The Demand Pools window opens 3 Click on PPP Circuits or FR Circuits 4 Click on Schedule The PPP Demand Circuits window or the FR Demand Circuits window opens The Circuit Time of Day Schedule window PPP or the Pool Availability window frame relay opens 5 Choose a schedule entry and click on Delete 6 Click on Apply and then click on Done You return to the appropriate demand circuits window 7 Click on Done You return to the Demand Pools window 8 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window 308621 14 00 Rev 00 12 45 Configuring Dial Services Configuring Demand Circuit Groups To simplify configuration of unnumbered interfaces in a large network you can configure a demand circuit group This feature is configurable only using Site Manager For more information about demand circuit groups see Demand Circuit Groups on page 6 7 To configure a demand circuit group Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window choose Dialup The Dialup menu opens Choose Demand Circuit Groups 3 Click on Add Group The Demand Circuit Groups window opens The Enter a Demand Pool window opens 4 Set the following parameters PooliD Number of Circuits Click on Help or see the parameter descriptions
13. 4 Click on Apply The new phone number appears in the list 5 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window 308621 14 00 Rev 00 15 21 Configuring Dial Services Using the Incoming Phone List for Callback Service If the callback mode of your router is Server One Charge or Server One Charge Call ID the router uses incoming call filtering to identify the client not PPP authentication which relies on the caller resolution table Using incoming call filtering the router can maintain security while refusing the initial call from the client to save the client phone charges When the server uses incoming filtering it relies on the incoming phone number to identify the client When the server receives the call from the client it matches the client s phone number with a phone number and circuit number in the incoming phone list The circuit number identifies the circuit that the server uses to place the outgoing call back to the client Using the BCC To use the callback modes Server One Charge and Server One Charge Call ID you specify a circuit name after you specify a phone number This command is optional To add a phone number and configure a circuit name navigate to the isdn in phone list prompt and enter in phone number lt number gt circuit name lt name gt number is a numeric string up to 25 characters that represents the incoming phone number name is the name of an
14. Devices 308621 14 00 Rev 00 4 7 Configuring Dial Services For More Information About ISDN For detailed information about ISDN protocol design and implementation refer to the following Deming R ISDN The Network Architecture of the Future Bell Communication Research Technical Education Center New Jersey Goldstein F ISDN in Perspective Reading Mass Addison Wesley 1992 Kessler G ISDN 2d ed New York McGraw Hill 1993 Motorola University Press The Basics Book of ISDN Network Information Center NIC SRI International Reading Mass Addison Wesley third printing January 1994 Newton H Newton s Telecom Dictionary 10th ed New York Flatiron Publishing 1996 Stallings W ISDN and Broadband ISDN 3rd ed New York Macmillan 1995 Stallings W ISDN An Introduction New York Macmillan 1989 4 8 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Chapter 5 Implementation Notes for All Dial Services This chapter describes the Nortel Networks implementation of all three dial services It includes the following information Topic Point to Point Protocol WAN Encryption Protocol jn oy oA MIke fo lE amp Q oO Asynchronous PPP RADIUS ISDN Services Point to Point Protocol You can use Point to Point Protocol PPP across dial lines for any dial service PPP Authentication Dial circuits use a PPP identification mechanism to identify the calling router
15. Ethernet line E11 129 122 1 1 Sync line S331 129 122 3 2 Sync line S11 129 122 3 1 DS0022A Figure B 5 Dial Backup Configuration with PPP B 24 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Configuration Examples Configuring Dial Backup Using the BCC The following section explains how to configure dial backup with PPP on the primary line using the BCC Figure B 5 on page B 25 You would follow similar steps to configure Nortel Networks Standard on the primary line Configuration of Router 1 To create the dial backup configuration in Figure B 5 on page B 24 configure router 1 as follows 1 Enter configuration mode bec gt config Configure a leased synchronous interface with PPP on serial interface slot 1 connector 1 box serial 1 1 serial 1 1 ppp ppp 1 1 ip 129 122 3 1 255 255 255 0 ip 192 122 3 1 255 255 255 0 box Create a dial object for serial interface slot 5 connector 1 PPP is the default protocol box serial 5 1 serial 5 1 dial dial serial 5 1 box Create a backup pool with pool ID 22 then create a backup line on the serial interface you created in step 3 Add this line to the backup pool box backup pool 22 backup pool 22 backup line serial 5 1 Configure a backup circuit for the leased circuit ppp 1 1 Also set the backup mode to initiator backup line 22 serial 5 1 Cwe serial 1 1 ppp ppp 1 1 backup circuit pool id 22 backup mode initiator This circuit uses backup lines configured
16. Go to Designating an Interface As a Dial Object on page 3 14 Designating an Interface As a Dial Object Designating an interface as a dial object tells the router that it can use the interface as a dial line in a line pool For dial backup lines the dial command also configures the default layer 2 protocol PPP 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Starting Dial Services Using the BCC To make an interface a dial object navigate to the interface prompt and enter dial For example to make serial interface 1 1 a dial object enter serial 1 1 dial To make BRI interface 3 1 a dial object navigate to the channel prompt and enter channel 3 1 dial To make PRI interface 2 1 a dial object navigate to the pri prompt and enter pri 2 1 dial The dial command indicates that interface is now available to be used as a dial line in a line pool Note If you purchased selective PRI service from your ISDN provider see Chapter 9 Customizing Line Pools for instructions on configuring a subset of B channels from the full complement of B channels Creating a Line Pool A line pool is a group of one or more lines that reside on the router slots You identify each pool by assigning it a pool ID Each line can connect to a modem or directly to an ISDN network using a router with internal ISDN A line pool can have a combination of synchronous and asynchronous interfaces To create a demand pool or backup pool navigate to the b
17. Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Auto Demand Termination Dialup gt Demand Circuits gt Demand Pools gt PPP or FR Circuits gt PPP or FR Demand Circuits Disabled Enabled Disabled For applications where there are two paths to the same destination this parameter allows the router to automatically terminate a failed demand circuit and send the data over an alternative path to the destination Note that the router does not terminate the circuit until it reaches the maximum number of connection attempts which you specify in the Retry Max parameter Enable this parameter when the router continues to advertise a static route over a demand circuit but cannot establish a connection over that circuit The router terminates the demand circuit which notifies the routing protocol that the static routes associated with this circuit are no longer active The router then uses the alternative path Select Enable if you have an alternative path to a remote destination and you want to ensure that if the demand circuit fails the router terminates the circuit and sends data over the other path 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 4 5 1 29 Auto Demand Term Reset Dialup gt Demand Circuits gt Demand Pools gt PPP or FR Circuits gt PPP or FR Demand Circuits 60 minutes 1 to 999 999 minutes Specifies the amount of time in minutes that the router waits before reestablishing the demand circuit
18. Table A 1 Table A 2 Table A 3 Table C 1 Table C 2 Table C 3 Table C 4 Table D 1 Table D 2 Table E 1 Tables Dial cervice ES iiicoisiniiai cbsvninnd anand beieeanuannienlal asian santas 1 2 Primary and Back p LINGS ois sesds sis sacatusiedenertiyeslavasuitedegratneecatueumeetcasanas 1 14 Primary and Backup Circuit Protocolg scceiciacceceacccsduee sate renestalcannetaseconiede 1 15 Setting Up a Default Modem or ISDN Configuration Using Site Manager 2 4 Setting Up a Default Modem or ISDN Configuration Using the BCC 3 6 Mode Types for BAI Operation cicicicecccrcnetesenctivccceetertasnecedevsdiedaaeeers 3 13 Configuration Requirements for Routers A and C ceccsecceceeesteeeeeeenees 7 4 Terminology for Bandwidth on Demand Service ccceeeeeesteeeeeeees 8 2 Callback Mode OPIONS suxcssinsssaiienr amarante qanlaxannayauainien 12 33 INNS INS T E A vedas aan N EET 12 38 Time of Day Schedules for Standby Circuit 1 cceeeseeeeeeteeeereeeees 12 42 Dial Backup CanigutationS siirsi ensena onn Nana iE 13 2 OH CILIA INNS samnccranamaaa e eae onan 13 18 Terminology for Bandwidth on Demand Service cccccessseeseeereees 14 2 Customizing Bandwidth on Demand Service cecccecceeceeeteeeeeeees 14 3 Changing the Monitor Parameters a Semele re acting acne 1465 Phas Number Typs OPHONS sssiisssseiiinaniin oki actin anand 15 7 Otganizaton of PARAM ONS cisasorniaarnaio innin A 1 A
19. The Primary Circuit Definition window or the FR Primary Interface Definition window opens 4 Click on Schedule 5 Select a schedule entry to be deleted The first Circuit Time of Day Schedule window opens 6 Click on Delete Site Manager removes the entry 7 Click on OK You return to the completed Circuit Time of Day Schedule window 8 Click on Done You return to the Primary Circuit Definition or the FR Primary Interface Definition window 9 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window Removing PPP or Frame Relay Backup Service The following sections explain how to remove dial backup circuits Using the BCC To delete a backup service navigate to the backup circuit prompt for the interface that you want to delete and enter delete For example backup circuit 8 5 1 delete 13 22 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Using Site Manager To remove backup service Customizing Backup Circuits Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window choose Dialup The Dialup menu opens Choose Backup Circuits The Backup Circuits menu opens Choose PPP or Frame Relay The Primary Circuit Definition window or the FR Primary Interface Definition window opens Click on Cct Type or Intf Type Modify one of the following parameters For PPP change the Circuit Type parameter
20. configure multiple lines in the backup pool If the first line fails for every phone number in the router s phone list and the primary line is still down the router tries the next line in the pool If you are backing up a frame relay primary circuit the router not the network activates and terminates the frame relay backup connection The router rejects incoming calls from the frame relay network Reestablishing the Backup Connection If the remote site has several telephone lines attached to individual dial units the backup circuit uses the telephone numbers stored in the primary circuit s record to connect to the site If one telephone number fails the backup line attempts to connect using one of the other telephone numbers 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Configuring Dial Services For V 25bis calls the router redials the same phone number until its retry attempts reach the maximum retry count that you specify in the modem parameters If the router cannot make a connection using the current phone number it tries the next number in its phone list It continues trying until it has gone through all of the numbers or it connects successfully For ISDN calls the router sends a call setup message for each number in the phone list If the router cannot make a connection using the current phone number it tries the next number in its phone list It continues trying until it has tried all of the numbers or it connects successful
21. 3 When it finds an available line router B sends a call response that includes the local phone number of the available line 4 Router A calls the new phone number Router B then activates the additional line 5 Ifthe lines become congested again router A repeats the process If router B uses all the available phone numbers and router A sends another call request for bandwidth router B can inform router A that there are no available lines saving router A the cost of calling to make a connection When router A no longer needs the extra bandwidth it must ask router B to deactivate the line Both routers must agree to deactivate the line to prevent one router from keeping the line active while the other tries to deactivate it BAP Negotiation with Non Nortel Networks Routers If your Nortel Networks router communicates with another vendor s router both routers may be monitoring congestion regardless of who initiated the call Bandwidth allocation algorithms or congestion thresholds may not always be the same on both sides of the line Therefore both routers must agree to activate or deactivate the line to prevent one side from keeping the line active while the other tries to deactivate it 8 6 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Bandwidth on Demand Implementation Notes Configuring BAP To use BAP you must configure bandwidth on demand service for single leased lines leased multilink bundles or dial on demand circuits After you set u
22. Figure B 2 shows a frame relay network In this network BRI channels are used as dial on demand connections This example assumes the following e Both routers are ASNs e The ISDN switch type is BRI NII e The switches can support dial lines e There is no incoming call filtering e Sending complete IEs are not used for call setup e The adaption rate is 64 Kb s e CHAP is the PPP authentication protocol e IP is the only LAN protocol configured e Only one phone number and SPID are used BRI lines usually have two phone numbers and SPIDs Frame relay Switch type brini1 Router 1 Router 2 a 192 100 100 1 192 100 100 2 PVC number 300 PVC number 400 Local phone number 8005552323 Local phone number 8005559876 SPID 2323 SPID 9876 DS0038A Figure B 2 Dial on Demand Across a Frame Relay Network Configure routers 1 and 2 according to the instructions that follow B 10 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Configuration Examples Configuration of Router 1 To create the dial on demand configuration in Figure B 2 on page B 10 configure router 1 as follows 1 Start the BCC and enter configuration mode bec gt config Create a dial object for BRI interface slot 3 module 2 connector 1 stack bri 3 2 1 mode 2b d bri 3 2 1 channel channel 3 2 1 dial dial bri 3 2 1 back Specify a local phone number and SPID fo
23. Modifying the ARN Internal Modem Configuration on page 10 13 Using Modem Factory Defaults You can specify whether exclusive use of the factory default modem initialization string is enabled or disabled When the factory default string is enabled the router sends only the default string ATT amp d0 amp k3 amp X0S0 2S 2 43 to the modem When it is disabled the router sends a user specified initialization string after sending the default string This user specified string is set in the Modem Config String parameter using Site Manager and in the init string parameter using the BCC Commands in the user specified string take precedence over the factory default command string Using the BCC To enable or disable the factory default settings for the modem configuration navigate to the serial interface prompt and enter factory defaults load lt state gt state is enabled or disabled For example serial 2 1 factory defaults load enabled You must set the factory defaults load parameter to disabled when configuring a Hayes compatible external modem for asynchronous interfaces 308621 14 00 Rev 00 10 7 Configuring Dial Services Specifying a Modem Initialization Command Hayes Only For Hayes compatible modems you can specify a custom initialization string Using the BCC You can customize the modem initialization string for Hayes compatible modems Note To set a modem initialization string for interfaces tha
24. Path Dialup gt Backup Circuits gt PPP gt Primary Circuit Definition Default Master Options Master Slave Function Determines which router initiates dialing to establish a backup connection if the primary circuit fails Instructions Accept the default Master if you want the router to initiate dialing The router at the other end must be set to Slave so that it waits until the master router initiates the call Only one router on the link can serve as the master router If both are set to Master they may try to initiate a call simultaneously resulting in a collision on the network If you change the Backup Mode parameter from Master to Slave Site Manager displays the Caller Resolution Info window prompting you to make a caller resolution table entry for the circuit By requiring a table entry Site Manager ensures that you identify the remote master router The local router can then verify the master router s identity and accept the incoming calls Refer to the appropriate parameter descriptions for this window MIB Object ID 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 4 5 1 7 A 70 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Site Manager Parameters Frame Relay Interface Parameters Dial Backup The FR Interface window Figure A 15 contains the interface type parameter which defines the frame relay connection type FR Interface Slot 2 COM2 Cancel OK Values Help Interface Type Pool ID Figure A 15 FR Interface Window The parameter de
25. Port Application Mode Configuration 2 0 0 eceesesseeereeeseeeeeees eee _ B 39 Backup Pool GoniguralgTi aurassa B 39 Backup Ct CTIA sax vasees sasvasshines Aussirsdancusi se teandencass cies veniam ine B 40 Outgoing Phone List COneuratOny ccccccssievcasesncestoxesiretcsciveedi aas B 41 Caller Resolution Table Configuration cc cecesceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeteneeeeeeeeees B 41 Local Phone N mber Configuration saisisit a B 43 Appendix C BCC show Commands Online Hep tor show Commands asiirsasissiasd tiana akanda hania ARNE C 3 Commands for Didon Demand iriran eaa a EA aa anaa a C 4 show CR CS TANCE SUMMA ornes C 5 SUR eal e aae cs ccs Gicce re csc detpen A E A eee C 5 show dial demand circuits general a icccccccinmcccscsanterccennicenedarennmesstnenmendscinepcarsenbencnennte C 7 show dial demand circuits Advanced o uic cesses iesrascssnemsnsrrnendunserscninnenitonnstascannnnese C 7 show dial demand lines feteminde SSRN Rii PAAT heemcuds enue oneta oean anaes show CSI Ce II SCONE E snan C 9 show dial demand in phone numbers cccecceeecceeseeeeeceeeeceeeeceaeceaeceaeeseaeeeaeesneeeeaes C 10 show dial demand out phone NUMDErS sencecadccnncnccanionmrcaceinceencattnnmbcacnniepresnntnercdsrnees C 10 show dial demand caller resolution ssenunissnierini C 11 show dial demand pap chap information ener T T ET bekal eean C 12 Commands ior Dial BackUp oirrasan aa a a aa C 13 show dial CUS Summary as secicc
26. You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window choose Dialup The Dialup menu opens 2 Choose Demand Pools Backup Pools or Bandwidth On Demand Pools The Demand Pools Backup Pools or Bandwidth On Demand Pools window opens 3 Click on Add The appropriate Pool Configuration window opens 4 Enter a number for the Demand Backup Bandwidth Pool ID parameter then click on OK You can use the same ID for a demand backup or bandwidth pool but you cannot use the same ID for two pools of the same type Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 4 The Lines Definition window opens 5 Choose a previously configured ISDN MCT1 or MCE1 port The ISDN Switch Configuration window opens 6 Set the Switch Type parameter Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 20 Site Manager bypasses the ISDN Switch Configuration window for subsequent ISDN lines Chapter 9 explains how to modify the switch type 7 Click on Done The ISDN Logical Lines window opens 8 Click on OK You return to the Lines Definition window To modify the other switch parameters see Chapter 9 9 Choose File The File menu opens 10 Choose Exit You return to the Pools window which shows the configured pools The window has three new buttons Edit Apply and Delete continued 308621 14 00 Rev 00 2 13 Configuri
27. show dial demand in phone numbers C 10 show dial demand out phone numbers C 10 show dial demand caller resolution 11 show dial demand pap chap information C 12 show dial backup summary G 13 show dial backup pools C 14 show dial backup circuits G 15 show dial backup lines C 16 show dial backup schedules C 17 show dial backup out phone numbers C 17 show dial backup caller resolution C 18 continued 308621 14 00 Rev 00 C 1 Configuring Dial Services Command Page show dial backup pap chap information C 19 show dial calls C 21 show dial caller resolution G 22 show dial pap chap information C 22 show dial local pbhone numbers C 23 show modem alerts G 24 show modem all C 25 show modem errors C 28 show modem sample C 29 show modem stats C 30 The show command displays information about the router s dial configuration For example if you enter the command bcc gt show dial backup circuits The router displays the following output Dial services Dial backup Circuit Information Primary Backup Primary WAN Circuit Pool ID Backup Mode Protocol S21 179 Initiator ppp S41 175 Initiator ppp MCE1 31 2 175 Receiver ppp MCE1 31 3 177 Initiator relay MCE1 31 4 178 Initiator ppp C 2 308621 14 00 Rev 00 BCC show Commands Online Help for show Commands To display a list of command options for dial services enter show dial at any BCC prompt To learn m
28. 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 4 5 1 24 Force Dial Dialup gt Demand Circuits gt Demand Pools gt PPP or FR Circuits gt PPP or FR Demand Circuits Disable Enable Disable Forces the demand circuit connection to immediately activate To force a demand circuit connection select Enable then reset it to Disable 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 4 5 1 9 308621 14 00 Rev 00 A 35 Configuring Dial Services Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Inactivity Time Dialup gt Demand Circuits gt Demand Pools gt PPP or FR Circuits gt PPP or FR Demand Circuits 60 seconds 1 to 99 999 999 seconds Measures the data inactivity on the line Specifically it determines the number of seconds that can elapse without data activity before the router disconnects the line Each time data passes through the router the inactivity time resets NOTE The router does not consider LQR LCP and periodic CHAP messages as data so they do not reset the time This parameter and the Inactivity Mode parameter determine how inactivity is monitored Once the router concludes that there is no data activity it disconnects the line Specify a time limit between 1 and 99 999 999 seconds that the router waits before deactivating the switched connection If you want the connection to remain active at all times enter 99 999 99
29. 2 Inthe Configuration Manager window The Dialup menu opens choose Dialup 3 Choose Backup Circuits The Backup Circuits menu opens 4 Choose PPP The Primary Circuit Definition window opens listing the frame relay PVC 5 Select the frame relay circuit and click on The Circuit Options window opens Cct Type 6 Set the Circuit Type parameter to Primary Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 78 7 Set the Backup Pool ID parameter Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 68 8 Click on OK You return to the completed Primary Circuit Definition window 9 Repeat steps 5 through 8 for each primary circuit that you want to add 10 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window 13 4 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Customizing Backup Circuits Creating Frame Relay Backup Circuits for Group Mode PVCs If your frame relay interface has group mode PVCs that is a service record with multiple PVCs you need to back up the entire interface This is called link backup For link backup you must configure frame relay across the backup circuit You cannot use link and circuit backup over the same frame relay interface You can configure link backup using Site Manager only To configure a frame relay backup circuit Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window choose Dialup The Dialup
30. 9 Choose Exit You return to the Demand Backup or Bandwidth on Demand Pools window 10 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window Modifying the ISDN Switch Type If the ISDN switch at the central office has changed you need to alter the switch type in the router s configuration If you change the switch type the router disconnects any existing calls while the ISDN software makes changes to account for the new switch After the changes are made the software restarts and you can reconnect 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Customizing ISDN Lines Using the BCC To modify the switch type navigate to the isdn switch prompt and enter switch type lt switch gt switch can be any one of the following brinet3 brintt prikdd briswissnet3 brits013 printt bri5ess brini1 prinet5 bridms100 pri4ess prits014 brivn3 pri5ess brikdd pridms100 For example isdn switch 2 switch type bridms100 The default switch types are brinet3 for BRI and pri5ess for PRI Using Site Manager To modify the switch type Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window The Dialup menu opens choose Dialup 2 Choose Edit Switch Parameters The ISDN Configured Switches window opens 3 Set the Switch Type parameter Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 20 4 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window
31. Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Site Manager Parameters BOD Pool ID Dialup gt Bandwidth On Demand Circuits gt Bandwidth On Demand Circuit Definition None 1 to 255 Identifies the bandwidth pool associated with the bandwidth circuit If you select Bandwidth on Demand for the Circuit Type parameter enter the ID of the bandwidth pool that this circuit should use If you select Normal for the Circuit Type parameter Site Manager does not allow you to enter a pool ID You must create a pool before you can specify a circuit as a bandwidth circuit The router first creates the circuit as a normal circuit 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 4 5 1 35 Bandwidth Mode Dialup gt Bandwidth On Demand Circuits gt Bandwidth On Demand Circuit Definition gt Cet Type gt Circuit Options Non Monitor for leased circuits Dynamic Monitor for demand circuits Non Monitor Monitor Dynamic Monitor demand circuits only Determines whether or not the router serves as the congestion monitor The level of congestion determines when the router provides an additional circuit to carry data across the network Refer to page A 79 for a description of this parameter 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 4 5 1 36 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Configuring Dial Services Bandwidth on Demand Congestion Monitor and BAP Parameters The BOD Configuration window Figure A 19 contains the monitor option parameters for bandwidth on demand servi
32. The Dialup menu opens 2 Choose Demand Circuits The Demand Pools window opens 3 Click on PPP Circuits The PPP Demand Circuits window opens Choose Protocols The Protocols menu opens Choose Add Delete Select one or more protocols for this demand circuit then click on OK The Select Protocols window opens For each protocol Site Manager displays windows that require configuration See the appropriate protocol guide 7 Click on Done 8 Click on Done You return to the Demand Pools window You return to the Configuration Manager window If you enable compression across PPP demand circuits and configure the router to negotiate compression below the multilink bundle do not configure protocol prioritization for demand circuits running PPP multilink Protocol prioritization modifies the order in which packets are sent over the line which could change the multilink assigned order of packets and cause problems with the data For more information about compression see Configuring Data Compression Services Scheduling Demand Circuit Availability After you complete the demand circuit s configuration you can configure when the circuit is available You can define the following schedules Table 12 2 using the BCC or Site Manager 308621 14 00 Rev 00 12 37 Configuring Dial Services Table 12 2 Scheduling Options Parameter Function days star
33. This parameter is available only if you select a modem from the list that Site Manager provides Select one of the following Off Turns the speaker off entirely On For Call Turns the speaker on only when a call is established and turns it off when the modem is transmitting data Always On Keeps the modem speaker on at all times On For Answer Turns the speaker on only when the modem is answering a call and turns it off when the modem is transmitting data Not applicable 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Configuring Dial Services Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID No of Rings to Answer COM Connector gt Edit Modem gt Async Hayes Modem Interface 0 0 to 255 Determines the number of rings the router allows to connect to the modem This parameter is available only if you select a modem from the list that Site Manager provides Enter an integer indicating the number of rings the router allows For some modems the modem may not answer after one ring so you may want to set this value for two rings or more Not applicable 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Site Manager Parameters V 34 Modem Parameters Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID These parameters are available only for the ARN using the V 34 Modem Adapter Module Expert Config C
34. and ISDN interfaces You can use the following types of lines and protocols for bandwidth on demand service e Leased lines A single leased line a multilink bundle a switched dial on demand line Protocol supported PPP multilink e Secondary dial up lines Any WAN line Protocols supported asynchronous or synchronous PPP multilink BAP for ISDN lines The leased lines and secondary dial up lines may operate at different speeds 308621 14 00 Rev 00 1 23 Configuring Dial Services Figure 1 10 shows how secondary lines support a leased connection Central site A Remote site B Leased line with PPP multilink 64 Kb s Secondary dial up lines ISDN B channels DS0006A Figure 1 10 Example of Bandwidth on Demand Service Initially the router brings up one secondary line to alleviate congestion If the congestion persists the router activates a second and then a third line until the congestion subsides Each new line that the router activates becomes part of a multilink bundle The router then balances traffic over the bundle After the traffic decreases the router deactivates the secondary lines one at a time A router on one side of the connection monitors byte counts for the data it sends and receives This router is called the monitor router The monitor router uses these byte counts along with bandwidth on demand monitor parameters to determine when to activate additional lines for more bandwidth The
35. and receive the information for setting up ISDN configurations for example switch type and phone numbers For information on ordering ISDN lines in the United States see Appendix D Ordering ISDN Lines in the United States Order and configure external modems if applicable Determine the Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol CHAP names and secrets for routers making connections with the Point to Point Protocol PPP Open the configuration file you want to configure for dial services For instructions see Configuring and Managing Routers with Site Manager Setting Up a Dial Service Each dial service has many configurable parameters but for a basic configuration you change only a subset of these parameters Setting up dial backup service involves the following main tasks T 2 3 Creating the leased interface that will use backup service dial backup only See Configuring WAN Line Services for instructions Creating line pools Configuring circuits that use the configured line pools Each task involves several steps which are discussed later in this chapter 2 2 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Starting Dial Services Using Site Manager Table 2 1 lists the basic tasks required to set up a dial service These tasks apply to modem and ISDN configurations This basic configuration assumes the following e PPP is the layer 2 protocol Site Manager automatically configures PPP on lines in a bandwidth poo
36. demand circuit circuit to Boston redial count 3 To specify how long the router waits between retry attempts navigate to the demand circuit prompt and enter redial delay lt integer gt integer is a number from 1 to 60 seconds The default is 3 Enter the amount of time that you want the router to wait before trying the next line in the pool The amount of time you choose depends on the time it typically takes the network to recover For example to wait 15 seconds between attempts enter demand circuit circuit to Boston redial delay 15 308621 14 00 Rev 00 12 11 Configuring Dial Services Using Site Manager To retry the connection if it fails Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window choose Dialup The Dialup menu opens Choose Demand Circuits The Demand Pools window opens Click on PPP Circuits or FR Circuits The PPP Demand Circuits window or the FR Demand Circuits window opens 4 Select the circuit that you want to modify 5 Set the following parameters Retry Max Retry Delay Click on Help or see the parameter descriptions beginning on page A 36 6 Click on Apply then click on Done You return to the Demand Pools window 7 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window Specifying Which Router Initiates a Call To determine the role of each router when two r
37. ip 192 32 16 2 255 255 255 0 ip 192 32 16 2 255 255 255 0 back Set the standby mode parameter so the demand circuit operates as a normal standby circuit ppp from boston standby mode standby normal For the demand circuit to operate as a normal standby circuit set the connection mode parameter to collision slave ppp from boston connection mode collision slave ppp from boston back Configure the caller resolution table so this router can verify the identity of router 1 when placing the incoming call demand circuit from boston caller resolution baycentral secret corpbin 308621 14 00 Rev 00 B 23 Configuring Dial Services Dial Backup with PPP or Standard on the Primary Line Figure B 5 shows routers 1 and 2 connected via a synchronous line running PPP and using Raise DTR signaling This connection can also use Nortel Networks Standard You designate this synchronous connection as a primary connection so that if it fails the router provides a dial backup connection You can configure the routers for this network using the BCC or Site Manager Go to one of the following sections e Configuring Dial Backup Using the BCC on page B 25 e Configuring Dial Backup Using Site Manager on page B 28 EC 2 Primary with PPP or Bay Networks Standard Backup line Raise DTR Router 1 IP addresses Router 2 IP address
38. nice pi tencaseeaaieeesamnee OE haa B 22 Configuration of Router 2 Normal Standby Circuit E EE E E B 23 Dial Backup with PPP or Standard on the Primary Line c cccsseeseeeeeteeeeeseeeeees B 24 Configuring Dial Backup Using the BCC sisses rere muna ete B 25 Conmguralon or RODET T anria AE aE B 25 Optional Schedule Configuration for Router 1 ccccceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees B 26 CRUISIN OT ROULET Z csiedtas osseandicesiecs unani a E AAAS B 27 Configuring Dial Backup Using Site Manager ccccesceceeeeeeseeseeeeeeeeaeeeeenees B 28 Leased Interface Configuration eeu gaits eee bokan eoni B 28 Backup Pool MUA sirasini aa naaar eais ar Eia ea B 29 Backup Circuit Configuration cia csescnota orsinancindincaneatintemaadaldasaonmdeaetiamaareciuss B 30 Outgoing Phone List Configuration anea E aamin B 31 Caller Resolution Table Configuration cc cccescceceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeees B 31 Dial Backup over a n ISDN NetWork os fseessdaacussaseieannisiesdaaniassd aaan ea B 33 Configuring Dial Backup Using the BOG sirsriissrasiircucssisscoraann tusiina B 34 308621 14 00 Rev 00 xvii COMMU AON OT ABUT T sauren ahead bee B 34 Configuration of Router 2 ieee Seine genet AT ee stable Scene B 36 Configuring Dial Backup Using Site Manager c cccssceceeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeesaeeeeeees B 37 Leased Intertace Configuration isos cristae trussed acuuintoaian sus niasin B 37
39. you prevent the demand circuit from remaining active unnecessarily For more information about these RIP features see Configuring IP ARP RARP RIP and OSPF Services IPX RIP and SAP Broadcast Timers To prevent broadcast messages from keeping the demand circuit active you can configure RIP and SAP broadcast timers for IPX transmission RIP and SAP broadcast timers enable you to control how often update transmissions occur You can even eliminate RIP and SAP broadcasts entirely By controlling broadcast traffic you can prevent the demand circuit from remaining active unnecessarily For more information about broadcast timers see Configuring IPX Services Traffic Filters To prevent routing updates and protocol specific messages from keeping the circuit active you can configure traffic filters that specify which packets are permitted across an established dial up line and which packets are prevented from activating a dial up line Traffic filters enable the router to selectively relay or drop a packet frame or datagram based on standard protocol fields or user defined fields If you implement inbound filters the router drops unwanted packets at the interface where it receives data By filtering incoming data you can prevent unwanted packets from going to the destination interface 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Dial on Demand Implementation Notes If you implement outbound filters the router drops unwanted packets before dialing a
40. you must configure a CHAP secret Navigate to the caller resolution prompt and enter secret lt string gt string is any text string up to 20 characters The CHAP secret must be the same on both sides of the connection For example to specify the CHAP secret for bIncorp enter caller resolution blncorp secret bayeast Configuring the PAP Password If you enter a PAP ID for the caller name configure a PAP password by navigating to the caller resolution prompt and entering pap password lt string gt string is any text string up to 25 characters The PAP password must be the same on both sides of the connection 16 4 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Customizing Caller Resolution During the authentication phase all password authenticate request messages that the calling router sends to the called router must include the correct password If the password is not correct the called router sends an authenticate negative acknowledgment authenticate NAK message and the calling router does not activate the connection For example to specify the PAP password for blncorp enter caller resolution blncorp pap password baywest Using Site Manager To configure the caller resolution table Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window choose Dialup The Dialup menu opens Choose Caller Resolution Table The Caller Resolution Table window opens Click
41. 00 Rev 00 Starting Dial Services Using the BCC Table 3 2 Mode Types for BRI Operation Mode Meaning 2b d Specifies that this is an ISDN switched line that provides two B channels and that call setup occurs between the router and an ISDN switch 1b d Specifies that this is an ISDN switched line that provides only one B channel and that call setup occurs between the router and an ISDN switch Use this option when you do not need to use two B channels floating b Only for AN ANH and ARN router specifies that although this is an ISDN switched line providing two B channels the software makes the necessary adjustments if only one channel is in use Use this option if you can purchase only 2B D service but only want to use one B channel or if your application requires two synchronous ports and only one B channel leased 64k Specifies that this line provides one B channel that is always available No call setup occurs with an ISDN switch Instead the switch has a defined point to point connection between two ISDN end points Germany and Japan only leased 2x64k Specifies that this line provides two B channels that are always available No call setup occurs with an ISDN switch Instead the switch has a defined point to point connection between two ISDN end points Germany and Japan only leased 128k Specifies that this line provides one B channel that is always available The extra bandwidth of the 128 Kb s
42. 1 amp GO Disable guard tone amp G1 Disable guard tone amp G2 Enable 1800 Hz guard tone amp JO Set S Register response only for compatibility amp J1 Set S Register response only for compatibility amp KO Disable DTE DCE flow control amp K3 Enable RTS CTS DTE DCE flow control amp K4 Enable XON XOFF DTE DCE flow control amp K5 Enable transparent XON XOFF flow control amp K6 Enable both RTS CTS and XON XOFF flow control amp LO Select dial up line operation amp MO Select direct asynchronous mode amp M1 Select sync connect with async off line command mode amp M2 Select sync connect with async off line command mode and enable DTR dialing of directory zero amp M3 Select sync connect with async off line command mode and enable DTR to act as Talk Data switch continued E 4 308621 14 00 Rev 00 AT Initialization Commands for the ARN Table E 1 Summary of AT Modem Initialization Commands continued Command Function amp PO Set 10 p s pulse dial with 39 61 make break amp P1 Set 10 p s pulse dial with 33 67 make break amp P2 Set 20 p s pulse dial with 39 61 make break amp P3 Set 20 p s pulse dial with 33 67 make break amp Q0 Select direct asynchronous mode amp Q1 Select sync connect with async off line command mode amp Q2 Select sync connect with async off line command mode
43. 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 4 5 1 33 UpTime Term Reset Demand Circuits Dialup gt Demand Circuits gt Demand Pools gt PPP or FR Circuits gt PPP or FR Demand Circuits Backup Circuits Dialup gt Backup Circuits gt PPP or Frame Relay gt Primary Circuit Definition or FR Primary Interface Definition 60 minutes 1 to 999 999 minutes Determines the amount of time the router waits before making the demand circuit available again after an uptime termination Max UpTime Termination parameter The circuit is not established at this point but the next time the router receives data the circuit will be available and the router can activate it The router invokes this timer only after an invoking the UpTime Termination parameter Enter the time period that the router should wait before making the circuit available again You must enter a value for this parameter if you configured the Max UpTime Termination parameter 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 4 5 1 34 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Site Manager Parameters Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Minimum Call Duration Demand Circuits Dialup gt Demand Circuits gt Demand Pools gt PPP or FR Circuits gt PPP or FR Demand Circuits 60 seconds 10 to 2 147 483 647 Specifies the minimum amount of time that the connection remains active regardless of whether there is data traffic Enter the minimum amount of time the connection should remain activ
44. 1 to 10 Specifies the maximum number of times that the router can attempt to connect to a dial up line before it is disconnected Select a number between and 10 inclusive 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 8 1 1 16 Ring Indicator COM Connector gt Edit Modem gt Sync Async Modem Interface Enable Enable Disable Enables or disables the Ring Indicator RI signal for Raise DTR signaling If the dial on demand line is configured to use Raise DTR and you have a Series 5 router running 7 60 software set this parameter to Disable Hardware versions earlier than 7 60 do not support RI Otherwise accept the default Enable 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 8 1 1 28 A 10 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Site Manager Parameters Debug Mode COM Connector gt Edit Modem gt Sync Async Modem Interface or Async Hayes Modem Interface Disable Enable Disable Allows you to print debug log messages concerning the V 25bis Raise DTR or Hayes connection setup Select Enable if you want to see the debug log messages If not accept the default Disable 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 8 1 1 29 Modem Type COM Connector gt Edit Modem gt Async Hayes Modem Interface Custom List of supported modems Click on Values to see the list Lets you specify the modem you are using in your network
45. 15 19 Modifying Numbers in the Incoming Phone List cccceseccceeeeeeceeeeeeeeeceeeeneees 15 21 Using the Incoming Phone List for Callback Service cccccccessseeeeeeessteeeeeeeees 15 22 Creating a Local Phone List ISDN Only eee T eeipesiads Noona obiti e 15 23 Modilving the Local Phone List ssesairiissicminrsisiini aieiai 15 26 Chapter 16 Customizing Caller Resolution Caller Resolution for Demand Circuit Groups c cccccceeeenee cece eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeseneeeeaes 16 2 Adding Entries to the Caller Resolution Table c ccecccecseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeaeeeeee 16 3 Configuring the CHAP Secret hoani orean eer ier aboe Reitente 16 4 CGoniguing Whe PAP Password soiis Aa a ar aaa E 16 4 Modifying Entries in the Caller Resolution Table c ccccceeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeenees 16 6 Deleting a Caller Resolution Entry s es TR E PPE ET 16 7 Appendix A Site Manager Parameters Pool ID Parameter sassen a mime anaes soeg austin iss aeedane opeis A 4 WAN Serial Interface Type Paramete ccisceccncceccacsscctnccsesseensed sencdecteesnecsnuintdasoneeteereninens A 5 Sync and Async Line Media Type Parameters sssseessseesssssesssrsssrssrnsssrrsssrresrnnen nens A 6 308621 14 00 Rev 00 XV External Modem Parametets ses csccsedstcansedeccisessaverinassaderiugddx dere xedestecituusidedevasedtudeeiuaeenseeed A 9 V 34 Modem Parameters aed chains eine senat
46. 2 i Router A Router B Calling router Called router outbound authentication disabled Challenge Response gt lt Response match One Way Authentication PAP Router A Router B Calling router Called router outbound authentication disabled Authenticate request Authenticate response DS0031A Figure 5 2 One Way Authentication 308621 14 00 Rev 00 5 3 Configuring Dial Services The receiving router can use PAP and CHAP in a single line pool If router A rejects the CHAP challenge and router B has the PAP Fallback parameter enabled router B switches to PAP and retries authentication If PAP Fallback is not enabled the connection is activated Configuring the Type of Authentication Configuring outbound authentication determines the type of authentication the router uses You enable outbound authentication to use two way authentication and disable it to use one way authentication To set this parameter see the appropriate chapter for configuring circuits Using CHAP Names and PAP IDs for Authentication Authentication occurs before the routers establish a connection The router at one or both ends of the connection must agree on the CHAP name and secret or PAP ID and password so PPP can identify the caller and activate the correct circuit
47. 3 1 caller resolution caller name baynet1 secret bayeast To configure caller resolution for a demand circuit enter ppp circuit to boston caller resolution baynet1 secret bayeast What to Do Next After you complete the steps in this chapter your dial service should be operating To learn about Nortel Networks dial services implementations see Chapters 5 through 8 To customize your configuration see Chapters 9 through 16 3 24 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Chapter 4 ISDN Overview This chapter contains the following information Topic Page ISDN Standards 4 2 ISDN Interf 4 5 For More Information About ISDN 4 8 Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN is an internetworking technology that integrates voice data and video communication over end to end digital connections Figure 4 1 From an internetworking perspective the router can use ISDN to provide LAN interconnection services over a wide area C Router Router DS0007A Figure 4 1 Sample ISDN Network Because ISDN integrates services and offers multiple communication channels it is more versatile than traditional network services that support only one channel With ISDN you can use the same lines and equipment for a variety of communication needs Also using digital lines as opposed to analog lines eliminates the need to convert digital to analog signals and provides faster and more accurate communicati
48. 3 22 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Starting Dial Services Using the BCC To configure phone numbers for a local phone list navigate to the pri or channel for BRI prompt and enter local phone number lt number gt number is a numeric string up to 20 characters For example pri 2 1 local phone number 5553427 If necessary you can enter a subaddress for the main phone number The subaddress is useful when you have several routers at your site but the ISDN provider assigns only one phone number to the site An incoming call must specify the number and the subaddress to reach a specific router After you configure a phone number you can specify a subaddress Navigate to the local phone number prompt and enter subaddress extension lt number gt number is a numeric string up to 25 characters For example to add an extension to local phone number 5553427 enter local phone number 2 1 5553427 subaddress extension 897 If necessary enter the SPID that your ISDN provider supplied when you received ISDN service Ignore this parameter if you have a SESS switch and you have set the line type parameter to point to point To set the SPID navigate to the local phone number prompt and enter spid lt string gt string is a numeric string up to 20 characters For example to enter a SPID for local phone number 5553427 enter local phone number 2 1 5553427 4 spid 50855534270100 Go to the next section Setting Up the Caller Resoluti
49. A 19 Configuring Dial Services ISDN Switch Parameters The ISDN Switch Configuration window Figure A 7 contains the switch parameters a Cancel OK Values Help Switch Type ERI NET3 Incoming Filter DISABLE Sending Complete IE DISABLE Global Adaption Rate 64K Figure A 7 ISDN Switch Configuration Window Parameter Switch Type Path Dialup gt Demand Backup Bandwidth On Demand Pools gt Pools gt Add gt Demand Backup Bandwidth On Demand Pool Configuration gt OK gt Lines Definition gt ISDN MCT1 MCE1 Connector gt ISDN Switch Configuration Default BRI NET3 PRI Net5 Options BRI NET3 BRI SWISSNET3 BRI 5ESS BRI DMS100 BRI KDD BRI NTT BRI TSO13 BRI NI1 PRI SESS PRIDMS100 PRI 4ESS PRI KDD PRI NTT PRI NetS PRI TS014 Site Manager displays only those switch options for the interface you are configuring For example if you are setting up BRI service you will see only BRI switch types when you click on Values In addition if the router is communicating with a Version 8 10 router you will only see BRI switch types that support Version 8 10 software Function Specifies the type of ISDN switch to which you are connecting Instructions Choose the appropriate ISDN switch Refer to Table A 3 On the ASN you cannot configure two different switch types on the same slot MIB Object ID 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 8 6 1 3 A 20 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Table A 3 Swit
50. A 67 PPP Primary Circuit Definition Parameters Dial Backup eeeeseeescesreeseeereereesn A 69 Frame Relay Interface Parameters Dial Backup PEE Serenata Se a A 71 Frame Relay Primary Interface Definition Parameters Dial Backup ceeeee A 74 Frame Relay Service Control Parameter Demand and Dial Backup 0 00 A 76 Frame Relay PVC and Service Parameters Demand and Dial Backup 2 A 77 Bandwidth on Demand Circuit Options Parameters cccccccecseeeeeeneeeseteeeeeneeessaees A 77 Bandwidth on Demand Circuit Definition Parameters F ree P P A 80 Bandwidth on Demand Congestion Monitor and BAP Parameters c sccseeerees A 82 Local Fhone Number Parameters osc ssccnsces ce st tusssceddvusiessevveusisdeasisedbseneiwecsnaibeileesreaoten A 90 Outgoing Phone List Parameters Stas pees E T OET ere rere A 94 incoming Phone List ParamolerS sssnisinaiiai nae ee A 105 Caller Resolution Table Parameters cc ccccssceseeeeececeeceeeeeeceeaeeeeaaeeeeeeeseeaaeeseeeeees A 107 Appendix B Configuration Examples Dekon Demand WIN Pie conn ncanaiicen ans Aina Wariner taser uardutauda asians B 2 Configuring Dial on Demand Using the BCC ET loiras E a EN B 3 xvi 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Gomiguraton of RONIET A skinin lenaeiie pine taal bieaasatii B 3 COMMON OF ROUET 2 aces aarnsiecsaeinuumsiaeinnisveanaiaitiad aa aN SAnausddeanmauties B 4 Conf
51. B requires a more immediate response than a user at router A performing a file transfer with router B When you configure a demand circuit the router automatically enables protocol prioritization because PPP requires priority for control messages Although protocol prioritization is set automatically you still need to configure priorities and filters For more information about protocol prioritization see Configuring Traffic Filters and Protocol Prioritization 308621 14 00 Rev 00 6 15 Chapter 7 Dial Backup Implementation Notes This chapter describes the Nortel Networks implementation of dial backup service Most of these notes apply only to circuit backup that is they apply only to a primary Nortel Networks Standard PPP or frame relay PVC Data compression is the only feature that you can use with circuit and link backup This chapter contains the following information Topic Page Bay Command Console 7 1 Data Compression 7 2 Defining the Role of the Router in the Network T2 Bandwidth for Backup Circuits 7 2 Using Unnumbered Interfaces to Dial an Alternative Site 7 3 Bay Command Console You can configure dial backup service using the Bay Command Console BCC The BCC is a command line interface for configuring Nortel Networks devices In BCC configuration mode you can create a customized configuration and modify this configuration In configuration mode you navigate through th
52. Command Hayes Only s es Seppe 10 8 Modifying the Modem Command String ccecccceeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeaaeeeseeeeeteaeeneenees 10 10 Changing the Asynchronous Baud Rate cc cceceeeeeceeeceeeceeeeeeaeeeaeenaeesaeeeaes 10 11 Modifying How the Modem Connects to the Network cccsesseceesstteeeeeseeeees 10 12 Modifying the ARN Internal Modem Configuration cc eeeeeeeeeeereeeeeeeereeeneeenaees 10 13 Selecting a Modem Type and Specifying an Initialization String PE 10 13 Changing the Asynchronous Baud RAG sicicccssscccsteincciimendsocesnsenscscanntadace sesantedants 10 15 Using Modem Factory Defaults ssh cainewsnseannioetianrandandevannduarenansverdinasioehednanvoarboocens 10 15 Configuring a Modem for a Specific Country oaii PT ET boan aroan 10 17 Specifying tha Phone Number to Dial se c 2scc0ssactieerslasteessi niece arainn 10 17 Resetting the Modem Remotely aasssssesssseeessrresssrnennsnrnesnsnnnnnsnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnaa 10 18 Modifying the Operation of the Modem ssisiisieririeisiirssissisrerniimiinrninnneniinnas 10 19 Deleting Modem Lines from a POO ecrrsiinssicrnssninan pradaesepersuaeenonsis 10 20 Chapter 11 Customizing ISDN Lines Modifying the MCT1 and MCE1 Port Configurations cccccssceecsesseeeeeeesseeeesssnaees 11 2 Modifying the BRI and PRI Modes of Operation ccccccccceessseeeesessteeeeesesteeeeseeaees 11 2 Configuring Selective PRI SEryICE ssccisiccaccccscta
53. Configuration window router 1 or the ISDN1 connector opens router 2 6 Set the Switch Type parameter as follows The ISDN Logical Lines window opens Router 1 PRI5ESS Router 2 BRI NI1 7 Accept the defaults then click on OK You return to the Demand Lines Definition window continued 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Configuration Examples Site Manager Procedure continued 8 You do this Choose File gt Exit System responds You return to the Demand Pools window 9 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window Demand Circuit Configuration After you configure the demand pool the next step is to configure demand circuits Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window choose Dialup The Dialup menu opens Choose Demand Circuits The Demand Pools window opens 3 Choose PPP Circuits The PPP Demand Circuits window opens 4 Choose Add 5 Set the CHAP Local Name parameter as follows e Router 1 BLN case sensitive e Router 2 ASN case sensitive Site Manager adds a demand circuit Set the CHAP Secret parameter to ISDN for routers 1 and 2 Set the Connection Mode parameter as follows Router 1 Collision Master default Router 2 Collision Slave 8 Click on Apply Keep the PPP Demand Circuits window open and go to the n
54. Customizing Phone Lists THGSS oi Phong LISTS cccccetcsccontepecsrenneeassesnmrtasconmessetentoncsstdncmerdataniinccasneniepecaininieescsesntes 15 1 Flow ISDN Galle Use Phone LISS tesesccneae panda nanieninaniiaaaniadineneaendiniadnans IOC Outgoing and Incoming Phone Lists E ree ee cree S ART Pee 15 2 Local Phone LASTS costes ese shssrtarvnsietavarseuetncarehaabtensseanietnaryShurbuectineeiaet ai 15 3 How V 25bis and Hayes Calls Use the Outgoing Phone List 0 ccceeecteeeeteeeeeeeees 15 3 Modifying an Outgoing Phone List 06 saa tpenaaneteaetis iets apes a PE 15 4 Peng FAS Numba eresio aren ATM RS 15 4 Modifying the Phone Number Type 22 c cceeeceseeeeeeeeeeceaeceaeeeaaeseaeesaaeesaeeseneeaes 15 7 Specifying the ISDN Number Type and Plan cccccececeeeeeseeceeteeeesaeeesaes 15 8 Reordering and Deleting Phone Numbers c sccsscstciessssrssscedsssteeseesees cenessonteas 15 10 Modifying a Calls Adaption Rate eae P E eee P pee 15 12 Changing the Remote Pool VDE sais sceccsctccccccdoncscaneesatedncegacitachiteisunneaescmadiaetassvaes 15 13 Configuring the Phone Number for Single or Multiple Calls 0 cceeseeeeeees 15 15 Enabling PRI Multirate 0 0 E E EE T T T boan oae 15 16 Changing the AT Command String Hayes Only ceccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteneeetaes 15 18 Creating an Incoming Phone List ISDN Only 0 ceeccesesceeeseeeeceeeeeeeeeeesaeeeeaeeeenaes
55. D Figure A 6 Port Application Window The parameter descriptions follow PRI Port Application Mode Parameter Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Port Application Mode MCT1 or MCE1 Connector gt Port Application NonPRI NonPRI PRI Determines if this port is for PRI service The NonPRI option indicates that this is a standard synchronous interface The PRI option indicates that this is a PRI port If your application calls for PRI select PRI Otherwise accept the default 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 9 3 1 16 A 18 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Site Manager Parameters BRI Port Application Mode Parameter Parameter Port Application Mode Path Configuration Manager gt ISDN Connector gt Port Application Default Dialup 2B D Options Dialup 2B D Dialup 1B D Dialup Floating B Leased 2X64K Leased 1X64K Leased 128K Function Determines how the BRI service operates The options are as follows Dialup 2B D Specifies that this is an ISDN switched line that provides two B channels and call setup occurs between the router and an ISDN switch Dialup 1B D Specifies that this is an ISDN switched line that provides only one B channel and call setup occurs between the router and an ISDN switch Use this option when you do not need to use two B channels Dialup Floating B Only for AN ANH and ARN routers Specifies that although
56. Demand Circuits PPP or FR Circuits gt PPP or FR Demand Circuits gt Phone Out gt Outgoing Phone List gt Add gt Phone Number Backup Circuits PPP or Frame Relay gt Primary Circuit Definition or FR Primary Interface Definition gt Phone Out gt Outgoing Phone List gt Add gt Phone Number Bandwidth Circuits Bandwidth On Demand Circuit Definition gt Phone Out gt Outgoing Phone List gt Add gt Phone Number ATDT Any valid AT command string For asynchronous PPP connections only this parameter specifies a prefix that the router sends to the modem to initiate dialing Accept the default ATDT or enter a valid AT initialization command Refer to Appendix E for a list of AT initialization commands for the ARN Your modem may use a different set of commands so refer to the manual for that modem 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 4 6 1 15 A 104 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Site Manager Parameters Incoming Phone List Parameters Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID The Incoming Phone List window Figure A 22 contains the incoming phone list parameters pore Add Apply Delete Values Help Incoming Phone Number Incoming Phone Ext SubAddr Callback Demand Circuit Name Figure A 22 Incoming Phone List Window The parameter descriptions follow Incoming Phone Number Dialup gt Incoming Phone Numbers gt Incoming Phone List gt Add gt Phon
57. Figure 5 3 shows an example of routers using CHAP for authentication PAP works in a similar way This example uses two way authentication PPP link between Router A and Router B v Router B y Dial device 2 Router A iil CL Local CHAP Name Branch_B Router C Local CHAP Name Branch_A Dial device Local CHAP Name Branch_C Router A Router B Caller resolution table Caller resolution table Caller Name Local Circuit Caller Name Local Circuit Branch_B 27 Branch_A 5 Branch_C 13 DS0019A Figure 5 3 Routers Using CHAP for Authentication 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Implementation Notes for All Dial Services In Figure 5 3 routers A and B each have a caller resolution table that maps local circuits to the names of remote callers Router A calls router B When router A makes the call it places its local CHAP name Branch_A and CHAP secret in the CHAP challenge message Router B s caller resolution table shows Branch_A assigned to Circuit 5 the connection to router A When router B receives the call it looks in its table confirms router A s CHAP name referred to as the Caller Name in the table and CHAP secret and activates Circuit 5 Conversely when router B calls router A it places its local CHAP name Branch_B in the CHAP c
58. If you select server server call ID client or client one charge Site Manager prompts you to make a caller resolution table entry by displaying the Caller Resolution Info window These callback modes require a caller resolution table entry to authenticate callers on each side of the connection and for the server to indicate which circuit to activate for a call e Site Manager requests an outgoing phone number If you select server or server one charge and there are no entries in the outgoing phone list Site Manager prompts you to enter a phone number by displaying the Outgoing Phone Number window Callback and the Circuit s Connection Mode The server s callback configuration takes precedence over its connection mode The Connection Mode parameter determines whether or not a router can place a call If you enable callback the router ignores the Connection Mode parameter to ensure that the server can always call the client The next two sections explain how to configure callback 12 32 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Using the BCC Customizing Demand Circuits To enable callback navigate to the ppp circuit prompt and enter callback mode lt mode gt mode can be any of the values described in Table 12 1 Table 12 1 Callback Mode Options ISDN connections only Mode Meaning inactive Disables the callback feature for this circuit server Designates the router as the callback server The server receives a c
59. In most cases you can use the defaults for MCT1 and MCE1 parameters To modify these values see Configuring WAN Line Services System responds The PRI Logical Lines window opens For the first PRI interface you configure the Timeslots window opens immediately following the PRI Logical Lines window Each PRI port supports up to 23 logical B channels for MCT1 ports or 30 logical B channels for MCE1 ports Choose Select All to change all timeslots to B channels If you purchased selective PRI service from your ISDN provider go to step 7 All the timeslots now read B Channel Optionally if you purchased selective PRI service from your ISDN provider select individual timeslots Select only the timeslots that the service provider assigns to you For example if your provider assigns you timeslots 1 through 10 select slots 1 through 10 in the Timeslots window A timeslot menu opens Select B Channel Repeat the procedure for each timeslot you want to configure The configured timeslot should now read B channel Click on OK You return to the PRI Logical Lines window 10 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window 11 Go to the next section Adding ISDN Lines to a Pool 2 12 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Starting Dial Services Using Site Manager Adding ISDN Lines to a Pool To add ISDN BRI or PRI lines to a pool Site Manager Procedure
60. Incoming Phone List ISDN Only You configure an incoming phone list to use incoming call filtering Features such as callback rely on incoming call filtering for certain callback modes Using the BCC To create an incoming phone list navigate to the isdn in phone list prompt by entering the following command at the box prompt isdn in phone list To add a phone number to the incoming phone list enter in phone number lt number gt number is a numeric string up to 25 characters for the incoming phone number 308621 14 00 Rev 00 15 19 Configuring Dial Services For example isdn in phone list in phone number 1234566 Using Site Manager To create an incoming phone list Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window The Dialup menu opens choose Dialup 2 Choose Incoming Phone Numbers The Incoming Phone List window opens 3 Click on Add The Phone Number window opens 4 Set the following parameters If this is a demand circuit for which you Incoming Phone Number enabled the callback feature the Phone Incoming Phone Ext SubAddr Number window displays a third parameter Callback Demand Circuit Click on Help or see the parameter Name description on page A 105 5 If you enabled the callback feature and the callback mode is Server One Charge or Server One Charge Call ID enter a value for the Callback Demand Circuit Name parameter Cl
61. Inthe Circuit Options window set the If you accept the default Non Monitor Bandwidth Mode parameter to Monitor the Caller Resolution Info window opens If this router is set to Non Monitor the peer must be set to Monitor If you select Monitor and this is the first monitor circuit associated with a pool that Click on Help or see the parameter uses multiple slots the Preferred description on page A 79 Reserved Slots for BOD Pool window opens continued 308621 14 00 Rev 00 2 23 Configuring Dial Services Site Manager Procedure continued You do this 2 If applicable in the Caller Resolution Info window set the Caller Name and CHAP Secret parameters then click on OK Otherwise go to step 4 Click on Help or see the parameter descriptions beginning on page A 107 The caller resolution information enables the local non monitor router that receives the call to identify the remote router placing the call System responds You return to the Circuit Options window If applicable in the Preferred Reserved Slots for BOD Pool window set the Preferred Bandwidth Slot and Reserved Bandwidth Slot parameters and click on OK Click on Help or see the parameter descriptions beginning on page A 85 Click on OK Keep the Bandwidth on Demand Circuit Definition window open and go to the next section Specifying the Authentication Protocol Information You return to the Cir
62. Names Full Name Abbreviated Name Dial on demand Demand Dial backup Backup Bandwidth on demand Bandwidth 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Dial Services Overview Nortel Networks Dial Services The router provides three types of dial services dial on demand dial backup and bandwidth on demand Each dial service serves a different purpose e Dial on demand service reduces your line costs by establishing a connection between two devices only when there is data to send You do not incur the cost of a leased line that is active regardless of data traffic e Dial backup service provides a backup circuit when a leased circuit fails The backup circuit serves as an alternative path for data to reach its destination e Bandwidth on demand service provides up to 29 additional B channels for a congested leased line dial on demand line or leased multilink bundle This provides a total of 30 B channels for communication The additional lines increase bandwidth for data traffic improving communication and reducing network delays All three dial services work over public switched telephone networks PSTNs such as a standard telephone network a switched 56 Kb s network and an Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN Figure 1 1 4 Switched 56 Kb s network Router Terminal adapter You only need a terminal adapter if your router does not have bu
63. Number parameter Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 16 4 Click on OK You return to the Edit Connector window 5 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window Resetting the Modem Remotely Using the BCC you can reset the modem remotely if there seems to be a problem with the call connection Using this command causes the modem to terminate all its connections and drop any data To remotely reset the modem navigate to the modem prompt and enter unit reset lt value gt value can be one of the following reset Resets the modem cleared Clears the current call For example modem 2 1 unit reset reset 10 18 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Customizing Modem Lines Modifying the Operation of the Modem Using Site Manager you can change the V 34 Modem Adapter module operation for example speaker volume and control whether it originates or answers and the type of dialing it uses To modify the V 34 Modem Adapter module operation Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window The Edit Connector window opens click on the COM connector whose configuration you want to change The connector name should have a D B or W next to it 2 Click on Edit Modem The V 34 Modem Interface Parameters window opens 3 Set the following parameters Expert Config Originate Answer Speaker Volu
64. One demand circuit group supports many remote routers thereby reducing the configuration tasks for a large network See Chapter 6 for a detailed description of demand circuit groups 7 4 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Dial Backup Implementation Notes Sample Network Using Demand Circuit Groups Figure 7 2 shows a sample network using demand circuit groups Router 1 is a regional router that supports hundreds of remote routers Router 5 serves as a recovery router for several branch offices if router 1 fails Branch offices Regional router C N Router 1 CHAP name R1 Disaster recovery router C JT Router5 Configured with an unnumbered demand CHAP name R4 Py circuit group Remotes configured with dial backup Primary circuits Backup circuits DS0002A Figure 7 2 Dialing an Alternative Router Using Demand Circuit Groups This type of network is ideal for a demand circuit group because it supports many nodes If you were to configure each circuit individually the task of backing up each remote router would be difficult By using demand circuit groups however you need only one configuration on the disaster recovery router to support many remote sites 308621 14 00 Rev 00 7 5 Configuring Dial Services The configuration for this type of network is as follows The branch offices are configured for dial backup and are connected directly to the regional router They dete
65. PPP Using the BCC PPP is the only protocol you can configure for the backup circuit Specifying the Authentication Protocol Information For network security the router that initiates a call must identify itself to the remote router The authentication protocols CHAP and PAP enable the identification process CHAP is the default protocol All lines in a pool must use the same authentication protocol The CHAP name is part of the outbound call it informs remote peer routers of the local router s identity The CHAP secret is for identification and security purposes and must be the same on both sides of the link When one router places a call to another router an authentication process takes place During this phase the routers send challenge packets back and forth that include the CHAP secret Both routers on a link must have the same CHAP secret to correctly calculate responses to the challenges 3 20 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Starting Dial Services Using the BCC To specify a CHAP name and secret for a demand circuit navigate to the ppp demand circuit prompt For a backup circuit navigate to the backup circuit prompt At the circuit prompt enter chap name lt text string gt chap secret lt text string gt text string is any text string up to 20 characters For example to configure a CHAP name and secret for the demand circuit circuit to boston enter ppp circuit to boston Chap name bayrs1 chap secret east To co
66. Pools gt Add gt Demand Backup Bandwidth on Demand Pool Configuration gt OK gt Lines Definition gt ISDN MCT1 MCE1 Connector gt ISDN Switch Configuration 64K 64K 56K In accordance with the ITU T V 110 standard this parameter enables the router to send and receive data transmitting at a rate of 56 Kb s and adapt it for transmission over a 64 Kb s line Specify the rate that the router sends and receives calls over a B channel Ensure that the rate is compatible with the network connections to the destination device Ask your provider if you are unsure I 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 8 6 1 9 Global X 25 over ISDN D Channel Dialup gt Edit Switch Parameters gt ISDN Configured Switches Disable Enable Disable Globally enables or disables X 25 service over the D channel for a slot on the router Site Manager automatically sets this parameter to Enable when you configure X 25 service over the D channel for a BRI line Refer to page A 30 for the parameter that enables this feature for the BRI line Select Disable to disable this service for a slot 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 8 6 1 10 308621 14 00 Rev 00 A 23 Configuring Dial Services Pool Channel Count and Priority Parameters The ISDN Logical Lines window Figure A 8 contains the ISDN pool parameters Pool Channel Count Pool Channel Priority Figure A 8 ISDN Logical Lines Window The parameter descriptions follows A 24 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Site Manag
67. Rev 00 Site Manager Parameters Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID TEI Value for X 25 over ISDN D ISDN Connector gt ISDN Dialup gt Edit D Chan gt BRI Interface Configuration 1 0 to 63 Assigns a number to the X 25 DTE to identify it to the ISDN switch This parameter is available only if you enable X 25 over the D channel for a fixed TEI type If you set the TEI type to Fixed enter the TEI value that the switch provider assigned when you ordered ISDN service The value must be in the range 0 to 63 If the TEI type is set to Auto ignore this parameter 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 8 9 1 41 308621 14 00 Rev 00 A 31 Configuring Dial Services BRI Leased Line Configuration Parameters Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID MTU ISDN Connector gt ISDN Leased Line B Channels or ISDN Leased Line 1600 3 to 4608 Specifies the largest frame Maximum Transmission Unit that the router can transmit over the line Set this parameter to a value appropriate for your network 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 5 1 96 Inter Frame Time Fill ISDN Connector gt ISDN Leased Line B Channels or ISDN Leased Line Default Default FORCEHDLCFLAGS FORCEIDLES The inter frame time fill FTF indicates the signal pattern that the router transmits when there is no da
68. Select one of the modems from the list If the modem you are using is not listed select Custom and be sure to enter a modem initialization string If you do not enter a string Site Manager prompts you to do so 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 29 1 1 21 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Configuring Dial Services Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Modem Command String COM Connector gt Edit Modem gt Sync Async Modem Interface or Async Line Media Type OR Dialup gt Pools gt Demand Backup Bandwidth on Demand Pools gt Add gt Demand Backup Bandwidth on Demand Pool Configuration gt OK gt Lines Definition gt COM Connector gt Choose Wan Serial Interface Type gt OK gt Sync or Async Line Media Type None Any valid modem command string Raise DTR and V 25bis only Enables you to test and modify the configuration of your modem For example if you want to change the speed of your modem you can enter a command string to do this Also if you are having trouble placing calls enter a string to test whether the modem responds Enter a command string that your modem supports 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 8 13 1 4 Modem Init String COM Connector gt Edit Modem gt Async Hayes Modem Interface AT amp F An AT modem command string which is an ASCII text string from 3 to 34 characters For asynchronous interf
69. Services Remote Router A Central Router B _ Demand circuit 1 Initiate call gt 2 Authenticate caller 3 Disconnect or refuse call 4 Call back 5 Accept call lt DS0032A Figure 6 1 Example of Callback over a Demand Circuit Remote router A places a call to central router B Router B determines whether the caller is authorized and if so terminates the initial call Router B then places a return call to router A Configuring Callback Callback operates on a per demand circuit basis You enable callback by configuring the callback mode parameter This parameter assigns each end of a callback circuit the role of server or client If you do not want to use the callback feature you accept the default callback mode Inactive The server responds to each incoming call from the client and either authenticates the call using CHAP or PAP or identifies the caller using the incoming filtering feature The server disconnects or refuses the call then redials the client using one of the following options e The outgoing phone list The outgoing phone list is a user defined list containing the phone numbers of remote routers Each number in the outgoing phone list is associated with a specific circuit e Caller ID also called Automatic Number Identification ANT Caller ID is an ISDN service that you purchase from an ISDN service provider When you purchase caller ID the phone number of the caller is placed in the call setup mess
70. Services Configuring PPP Demand Circuits After you create a demand pool and add lines to it you configure the demand circuits The demand pool must have at least one demand line configured before you can add a demand circuit To create a demand circuit navigate to the demand pool prompt and enter demand circuit lt circuit_name gt circuit_name is any text string For example to configure a demand circuit associated with demand pool 1 enter demand pool 1 demand circuit circuit to boston Adding Protocols to the Demand Circuit After you add the demand circuit you can assign protocols to it PPP is the default layer 2 protocol for a demand circuit the PPP object is automatically part of the demand circuit context To navigate to the PPP context you enter ppp at the demand circuit prompt for example demand circuit demand to boston ppp This command now puts you at the PPP demand circuit prompt for example ppp demand to boston To add IP to the demand circuit from the PPP demand circuit prompt enter ip lt ip_address gt lt subnet_mask gt ip_address is any valid IP address subnet_mask is any valid 32 bit mask For example to add IP to the demand circuit demand to boston enter ppp demand to boston ip 192 132 23 1 255 255 255 0 ip 192 132 23 1 255 255 255 0 3 18 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Starting Dial Services Using the BCC Defining the Circuits Connection Mode After you specify the protocol f
71. Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 Inthe top left corner of the PPP Demand The Protocols menu opens Circuits window choose Protocols 2 Choose Add Delete The Select Protocols window opens 3 Select IP then click on OK The IP Configuration window opens 4 Set the IP Address parameter then click You return to the PPP Demand Circuits on OK Click on Help or see Configuring window IP ARP RARP RIP and OSPF Services 5 Do one of the following If you added ISDN lines or modem lines V 25bis or Hayes to the pool go to Creating an Outgoing Phone List on page 2 27 If you added only Raise DTR lines to the pool click on Done and go to Setting Up the Caller Resolution Table on page 2 30 If you enable compression across PPP demand circuits and you configure the router to negotiate compression below the multilink bundle do not configure protocol prioritization for demand circuits running PPP multilink Protocol prioritization modifies the order in which packets are sent over the line which could change the multilink assigned order of packets and cause problems with the data For more information about compression see Configuring Data Compression Services 2 18 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Starting Dial Services Using Site Manager Creating PPP Dial Backup Circuits To create a PPP backup circuit you designate a single leased circuit leased PPP m
72. Srrerr A ery ren ree 12 16 Modifying PAP pipni rere ipa E setae errr E 12 16 Configuring Outbound utisnticatien PEE E E E E EE 12 17 Speciiying the Duration of the CHU saccccniccssnscanixnciedeurnassannunns daanenaraciananebsnannies 12 19 Specifying the Maximum and Minimum Time the Circuit Is Active 12 19 xii 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Terminating and Resetting the Circuit c cccececeeseseeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeseaeeeeeeees 12 20 Setna he Naca NS si sindstierasiarieuassadaandeecapriancciiiaaiasussuanumauictaas misecbounntsiiaganives 12 22 Changing the Demand Circuit NAME cccccctsccccstircanatieteonried nodes 12 23 Enabling DialOptimizad RODNO castcnisdateeteecintettnsenienhsieutead a e 12 24 Configuring Standby Circuits panes PAT oiia PLE pomadi re 12 26 Guidelines for Configuring Standby Circuits 0 ccceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 12 26 Coniguring a Hot Standoy Creu x2 isssceuscssresceiansnssteyisclascdinsibsesdirenisdanees 12 27 Configuring a Normal Standby Circuit P errr rere EET i 12 28 Controlling the Failback to the Primary Circuit 0 ccceccseteeeereeesteeeeeeees 12 28 Controlling the Standby Circuit Manually cccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeees 12 29 Enabling Callback arrinin nna EE EE Aiat 12 31 Modifying the Callback Mode Parameter sssossseseesseessseesrnessressseesreesrsessses 12 31 Callback and the Circuits Connection Mode e
73. System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window The ISDN Leased Line B Channels click on an ISDN connector that is window opens configured as a leased line 2 Click on Edit D Chan The BRI Interface Configuration window opens 3 Set the BRI T4 Timer parameter Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 28 4 Click on OK You return to the ISDN Leased Line B Channels window 5 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window 308621 14 00 Rev 00 11 21 Configuring Dial Services Modifying the Interframe Time Fill Pattern The interframe time fill FTF indicates the signal pattern that the router transmits when there is no data going across a particular channel You can modify this pattern to suit your network To modify the interframe time fill pattern Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window The ISDN Leased Line window opens click on an ISDN connector that is configured as a leased line 2 Set the Inter Frame Time Fill parameter Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 32 3 Click on Done The Edit Connector window opens 4 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window Deleting BRI and PRI from the Router Before you delete the BRI and PRI physical interface you must delete the dial up circuits and pools Using the BCC To remove BRI
74. TE devices for example routers However the service provider may assign only one phone number for the customer side of the local loop To determine the specific destination of the call the router uses a subaddress Each router has an assigned subaddress for which it will accept calls The subaddress must be part of the incoming call setup message sent to the router Based on the subaddress the router determines whether it is the intended receiver If not the router ignores the call Floating B Option for the AN and ANH If your ISDN service provider offers only 2B D service the floating B option for the AN and ANH enables you to use only one B channel for dial service applications Floating B is an alternative if you cannot purchase 1B D service If your service provider offered only 2B D service the AN and ANH CPU would use two of its four serial communication controllers SCCs for the two B channels one SCC for the Ethernet link and one SCC for a synchronous link Using the floating B option you use only one B channel at a time freeing up an SCC for an additional synchronous link 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Implementation Notes for All Dial Services You can use floating B if your network integrates an ISDN dial backup connection with network devices that send protocol traffic such as SDLC or X 25 This type of application requires the following interfaces e One synchronous interface for SDLC or X 25 traffic e One synchr
75. The default is disabled For example schedule to boston weekday 1000 2100 inactivity timer enabled To set the availability mode enter availability mode lt mode gt mode can be available The circuit is available between the start time and end time not available The circuit is available during all hours outside the start time and end time interval defined by all schedules there can be more than one schedule that defines a start time and end time interval For example schedule to boston weekday 1000 2100 availability mode not available 308621 14 00 Rev 00 12 39 Configuring Dial Services Using Site Manager To configure a circuit s schedule Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window choose Dialup The Dialup menu opens 2 Choose Demand Circuits The Demand Pools window opens 3 Click on PPP Circuits or FR Circuits The the PPP Demand Circuits window or the FR Demand Circuits window opens 4 Click on Schedule 5 Click on Add The Circuit Time of Day Schedule window PPP or the Pool Availability window frame relay opens The Circuit Time of Day Schedule window opens 6 Set the following parameters Days Start Time End Time Click on Help or see the parameter descriptions beginning on page A 56 7 Click on OK You return to the Circuit Time of Day Schedule window or the Pool Availabi
76. The router uses the CHAP name when it activates the secondary line Instructions If you configure CHAP as the authentication protocol specify a name for router identification If not ignore this parameter Do not configure this parameter for a demand circuit group MIB Object ID 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 4 5 1 31 A 46 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Site Manager Parameters Parameter CHAP Secret Path Demand Circuits Dialup gt Demand Circuits gt Demand Pools gt PPP Circuits gt PPP Demand Circuits Backup Circuits Dialup gt Backup Circuits gt PPP gt Primary Circuit Definition Bandwidth Circuits Dialup gt Bandwidth On Demand Circuit gt Bandwidth On Demand Circuit Definition Default Unsecured Options Any text string maximum of 20 characters Function Specifies the CHAP Secret that you assign to this interface The CHAP secret is for identification and security purposes and must be the same on both sides of the link When one router places a call to another router an authentication process takes place During this phase the routers send challenge packets back and forth that include the CHAP secret Both routers on a link must have the same CHAP secret to correctly calculate responses to the challenges For bandwidth on demand circuits this parameter is only configurable if the bandwidth mode is Monitor The router uses the CHAP secret when it brings up the secondary line Instructions If you configure CHAP as the authe
77. UpTime Term Reset parameter A 52 Use Backup Interface Filters parameter A 75 V V 25bis signaling configuring BCC 3 10 configuring Site Manager 2 6 creating phone lists 15 1 description 1 4 modifying BCC 10 4 modifying Site Manager 10 5 Ww WAN Encryption Protocol WEP using with dial services 5 6 WAN Interface Serial Type parameter A 5 X X 25 over ISDN D Channel parameter A 30 X 25 over the D channel configuring 5 19 11 11 description 5 18 disabling 11 15 Index 7
78. Window Parameter WAN Serial Interface Type Path Dialup gt Demand Backup Bandwidth on Demand Pools gt Pools gt Add gt Demand Backup Bandwidth on Demand Pool Configuration gt OK gt Lines Definition gt COM Connector gt Choose Wan Serial Interface Type Default Sync Options Sync Async Pasync not applicable for dial services Function Determines whether this interface uses synchronous communication or asynchronous communication Instructions If you are using asynchronous PPP select Async Otherwise accept the default MIB Object ID 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 5 1 109 308621 14 00 Rev 00 A 5 Configuring Dial Services Sync and Async Line Media Type Parameters The Line Media Type windows Figures A 3 and A 4 contain the physical interface parameters for the dial line Line Media Type EAISEDTR Cable Type RS232 Priority 1 Modem Command String Figure A 3 Sync Line Media Type Window Cancel OK Values Help Line Media Type EAISEDTR Priority 1 Modem Command String Figure A 4 Async Line Media Type Window The parameter descriptions follow A 6 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Site Manager Parameters Parameter Line Media Type Path Dialup gt Demand Backup Bandwidth on Demand Pools gt Pools gt Add gt Demand Backup Bandwidth on Demand Pool Configuration gt OK gt Lines Definition gt COM Connector gt Choose Wan Serial Interface Type gt OK gt Sync or Async Line Me
79. You return to the Configuration Manager window Configure routers 1 and 2 according to the sections that follow B 38 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Port Application Mode Configuration Configuration Examples Configure the port application mode by completing the following tasks for both routers 1 and 2 Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window choose the ISDN1 connector on the ISDN BRI net module The Port Application window opens Accept the default for the Port Application Mode parameter Dialup 2B D then click on OK You return to the Configuration Manager window Backup Pool Configuration Configure a backup pool for each router as follows Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window choose Dialup The Dialup menu opens 2 Choose Backup Pools The Backup Pools window opens default values 3 Click on Add The Backup Pool Configuration window opens 4 Set the Pool ID parameter to 1 then click The Backup Lines Definition window on OK opens 5 Choose the ISDN1 port that you The ISDN Switch Configuration window configured as a BRI interface opens 6 Set the Switch Type parameter to BRI The ISDN Logical Lines window opens NI1 for both routers then click on OK 7 Click on OK to accept the parameter You return to the Backup Lin
80. a command line interface for configuring Nortel Networks devices In BCC configuration mode you can create a customized configuration and modify this configuration In configuration mode you navigate through the configuration tree hierarchy to objects that enable you to create dial on demand service To navigate through the configuration hierarchy and learn what you can configure at each level enter a question mark or the help tree command at any prompt To learn more about the BCC see Using the Bay Command Console BCC 308621 14 00 Rev 00 6 1 Configuring Dial Services Standby Circuits The expansion of enterprise networks to remote branch sites requires reliable access to these sites Therefore it is important to have more than one connection to the remote sites in case a primary connection fails To provide additional connections you can use standby circuits A standby circuit is a special type of demand circuit that gives the router another path to the destination The destination can be a different interface at the primary circuit s original site or an entirely different site Standby circuits support asynchronous RS 449 synchronous RS 449 V 35 RS 422 and X 21 and ISDN interfaces PPP is the only data link layer protocol that you can configure over a standby circuit you cannot use frame relay Comparing Standby Circuits with Dial Backup Circuits Both standby circuits and dial backup circuits can back up
81. amount of time you choose depends on the time it typically takes the network to recover 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 4 5 1 27 Connection Mode Dialup gt Demand Circuits gt Demand Pools gt PPP gt PPP Collision Master No Dial Collision Master Collision Slave Determines the role of each router when two routers try to establish a demand circuit with one another at the same time resulting in a collision Both routers in a demand configuration can initiate a call If a collision occurs each router refers to the value of this parameter to determine whether to initiate subsequent calls or whether to wait and receive calls To avoid continual collisions configure one router as Collision Master and the other as Collision Slave After an initial collision each router will then follow the role assigned by this parameter To ensure that a router receives calls but never initiates calls enter No Dial If this circuit is part of an unnumbered demand circuit group the router automatically sets this parameter to No Dial because a circuit in a demand circuit group cannot initiate a call If you are configuring a bandwidth pool for this circuit and this router is the monitor router you must select Collision Master or Collision Slave do not use the No Dial option 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 4 5 1 28 308621 14 00 Rev 00 A 37 Configuring Dial Services Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID
82. and enable DTR dialing of directory zero amp Q3 Select sync connect with async off line command mode and enable DTR to act as Talk Data switch amp Q4 Select Hayes AutoSync mode amp Q5 Modem negotiates an error corrected link amp Q6 Select asynchronous operation in normal mode amp RO CTS tracks RTS async or acts per V 25 sync amp R1 CTS is always active amp S0 DSR is always active amp S1 DSR acts per V 25 amp TO Terminate any test in progress amp T1 Initiate local analog loopback amp T2 Returns ERROR result code amp T3 Initiate local digital loopback amp T4 Allow remote digital loopback amp T5 Disallow remote digital loopback request amp T6 Request an RDL without self test amp T7 Request an RDL with self test amp T8 Initiate local analog loop with self test amp V Display current configurations amp WO Store the active profile in NVRAM profile 0 amp W1 Store the active profile in NVRAM profile 1 amp X0 Select internal timing for the transmit clock continued 308621 14 00 Rev 00 E 5 Configuring Dial Services Table E 1 Summary of AT Modem Initialization Commands continued Command Function amp X1 Select external timing for the transmit clock amp X2 Select slave receive timing for the transmit clock amp Y0 Recall stored profile 0 upon power up amp Y1 Recall stored profile 1 upon power up amp Zn x Store dial str
83. available local demand circuit that corresponds to the incoming phone number The server uses this circuit to call back the client For example to add the phone number 1234567 and specify the callback circuit to Boston enter isdn in phone list in phone number 1234567 circuit name to Boston Remember you must also enable incoming call filtering For instructions see Enabling Incoming Call Filtering on page 11 8 15 22 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Customizing Phone Lists Using Site Manager The Callback Demand Circuit Name parameter is located in the Incoming Phone List window For configuration instructions see Creating an Incoming Phone List ASDN Only on page 15 19 Remember you must also enable incoming call filtering For instructions see Enabling Incoming Call Filtering on page 11 8 Creating a Local Phone List ISDN Only Using the BCC or Site Manager you can configure a local phone list for any demand or backup service that uses BRI and PRI lines but this list is optional For bandwidth on demand connections that use BRI and PRI lines and BAP negotiation you must configure the local phone list When you enter local phone numbers enter the phone number that your ISDN provider supplied when you received ISDN service For switches in the United States do not include the area code when you enter the phone number Any remote party that calls the router must include this phone number in the Called Par
84. beginning on page A 62 5 Click on OK The Caller Resolution Info window opens 6 Go to Caller Resolution Information for Demand Circuit Groups on page 12 47 12 46 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Customizing Demand Circuits Protocol Configuration for Demand Circuit Groups You must configure a demand circuit group using one of the following unnumbered protocols e IP with either RIP RIP2 or OSPF as the routing protocol e IPX with RIP SAP and or NLSP as the routing protocol e Bridging Note When you configure a protocol for a demand circuit group Site Manager requires that you also configure a routing protocol A single protocol configuration applies to all circuits in the group and can be used by many remote nodes calling the recovery router Without the use of specific network addresses the recovery router must use routing updates to determine the data path to the remote nodes Unlike individual demand circuits you can enable routing protocols for a demand circuit group without establishing a dial up connection The demand circuit group and its protocol interface are active only when the physical connection is active Without a physical line available no circuit or protocol information for example RIP update packets can pass from one router to the next If you enable compression across PPP demand circuits and you configure the router to negotiate compression below the multilink bundle do no
85. can manage the allocation of bandwidth for a multilink bundle by enabling the PPP Bandwidth Allocation Protocol BAP This protocol is available only after bandwidth service is set up For more information about BAP see Chapter 8 Bandwidth on Demand Implementation Notes Figure 1 5 illustrates how additional switched lines provide more bandwidth for a congested demand line New York City Boston Initial demand line Additional lines from a bandwidth pool DS0004A Figure 1 5 Additional Lines for a Dial on Demand Connection 308621 14 00 Rev 00 1 13 Configuring Dial Services Dial Backup Service Dial backup service provides alternate paths between the same two routers for data to reach its destination if the primary line fails A primary line is a leased line a leased multiline Standard and PPP only or a leased multilink connection This leased line acts as the physical connection over which the leased circuit the logical connection carries traffic You designate these leased circuits as primary circuits which instructs the router to provide backup service if the primary line and circuit fail If a primary circuit fails and you configured dial backup service for that circuit the router activates an available backup line When the primary circuit is restored the router reroutes all traffic from the backup circuit to the primary circuit and clears the dial backup connection Dial backup is support
86. channels in a pool The pool channel count is part of the ISDN logical line configuration because it defines the logical B channels not the physical line Before changing the logical line configuration you must delete all circuits associated with that pool For instructions see the appropriate customizing chapter for circuits 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Configuring Dial Services Using the BCC To modify the pool channel count navigate to the demand line or backup line prompt and enter channel count lt nteger gt integer is the number of B channels you are allocating for the backup pool For example if you set the channel count parameter to 5 and now want to remove 3 lines enter backup line 8 pri 3 1 channel count 2 Using Site Manager To modify the pool channel count and priority Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window choose Dialup The Dialup menu opens 2 Choose Demand Backup or Bandwidth The Demand Backup or on Demand Pools Bandwidth on Demand Pools window opens 3 Select the pool that contains the ISDN The Pool ID for the selected entry lines that you want to modify appears in the Pool ID field 4 Click on Edit The Lines Definition window opens 5 Click on an ISDN MCT1 or MCE1 The ISDN Logical Lines window opens connector 6 Set the Pool Channel Count parameter Click on Help or see the parameter descr
87. checks its caller resolution table for an entry that identifies the remote caller e If the caller is authorized the local router maps the caller to a local circuit and then activates that circuit 308621 14 00 Rev 00 5 9 Configuring Dial Services e If the caller is not in the caller resolution table and RADIUS is configured a request is sent to the RADIUS server for authentication Note Do not configure the remote router in the caller resolution table If you do the local router which is the RADIUS client will not access the vendor specific attributes ISDN Services A router with built in ISDN capability is a TE1 device which is an ISDN compatible device This means that the router provides the S T interface which defines the boundary between the user and the network The ARN also provides the U interface which includes an integral NT1 interface The NT1 interface defines the point at which the service provider s wires terminate at your site For BRI service the S T interface follows the standards outlined in ITU T recommendation 1 430 the physical layer protocol that defines the S T interface For PRI service the interface follows ITU T recommendation I 431 You have an S interface only if an NT2 device is present An NT2 is a switch at your site that connects your TE1 and TE2 equipment to the network Figure 5 5 shows the router in a sample ISDN network S T U TE1
88. circuit prompt and enter force take down enabled For example to deactivate the demand circuit to Boston enter demand circuit circuit to Boston force take down enabled The default for this parameter is disabled 12 8 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Customizing Demand Circuits Using Site Manager To force the circuit to activate or terminate Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window The Dialup menu opens choose Dialup 2 Choose Demand Circuits The Demand Pools window opens 3 Click on PPP Circuits or FR Circuits The PPP Demand Circuits window or the FR Demand Circuits window opens 4 Select the circuit that you want to modify 5 Set the following parameters Force Dial Force Take Down Click on Help or see the parameter descriptions beginning on page A 35 6 Click on Apply then click on Done You return to the Demand Pools window 7 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window Deactivating the Circuit Due to Inactivity You can configure the router to terminate a circuit if there is no data going across the connection The inactivity time measures the data inactivity on the line Specifically it determines the number of seconds that can elapse without data activity before the router disconnects the line Each time data passes through the router the inactivity time resets Together with the inactiv
89. click on Demand Intf The FR Demand Interface List window opens Click on Services The Frame Relay Demand Service List window opens 6 Choose Protocols 7 Choose Add Delete The Protocols menu opens The Select Protocols window opens 8 Select one or more protocols for this demand circuit then click on OK For each protocol you select Site Manager displays windows that require information Consult the appropriate protocol manual Click on Done until you return to the Configuration Manager window 308621 14 00 Rev 00 12 7 Configuring Dial Services Customizing Demand Circuit Operation After you configure a PPP or frame relay demand circuit you can customize the circuit s parameter defaults The demand circuit parameters determine how the demand circuit operates and what demand circuit features it uses You can modify demand circuits using the BCC or Site Manager Forcing the Circuit to Activate or Deactivate You can force the router to immediately activate or deactivate a demand circuit using the BCC or Site Manager Using the BCC To force the demand circuit to activate navigate to the demand circuit prompt and enter force dial enabled For example to activate the demand circuit to Boston enter demand circuit circuit to Boston force dial enabled The default for this parameter is disabled To force the demand circuit to terminate navigate to the demand
90. default MRU size navigate to the dial prompt and enter mru lt integer gt integer is a value from 1 to 4600 bytes For example dial serial 3 1 mru 1590 If you configure an MRU size other than the default be aware that the router can negotiate only for an MRU value that is larger than its configured value The range that it can negotiate is between the configured MTU size and the router s driver MTU value minus the PPP header and CRC size For example if the configured MTU is 1500 and the driver MTU is 1600 the negotiation range is 1500 to 1590 1600 8 2 1590 Note Dial up lines add 56 bytes to the frame s header and if you enable the WAN Compression Protocol WCP that adds an additional 5 bytes Instead of fragmenting large packets to stay within the size of the default MTU both Site Manager and the BCC automatically increase the size of the MTU Therefore you do not need to adjust the driver MTU to accommodate the additional frame headers Site Manager and the BCC automatically update dial up lines only they do not update leased lines We recommend that the peer be configured for an MRU value of at least 1500 bytes Note also that the router and its peer do not have to use the same MRU value to communicate with one another For leased lines the router negotiates the MRU size automatically but you must disable the mru compliance parameter For instructions go to the next section Disabling MRU Compli
91. err eene reer tr eae mee ret neg een try econ ny reare mr ee rer sn teerern tat 3 24 308621 14 00 Rev 00 vii Chapter 4 ISDN Overview SET SIT aa e E E E E E song daneessddauepecnesanedcatarategacieaaniedducsemmsesd 4 2 rie R AE a N 4 2 Primary Rate Interface DTN noian ET PRT pennn eae ere iene PEERS FVROUD ass da Le cea heryitien phar a aie Edie cabot 4 3 Link Access Procedir oscars ch cunt tinclecastvsinivmamianinteeuedertidadadertvadtiasiy eaclotiedts 4 3 Call Contvol on the D CANDE cs cic edasccnsuctticrineds doves ducctaasereciceciseresstareusectetanteds 4 5 ISDN TBS iraniani E E A 4 5 Functional Groups iiba T PET rere eee eee T adran eii ee 4 5 PROTEGE FOMIO cosie a 4 6 For Mote Intoimation About ISDN ssssisinnaoinononniasa iaoiai iai 4 8 Chapter 5 Implementation Notes for All Dial Services PONIO PONLF OOC O a aa PPP Authentication ode Aaa AN T inan ee AT A T a TYBSS OT AUNOMCANON saitinin staveanent saceataetamaeioerdacmmmeiubraaddeaeees 5 2 TWO Nay UN UUM ooieoe Ceotaneia ded cases Weaen EE 5 2 One Way Authentication 0 0 nrc rere errr rr re etre ree 5 3 Configuring the Type of Authentication c ccecccccseeceseneeeeeteeeeeeeeseteeettaeteees D 4 Using CHAP Names and PAP IDs for Authentication eeens 5 4 WAN Encryption PrOtOCOL cciiccsucrecncstanincnaiishitebaaccahrbiulddanndancuuaciylacsdabardeasaintvaadautvamaaatrla 5 6 Using Briers pier wiih Dial BackUp cass ssictanessaiplapee
92. execute the command hot standby lt demand_circuit_name gt for the primary circuit object For example to make the demand circuit from centralbIn a normal standby circuit enter ppp from centralbln standby mode standby normal In addition to creating a normal standby demand circuit the circuit s connection mode must be set to collision slave for example ppp from centralbln connection mode collision slave Controlling the Failback to the Primary Circuit If you configured a demand circuit as a hot standby demand circuit you can control the failback from the hot standby circuit back to the primary circuit To configure how the router transfers from using the hot standby circuit to the primary circuit navigate to the ppp demand circuit prompt and enter standby failback mode lt failback_mode gt 12 28 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Customizing Demand Circuits failback_mode can be none Instructs the router to rely exclusively on the circuit schedule parameters for primary and standby circuit operation and to ignore this parameter automatic Automatically deactivates the hot standby circuit and sends data back across the primary circuit when it recovers This option takes precedence over any configured circuit schedule manual Controls the primary and hot standby circuits by operator intervention To return traffic to the primary circuit you manually deactivate the standby circuit This option overrides the circuit s c
93. failed primary circuits however they differ in the following ways Each standby circuit has a unique configuration it does not adopt the primary circuit s configuration In contrast most dial backup circuits inherit the primary circuit s configuration This unique standby configuration offers flexibility when setting up other paths to remote sites For example you may want the standby circuit to have a different destination than the primary circuit or you may enable compression on the standby circuit but not on the associated primary circuit Standby circuits let you control when the router switches from the standby circuit back to the recovered primary circuit You do not have this option with dial backup circuits In dial backup configurations the router terminates the backup circuit when the primary circuit recovers For example to ensure the stability of a recovered primary circuit before bringing down the standby circuit you can delay the return of data to the primary circuit Standby circuits support PPP multilink You can assign a bandwidth on demand pool to the hot standby circuit to relieve congestion Bandwidth on demand connections use PPP multilink which lets the router use multiple dial up lines simultaneously to transmit data You do not have this option with dial backup circuits 6 2 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Dial on Demand Implementation Notes If you associate a bandwidth on demand pool with a hot standby ci
94. from the router navigate to the BRI prompt and enter delete For example bri 1 1 delete To remove PRI from the router navigate to the PRI prompt and enter delete For example pri 3 2 delete 11 22 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Using Site Manager To remove BRI from the router Customizing ISDN Lines Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window click on the ISDN connector The ISDN Dialup window opens 2 Click on Delete All Site Manager removes BRI service 3 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window To remove PRI from the router Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window click on an MCT1 or MCE1 connector The PRI Logical Lines window opens 2 Click on Delete PRI Site Manager removes PRI service 3 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window Deleting ISDN B Channels from a Pool You can remove B channels from a line pool using the BCC or Site Manager Using the BCC To remove B channels from a line pool complete the following steps 1 Remove an ISDN backup line from a line pool by navigating to the demand or backup line prompt and entering delete For example demand line 4 bri 2 1 delete 308621 14 00 Rev 00 11 23 Configuring Dial Services Remove the line as a d
95. gt type can be raise dtr A signaling method that enables access to the network by preprogramming the destination phone numbers into the dial device Raise DTR signaling works with any of these interfaces X 21 V 35 RS 232 and RS 422 v25bis A signaling method that enables access to the network by passing the destination phone numbers from the router to the dial device Using V 25bis the dial device can use multiple phone numbers to call multiple destinations V 25bis signaling works with any of these interfaces X 21 V 35 RS 232 and RS 422 hayes A signaling method that enables access to the network by passing the destination phone numbers from the router to the dial device Hayes signaling is for asynchronous PPP and works with RS 422 and V 34 interfaces To use Hayes as the serial media type you must also specify a modem initialization string The router sends this string to the modem to initiate a call For example serial 3 3 media type v25bis To set the cable type navigate to the dial interface prompt and enter cable type lt va lue gt value can be null rs232 s422 v35 or x21 Select the option that corresponds to the interface type supported by the attached dial device For example dial serial 3 3 cable type rs232 10 4 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Customizing Modem Lines Using Site Manager To modify the line media type and cable type Site Manager Procedure You do this System respond
96. gt PPP Demand Circuits Backup Circuits Dialup gt Backup Circuits gt PPP gt Primary Circuit Definition Bandwidth Circuits Dialup gt Bandwidth On Demand Circuit gt Bandwidth On Demand Circuit Definition Default Unsecured Options Any text string maximum of 25 characters Function Specifies the PAP password that you assign to this interface During the interface s authentication phase all Password Authenticate Request messages that the calling router sends to the called router must include the correct PAP password or the called router sends an Authenticate Negative Acknowledgment Authenticate NAK and does not bring up the connection For bandwidth on demand circuits this parameter is only configurable if the Bandwidth Mode parameter is set to Monitor Instructions If you are using PAP as the authentication protocol specify a unique PAP password for this circuit If not ignore this parameter MIB Object ID 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 4 5 1 38 308621 14 00 Rev 00 A 49 Configuring Dial Services Parameter Outbound Authentication Path Demand Circuits Dialup gt Demand Circuits gt Demand Pools gt PPP Circuits gt PPP Demand Circuits Backup Circuits Dialup gt Backup Circuits gt PPP gt Primary Circuit Definition Bandwidth Circuits Dialup gt Bandwidth On Demand Circuit gt Bandwidth On Demand Circuit Definition Default Enable Options Enable Disable Function Specifies whether the router
97. if you have a SESS switch and the line type parameter is set to point to point To set the SPID navigate to the local phone number prompt and enter spid lt string gt string is a numeric string up to 20 characters For example to specify a SPID for the local phone number 5553427 enter local phone number 2 1 5553427 Spid 1212 In addition to the local phone number you can define the ISDN number type and plan to indicate the standard that the phone number follows The router passes this information to the ISDN switch To specify the ISDN number type navigate to the local phone number prompt and enter isdn number type lt type gt isdn number plan lt plan gt type can be one of the following unknown specific international subscriber national abbreviated 15 24 308621 14 00 Rev 00 plan can be one of the following unknown telex telephony standard x121 private For example Customizing Phone Lists local phone number 2 1 5553427 isdn number type national isdn number plan telephony Using Site Manager To create a local phone list Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window choose Dialup The Dialup menu opens Choose Local Phone Numbers The ISDN Local Phone Lines window opens Click on Local Phones The ISDN Local Phone Numbers window opens The SPID parameter appears only for
98. in router slot 1 26 location on router 1 12 Sending Complete IE parameter A 22 Service Advertising Protocol SAP broadcast timers 6 12 service records frame relay configuring 13 7 Set Pulse Tone Dial Default parameter A 17 show commands C 1 Speaker Control parameter A 13 Speaker Volume parameter A 13 SPID parameter A 92 standby circuits balancing traffic 6 4 configuring 12 26 description 6 2 scheduling availability 12 41 Standby Failback Mode parameter A 41 Standby Mode parameter A 41 Standby Primary Circuit parameter A 42 Start Time parameter A 57 static routes for dial on demand 6 8 support Nortel Networks xxx Switch Type parameter A 20 switch type modifying 11 7 synchronous lines bandwidth on demand 1 23 dial backup 1 14 dial on demand 1 8 T T reference point ISDN description 4 6 technical publications xxx technical support xxx TEI Type for X 25 over ISDN D parameter A 30 308621 14 00 Rev 00 TEI Value for X 25 over ISDN D parameter A 31 terminal adapter TA description 4 5 terminal equipment 1 TE1 description 4 5 terminal equipment 2 TE2 description 4 5 terminating dial backup circuits 1 16 text conventions xxvi TimeOfDay Failback Mode parameter A 60 time sensitive protocols for dial backup 7 2 traffic filters 6 12 two way authentication 5 2 U U reference point ISDN description 4 6 unnumbered IP interfaces demand circuit groups 7 3
99. in the backup pool 22 The backup mode parameter is set to initiator so router 2 s backup mode must be set to receiver for proper operation 308621 14 00 Rev 00 B 25 Configuring Dial Services Define the router s local CHAP name and secret so it can identify itself to the remote router backup circuit 22 1 1 chap name bin chap secret west This router the initiator router does not require a caller resolution table router 1 initiates calls to router 2 it does not receive them therefore router 1 does not need to verify router 2 s identity In contrast router 1 must have a CHAP name and secret configured which it then places in the call setup message to identify itself to router 2 Specify the outgoing phone number for remote router 2 backup circuit 22 1 1 Oout phone number phone number 4362222 out phone number backup 22 1 1 4362222 Optional Schedule Configuration for Router 1 You can specify a schedule for the backup circuit s availability By default the backup circuit is available all the time Assume that you are at the out phone number prompt from the previous section To specify a different schedule 1 From the out phone number prompt go back to the backup circuit prompt out phone number backup 22 1 1 9162222 back backup circuit 22 1 1 Specify the schedule backup circuit 22 1 1 schedule days weekend start time 1000 end time 2100 B 26 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Configuration Ex
100. initiate connections Accept the default Disable if you do not want to limit updates in this way If you enable or disable dial optimized routing dynamically while your demand connection is active the router deactivates the connection If there is still data to send after the call is cleared the router places another call using the new value for this parameter If you do not enable dial optimized routing you may want to limit routing updates using another method Refer to Chapter 6 for more information about limiting broadcast traffic 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 4 5 1 47 308621 14 00 Rev 00 A 39 Configuring Dial Services Parameter Routing Update Hold Time Path Dialup gt Demand Circuits gt Demand Pools gt FR Circuits gt FR Demand Circuits Default 0 Options 0 to 600 seconds Function Tells the router how long to wait before sending RIP or SAP updates across the Frame Relay demand circuit This parameter works together with dial optimized routing Instructions If you enable dial optimized routing enter the number of seconds that the router should wait after placing a call to send routing updates The time interval you specify should be long enough so that the connection to the destination site activates not just the connection to the frame relay switch If you send routing updates before the connection to the destination is active routing updates may not reach the destination MIB Object ID 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 4
101. is activated Line Information Serial Lines Slot Module Conn Link State Media Type Async Baud Rate Active Circuit Name The slot module number and the connector number where the dial interface resides Indicates whether the link is initialized or inactive Signaling type for the modem interface Baud rate for the interface Circuit name 308621 14 00 Rev 00 BCC show Commands Line Information ISDN Lines Slot Module Conn Channel Count Channels in use Priority The slot module number and the connector number where the dial interface resides Number of B channels in the pool Number of active B channels Priority value assigned to the channel show dial backup circuits The show dial backup circuits command provides information about the primary and backup circuits You can use the following filter flags and filter arguments with this command pool lt pool_ia gt shows circuit information for a specified backup pool circuit lt circuit_name gt shows circuit information for a specified primary circuit The output contains the following information Primary Circuit Backup Pool ID Backup Mode Primary WAN Protocol Circuit name ID of the line pool Specifies whether the router initiates or receives the calls WAN protocol for the primary circuit 308621 14 00 Rev 00 C 15 Configuring Dial Services show dial backup lines The show dial backup lines command shows
102. la connection mode collision master ppp dial to la back demand circuit dial to la out phone number 9162222 out phone number dial to la 9162222 back Define router 1 s local CHAP name and secret so it can identify itself to router 2 ppp dial to la chap name baycentral chap secret corpblin Navigate to the leased frame relay PVC service record and assign the hot standby circuit dial to la to this leased interface box serial 2 1 frame relay service trunk to la service trunk to la hot standby dial to la B 22 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Configuration Examples The hot standby circuit dial to la is now assigned to the leased interface trunk to la If the leased interface fails dial to la will activate and data will use this circuit until the primary has recovered and the configured failback time has been reached Configuration of Router 2 Normal Standby Circuit Router 2 is the other end of the connection Because router 1 is configured with a hot standby circuit router 2 must be configured with a normal standby circuit to receive calls from router 1 To configure the network in Figure B 4 on page B 21 configure router 2 as follows 1 Configure a PPP demand circuit box met 3 15pri pri 3 1 dial dial pri 3 1 box box demand pool 10 demand pool 10 demand line pri 3 1 demand line 10 pri 3 1 back demand pool 10 demand circuit from boston demand circuit from boston ppp ppp from boston
103. line Multilink is important for demand circuits that use bandwidth on demand service because it enables you to e Group lines of different speeds e Distribute traffic more evenly among the lines e Restore packet sequence e Monitor traffic volume for bandwidth on demand service These features enable the router to add bandwidth to relieve a congested demand circuit When you enable multilink you can combine a set of lines between two routers into a single bundle Each bundle belongs to a separate circuit Multilink distributes traffic over each logical line in a bundle in an amount proportional to the bandwidth of the link When data reaches the destination router multilink resequences packets arriving on different lines For ISDN lines you can manage the allocation of bandwidth in a multilink bundle by enabling the PPP Bandwidth Allocation Protocol BAP For more information about this protocol see Chapter 8 Bandwidth on Demand Implementation Notes For more information about PPP multilink see Configuring PPP Services 6 14 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Dial on Demand Implementation Notes Protocol Prioritization When you configure a router you can prioritize the different types of traffic sent across a synchronous line This process is called protocol prioritization Prioritizing traffic is important for your time sensitive applications For example a user at router A participating in a Telnet session with router
104. line The router continues to filter the data so that unwanted packets do not keep the circuit active You can also filter outbound packets to prevent the inactivity time from resetting For example RIP packets can always be sent but if no other data is sent the inactivity time expires and the line is deactivated To set up traffic filters see Configuring Traffic Filters and Protocol Prioritization Data Compression You can configure one of two compression protocols over any PPP demand circuit e Nortel Networks proprietary data compression protocol WCP e Hi fn LZS Enabling compression improves bandwidth efficiency by eliminating redundant strings in data streams This in turn improves network response times and yields line cost savings To implement data compression you select either WCP or Hi fn LZS as one of the protocols for the demand circuit To configure protocols for the demand circuit see Adding Layer 3 Protocols to PPP Demand Circuits on page 12 36 Note that WCP does not work with any other vendor s compression protocol For more information about data compression see Configuring Data Compression Services 308621 14 00 Rev 00 6 13 Configuring Dial Services PPP Multilink Multilink is a feature of PPP that you can enable for individual PPP links Links are logical communication channels between two routers A typical link includes one ISDN B channel one dial up modem connection and a leased T1
105. lines that help reduce congestion on a leased line Incoming Call Filtering Incoming call filtering is a security feature that works with the ISDN caller ID service Incoming call filtering lets the router filter incoming calls based on the calling party s phone number This feature is available for BRI and PRI service Caution To use incoming call filtering you must purchase caller ID service from your ISDN service provider If you enable incoming call filtering without caller ID service the router rejects all incoming calls The router filters incoming calls based on a list of phone numbers that you specify in an incoming phone list The phone number you enter must exactly match the phone number that the switch sends to the router If the phone number is included in the router s list the router accepts the call If not the router rejects the call This ensures that only authorized users have access to your network To enable incoming filtering see Enabling Incoming Call Filtering on page 11 8 You must also create an incoming phone list for incoming filtering For instructions see Creating an Incoming Phone List ISDN Only on page 15 19 5 16 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Implementation Notes for All Dial Services Rate Adaption Rate adaption enables the router to accommodate data transmission at a rate of 56 Kb s over a 64 Kb s B channel Nortel Networks supports only 56 Kb s adapted to 64 Kb s using t
106. loop that is the wire between your phone and the phone company s central office Note Any device that can connect to an S reference point can connect to a T reference point because the devices are the same electrically e Ureference point The point between the NT1 where the phone company s line ends at your premises and the phone company s central office It is where the subscriber side and network side of the local loop meet This point is different in North America than in Europe In North America the subscriber side of the local loop includes the NT1 so the U point is further out on the network In Europe the NT1 is part of the service provider s side or network side of the local loop so the S T point is where the subscriber and the network meet 4 6 308621 14 00 Rev 00 ISDN Overview Figures 4 4 and 4 5 show two ISDN networks with functional groups and reference points TE1 NT1 Digital line CJ Router with I ISDN BRI I S T U 1 1 l I 1 I 1 1 1 I 1 I 1 1 module DS0010A Figure 4 4 Reference Points and Functional Groups for Devices R S T U I I I I I I E Digital line ig Ou eae I I 1 Non ISDN router l I I I I I 1 DS0011A Figure 4 5 Reference Points and Functional Groups for Non ISDN
107. menu opens Choose Backup Circuits The Backup Circuits menu opens Choose Frame Relay The FR Primary Interface Definition window opens 4 Click on Intf Type The FR Interface window opens 5 Set the Interface Type parameter to Primary Shared or Primary Secondary Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 72 If you select Primary Secondary Site Manager prompts you to enable the frame relay interface You will do this in step 8 Set the Pool ID parameter and click on OK Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 73 You return to the FR Primary Interface Definition window which has four new buttons Backup Def Schedule Phone Out and Apply If you selected Primary Secondary as the interface type click on Backup Def The FR Backup Interface window opens Set the FR Service Control parameter to Enable Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 76 Click on Done You return to the FR Primary Interface Definition window 10 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window 308621 14 00 Rev 00 13 5 Configuring Dial Services Modifying the Frame Relay Backup Interface After you configure a primary circuit Site Manager sets up the frame relay backup circuit with default values The interface parameters define the frame relay characteristics of the circuit unlike the primary interface pa
108. of Resource Number of packets received and discarded because of lack of resources for example buffers Output Lack of Resource Number of transmit packets discarded because of lack of resources for example buffers 308621 14 00 Rev 00 C 29 Configuring Dial Services show modem stats The show modem stats command displays input and output statistical information for the V 34 modem module You can use the following filter flags and filter arguments for this command slot lt s ot_number gt shows information for a specified router slot The output contains the following information Slot Conn Operational State Receive Errors Transmit Errors Number of Buffers Receive Transmit Receive Bytes Receive Frames Recv Avg Pkt Transmit Bytes Transmit Frames Transmit Avg Pkt The slot and the connector number where the modem module resides State of the line driver up down init wait dsr wait holdown remote loop lineloopbofltest not present enabled but not yet started The Not Present state occurs for several reasons For example the modem module may not be physically present in the chassis the software may be booting and has not yet initialized the driver software the slot may be running diagnostics or there may be a problem with the configuration Number of frames received with errors Number of transmit frames with errors Number of buffers received without errors Number of buf
109. on page 2 13 308621 14 00 Rev 00 2 9 Configuring Dial Services Configuring BRI Leased Lines Germany and Japan Only For Germany and Japan if your ISDN service provider does not use the D channel for call setup or if you can use ISDN leased lines at an economical rate you can configure your ISDN line to act as a leased line To set up BRI leased line service complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window click on an ISDN connector The Port Application window opens Select a leased option for the Port Application Mode parameter Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 19 The ISDN Leased Line B Channels window opens showing two leased B channels 3 Click on Done The Add Circuit window opens 4 Click on an ISDN connector Site Manager supplies a value for the Circuit Name parameter Accept the value for the circuit name or specify another 6 Click on OK The WAN Protocols menu opens 7 Select a WAN protocol and then click on OK Select a LAN protocol and then click on OK to complete the configuration Site Manager prompts you to select a LAN protocol You return to the Configuration Manager window To modify the leased line configuration see Modifying BRI Leased Line Service Germany and Japan Only on page 11 20 2
110. on Add to add an entry to the table The Caller Name and Secret Password window opens Set the following parameters Caller Name CHAP Secret PAP Password Click on Help or see the parameter descriptions beginning on page A 107 If this entry is for a demand circuit group set the Local Group parameter Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 109 If not go to step 6 Click on OK The Local Circuit List window opens listing the previously configured demand primary or bandwidth circuits continued 308621 14 00 Rev 00 16 5 Configuring Dial Services Site Manager Procedure continued You do this 7 Set the Local Circuit parameter by selecting a local circuit then click on OK Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 109 System responds You return to the completed Caller Resolution Table window Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window Modifying Entries in the Caller Resolution Table Using the BCC you can only delete entries and create new ones you cannot modify an existing caller resolution entry Using Site Manager you can change entries in the caller resolution table Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window choose Dialup The Dialup menu opens Choose Caller Resolution Table Specify a new valu
111. or both The router then uses only the outgoing phone numbers whose values for this parameter match the pool type of the destination connection This parameter is for applications that use bandwidth on demand to aid congested demand circuits By configuring the Remote Pool Type parameter you prevent the local circuit from using a phone number associated with the wrong type of remote pool If a demand circuit places a call to a bandwidth pool the remote router terminates the call 308621 14 00 Rev 00 15 13 Configuring Dial Services To set the remote pool type Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window choose Dialup The Dialup menu opens Choose Demand Backup or Bandwidth on Demand Circuits For backup and bandwidth circuits the appropriate Circuit Definition window opens For demand circuits the Demand Pools window opens Click on PPP Circuits or FR Circuits to open the appropriate Demand Circuits window 3 Choose Phone Out The Outgoing Phone List window opens 4 Set the Remote Pool Type parameter Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 101 5 Click on Done You return to the appropriate circuit window 6 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window 15 14 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Customizing Phone Lists Configuring the Phone Number for Single or Multiple Calls Y
112. password lt text string gt text string can be any text string up to 25 characters For example for the backup circuit supporting primary line 5 1 enter backup circuit 10 5 1 pap id bayrs pap password admin 13 12 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Customizing Backup Circuits Configuring Outbound Authentication Outbound authentication specifies whether the router performs authentication when it places an outbound call Disabling outbound authentication improves interoperability with devices that do not perform two way authentication or support CHAP Accept the default enabled if you want to use two way authentication that is if each side of the connection will authenticate the other s identity Select disabled to use one way authentication which means that only the router receiving the call performs authentication If you disable this parameter to use one way authentication you must enable the PPP Fallback parameter which is part of the PPP interface configuration For information about the PPP Fallback parameter see Configuring PPP Services To specify whether the router performs authentication when it places an outbound call navigate to the backup circuit prompt and enter outbound authentication lt siate gt state is enabled or disabled For example for the backup circuit supporting primary line 5 1 enter backup circuit 10 5 1 outbound authentication disabled Using Site Manager To modify the authentication para
113. performs authentication when it places an outbound call Disabling outbound authentication improves interoperability with devices that do not perform two way authentication or support CHAP Instructions Accept the default Enable if you want to use two way authentication that is both sides of the connection will authenticate the other s identity Select Disable to use one way authentication which means that only the router receiving the call performs authentication If you disable this parameter to use one way authentication you must enable the PPP Fallback parameter which is part of the PPP interface configuration Refer to Configuring PPP Services for information about PPP Fallback MIB Object ID 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 4 5 1 48 A 50 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Site Manager Parameters Circuit Duration Parameters Demand and Dial Backup The circuit duration parameters determine how long the connection remains active not the circuit s availability These parameters are located in each service s circuit configuration window Parameter Maximum Up Time Path Demand Circuits Dialup gt Demand Circuits gt Demand Pools gt PPP or FR Circuits gt PPP or FR Demand Circuits Backup Circuits Dialup gt Backup Circuits gt PPP or Frame Relay gt Primary Circuit Definition or FR Primary Interface Definition Default 60 minutes Options 1 to 999 999 minutes Function Specifies the maximum duration of a call for a continuous perio
114. pool the remote router terminates the connection Instructions Enter the type of remote line pool associated with the outgoing phone number Use the following guidelines e Enter Dial on Demand if the line connected to the remote router is only ina demand pool e Enter Bandwidth on Demand if the line connected to the remote router is only in a bandwidth pool e Enter Dial and Bandwidth on Demand if the line connected to the remote router is in a demand pool and a bandwidth pool MIB Object ID 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 4 6 1 11 308621 14 00 Rev 00 A 101 Configuring Dial Services Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Connection Type Dialup gt Demand Backup Bandwidth On Demand Circuits Demand Circuits PPP or FR Circuits gt PPP or FR Demand Circuits gt Phone Out gt Outgoing Phone List Backup Circuits PPP or Frame Relay gt Primary Circuit Definition or FR Primary Interface Definition gt Phone Out gt Outgoing Phone List Bandwidth Circuits Bandwidth On Demand Circuit Definition gt Phone Out gt Outgoing Phone List Multiple Single Multiple Indicates whether the router uses the phone number for a single call or multiple calls for applications that use bandwidth on demand to aid congested demand circuits If you select Single the router checks whether this phone number is already in use for a circuit on the same slot If the remote device is already busy th
115. primary connections which is easier for the remote router than for the central router because there are fewer connections Standby circuits support standard demand circuit features such as multilink unnumbered interfaces dial optimized routing and outbound filtering Balancing Traffic Between a Primary Circuit and a Hot Standby Circuit When a hot standby circuit is active the routing protocol activates and finds an alternative route to the destination When the primary circuit recovers and resumes data transmission the routing protocol deactivates This is referred to as a failback to the primary circuit You can control the failback to the primary circuit manually or automatically One advantage of controlling failback is that you can delay the return of traffic to the primary circuit This lets the primary circuit stabilize before it resumes transmission of critical data 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Dial on Demand Implementation Notes The following configuration choices enable you to manage traffic between the primary circuit and the hot standby circuit e RIP or OSPF precedence and cost parameters The router sends traffic across the circuit with the better cost route If the better route is the hot standby circuit traffic continues across this circuit even if the primary circuit recovers Conversely traffic will resume across the primary circuit if that is the better route See Configuring IP ARP RARP RIP and OSPF Services fo
116. relation to its peer for callback operation show dial demand lines The show dial demand lines command provides information about demand lines You can use the following filter flag and filter argument with this command pool lt pool_ia gt shows circuit information about a specified demand pool The output contains the following information Line Information Serial Pool ID Slot Module Conn Link WAN Type Media Type Async Baud Rate Active Circuit Name Line Priority The ID number of the demand pool The slot module number and the connector number where the dial interface resides Indicates the type of WAN interface that is synchronous or asynchronous Signaling type for the modem interface Baud rate for the interface Circuit name The priority assignment of the line in the pool C 8 308621 14 00 Rev 00 BCC show Commands Line Information ISDN Pool ID Slot Module Conn Channel Count Channels in use Priority ID number of the demand pool The slot module number and the connector number where the dial interface resides Number of B channels in the pool Number of active B channels Priority value assigned to the channel show dial demand schedules The show dial demand schedules command provides information about the availability schedules of demand circuits You can use the following filter flags and filter arguments with this command pool lt pool_id gt sho
117. relay switch The router contacts the switch for the first time using a statically configured PVC If the router sends routing updates over the static PVC they will not go over the PVCs that connect to the destination By setting the Routing Update Hold Time to a large enough value you ensure that the updates are sent to the destination For more information about using dial optimized routing to limit broadcast traffic see Chapter 6 Dial on Demand Implementation Notes 12 24 308621 14 00 Rev 00 To enable dial optimized routing Customizing Demand Circuits Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window choose Dialup The Dialup menu opens Choose Demand Circuits The Demand Pools window opens 3 Click on PPP Circuits or FR Circuits 4 Select the circuit that you want to modify The PPP Demand Circuits window or the FR Demand Circuits window opens 5 Set the Dial Optimized Routing parameter Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 39 For a frame relay circuit set the Routing Update Hold Time parameter Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 40 7 Click on Apply then click on Done You return to the Demand Pools window 8 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window 308621 14 00 Rev 00 12 25 Configuring Dial Services Configuring Stand
118. rely only on the phone number in the call setup message If you cannot use caller ID or the phone number in the call setup message is not sufficient to place an outgoing call for example you have to dial 9 to get an outside line do not select a Call ID mode Function Determines the role of the router in relation to its peer router and how the router identifies which phone number to call back Instructions Select one of the following options Inactive Disables the callback feature for this circuit Server Designates the router as the callback server The server receives a call from the client It authenticates the caller disconnects the call and returns the call using a phone number in the outgoing phone list continued 308621 14 00 Rev 00 A 43 Configuring Dial Services Instructions MIB Object ID Client Designates the router as the callback client Use this mode when the other end of the connection uses Server or Server Call ID The client initiates a call to the server then waits for the server to return the call Once it receives the return call the client authenticates the call before accepting it Server Call ID ISDN connections only Designates the router as the callback server using caller ID The server receives a call from the client authenticates the call and disconnects it The server then returns the call using the phone number in the original call s setup message Client One Charge ISD
119. router returns to the primary circuit by using a schedule for the standby circuit To control the return from the hot standby circuit to the primary circuit navigate to the schedule prompt and enter schedule standby failback mode lt mode gt mode can be either automatic or manual Select automatic to automatically deactivate the hot standby circuit and return to the primary circuit The schedule standby failback time parameter for this circuit determines the failback delay Select manual to manually deactivate the hot standby circuit For example to rely on operator intervention to determine whether the active circuit becomes the primary again enter schedule to boston weekday 1000 2100 schedule standby failback mode manual If the standby failback mode parameter is set to none you can control how long the router waits before it deactivates the hot standby circuit and returns to a recovered primary circuit 308621 14 00 Rev 00 12 43 Configuring Dial Services To configure the delay back to the primary circuit navigate to the schedule prompt and enter schedule standby failback time lt integer gt integer is a number from 0 to 1439 minutes The default is 0 For example to delay the return to the primary circuit for an hour enter schedule to boston weekday 1000 2100 schedule standby failback time 60 Using Site Manager To configure a standby circuit s schedule Site Manager Procedure You do t
120. router then uses all the available lines in the bundle to send data across the network The router on the other side of the connection is the non monitor router The non monitor router cannot activate additional dial up lines If you configure BAP for ISDN connections the non monitor router has a more active role in determining how additional lines are activated for more bandwidth For more information about BAP see Chapter 8 Bandwidth on Demand Implementation Notes 1 24 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Dial Services Overview Activating Dial Up Lines to Relieve Congestion If one dial up line from the bandwidth pool does not relieve the congestion the router adds up to 29 lines until the congestion is relieved The router activates additional lines only for a congested line not for a failed line PPP multilink detects a state of congestion based on byte counts and the user defined monitor parameters For routers running BayRS Version 12 10 or later byte counts are measured after data compression The monitor parameters let you define congestion thresholds for the leased or demand circuit If data traffic exceeds a threshold the router tries to activate a dial up line At this point if you configure BAP it manages the addition and removal of lines from the multilink bundle based on the monitor parameters For more details about BAP see Chapter 8 Bandwidth on Demand Implementation Notes After the volume of traffic on the
121. schedule 308621 14 00 Rev 00 B 27 Configuring Dial Services Configuring Dial Backup Using Site Manager The configuration in Figure B 5 on page B 25 shows dial backup service for a PPP primary line To create the dial backup configuration using Site Manager configure routers 1 and 2 according to the instructions in the following sections Leased Interface Configuration on page B 28 Backup Pool Configuration on page B 29 Backup Circuit Configuration on page B 30 Outgoing Phone List Configuration on page B 31 Caller Resolution Table Configuration on page B 31 Leased Interface Configuration To create the dial backup configuration shown in Figure B 5 on page B 24 first configure the leased interface that will use dial backup service Configure router 1 with a leased synchronous interface named S11 as follows Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window select a COM port The Add Circuit window opens 2 Inthe Circuit Name field enter S11 and The WAN Protocols menu opens click on OK 3 Choose PPP or Standard The Select Protocols menu opens 4 Choose IP and click on OK The IP Configuration window opens 5 Set the IP Address parameter to You return to the Configuration Manager 129 122 3 1 and click on OK window B 28 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Configuration Examples Configure router 2 with a leased sync
122. so it can identify itself to router 4 ppp to router4 Chap name bin chap secret west Set the connection mode for router 7 to collision slave to ensure that if both sides of the connection try to activate the circuit router 7 will allow router 4 to initiate the call ppp to router4 connection mode collision slave ppp to router4 back Specify the outgoing phone number This is the phone number for router 4 ppp to router4 out phone number 4362323 out phone number to router4 4362323 back Create a caller resolution entry so router 7 can identify router 4 and ensure that router 4 is an authorized caller ppp to router4 Caller resolution remote4 caller resolution remote 7 secret west 308621 14 00 Rev 00 B 5 Configuring Dial Services Configuring Dial on Demand Using Site Manager Routers 4 and 7 are BLNs with at least one synchronous link module installed To create the dial on demand configuration in Figure B 1 on page B 2 configure routers 4 and 7 according to the instructions in each of the following sections Demand Pool Configuration on page B 6 Demand Circuit Configuration on page B 7 Outgoing Phone List Configuration on page B 8 Caller Resolution Table Configuration on page B 9 Demand Pool Configuration To configure a demand pool for routers 4 and 7 complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window cho
123. start time lt time_of_day gt end time lt time_of_day gt day can be a specific day of the week weekday or weekend time_of_day is the time specified using the 24 hour clock 0 to 2400 For example backup circuit 8 1 schedule days weekday start time 1000 end time 2100 308621 14 00 Rev 00 13 19 Configuring Dial Services To set the inactivity timer enter inactivity timer lt state gt state is enabled or disabled For example schedule backup 8 1 weekday 1000 2100 inactivity timer enabled To set the availability mode enter availability mode lt mode gt mode can be available The circuit is available between the start time and end time not available The circuit is available during all hours outside the start time and end time interval defined by all schedules there can be more than one schedule that defines a start time and end time interval For example schedule backup 8 1 weekday 1000 2100 availability mode outside interval Using Site Manager To specify a schedule for the backup circuit Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window The Dialup menu opens choose Dialup 2 Choose Backup Circuits The Backup Circuits menu opens 3 Choose PPP or Frame Relay The Primary Circuit Definition window or the FR Primary Interface Definition window opens 4 Click on Schedule The first Circuit Time of Day Schedule window opens
124. that the client is an authorized caller by matching the client s phone number with a phone number and circuit number in the incoming phone list If the server finds a matching entry it refuses the call By refusing the call the server eliminates any phone charges for the client The server then returns the call using the phone number in the original call s setup message 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 4 5 1 53 A 44 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Site Manager Parameters Callback Server Delay Time sec Dialup gt Demand Circuits gt Demand Pools gt PPP Circuits gt PPP Demand Circuits 0 0 to 1800 seconds Specifies the amount of time the server waits before calling back the client Delaying the call allows time for the client s modem to disconnect or for its ISDN connection to stop retrying the original call This parameter is available only if the Callback Mode parameter is set to one of the server options Enter the amount of time you want the server to wait before calling the client back If you are using a modem enter a value greater than 6 seconds 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 4 5 1 54 Callback Client Delay Time sec Dialup gt Demand Circuits gt Demand Pools gt PPP Circuits gt PPP Demand Circuits 5 seconds 0 to 1800 seconds Specifies the amount of t
125. the Role of the Router in the Network 0 0 2 ccccesecceceeeeeeceeeeneeeceeeeeneeeeeeeeneees 8 8 Balancing Traffic Between Lines in a Multilink Bundle c ceecceeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 8 8 External Clock Speed Effects on Congestion Thresholds eek sbeegeerais ERT aina 8 9 Testing the Bandwidth on Demand Connection sssessssessesessinssirsssrnesrrnesrneesnnennnnenn ene 8 9 Chapter 9 Customizing Line Pools Changing POODE crci enri a a Ea SEA 9 2 Bree Cat POl a a y rere gerne tery et reer heer reer tT 9 2 Modifying PPP Dial Interfaces in a Pool onia E PE EA ae mi ened Seting a Time Limit for COnvergenGE sicions cieune cienu raaraa paii ein 9 4 Specifying the Asynchronous Modem Control Character Map csceeeeeeeeeeeee 9 5 Setting the Maximum Receive Unit MRU sses eeu a T 11 9 6 Disabling MRU Complhanes srarismsaniiiiei ei a E Naa T x 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Chapter 10 Customizing Modem Lines Modifying the WAN Interlace Type sncciccsccncesecccconctesccccsneeaccttaueercetcommicconemmetsenmiccnnenmey 10 2 Modifying the Line Media Type and Cable Type ssssssessseesseesssesssessserssrrsssrrssrrnssrnsesrnens 10 3 Modifying the Line Priority er eter rie ere ere ere arin ere meted o Modifying External Modem Canigo E T E P male P A E I E 10 7 Using Modem Factory Defaults cis scseisciss ssttonsisssutsdeliesccuniinanhtiehied srcutecohuon eat 10 7 Specifying a Modem Initialization
126. the backup mode Using the BCC You must specify the backup mode when you initially configure a backup circuit To change the backup mode delete the backup circuit and re create it with a different mode For instructions see Configuring PPP Backup Circuits on page 3 19 13 10 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Customizing Backup Circuits Using Site Manager To edit the backup mode complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window The Dialup menu opens choose Dialup 2 Choose Backup Circuits The Backup Circuits menu opens 3 Choose PPP The Primary Circuit Definition window opens 4 Select the Backup Mode parameter Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 70 5 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window Modifying PPP Authentication Information To configure PPP authentication you can use CHAP or PAP You configured CHAP authentication the default authentication protocol in Chapter 2 Starting Dial Services Using Site Manager or Chapter 3 Starting Dial Services Using the BCC For more information about CHAP and PAP see Chapter 5 Implementation Notes for All Dial Services Using the BCC Changing the Authentication Protocol CHAP is the default authentication protocol To change the authentication protocol that the router uses navigate to the dial prompt an
127. the phone number in the call setup message is not sufficient to place an outgoing call for example you have to dial 9 to get an outside line do not select a Call ID mode For more information about callback see Chapter 6 Dial on Demand Implementation Notes Modifying the Callback Mode Parameter If you modify the Callback Mode parameter be aware of the following The server or client delay time resets If you change from a server mode to a client mode or from a client mode to a server mode the associated callback delay time resets to its default value For example if you change the callback mode from server to client and the callback server delay Time was set to 5 seconds this time resets to the default value of 0 Conversely if you change the callback mode from client one charge to server one charge the callback client delay time resets to its default value of 5 seconds 308621 14 00 Rev 00 12 31 Configuring Dial Services e Site Manager prompts you to enable incoming call filtering If you select server one charge or server one charge call ID Site Manager prompts you to enable the Incoming Filter parameter For these two callback modes the router uses incoming call filtering to verify that the client is an authorized caller If you later change these modes to any other callback mode Site Manager prompts you to disable incoming call filtering e Site Manager requests caller resolution table information
128. the primary circuit router A is not limited to calling router B Router A dials the next phone number in its outgoing phone list router C s phone number and makes a connection For router A to dial router C configure the routers as shown in Table 7 1 Table 7 1 Configuration Requirements for Routers A and C Router A Router C Configure an unnumbered PPP primary Configure a demand pool with unnumbered circuit demand circuits Configure routing protocols for the Configure routing protocols on the demand primary circuit circuit to match router A s routing protocol configuration for the primary circuit N A Set the Connection Mode parameter to No Dial Configure CHAP Local Name CHAP Configure the caller resolution table to include Secret or PAP Local ID PAP Password router A s CHAP Name CHAP Secret or PAP for the primary circuit ID PAP Password Simplifying Unnumbered Configurations with Demand Circuit Groups You can simplify configurations for large networks by using a demand circuit group and dial backup service A demand circuit group is a set of demand circuits that share the same user defined unnumbered protocol configuration An unnumbered protocol configuration does not restrict the router to a specific destination address Instead it enables the router to use any circuit in the group for an incoming call eliminating the need to configure a unique demand circuit for each remote router in the network
129. this interface show dial demand schedules State of the line driver up down init wait dsr wait holdown remote loop lineloopbofltest not present enabled but not yet started The Not Present state occurs for several reasons For example the modem module may not be physically present in the chassis the software may be booting and has not yet initialized the driver software the slot may be running diagnostics or there may be a problem with the configuration Number of errors for a specific circuit Maximum transmission unit which is the largest frame the router transmits or receives across this interface The show modem all command lists detailed configuration and statistical information about the modem interface You can use the following filter flag and filter argument for this command slot lt s o amp shows information for a specified router slot The output contains the following information Slot Connector Admin State Operational State The slot and connector number where the modem module resides State of the line State of the line driver up down init wait dsr wait holdown remote loop lineloopbofltest not present not present enabled but not yet started The Not Present state occurs for several reasons For example the modem module may not be physically present in the chassis the software may be booting and has not yet initialized the driver software the slot may be running diagnost
130. time enter demand circuit to phoenix max uptime termination enabled The uptime termination reset parameter determines the amount of time the router waits before making the demand circuit available again after an uptime termination The circuit is not established at this point but the next time the router receives data the circuit will be available and the router can activate it The router invokes this timer only when you set the maxtime uptime termination parameter To specify when the demand circuit is reset after termination navigate to the demand circuit prompt and enter uptime termination reset lt nteger gt integer is a number from 1 to 999 999 minutes The default is 60 minutes For example to reset the circuit after 30 minutes enter demand circuit to phoenix uptime termination reset 30 12 20 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Using Site Manager To set the duration of a demand circuit Customizing Demand Circuits Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window choose Dialup The Dialup menu opens Choose Demand Circuits The Demand Pools window opens Click on PPP Circuits or FR Circuits The PPP Demand Circuits window or the FR Demand Circuits window opens 4 Select the circuit that you want to modify 5 Set the following parameters Maximum Up Time Minimum Call Duration Max UpTime Termination UpTime Term Re
131. to Normal Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 67 For frame relay change the Interface Type parameter to Normal Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 72 The Circuit Options window or the FR Interface window opens Site Manager asks you to confirm the change and then removes the backup circuit and treats the leased circuit as a regular circuit Click on OK You return to the Circuit Options or the FR Interface window Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window 308621 14 00 Rev 00 13 23 Chapter 14 Customizing Bandwidth on Demand Circuits This chapter includes the following information Topic Page Customizing Bandwidth on Demand Service 14 2 Changing the Authentication Protocol 14 Monitoring Congestion on the Bandwidth or Demand Circuit 14 3 Enabling BAP for Bandwidth on Demand Service 14 8 Removing Bandwidth on Demand Service 14 To enable bandwidth on demand service you can do the following e Designate a single leased circuit or leased multilink circuit as a bandwidth on demand circuit e Associate a dial on demand circuit with a bandwidth on demand pool If any of these circuits becomes congested the router provides up to 29 additional dial up circuits to relieve congestion for a total of 30 circuits You should have already set up a bandwidth on demand pool and circuit in
132. to deactivate the circuit at the end time set the Availability Mode to not available inactivity timer BCC only If enabled this timer instructs the router to disconnect the call if there is no data activity Accept the default disabled if you want the router to establish the connection at the start time and remain active until the configured end time regardless of data activity and regardless of the setting of the Availability Mode parameter Only the network can bring down the connection availability mode Determines whether the router activates the circuit between the configured time interval specified with the circuit s schedule 12 38 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Customizing Demand Circuits Using the BCC The following examples show how to set the BCC schedule parameters for the demand circuit To configure the object schedule you must set the days start time and end time parameters To set these parameters navigate to the ppp or frame relay circuit prompt and enter schedule days lt day gt start time lt time_of_day gt end time lt time_of_day gt day can be a specific day of the week weekday or weekend time_of_day is the time specified using the 24 hour system 0 to 2400 For example to have an available circuit every day from 10 a m to 9 p m enter ppp to boston schedule days weekday start time 1000 end time 2100 To enable the inactivity timer enter inactivity timer enabled
133. to the Bandwidth On Demand Circuit Definition window 6 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window 14 8 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Customizing Bandwidth on Demand Circuits Removing Bandwidth on Demand Service To remove bandwidth on demand service Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window choose Dialup The Dialup menu opens Choose Bandwidth on Demand Circuits The Bandwidth On Demand Circuit Definition window opens 3 Click on Cet Type The Circuit Options window opens 4 Set the Circuit Type parameter to Normal then click on OK Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 78 You return to the Circuit Options window Click on OK Click on OK Site Manager asks you to confirm your change to a normal circuit You return to the Bandwidth On Demand Circuit Definition window Site Manager treats the dial up circuits as regular leased circuits Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window 308621 14 00 Rev 00 14 9 Chapter 15 Customizing Phone Lists The router uses phone lists for calls to and from remote routers If any of the lines in your pool are ISDN lines or modem lines using V 25bis or Hayes signaling you must set up phone lists If a line uses Raise DTR signaling the phone numbers are already stored in the modem so phone
134. you designate a leased circuit as a primary circuit If this circuit fails the router provides a backup circuit that adopts the configuration of the primary circuit B 40 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Configuration Examples Outgoing Phone List Configuration From the Primary Circuit Definition window configure the outgoing phone list for each router by completing the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 Inthe Primary Circuit Definition window select a circuit 2 Click on Phone Out The Outgoing Phone List window opens 3 Click on Add The Phone Number window opens 4 Set the Outgoing Phone Number parameter as follows Router 1 4363333 e Router 2 4364444 Do not use hyphens or other nonnumeric characters 5 Click on OK You return to the Outgoing Phone List window 6 Click on Done You return to the Primary Circuit Definition window 7 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window The ISDN Numbering Plan and ISDN Numbering Type parameters default to the correct values based on the switch type you configured Do not change these parameters unless you receive explicit instructions from your service provider Caller Resolution Table Configuration Router 1 the master router does not require a caller resolution table Router 1 initiates calls to router 2 it does not receive them therefore router 1 does not need to verify
135. 0 B 31 Configuring Dial Services To configure router 2 s caller resolution table complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window choose Dialup The Dialup menu opens 2 Choose Caller Resolution Table The Caller Resolution Table window opens 3 Click on Add The Caller Name and Secret Password window opens 4 For router 2 only set the Caller Name parameter to BLN 5 For router 2 only set the CHAP Secret parameter to West 6 Click on OK The Local Circuit List window opens which lists the demand circuit that you previously configured 7 Select the demand circuit from the list Site Manager sets this circuit as the local then click on OK circuit You return to the Caller Resolution Table window 8 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window B 32 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Dial Backup Configuration Examples over an ISDN Network Figure B 6 shows dial backup service over an ISDN network In this configuration the primary circuit is using PPP If the primary circuit uses Nortel Networks Standard or frame relay as the WAN protocol the procedure is the same as c onfiguring PPP Router 1 4 140 1 1 0 Router 2 ASN S131 S12 AN ISDN 1 2 ISDN 1 ISDN Local phone no 43
136. 10 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Starting Dial Services Using Site Manager Configuring PRI Lines PRI lines are available only on the ASN BCN and BLN hardware platforms using the following link modules Single or Dual Port Multichannel T1 Link Module BLN and BCN Dual Port Multichannel T1 Net Module ASN 120 ohm Single Port MCE1 II Link Module BLN and BCN 120 ohm Single or Dual Port MCE1 II Net Module ASN QMCT1 Link Module BLN and BCN To configure PRI lines complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window click on an MCT1 or MCE1 connector The Port Application window opens Set the Port Application Mode parameter to PRI and click on OK Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 18 You return to the Configuration Manager window Repeat steps 1 and 2 for each PRI line that you want in the pool The Clock Parameters window opens The clock parameters define the timing sources that apply to all connectors and DSO timeslots supported by the MCT1 and MCE1 link modules Click on OK The MCT1 or MCE1 Port Parameters window opens The port parameters apply to each of the 24 DSO channels for MCT1 ports or 31 DSO channels for MCE1 ports continued 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Configuring Dial Services Site Manager Procedure continued 5 You do this Click on OK
137. 11 6 Enabling Incoming Call Filtering 11 Modifying the Adaption Rate 11 9 Informing the Switch That Call Setup Is Complete 11 10 Configuring X 25 over a D Channel BRI Only i Modifying BRI Signaling over the D Channel 11 15 Modifying the X 25 Circuit for Service over the D Channel 11 19 Modifying BRI Leased Line Service Germany and Japan Only 11 20 Modifying the BRI T4 Timer 11 21 continued 308621 14 00 Rev 00 11 1 Configuring Dial Services Topic Page Modifying the Interframe Time Fill Pattern 1122 Deleting BRI and PRI from the Router 11 22 Deleting ISDN B Channels from a Pool 11 23 Modifying the MCT1 and MCE1 Port Configurations The default values for the port parameters work for most configurations however you can modify the physical interface of the MCT1 and MCE1 ports To modify the MCT1 and MCE configurations see Configuring WAN Line Services Modifying the BRI and PRI Modes of Operation You cannot modify the BRI or PRI port application mode You specify the mode of operation when you initially configure an ISDN interface To change the mode you must delete the interface and re create it with a different mode To delete these interfaces see Deleting BRI and PRI from the Router on page 11 22 To set the mode again see Creating Line Pools with ISDN Lines on page 2 8 Site Manager or Specifying the ISDN Switch Type on page 3 17 BCO Configuring Selective PRI Se
138. 2 19 Configuring Dial Services Specifying the Backup Mode The backup mode determines which router initiates a backup connection To specify the backup mode Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 Scroll down the Primary Circuit Definition window to the Backup Mode parameter Set the Backup Mode parameter Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 70 If the router is set to Master the peer must be set to Slave Keep the Primary Circuit Definition window open and go to the next section Specifying the Authentication Protocol Information 2 20 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Starting Dial Services Using Site Manager Specifying the Authentication Protocol Information For network security the master router must identify itself when it calls the remote router The authentication protocols CHAP and PAP enable the identification process CHAP is the default protocol All lines in a pool must use the same authentication protocol To specify the CHAP information for the router complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure 1 You do this Scroll down the Primary Circuit Definition window to the CHAP parameters System responds Set the CHAP Local Name and CHAP Secret parameters The CHAP Local Name must be unique but the CHAP Secret must be the same on both sides of the connection Click on Help or see the parameter descrip
139. 21 14 00 Rev 00 Starting Dial Services Using the BCC Dial on Demand Configuration Hierarchy Figure 3 1 shows the hierarchy of dial on demand objects and the relationship between objects The serial mcel and mct1 objects at the top of the hierarchy are leased interfaces for the hot standby object The bri mcel mctl modem and serial objects at the lower part of the hierarchy are the dial interfaces box stack isdn switch serial logical line 9 frame relay H service hot standby local phone number i BCC prompt bcc gt Hsia A l seria j l 7 7 7 caller resolution frame relay pvc out phone number demand pool DS0037A Figure 3 1 Dial on Demand Configuration Hierarchy 308621 14 00 Rev 00 3 7 Configuring Dial Services Dial Backup Configuration Hierarchy Figure 3 2 shows the hierarchy of dial backup objects This diagram shows the relationship of each object to other objects box stack logical line frame relay H service pae backup circuit out phone number schedule caller resolution BCC prompt bcc gt l l local phone number I l A l backup pool v N Related objects DS0036A Figure 3 2 Dial Backup Configuration Hierarchy 3 8 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Starting Dial Services Using the BCC Creating a Leased Interfa
140. 3 init string EO Using Site Manager To set the initialization string for the ARN Site Manager Procedure You do this 1 In the Configuration Manager window click on the COM connector whose configuration you want to change The connector name should have a D B or W next to it System responds The Edit Connector window opens Click on Edit Modem The V 34 Modem Interface Parameters window opens Set the Modem Config String parameter See the parameter description on page A 15 Click on OK You return to the Edit Connector window Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window 10 14 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Customizing Modem Lines Changing the Asynchronous Baud Rate When the wan type parameter is set to asynchronous the asynchronous baud rate determines the transmission speed between the modem and the serial interface When setting this parameter select a value that is greater than or equal to the speed of the modem The default is 115 200 b s To set the asynchronous baud rate using the BCC navigate to the modem prompt and enter async baud rate lt rate gt rate can be Rate in Bits Per Second b s 1200b 7200b 14400b 38k 76k 2400b 9600b 19200b 56k 96k 4800b 12000b 28800b 64k 115k For example modem 1 1 async baud rate 28800b To configure the asynchronous baud rate using Site Manager see Config
141. 5 1 57 A 40 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Site Manager Parameters Standby Circuit Parameters PPP Demand Circuits Only Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID The standby circuit parameters which define standby demand circuits are in the PPP Demand Circuits window Figure A 10 on page A 34 Standby Mode Dialup gt Demand Circuits gt Demand Pools gt PPP Circuits gt PPP Demand Circuits Demand Normal Demand Normal Standby Hot Standby Indicates whether this circuit operates as a demand circuit or a standby circuit Accept the default if you want this circuit to operate as a demand circuit Select Hot Standby if you want this circuit to back up a failed primary circuit Select Standby to act as a standby circuit for incoming calls 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 4 5 1 50 Standby Failback Mode Dialup gt Demand Circuits gt Demand Pools gt PPP Circuits gt PPP Demand Circuits None None Automatic Manual Controls the failback from the hot standby circuit to the primary circuit This option is available only if the Standby Mode parameter is Hot Standby Select one of the following options Automatic Automatically deactivates the hot standby circuit and sends data traffic back across the primary circuit when it recovers This option takes precedence over any Time of Day schedule Man
142. 6 12 IP RIP triggered updates 6 12 IPX RIP and SAP broadcast timers 6 12 overview 6 8 static routes 6 8 traffic filters 6 12 C Cable Type parameter A 7 call setup time ISDN 5 20 callback configuring 12 31 description 6 5 Callback Client Delay Time sec parameter A 45 Callback Demand Circuit Name parameter A 106 Callback Mode parameter A 43 Callback Server Delay Time sec parameter A 45 caller ID service incoming call filtering 5 16 Caller Name parameter caller resolution table A 107 demand circuit groups A 65 caller resolution table configuring BCC 3 24 configuring Site Manager 2 30 customizing 16 3 description 5 5 overview 16 2 Channel Bandwidth Type parameter A 103 CHAP Local Name parameter A 46 CHAP names 5 4 See also caller resolution table CHAP Secret parameter caller resolution table A 108 circuit A 47 demand circuit group A 66 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Circuit Name parameter A 39 Circuit Type parameter bandwidth on demand A 78 dial backup A 67 circuits See demand circuits backup circuits or bandwidth on demand circuits congestion threshold accuracy 8 9 Connection Mode parameter A 37 Connection Type parameter A 102 conventions text Xxvi convergence timer 9 4 customer support Xxx D D channel description 4 2 data compression bandwidth on demand 8 7 dial backup 7 2 dial on demand 6 13 data encryption for dial services 5 6 Days parameter A 56 D
143. 64444 Local phone no 4363333 Switch type NI1 Switch type Nii CHAP local name ASN CHAP local name AN CHAP secret ISDN CHAP secret ISDN DS0025A Figure B 6 Dial Backup over an ISDN Network This ISDN example assumes the following All BRI connections use a National ISDN 1 NIJ switch There is no incoming call filtering Sending complete IEs are not used for call setup The adaption rate is 64 Kb s CHAP is the PPP authentication protocol IP is the only LAN protocol configured The Ethernet segments shown in the network illustration are not configured Only one phone number and SPID are used BRI lines usually have two phone numbers and SPIDs 308621 14 00 Rev 00 B 33 Configuring Dial Services You can configure the routers for this network using the BCC or Site Manager For instructions go to one of the following sections e Configuring Dial Backup Using the BCC on page B 34 e Configuring Dial Backup Using Site Manager on page B 37 Configuring Dial Backup Using the BCC To create the dial backup over ISDN network configuration in Figure B 6 on page B 33 configure routers 1 and 2 as follows Configuration of Router 1 1 Enter configuration mode bec gt config 2 Configure a leased serial interface with PPP on serial interface slot 1 module 3 connector 1 stack serial 1 3 1 serial 1 3 1 ppp ppp 1 3 1 4 ip 140 1 1 1 255 255 255 0 ip 140 1 1 1 255 255 255 0 stack 3 Configure a BRI object fo
144. 9 The connection remains active unless the network deactivates the connection If the connection is deactivated the router redials the same number when the next packet is ready for transmission You can also manually force the router to establish a connection if a line is available 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 4 5 1 15 Retry Max Dialup gt Demand Circuits gt Demand Pools gt PPP or FR Circuits gt PPP or FR Demand Circuits 2 1 to 10 Specifies the number of attempts that the router makes to establish the circuit The router tries all of the phone numbers in the outgoing phone list for a given line If no connection is made and there is still data to send the router increments the retry count then retries these numbers on the next line in the pool Enter the number of times you want the router to try to establish the circuit 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 4 5 1 25 A 36 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Site Manager Parameters Retry Delay Dialup gt Demand Circuits gt Demand Pools gt PPP or FR Circuits gt PPP or FR Demand Circuits 3 seconds 1 to 60 seconds Determines how long the router waits between each retry attempt before trying to reestablish the circuit Enter the amount of time that you want the router to wait before trying the next line in the pool The
145. AP ID 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 2 3 1 2 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Configuring Dial Services Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID CHAP Secret Dialup gt Demand Circuit Groups gt Demand Circuit Groups gt Add Group gt Enter a Demand Pool gt OK gt Caller Resolution Info Unsecured Any text string maximum 20 characters Specifies the CHAP secret you assign to this interface The CHAP secret is for identification and security purposes and must be the same on both sides of the connection When one router places a call to another router the authentication process takes place During this phase the routers exchange challenge packets that include the CHAP secret Both routers on a link must have the same CHAP secret to correctly calculate responses to the challenges If you configure CHAP as the authentication protocol specify the CHAP secret If not ignore this parameter 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 2 3 1 4 PAP Password Dialup gt Demand Circuit Groups gt Demand Circuit Groups gt Add Group gt Enter a Demand Pool gt OK gt Caller Resolution Info None Any text string maximum 25 characters Specifies the PAP password you assign to this interface The PAP password is for identification and security purposes and must be the same on both sides of the connection During the authentication pha
146. B 10 configure router 2 as follows 1 Start the BCC and enter configuration mode bec gt config Create a dial object for BRI interface slot 1 module 2 connector 2 PPP is the data link protocol stack bri 1 2 2 mode 2b d bri 1 2 2 channel channel 1 2 2 dial dial bri 1 2 2 back Specify a local phone number and SPID for the BRI interface channel 1 2 2 local phone number 8005559876 local phone number 1 2 2 8005559876 Spid 9876 local phone number 1 2 2 8005559876 stack Modify the ISDN switch type from the default to BRI NII stack isdn switch 1 isdn switch 1 switch type brini1 isdn switch 1 stack Create a demand pool with ID 3 then create a demand line on the BRI interface you just created in step 2 Add this line to the demand pool stack demand pool 3 demand pool 3 demand line bri 1 2 2 demand line 3 bri 1 2 2 back 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Configuration Examples Configure a demand circuit with a unique name that uses frame relay with a service record containing one PVC Configure IP for that PVC demand pool 3 demand circuit to router1 demand circuit to routerl frame relay frame relay to routerl service service to r1 service service to r1 pve 400 pvc to router1 400 back service service to r1l ip 192 100 100 1 255 255 255 0 ip 192 100 100 1 255 255 255 0 back3 This circuit will use the demand line in demand pool 3 For this service to work properly you also need to configure th
147. BLN CHAP local name ASN CHAP secret ISDN CHAP secret ISDN DS0024A Figure B 3 Dial on Demand for an ISDN Network B 14 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Configuration of Routers 1 and 2 Configuration Examples To create the dial on demand configuration in Figure B 3 on page B 14 configure routers 1 and 2 according to the instructions in the following sections Port Application Mode Configuration Port Application Mode Configuration on page B 15 Demand Pool Configuration on page B 16 Demand Circuit Configuration on page B 17 Outgoing Phone List Configuration on page B 18 Protocol Configuration on page B 19 Caller Resolution Table Configuration on page B 19 Local Phone Number Configuration on page B 20 Begin by setting the Port Application Mode parameter for interfaces on routers 1 and 2 These interfaces will become part of the demand pool Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 Router 1 In the Configuration Manager window choose the MCT1 2 connector on the MCT1 link module Router 2 In the Configuration Manager window choose the ISDN1 connector on the ISDN BRI net module The Port Application window opens Set the Port Application Mode as follows then click on OK Router 1 PRI Router 2 Dialup 2B D default For router 1 the PRI interface the Clock Parameters window opens For router 1 only set the Primary Clock parameter to Port 2 Ext Loop then
148. BayRS Version 14 00 Part No 308621 14 00 Rev 00 September 1999 4401 Great America Parkway Santa Clara CA 95054 Configuring Dial Services NORTEL NETWORKS Copyright 1999 Nortel Networks All rights reserved Printed in the USA September 1999 The information in this document is subject to change without notice The statements configurations technical data and recommendations in this document are believed to be accurate and reliable but are presented without express or implied warranty Users must take full responsibility for their applications of any products specified in this document The information in this document is proprietary to Nortel Networks NA Inc The software described in this document is furnished under a license agreement and may only be used in accordance with the terms of that license A summary of the Software License is included in this document Trademarks NORTEL NETWORKS is a trademark of Nortel Networks Bay Networks ACE AFN AN BCN BLN BN CN FRE LN Optivity and PPX are registered trademarks and Advanced Remote Node ANH ARN ASN BayRS BaySecure BayStack BCC Centillion Passport SPEX and System 5000 are trademarks of Nortel Networks Microsoft MS MS DOS Win32 Windows and Windows NT are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation All other trademarks and registered trademarks are the property of their respective owners Restricted Rights Legend Use duplication or disc
149. C or Site Manager Disabling this feature globally disables the feature on a per slot basis Using the BCC To disable X 25 over the D channel globally navigate to the isdn switch prompt and enter x25 over isdn disabled For example isdn switch 2 X25 over isdn disabled 11 14 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Customizing ISDN Lines Using Site Manager When you configure X 25 over the D channel Site Manager automatically enables the Global X 25 over ISDN D Channel parameter in the ISDN Configured Switches window If you disable this parameter it disables the feature on a per slot basis For routers with only one slot disabling this parameter removes the feature from the router altogether To disable X 25 over the D channel Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window The Dialup menu opens choose Dialup 2 Choose Edit Switch Parameters The ISDN Configured Switches window opens 3 Set the Global X 25 over ISDN D Channel parameter to Disable Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 23 4 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window Modifying BRI Signaling over the D Channel In most cases the defaults for BRI signaling will work for your network however you can modify the parameters Note Nortel Networks recommends that you use the default BRI signaling configuration unless you are instructed otherwis
150. CC This chapter explains how to modify existing entries in the table and how to add new ones Before you set up your caller resolution table you should have completed your dial on demand dial backup or bandwidth on demand configurations Using the BCC This section assumes that you have already created one caller resolution table as described in Chapter 3 Starting Dial Services Using the BCC For each additional entry you must create an independent caller resolution entry which must include a caller name 308621 14 00 Rev 00 16 3 Configuring Dial Services To add a caller resolution entry navigate to the PPP demand circuit prompt or the backup circuit prompt and enter caller resolution caller name lt name_siring gt name_string is any text string up to 20 characters This name is part of the incoming call and informs the local router of the remote router s identity For example to configure a caller resolution entry for a backup circuit enter backup circuit 8 5 1 Caller resolution caller name bincorp You cannot modify an existing caller name for a caller resolution table entry You must delete the entry and create a new one with a new caller name After you configure a caller resolution table entry you can specify either the CHAP secret or the PAP password depending on the authentication protocol used for the dial circuit Configuring the CHAP Secret If you enter a CHAP name for the caller name
151. Chapter 2 Starting Dial Services Using Site Manager 308621 14 00 Rev 00 14 1 Configuring Dial Services Table 14 1 lists the terminology that Site Manager and this guide use to describe circuits in a bandwidth on demand configuration Table 14 1 Terminology for Bandwidth on Demand Service Type of Circuit Referred to As Leased circuit Leased multilink circuit Dial on demand circuit Demand circuit Bandwidth circuit You designate a leased circuit as a bandwidth circuit to enable bandwidth on demand service This is a demand circuit for which you can provide bandwidth on demand service You do not designate this as a bandwidth circuit Dial up circuit that helps the congested leased circuit Dial up or secondary circuit Customizing Bandwidth on Demand Service After bandwidth on demand service is set up Site Manager adds three new buttons to the Bandwidth On Demand Circuit Definition window Apply Phone Out and Options You can use these buttons to modify the parameter defaults To modify the configuration Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window choose Dialup The Dialup menu opens 2 Choose Bandwidth on Demand Circuits The Bandwidth On Demand Circuit Definition window opens 3 Select an existing circuit or add a new circuit and then enter new values for the parameters according to
152. Circuits menu opens 3 Choose Frame Relay The FR Primary Interface Definition window opens continued 13 16 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Customizing Backup Circuits Site Manager Procedure continued You do this System responds 4 Set the Use Backup Interface Filters parameter Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 75 5 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window Specifying the Redial Count Using the BCC you can specify the number of times that the router redials the phone number to activate the backup circuit To configure the number of redials navigate to the backup circuit prompt and enter redial count lt nteger gt integer is a value from 1 to 10 The default is 3 For example backup circuit 10 5 1 redial count 5 Specifying the Time Between Calls Using the BCC you can specify the amount of time in seconds that the router waits between call retries To configure the time between calls navigate to the backup circuit prompt and enter redial delay lt integer gt integer is a value from 1 to 60 The default is 3 For example backup circuit 10 5 1 redial delay 30 308621 14 00 Rev 00 13 17 Configuring Dial Services Choosing the Severity Level for Error Messages Using the BCC you can specify the severity level of debug messages that the router collects in the event log regarding backup circuit activity To
153. Configuration Manager window choose Dialup The Dialup menu opens 2 Choose Bandwidth On Demand Circuits The Bandwidth On Demand Circuit Definition window opens which lists the leased circuits that you previously configured 3 Select a leased circuit and click on Cet Type The Circuit Options window opens 4 Set the Circuit Type parameter to see the parameter description on page A 78 Bandwidth on Demand Click on Help or continued 2 22 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Starting Dial Services Using Site Manager Site Manager Procedure continued You do this System responds 5 Set the Bandwidth On Demand Pool ID parameter to the ID of the bandwidth pool that you want this circuit to use Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 78 6 Keep the Circuit Options window open and go to the next section Specifying the Bandwidth Mode Specifying the Bandwidth Mode The bandwidth mode determines whether the router serves as the congestion monitor The level of congestion instructs the router when to provide additional circuits to carry data across the network Note Ensure that the external clock speed of each synchronous line is set properly so that the router can calculate the congestion levels accurately This does not apply for ISDN lines To configure the bandwidth mode Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1
154. Cs may be different for each call but they direct data to the same destination The router initially learns the PVCs when it calls the frame relay switch If the UNI is static the user has defined the PVCs and can configure them for the router The UNI remains the same for all calls For a frame relay demand configuration to work well follow these guidelines e You must have a PVC configured before you place a call For data to activate a demand circuit instead of using Force Dial the router must learn at least one PVC from the frame relay switch before it can place a call However to learn the PVCs the router must call the switch which it cannot do For a dynamic UNI you need to statically configure at least one PVC on the router that is not configured for the switch The static PVC acts as a fake PVC that the router uses only to place an initial call to the switch To configure a static PVC you set the frame relay data link connection identifier DLCI to a number other than the number the switch provider assigns assuming you know the range of possible DLCIs The static PVC is still valid if you happen to use a number that the switch provider uses For information about configuring PVCs see Configuring Frame Relay Services For a static UNI the user configures the PVCs A fake PVC is unnecessary e Fora dynamic UNI use the default frame relay service record This service record holds all PVCs that the router learns d
155. Deleting Modem Lines from a Pool 10 20 308621 14 00 Rev 00 10 1 Configuring Dial Services Modifying the WAN Interface Type You can determine whether this interface uses synchronous or asynchronous communication by defining the serial interface type The default is synchronous To use asynchronous PPP connections you must change the WAN interface type to asynchronous You can configure asynchronous interfaces on the AN ASN and ANH using the Dual Sync Net Module ARN using any serial expansion module and BLN and BCN using the Octal Sync Link Module For more information see Chapter 5 Implementation Notes for All Dial Services You already set the WAN interface type in Chapter 2 Starting Dial Services Using Site Manager or Chapter 3 Starting Dial Services Using the BCC To modify it go to one of the following two sections Using the BCC The wan type parameter sets the serial interface type To set this parameter navigate to the serial interface prompt and enter wan type lt type gt type can be synchronous This is the default Choose this option for synchronous connections asynchronous Choose this option if you are using asynchronous PPP across the backup lines Otherwise accept the default synchronous polled asynchronous Not applicable for dial services For example to change the default wan type and create an asynchronous interface on slot 5 connector 2 enter se
156. Dial Sync Site Manager Dial BCC or Dial Async The router then has two lines to dial the call You can duplicate the same phone number for a circuit using Site Manager Using the BCC To specify the phone number type navigate to the out phone number prompt and enter phone number type lt type gt type can be any of the values in Table 15 1 Table 15 1 Phone Number Type Options Type Function dial For a router using V 25bis signaling This is the default value dialasync For a router using Hayes signaling isdn For a router that establishes the connection over an ISDN line You must ensure that the router supplies values for the isdn number type and isdn number plan parameters See the next section For example to specify that the phone number 9786665432 is for an ISDN connection enter out phone number backup 8 1 9786665432 phone number type isdn 308621 14 00 Rev 00 15 7 Configuring Dial Services Specifying the ISDN Number Type and Plan The isdn number type parameter indicates the standard that the phone number follows The router passes this information to the ISDN switch Accept the default value unknown unless your service provider explicitly instructs you to use another value The isdn number plan parameter indicates the standard that the phone number plan follows The router passes this information to the ISDN switch If you set the switch type parameter to brintt brikdd or bri
157. Edit Modem The Sync Modem or Async Modem Interface window opens 3 Set the Modem Command String parameter Note that Raise DTR and V 25bis signaling do not require a modem command string Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 12 4 Click on OK You return to the Edit Connector window 5 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window Changing the Asynchronous Baud Rate The asynchronous baud rate sets the transmission speed between the modem and the serial interface When setting this parameter select a value that is greater than or equal to the speed of the modem The default is 115 200 b s Using the BCC Set the asynchronous baud rate only when the wan type parameter is set to asynchronous To set the asynchronous baud rate navigate to the serial prompt and enter async baud rate lt rate gt rate can be Rate in Bits Per Second b s 1200b 7200b 14400b 38k 76k 2400b 9600b 19200b 56k 96k 4800b 12000b 28800b 64k 115k For example serial 1 1 async baud rate 28800b 308621 14 00 Rev 00 10 11 Configuring Dial Services Using Site Manager See Configuring WAN Line Services to configure this parameter using Site Manager Modifying How the Modem Connects to the Network Using Site Manager you can change how the modem connects to the network for example how many times it attempts to call and how frequently it retries th
158. HSSI SYNC relay switch a Frame Frame relay relay switch switch Raise DTR V 25bis Figure 1 4 Leased line Dial up line DS0033A Dial on Demand Connection over a Frame Relay Network In Figure 1 4 remote routers A B and C are connecting to the central router D through a frame relay network dialing into the network across ISDN lines Router D connects to the network across a leased line The permanent virtual circuits PVCs in this network can be either fully meshed or non fully meshed allowing routers A B C and D to connect to one another With the dial connection between the routers and the frame relay network each router can dial into the network and communicate with another router provided that the PVCs are set up properly and that the physical and logical connections are active Frame relay demand circuits cannot answer incoming calls They can only dial into a frame relay network that is they can place outbound calls 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Dial Services Overview Configuring Frame Relay to Work Optimally with Dial on Demand How frame relay demand circuits operate depends on how your frame relay service provider defines the user to network interface UNI the point between the router and the service provider site The service provider defines the UNI dynamically or statically If the UNI is dynamic it changes for each call This means that the PV
159. ITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE Licensee is responsible 308621 14 00 Rev 00 iii for the security of its own data and information and for maintaining adequate procedures apart from the Software to reconstruct lost or altered files data or programs 4 Limitation of liability INNO EVENT WILL NORTEL NETWORKS OR ITS LICENSORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY COST OF SUBSTITUTE PROCUREMENT SPECIAL INDIRECT INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES RESULTING FROM INACCURATE OR LOST DATA OR LOSS OF USE OR PROFITS ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE PERFORMANCE OF THE SOFTWARE EVEN IF NORTEL NETWORKS HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES IN NO EVENT SHALL THE LIABILITY OF NORTEL NETWORKS RELATING TO THE SOFTWARE OR THIS AGREEMENT EXCEED THE PRICE PAID TO NORTEL NETWORKS FOR THE SOFTWARE LICENSE 5 Government Licensees This provision applies to all Software and documentation acquired directly or indirectly by or on behalf of the United States Government The Software and documentation are commercial products licensed on the open market at market prices and were developed entirely at private expense and without the use of any U S Government funds The license to the U S Government is granted only with restricted rights and use duplication or disclosure by the U S Government is subject to the restrictions set forth in subparagraph c 1 of the Commercial Computer Software Restricted Rights clause of FAR 52 227 19 an
160. LL RS232 RS422 v35 X21 Function Indicates the physical interface type supported by the attached dial device This parameter is for synchronous interfaces only Instructions Select the option that corresponds to the interface type supported by the attached dial device MIB Object ID 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 5 1 83 308621 14 00 Rev 00 A 7 Configuring Dial Services Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Priority Dialup gt Demand Backup Bandwidth on Demand Pools gt Pools gt Add gt Demand Backup Bandwidth on Demand Pool Configuration gt OK gt Lines Definition gt COM Connector gt Choose Wan Serial Interface Type gt OK gt Sync or Async Line Media Type 1 1 to 50 Prioritizes a group of lines in the same pool For example the router uses a line of priority 1 before it uses a line of priority 2 For dial backup and bandwidth on demand pools lines can reside across slots but when you set this parameter it affects only lines on the same slot For example if the backup pool has two lines in slot 3 and three lines in slot 4 the router sets a priority between the lines in slot 3 then sets a priority between the lines in slot 4 For bandwidth on demand the router prioritizes lines in the preferred slot then the reserved slot and finally the local slot Assign a number to each line in the pool The lower the number the higher the priority For pools that combine mode
161. Manager you can modify the X 25 service and packet parameters after you enable X 25 service over the D channel This feature is only for NET3 switch types in Germany and France To modify the X 25 circuit Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window click on the ISDN connector The Edit Connector window opens 2 Click on Edit Circuit 3 Choose X 25 Protocol The Circuit Definition window opens The X 25 Protocol menu opens 4 Choose Packet to modify the packet configuration or Service to modify the service configuration Click on Help or see Configuring X 25 Services for parameter descriptions 5 Click on OK 308621 14 00 Rev 00 11 19 Configuring Dial Services Modifying BRI Leased Line Service Germany and Japan Only If you selected one of the leased modes for BRI operation you can modify the BRI leased line configuration using the BCC There is a leased line configuration for each of the two B channels If you list the objects for the leased BRI interface the BCC displays either one leased line object for leased 128K or two leased line objects for example bri 1 1 Iso leased line 1 1 1 leased line 1 1 2 The following sections explain how to modify a BRI leased line Changing the Circuit Name To change the circuit name of the BRI leased line configuration navigate to the leased line prompt from the bri p
162. Max Retry Maximum number of call retries allowed for the interface Attempts 308621 14 00 Rev 00 C 23 Configuring Dial Services Modem Commands show modem alerts Table C 4 lists the modem show commands These commands apply only to the ARN Table C 4 Modem show Commands lt container gt lt keyword gt lt filter_flags gt lt filter_arguments gt alerts lt none gt slot lt circuit_name gt lt slot gt all lt none gt slot lt circuit_name gt lt slot gt errors lt none gt slot lt circuit_name gt lt slot gt sample lt none gt slot lt circuit_name gt period lt slot lt period_in_seconds gt stats lt none gt slot lt circuit_name gt lt slot gt The show modem alerts command lists the modem interfaces that are configured but not active You can use the following filter flag and filter argument for this command slot lt s o amp shows information for a specified router slot The output contains the following information Slot Conn Admin State HW Address The slot and the connector number where the modem module resides State of the line Physical address of the line The line driver provides this address from the address stored in the module number PROM for this connector continued C 24 308621 14 00 Rev 00 WAN Protocol Operational State Errors MTU show modem all BCC show Commands WAN protocol enabled on
163. Mode PVC 13 2 Creating Frame Relay Backup Circuits for Group Mode PVCs 13 5 Customizing PPP and Frame Relay Backup Circuits 13 10 Scheduling Backup Circuit Availability 13 18 Removing PPP or Frame Relay Backup Service 13 22 For a complete description of frame relay and PPP backup service see Chapter 1 Dial Services Overview 308621 14 00 Rev 00 13 1 Configuring Dial Services Table 13 1 lists the instructions you should use to configure backup circuits Table 13 1 Dial Backup Configurations Backup Circuit Refer to this section for Primary Circuit Protocol Protocol configuration instructions Standard PPP async or sync Creating PPP Dial Backup Circuits Ppp PPP async or sync on page 2 19 Site Manager Configuring PPP Backup Circuits on page 3 19 BCC Frame relay backing up PPP async or sync Creating a PPP Backup Circuit for a only one PVC Direct Mode PVC on page 13 2 circuit backup Frame relay backing up frame relay Creating Frame Relay Backup the entire interface Circuits for Group Mode PVCs on link backup page 13 5 Site Manager configurable only You cannot configure a bandwidth on demand circuit as a primary circuit Creating a PPP Backup Circuit for a Direct Mode PVC If your frame relay circuit is configured as a direct mode PVC that is there is only one PVC in the service record you must configure PPP for the backup
164. Modem Factory Defaults parameter Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 16 4 Click on OK You return to the Edit Connector window 5 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window 10 16 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Customizing Modem Lines Configuring a Modem for a Specific Country Using the BCC you can ensure that the modem works for the country it is operating in To do so navigate to the modem prompt and enter country code lt region gt region can be one of the following northamerica uk germany japan For example modem 2 1 country code northamerica Specifying the Phone Number to Dial You can instruct the modem which phone to dial Using the BCC To instruct the modem which phone number it should dial navigate to the modem prompt and enter phone number lt number gt number is the phone number that you want the modem to dial For example modem 2 1 phone number 4856745 308621 14 00 Rev 00 10 17 Configuring Dial Services Using Site Manager To set the phone number Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window click on the COM connector whose configuration you want to change The connector name should have a D B or W next to it The Edit Connector window opens 2 Click on Edit Modem The V 34 Modem Interface Parameters window opens 3 Set the Phone
165. N connections only Designates the router as the callback client Also indicates that there will be no charge for the initial call to the server Use this mode when the other end of the connection uses Server One Charge or Server Once Charge Call ID The client places a call to the server expecting the call to fail The server refuses the call which eliminates any phone charge for the client The client then waits for a return call from the server This option saves the client the cost of the initial call Server One Charge ISDN connections only Designates the router as the callback server Also indicates that only the server will be charged for the return call to the client The server receives a call from the client The server using incoming call filtering verifies that the client is an authorized caller by matching the client s phone number with a phone number and circuit number in the incoming phone list If the server finds a matching entry it refuses the call By refusing the call the server eliminates any phone charges for the client The server then returns the call using a phone number in its outgoing phone list for the matching circuit Server One Charge Call ID ISDN connections only Designates the router as the callback server using caller ID and indicates that only the server will be charged for the return call to the client The server receives a call from the client The server using incoming call filtering verifies
166. NECT RING NO CARRIER NO ANSWER CONNECT XXXX and ERROR X4 Report all call progress result codes and connection rate For example OK CONNECT RING NO CARRIER NO ANSWER CONNECT XXXX BUSY NO DIAL TONE and ERROR YO Disable long space disconnect before on hook Y1 Enable long space disconnect before on hook ZO Restore stored profile 0 after warm reset Zi Restore stored profile 1 after warm reset amp CO Force RLSD active regardless of the carrier state amp C1 Allow RLSD to follow the carrier state amp DO Interpret DTR ON to OFF transition per amp Qn amp Q0 amp Q5 amp Q6 The modem ignores DTR continued 308621 14 00 Rev 00 E 3 Configuring Dial Services Table E 1 Summary of AT Modem Initialization Commands continued Command Function amp Q1 amp Q4 The modem hangs up amp Q2 amp Q3 The modem hangs up amp D1 Interpret DTR ON to OFF transition per amp Qn amp Q0 amp Q1 amp Q4 Asynchronous escape amp Q5 amp Q6 amp Q2 amp Q3 The modem hangs up amp D2 Interpret DTR ON to OFF transition per amp Qn amp Q0 through amp Q6 The modem hangs up amp D3 Interpret DTR ON to OFF transition per amp Qn amp Q0 amp Q1 amp Q4 The modem performs soft reset amp Q5 amp Q6 amp Q2 amp Q3 The modem hangs up amp FO Restore factory configuration 0 amp F1 Restore factory configuration
167. OM Connector gt Edit Modem gt Edit V 34 Modem Interface Parameters Disabled Enabled Disabled Enables or disables configuration of the Modem Config String parameter To use only the factory default configuration leave this set to Disabled Set to Enabled to enter an AT command string in the Modem Config String field Not applicable Modem Config String COM Connector gt Edit Modem gt Edit V 34 Modem Interface Parameters None An ASCII text string of 3 to 34 characters Specifies a modem initialization string to be sent to the modem after the default factory configured command string Commands in this string take precedence over commands in the factory default string AT amp M2 amp Q2 amp D0 amp S1 amp ROSO 0M1L2T Enter an AT command string Refer to Appendix E for a list of AT commands Note that entering an invalid command string could disable the modem Site Manager can verify AT command string changes only when in dynamic mode 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 29 1 1 9 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Configuring Dial Services Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Modem Factory Defaults COM Connector gt Edit Modem gt Edit V 34 Modem Interface Parameters Enabled Enabled Disabled Specifies whether exclusive use o
168. P Configuration window opens 8 Set the IP Address parameter as follows e Router 4 150 1 1 2 e Router 7 150 1 1 1 Set the Subnet Mask parameter to 255 255 255 0 for both routers 10 11 Click on OK Set the CHAP Local Name parameter as follows e Router 4 BLN1 case sensitive e Router 7 BLN2 case sensitive You return to the PPP Demand Circuits window 12 Set the CHAP Secret parameter to East for both routers 13 Set the Connection Mode parameter as follows Router 4 Collision Master default Router 7 Collision Slave 14 Click on Apply Site Manager saves your changes 15 Keep the PPP Demand Circuits window open and go to the next section 308621 14 00 Rev 00 B 7 Configuring Dial Services Outgoing Phone List Configuration To configure the outgoing phone list on each router complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the PPP Demand Circuits window choose Phone Out The Outgoing Phone List window opens Click on Add The Phone Number window opens 3 Set the Outgoing Phone Number parameter as follows Router 4 4362323 Router 7 4368989 Do not use hyphens or other nonnumeric characters 4 Click on OK You return to the Outgoing Phone List window 5 Click on Done You return to the PPP Demand Circuits window 6 Click on Don
169. PPP performs this identification process using one of two authentication protocols CHAP or PAP CHAP is the default protocol Note If you are configuring RADIUS with a dial service the router uses vendor specific attributes for authentication In this case do not configure a caller resolution table To identify an incoming remote caller using CHAP you enter the caller name and CHAP secret of each remote caller in a caller resolution table and associate each name with a local demand primary or bandwidth circuit When a router receives an incoming call it checks the caller resolution table for an entry that identifies the caller If the caller is authorized the local router maps the caller to a logical circuit number and then activates that circuit To configure the caller resolution table Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window The Dialup menu opens choose Dialup 2 Choose Caller Resolution Table The Caller Resolution Table window opens 3 Click on Add The Caller Name and Secret Password window opens continued 2 30 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Starting Dial Services Using Site Manager Site Manager Procedure continued You do this System responds 4 Set the following parameters Caller Name CHAP Secret Click on Help or see the parameter descriptions beginning on page A 107 The Caller Name parameter identifies
170. Password Outbound Authentication Click on Help or see the parameter descriptions beginning on page A 46 6 Click on Apply then click on Done You return to the Demand Pools window 7 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window To change the authentication protocol from the default CHAP to PAP you need to access a PPP configuration window To select PAP you must open the PPP Interface List window select the line record for dial lines and specify PAP for the Local Authentication Protocol parameter For more information about PPP and configuring authentication protocols see Configuring PPP Services 12 18 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Customizing Demand Circuits Specifying the Duration of the Circuit You can specify how long the connection is active using the BCC or Site Manager Using the BCC Specifying the Maximum and Minimum Time the Circuit Is Active The max uptime parameter specifies the maximum duration of a call for a continuous period of time which ensures that the connection is not up longer than necessary For example configure the circuit s availability from 9 00 a m to 5 00 p m Then set this parameter to 60 minutes If the connection activates at 10 00 a m the router keeps the circuit active until 11 00 a m To specify the maximum amount of time that the circuit is active in minutes navigate to the demand circuit prompt and enter max uptime lt integer gt i
171. SDN capability eliminates the need for dial devices such as modems because you no longer need to convert digital signals to analog An ISDN network also allows you to send data voice and video over the same digital line e Raise DTR A signaling method that enables access to the network by preprogramming the destination phone numbers into the dial device modem or ISDN terminal adapter Raise DTR signaling works with the following interfaces X 21 V 35 RS 232 and RS 422 e V 25bis A signaling method that enables access to the network by passing the destination phone numbers from the router to the dial device modem or ISDN terminal adapter This method lets the dial device support connections to multiple destinations V 25bis signaling works with the following interfaces X 21 V 35 RS 232 and RS 422 e Hayes A signaling method that enables network access by passing the destination phone numbers from the router to the dial device modem or ISDN terminal adapter Using Hayes signaling the router sends an AT initialization command to interact with the dial device The ARN internal V 34 modem uses Hayes signaling 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Dial Services Overview The method you choose depends on your application network resources and the type of network to which you are connecting ISDN a complex networking technology is further explained in Chapter 4 Dial on Demand Service Dial on demand service enables you to establi
172. SDN Lines Modifying the BRI T4 Timer The BRI T4 timer indicates the amount of time that the router waits for the line to recover from a deactivated state This timer prevents brief minor disturbances on a noisy line from forcing the router to deactivate the circuit Instead the router waits to see whether the line recovers within the T4 timer period This enables the router to suppress minor line problems from the upper layer protocols To modify the T4 timer enter t4 timer lt integer gt integer is a value from 500 to 1000 milliseconds For example bri 1 1 t4 timer 600 If your line is noisy enter the maximum amount of time that the router should wait for the line to reactivate Customizing Conformance Testing The bchannel loopback parameter is for layer 1 ISDN BRI conformance testing It allows the external equipment to send data to the router over the B channels and loop it back out the S T or U interface ARN only The external equipment can verify its physical connection to the router To enable a test enter bchannel loopback enabled The default is disabled For example bri 1 12 bchannel loopback enabled Do not enable this parameter when the router is in normal operational mode 308621 14 00 Rev 00 11 17 Configuring Dial Services Modifying the BRI Line Configuration You can specify whether you have a point to point PTP or multipoint MTP configuration on the BRI line To specify the line co
173. Using the BCC You cannot modify an existing phone number You must delete the phone number you want to change and enter a new one To delete numbers from the outgoing phone list navigate to the out phone number prompt for the number you want to delete and enter delete For example to delete an outgoing phone number for a demand circuit enter out phone number to phoenix 8 1 5085556879 delete 15 10 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Using Site Manager To modify the outgoing phone list Customizing Phone Lists Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window choose Dialup The Dialup menu opens Choose Demand Backup or Bandwidth on Demand Circuits For backup and bandwidth circuits the appropriate Circuit Definition window opens For demand circuits the Demand Pools window opens Click on PPP Circuits or FR Circuits to open the appropriate Demand Circuits window 3 Select a circuit and click on Phone Out The Outgoing Phone List window opens Modify the phone number list using these guidelines Order of numbers The order in which you enter the phone numbers is the order in which the router dials the numbers To insert a number between two existing numbers select the number that the new number should follow then click on Add After Changing numbers If you want to change a phone number click in the field for the parameter you
174. You can assign the same bandwidth pool ID to more than one circuit If you want a pool of dial up lines dedicated to a specific bandwidth circuit assign the pool exclusively to that circuit Remember to first configure a leased or demand connection before configuring bandwidth on demand service 1 26 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Dial Services Overview Sample Bandwidth on Demand Application In Figure 1 11 the leased line is congested due to bridge routing protocol traffic The BLN in Rome designated as the monitor router has determined that the line is congested based on the monitor parameter values Consequently the router brings up an ISDN B channel as a secondary line a Rome Backbone 7 S Link Node Tall 7 E p Secondary dial up line SA Pa ISDN B channel Slot 3 pes N Avignon octal syne lt Access Node Leased line 9 6 Kb s AN dual sync dual Ethernet R 64 Kb s leased line to Florence 1 7 Dial up line 7 to Interlaken DS0001A Figure 1 11 Sample Bandwidth on Demand Network The monitor router brings down the secondary line when the level of congestion falls below the configured percentages In addition to supporting the leased line to Avignon the B channel can also act as a backup line for the leased line from Rome to Florence and
175. _id gt circuit lt circuit_name gt out phone numbers lt none gt pool lt pool id gt circuit lt circuit_name gt caller resolution lt none gt caller lt caller_name gt pap chap information lt none gt circuit lt circuit_name gt The show dial backup summary command displays general information about dial backup including backup pool IDs primary circuits and backup lines You can use the following filter flag and filter argument with this command pool lt pool_ia gt shows information for the specified backup pool The output contains the following information Dial services Pool ID Primary Circuits Backup lines The dial services that the summary describes The ID of the backup pool Primary circuits using the pool Lines in the pool 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Configuring Dial Services show dial backup pools The show dial backup pools command displays information about backup pools You can use the following filter flag and filter argument with this command pool lt pool_ia gt shows the line information for a specified backup pool The output contains the following information Dial Service Information Dial service Pool ID The dial service that the summary describes The ID of the line pool Primary Circuit Information Primary Circuit Name Primary Down Time Circuit name Number in minutes the router allows for the primary circuit to recover before the backup circuit
176. a remote router Do not confuse this parameter with the CHAP Local Name parameter which identifies the local router that is the router you are currently configuring 5 Click on OK The Local Circuit List window opens which lists the demand primary or bandwidth circuits that you have configured 6 Set the Local Circuit parameter by choosing from the list of circuits that Site Manager provides The router activates this circuit when it receives a call from the remote caller Click on Help or see the parameter descriptions beginning on page A 109 7 Click on OK You return to the Caller Resolution Table window If you select a caller name in the window the parameters display the caller s information 8 Repeat steps 3 through 6 to configure other table entries 9 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window What to Do Next After you complete the steps in this chapter your dial service should be operating To learn about Nortel Networks dial services implementations see Chapters 5 through 8 To customize your configuration see Chapters 9 through 16 308621 14 00 Rev 00 2 31 Chapter 3 Starting Dial Services Using the BCC In this chapter you will create a basic dial on demand or dial backup configuration using the BCC that is a configuration using all available defaults Subsequent chapters explain how to customize the basic configuration to suit your need
177. a CONDE ES p a creme eer rrrn rr 6 13 PPP GRIEG ccc dnc pedis E P A EE E E A E A E E 6 14 Protocol POMZA sa aa 6 15 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Chapter 7 Dial Backup Implementation Notes Bay Command Console accacaesicatccctmiiedcsc cence pacenannueeiaancaneesciaaniegndae a E Eae 7 1 Bata os WPS SSO aeea A ARANNA NL A AN 7 2 Defining the Role of the Router in the Network AT T T ieee Bandwatmior Baekup OTEUS aaah iiaasen ch aaa gaint iene ativa dies NE NANO 7 2 Using Unnumbered Interfaces to Dial an Alternative Site cceecceesceceeeeeeeeeteeeeeeees 7 3 Sample Network Using Unnumbered Interfaces cccceccsseeceeeessteeeeeesseeeeeeenaaes 7 3 Simplifying Unnumbered Configurations with Demand Circuit Groups 066 7 4 Sample Network Using Demand Circuit Groups wisi ET ee ints 5 Chapter 8 Bandwidth on Demand Implementation Notes Bandwidth on Demand Terminology ccs cceecceeeeceeeeceeeceaecaeesaeeseaeesaeeeeeeseeeeteeeenees 8 2 A E cau paicncsaete ta tuacegsetesaniuacuianns sansdaned aca E A E T 8 2 IIB Fegmenidlot ssssnssitnnenstnna aa PPP Bandwidth Allocation Protocol orean PA PRT rete T TET 8 4 How BAP WORS arrani E 8 5 BAP Negotiation with Non Nortel Networks Routers c ccecceeeeeteeeeeteeeteees 8 6 Contig ring BAP sasaccenxspnsscvaes Se are P E neds ere rere 8 7 Bata Comp ESSO asr ene pee A A 8 7 Neea cad UN AEE E E A A A SENENI N OT P E EE 8 8 Defining
178. a FroloCol marsiete a 2 18 Creating PPP Dial Backup CNS icky cassis vss ceaass sae igatied iain aaa aE 2 19 Specifying the Backup Mode eee E areni eres an noaa 2 20 Specifying the Authentication Protocol Information ccccccecssesseesesssseeeessseetens 2 21 eee NV Bandwidii COURS ins sar erin eidacd arenas euxesieeasinserkananseirentibend aihiee SSA 2 22 Configuring Leased Circuits As Bandwidth Circuits 0 cccccccceeeeeseseeeeessteeeeeeees 2 22 Specitving Ihe Bandwidth Made ascii satiteatuanidncesente aii aa 2 23 Specifying the Authentication Protocol Information imine ieee ee Adding Bandwidth Service for Demand Lines ccceeesceeceeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeaeeeenes 2 26 Greating A0 OQuigoing Phone Liet israse aaia 2 27 Creating the Local Phone List ISDN Only PaT SSi raia news elias TAEA 2 28 vi 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Setting Up the Caller Resolution Table secriosssineninnanin a 2 30 MOUNTS ROWING NOT aian aeia EEE A E NEEESE 2 31 Chapter 3 Starting Dial Services Using the BCC BOY ONES sici A Ma ceatanteadeatustaed wiinde ce 3 2 Using the BCC E panes re PR Rra errr aA PER E Bo FEI o a E AA ER E a E Specifying a Physical Interface for the ASN c ccscceeceeeeeceeeceeeeeeeeseeetsaeesaeeeses 3 3 Specifying a Physical Interface for the ARN ccccccesceeceeeeeeenaeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeneeeeees 3 4 Demand Circuit Naming Conventions s2ccccccccctstsadveriisatsetss
179. ace vendor specific attribute wide area network Xerox Network System 308621 14 00 Rev 00 XXix Configuring Dial Services Hard Copy Technical Manuals You can print selected technical manuals and release notes free directly from the Internet Go to support baynetworks com library tpubs Find the product for which you need documentation Then locate the specific category and model or version for your hardware or software product Using Adobe Acrobat Reader you can open the manuals and release notes search for the sections you need and print them on most standard printers You can download Acrobat Reader free from the Adobe Systems Web site www adobe com You can purchase selected documentation sets CDs and technical publications through the collateral catalog The catalog is located on the World Wide Web at support baynetworks com catalog html and is divided into sections arranged alphabetically e The CD ROMs section lists available CDs e The Guides Books section lists books on technical topics e The Technical Manuals section lists available printed documentation sets How to Get Help If you purchased a service contract for your Nortel Networks product from a distributor or authorized reseller contact the technical support staff for that distributor or reseller for assistance If you purchased a Nortel Networks service program contact one of the following Nortel Networks Technical Solutions Cen
180. aces only this parameter specifies the modem initialization string the router sends to the modem This command string takes precedence over factory default commands Enter an AT command string that the modem should use to make calls You must enter a value for this parameter if you selected Custom as the modem type If you fail to enter a value Site Manager prompts you to do so Appendix E provides a summary of AT commands for the ARN Refer to the manual for your modem for valid AT commands Entering an invalid command may disable the modem If the modem does not initialize you may need to change the asynchronous baud rate To do this click on the COM connector and select Edit Line Modify the value of the asynchronous baud rate 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 29 1 1 9 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Site Manager Parameters Speaker Volume COM Connector gt Edit Modem gt Async Hayes Modem Interface Medium Low Medium High Sets the volume of the modem speaker This parameter is available only if you select a modem from the list that Site Manager provides Set the volume to Low Medium or High Not applicable Speaker Control COM Connector gt Edit Modem gt Async Hayes Modem Interface On For Call Off On For Call Always On On For Answer Controls the modem speaker
181. ackets sent over the D channel can travel at a maximum of 9600 b s If you use a higher baud rate you lose data X 25 calls are made to the destination device using X 25 addresses in the call request message The router uses E 164 addresses for communication across the D channel to the ISDN network and uses X 121 addresses to call an X 25 network directly You specify the address in the X 25 packet configuration 5 18 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Implementation Notes for All Dial Services One method of implementing X 25 over the D channel is to configure PDN service Another method of implementing X 25 over the D channel is to use IPEX single node switching For information about X 25 packet configuration PDN service and IPEX single node switching see Configuring X 25 Services Figure 5 8 shows how X 25 is implemented over the D channel using PDN service X 25 terminal Router X 25 terminal H Key ET Exchange terminator X 25 host DTE PH Packet handling PSPDN Packet switched public data network DS0035A Figure 5 8 X 25 over the D Channel Configuring X 25 Service over the D Channel You enable the X 25 over the D Channel feature for each BRI line You can also configure multiple D channel interfaces with X 25 For configuration instructions see Configuring X 25 over a D Channel BRI Only on page 11 11 308621 14 00 Rev 00 5 19 Con
182. ackup Interface Default Disable Options Enable Disable Function Indicates whether to terminate the dial up connection if the frame relay switch does not initially respond to the call with a full status message Instructions Select Enable if you want the router to clear the demand or backup circuit when MIB Object ID the switch does not respond Otherwise accept the default 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 9 1 1 32 A 76 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Site Manager Parameters Frame Relay PVC and Service Parameters Demand and Dial Backup See Configuring Frame Relay Services for PVC and service record parameter descriptions You cannot enter values for the following frame relay PVC parameters Node Protection Key Encrypt Enable LTSS Name LTSS Value and MEK Change These parameters are available only if you enable data encryption For information about encryption see Configuring Data Encryption Services Bandwidth on Demand Circuit Options Parameters The Circuit Options window Figure A 17 contains the circuit options that enable bandwidth on demand service Cancel OK Values Help Circuit Type Bandwidth on Demand Pool ID Bandwidth Mode Figure A 17 Circuit Options Window The parameter descriptions follow 308621 14 00 Rev 00 A 77 Configuring Dial Services Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function In
183. activity Time parameter which dynamically terminates the connection after a specified amount of time elapses without data activity If there is data going across the line the inactivity timer resets and the connection remains active To ensure that a connection is not up longer than necessary you can configure traffic filters that allow specific types of data to go across a line without resetting the inactivity time For PPP connections the router does not consider Link Quality Report LQR Link Control Protocol LCP and periodic CHAP messages as data so these messages do not reset the inactivity timer For frame relay circuits DLCMI messages and other signaling packets are not treated as data so they do not reset the inactivity timer The router usually terminates frame relay demand connections not the frame relay network 1 6 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Dial Services Overview e The frame relay DLCMI fails If the DLCMI messages cannot be exchanged across the frame relay demand circuit the router deactivates the circuit Dial on demand is supported on asynchronous RS 449 synchronous RS 449 V 35 RS 422 and X 21 and ISDN interfaces Figure 1 2 shows a demand line connecting two routers When the router has data to transmit or when you configure the router to bring up a demand circuit the router instructs the dial device to establish a connection Data arrives at the New York router but the final destination is Dall
184. after an autodemand termination After the router reestablishes the demand circuit the protocols readvertise the static routes for this demand circuit Specify an amount of time that allows the network to recover or that allows your network administrator to resolve the problem You must enter a value for this parameter if you enabled the Auto Demand Termination parameter 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 4 5 1 30 A 38 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Site Manager Parameters Circuit Name Dialup gt Demand Circuits gt Demand Pools gt PPP or FR Circuits gt PPP or FR Demand Circuits None Any valid demand circuit name Identifies the name of the demand circuit Site Manager supplies this name based on the available circuit names To modify this parameter value enter a new name then click on Apply 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 3 2 3 1 3 Dial Optimized Routing Dialup gt Demand Circuits gt Demand Pools gt PPP or FR Circuits gt PPP or FR Demand Circuits Disabled Disabled Enabled Enables dial optimized routing for this interface Select Enabled to exchange RIP or RIP SAP updates only when a connection is active for data transmission or when the protocol makes an update request at the expiration of the Broadcast Timer IP or Update Interval IPX Routing updates alone cannot
185. age The network switch must also support caller ID 6 6 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Dial on Demand Implementation Notes After placing the initial call the client waits for a return call from the server A user specified parameter determines how long the client waits for a response During this time the client will not place an outgoing call to any other destination To set the callback configuration parameters see Enabling Callback on page 12 31 Demand Circuit Groups A demand circuit group is a set of demand circuits that share the same user defined unnumbered protocol configuration An unnumbered protocol configuration does not restrict the router to a specific destination address Instead it enables the router to use any circuit in the group for an incoming call eliminating the need to configure a unique demand circuit for each remote node in the network One demand circuit group supports many remote routers thereby reducing the configuration tasks for a large network Demand Pools and Demand Circuit Groups Like individual demand circuits a demand circuit group is associated with an existing demand pool The number of circuits in the demand circuit group must be less than or equal to the number of lines in the demand pool If you change the number of lines in a demand pool you must increase or decrease the number of demand circuits in the group accordingly When the router activates a line from the demand pool the circ
186. al router includes its own phone number in the ISDN outgoing call setup message e To identify itself to the ISDN switch so that the switch can activate the circuit In the United States and Canada the Service Provider ID SPID is also required e To ensure that an incoming call was received at the intended destination When the local router receives a call it checks that the phone number in the incoming call setup message is the same as its own local phone number e To facilitate BAP negotiations for bandwidth on demand service The non monitor router passes a local phone number to the monitor router when the monitor router requests additional bandwidth When the monitor router receives the phone number it uses that number to call back the non monitor router which then activates another line How V 25bis and Hayes Calls Use the Outgoing Phone List For V 25bis and Hayes calls the router uses only the outgoing phone list The router passes the remote router s phone number to the modem to establish a connection 308621 14 00 Rev 00 15 3 Configuring Dial Services Modifying an Outgoing Phone List If you set up an ISDN V 25bis or Hayes signaling for the configuration in Chapter 2 Starting Dial Services Using Site Manager or Chapter 3 Starting Dial Services Using the BCC you have already set up an outgoing phone list The following sections explain how to modify the phone lists Adding Phone Numbers You mu
187. al services you can use the BCC to modify dial on demand and dial backup configurations This chapter include the following topics Topic Page hanging Pool ID 9 2 Deleting Pools 9 2 Modifying PPP Dial Interfaces in a Pool 9 4 Remember these guidelines about line pools e When adding lines to a pool configure all lines in the pool to use the same authentication protocol You cannot have a pool with one line using CHAP and another using PAP e Both individual circuits and demand circuit groups can use demand pools e If you plan to configure RADIUS for any dial service all lines in a line pool must use RADIUS 308621 14 00 Rev 00 9 1 Configuring Dial Services Changing Pool IDs Using Site Manager you can change the pool ID of an existing line pool Before you can change a pool ID you must first delete all circuits associated with that pool For instructions on deleting circuits see the appropriate chapter for customizing circuits To change a pool ID Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window The Dialup menu opens choose Dialup 2 Choose Demand Backup or Bandwidth The Demand Backup or on Demand Pools Bandwidth on Demand Pools window opens 3 Select a pool entry at the top of the The Pool ID for the selected entry window appears in the Pool ID field 4 Set the Demand Backup Bandwidth Pool ID paramete
188. all from the client It authenticates the caller disconnects the call and returns the call using a phone number in the outgoing phone list client Designates the router as the callback client Use this mode when the other end of the connection uses server or server call ID The client initiates a call to the server then waits for the server to return the call When it receives the return call the client authenticates the call before accepting it server callid Designates the router as the callback server using caller ID The server receives a call from the client authenticates the call and disconnects it The server then returns the call using the phone number in the original call s setup message client one charge ISDN connections only server one charge ISDN connections only Designates the router as the callback client Also indicates that there will be no charge for the initial call to the server Use this mode when the other end of the connection uses server one charge or server once charge call ID The client places a call to the server expecting the call to fail The server refuses the call which eliminates any phone charge for the client The client then waits for a return call from the server This option saves the client the cost of the initial call Designates the router as the callback server Also indicates that only the server will be charged for the return call to the client The server receives a call from the
189. aller Resolution Table on page 2 30 2 26 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Starting Dial Services Using Site Manager Creating an Outgoing Phone List For ISDN V 25bis and Hayes connections the router uses the outgoing phone list to place a call to a remote router The phone numbers in the list are the numbers of the remote routers Outgoing phone lists are associated with a specific circuit not with the physical line Because lines in the pool can be used by many circuits the telephone numbers are part of each circuit s configuration and not the line s configuration To create an outgoing phone list Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the PPP Demand Circuits Primary Circuit Definition or Bandwidth on Demand Circuit Definition window select a circuit Click on Phone Out The Outgoing Phone List window opens 3 Click on Add Set the following parameters Outgoing Phone Number Outgoing Phone Ext SubAddr Click on Help or see the parameter descriptions beginning on page A 95 The Phone Number window opens Click on OK You return to the Outgoing Phone List window with the phone number parameters and the phone list filled in Accept the defaults for the following parameters unless your service provider instructs otherwise Outgoing Phone Number Type ISDN Numbering Type ISDN Numbering Plan Click on Help or see the para
190. allows a backup circuit to use the same network layer address as the primary circuit The backup circuit s data link layer configuration PVCs DLCIs and filters can be the same or different from the primary circuit 308621 14 00 Rev 00 1 21 Configuring Dial Services If the backup circuit uses a unique configuration it is called the secondary configuration A secondary configuration uses a different network layer address and data link layer configuration PVCs and filters from the primary circuit Note If the backup circuit connects to a different interface at the destination than the primary circuit you do not need to configure unique PVCs for the backup circuit In this case the switch informs the destination router of the available PVCs Bandwidth on Demand Service Bandwidth on demand service lets you configure additional dial up lines for e Acongested leased line e Acongested multilink bundle which is a set of links between two peer routers e A congested dial on demand line Note For information about adding bandwidth for demand lines see Adding Bandwidth Service for Congested Demand Lines on page 1 12 When data traffic exceeds the capacity of a line or bundle bandwidth on demand service reduces congestion by adding up to 29 dial up lines The router can then provide a total of 30 lines for communication PPP multilink is the protocol that enables the router to use multiple dial up lines simult
191. als you must enable the sync polling feature which instructs the router to monitor modem signals See Configuring WAN Line Services for more information about the Sync Polling parameter In addition you must use the proper synchronous cable to connect to the primary line s modem or CSU DSU See the Cable Guide e A bit notification single frame relay PVC primary PPP backup If only one frame relay PVC is being backed up by PPP the router performs circuit backup For circuit backup the frame relay service provider must support A bit notification which tells the router the status of the PVC This enables the router to back up the PVC if it fails Without A bit notification the remote side of the PVC is never notified when the local side of the PVC has terminated making dial backup service impossible 308621 14 00 Rev 00 1 19 Configuring Dial Services Backup Lines and Pools A backup line is an alternative line that carries data if the primary line fails It is advantageous therefore to have one or more backup lines to ensure data transmission To assign one or more backup lines to a primary line you establish a backup pool A backup pool is a collection of lines that the primary circuits can use Each backup pool is identified by a backup pool ID The lines in a backup pool can reside in any slot on a router that supports WAN lines therefore the pool can span multiple slots Lines in a backup pool can connect to a mode
192. ameter for these lines is set to Monitor Site Manager prompts you to enter new values for the Preferred and Reserved Bandwidth Slot parameters Click on OK Click on Done You return to the Bandwidth On Demand Pools window You return to the Configuration Manager window Setting the Preferred and Reserved Slots for BAP If you configure BAP for dial up circuits the Bandwidth Mode parameter must be set to Dynamic Monitor This enables the router to act as the monitor or non monitor router You must then configure the Preferred and Reserved Bandwidth Slot parameters so that the non monitor router knows which slots to check first for available lines The non monitor router then sends the monitor router the phone number that it dials to activate the additional line 14 6 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Customizing Bandwidth on Demand Circuits Modifying Multilink Fragmentation Multilink fragmentation lets the router break up data packets into smaller segments for efficient data transfer across multilink circuits Fragmentation is enabled by default To modify the size of fragmentation packets or disable fragmentation Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window choose Dialup The Dialup menu opens Choose Bandwidth on Demand Circuits The Bandwidth On Demand Circuit Definition window opens Click on Options Set the Fragmentation Tri
193. amples Configuration of Router 2 To create the dial backup configuration in Figure B 5 on page B 24 configure router 2 as follows 1 Enter configuration mode bec gt config Configure a leased synchronous interface on an ASN with PPP on serial interface slot 3 module 3 connector 1 stack serial 3 3 1 serial 3 3 1 ppp ppp 3 3 14 ip 129 122 3 2 255 255 255 0 ip 192 122 3 2 255 255 255 0 stack Create a dial object for serial interface slot 2 module 1 connector 1 PPP is the default protocol stack serial 2 1 1 serial 2 1 1 dial dial serial 2 1 1 stack Create a backup pool with pool ID 24 then create a backup line on the serial interface you created in step 3 Add this line to the pool stack backup pool 24 backup pool 24 backup line serial 2 1 1 Configure a backup circuit for the leased circuit ppp 3 3 1 Also set the backup mode parameter to receiver backup line 24 serial 2 1 1 stack serial 3 3 1 ppp ppp 3 3 1 backup circuit pool id 24 backup mode receiver This circuit uses backup lines configured in the backup pool 24 The backup mode parameter is set to receiver the other router s backup mode must be set to initiator for proper operation Configure a caller resolution table entry so when this router receives a call from router 1 it can verify router 1 s identity backup circuit 24 3 3 1 caller resolution caller name bin secret west caller resolution blin back Accept the default circuit
194. ance 9 6 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Customizing Line Pools Disabling MRU Compliance The mru compliance parameter enables the router s MRU size to comply with RFC 1661 the document that defines PPP standards For dial lines mru compliance is enabled by default so you can use the standard MRU size 1500 bytes or manually configure a different size For leased lines the router negotiates the MRU size automatically To allow the negotiation process you must disable the mru compliance parameter To disable mru compliance navigate to the dial prompt and enter mru compliance disabled For example dial pri 2 1 mru compliance disabled 308621 14 00 Rev 00 9 7 Chapter 10 Customizing Modem Lines This chapter provides instructions on how to modify dial modem lines You should have already created line pools according to the instructions in Chapter 2 Starting Dial Services Using Site Manager or Chapter 3 Starting Dial Services Using the BCC You can use Site Manager to configure all three dial services you can use the BCC to modify modem lines for dial on demand and dial backup configurations This chapter includes the following information Topic Page Modifying the WAN Interface Type 10 2 Modifying the Line Media Type and Cable Type 10 3 Modifying the Line Priority 10 5 Modifying External Modem Configurations 10 7 Modifying the ARN Internal Modem Configuration 10 13
195. and circuits Highlight the circuit for which standby service should be provided then click on OK 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 4 5 1 4 A 42 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Site Manager Parameters Callback Parameters PPP Demand Circuits Only The callback parameters which define the callback feature are in the PPP Demand Circuits window Figure A 10 on page A 34 Parameter Callback Mode Path Dialup gt Demand Circuits gt Demand Pools gt PPP Circuits gt PPP Demand Circuits Default Inactive Options Inactive Server Client Server Call ID Client One Charge Server One Charge Server One Charge Call ID Note the following guidelines If the router is set to Server Client or Server Call ID the router performs CHAP or PAP authentication when it receives a call The one charge modes ensure that only the server side of the callback connection incurs phone charges When you choose any of these options the server refuses the call from the client eliminating charges for the client s initial call but charging the server for its return calls to the client To use any of the one charge modes each remote site must have a unique phone number The server must be able to identify a single circuit for each phone number that it calls back If you want to reduce your configuration work and you can purchase caller ID service select the modes that use Call ID These modes do not require an outgoing phone list to place a call they
196. andwidth circuit to determine if the line or bundle is congested Enter a value specifying how often you want the router to check the congestion on the bandwidth circuit For example entering a value of 200 means that the router checks the line every 20 seconds 200 x 0 10 seconds 20 seconds 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 2 2 1 52 BOD Full Threshold Dialup gt Bandwidth On Demand Circuits gt Bandwidth On Demand Circuit Definition gt Options gt Bandwidth On Demand Monitor Options 70 percent 10 to 400 percent Specifies a percentage of the maximum amount of data that the router transmits and receives The data traffic must reach or exceed this percentage before the router considers the line or bundle congested Enter a percentage that the router uses to measure congestion If you configured the WAN compression protocol WCP on the circuit and it is configured to run below the multilink bundle you may want to configure a threshold greater than 100 percent 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 2 2 1 53 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Site Manager Parameters BOD Periods to Fail Dialup gt Bandwidth On Demand Circuits gt Bandwidth On Demand Circuit Definition gt Options gt Bandwidth On Demand Monitor Options 10 1 to 100 Specifies the number of consecutive times the router fin
197. aneously to transmit data The actual number of lines in a multilink bundle depends on hardware platform constraints total speed of the bundle the speed of each link and the type of traffic you are sending You can manage the allocation of bandwidth for a multilink bundle using the PPP BAP This protocol is available only for ISDN lines you configure it after you configure bandwidth on demand service For more information about BAP see Chapter 8 Bandwidth on Demand Implementation Notes 1 22 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Dial Services Overview Enabling Bandwidth on Demand Service The leased line demand line or leased multilink bundle is the physical connection over which the leased or demand circuit the logical connection carries traffic The procedure for enabling bandwidth on demand service differs for leased circuits and demand circuits For a leased circuit you designate the circuit as a bandwidth on demand circuit This instructs the router to provide secondary dial up lines if the leased circuit becomes congested For a demand circuit the PPP Demand Circuits window includes a BW on Demand button that lets you associate the demand circuit with an existing bandwidth on demand pool It also lets you configure bandwidth on demand monitor parameters that determine when the demand circuit is congested Bandwidth on demand service is supported on asynchronous lines RS 449 synchronous lines RS 449 V 35 RS 422 and X 21
198. anietascccnnece 3 8 Figure 4 1 Sample ISDN NEWOFK cacisscedceadcstecaleuseedesansssensonioaussedainsa aaa 4 1 Figure 4 2 BRI Interface arani E iS Pree errr Peer peer ET 4 2 Poed k EAPO PAME yino 4 4 Figure 4 4 Reference Points and Functional Groups for Devices 0eee 4 7 Figure 4 5 Reference Points and Functional Groups for Non ISDN Devices 4 7 Figure 5 1 Two Way Authentication oocssnssrsniesisi a ee Figure 5 2 One Way Authentication aiia eke enue ieee eee eeu aa DO Figure 5 3 Routers Using CHAP for Authentication sesesesieseserernnernerirernrnnnnena 5 4 Figure 5 4 Using Asynchronous PPP over Modem Lines ccccceseeeeeeeeeeteees 5 7 Figure 5 5 Router in an ISDN Network mmidi E E AT ni 5 10 Figure 5 6 Rate Adaption for a Network with a 56 Kb s Trunk Line 0 0 00 5 17 Figure 5 7 Rate Adaption for a Switched 56 Kb s Network ssssssssssssesereeee 5 18 Figure SB R25 OVER he Birra aes ccseveste cae cease sacctave aa 5 19 Figure 6 1 Example of Callback over a Demand Circuit 000 ieee eee eeeeeeneeteeeees 6 6 Figure 7 1 Dialing an Alternative Router Using Unnumbered IP Interfaces 7 3 308621 14 00 Rev 00 xxi Figure 7 2 Dialing an Alternative Router Using Demand Circuit Groups 7 5 Figure 8 1 Multilink and Bandwidth on Demand Operation c 0e jasnih rr Figure 8 2 BAP Negotiation Between Two Routers
199. aption rate enables the router to send and receive data transmitting at a rate of 56 Kb s and adapt it for transmission over a 64 Kb s line Ensure that the rate you select is compatible with the network connections to the destination device If you are unsure ask your provider The default is 64 Kb s Using the BCC To modify the adaption rate navigate to the isdn switch prompt and enter global rate adaption lt rate gt rate can be one of the following rate64 to communicate at a rate of 64 Kb s across the B channel rate56 to communicate at a rate of 56 Kb s across the B channel For example to set the adaption rate to 56 Kb s enter isdn switch 2 global rate adaption rate56 The global rate adaption parameter works with the adaption rate parameter in the outgoing phone list To learn how to customize phone lists see Chapter 15 Customizing Phone Lists 308621 14 00 Rev 00 11 9 Configuring Dial Services Using Site Manager To modify the adaption rate Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window choose Dialup The Dialup menu opens 2 Choose Edit Switch Parameters The ISDN Configured Switches window opens 3 Set the Global Adaption Rate parameter Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 23 4 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window The Global Adaption Rate parameter w
200. artensaiiecedaanienteas 3 4 Setting Up a Dial Service eeeeeeeeeeees PEE E anes meee eee re 3 5 Dial on Demand Configuration Hierarchy E E A 3 7 Dial Backup Configuration Hierarchy 2 cc cceescceesceceeceeeeeeeeeeeesaaeesaeeseeeeseeeeneees 3 8 Creating a Leased Interface for Backup Service T T E Gish cals ected 3 9 Gomiguring a Modem TINTS sicer raaa phar aareanneleaeatateauians 3 10 Configuring an IBDN MErfaCe sinini tonGassiieecitindehiadienasideeeaeema ans 3 12 aeeti peleia Eir o e E A E E 3 12 GE nUnNG F RLULNES sariini ANE N peas 3 14 Designating an Interface As a Dial Object reer re aes mu ST AT 13 14 Ceao a bne cele Immeeeeente teres oeretrec a er errr 3 15 Aadma Lnes Tome Fool sessie 3 16 Specifying the ISDN Switch Type sessessesseeeeseens PE ere ences ee 3 17 Goniigurinag PPP Demand CU CUiS si tsscnesassarsbanatenai ieee A oneness 3 18 Adding Protocols tothe Demand Ciuc radecnnrsosennarsnsscanitetbanmnpetaninnenn 3 18 Defining the Circuits Connection Mode ccsctesccccsisncnstennte fan dtdeneteocdemndecnddeniacnecasees 3 19 Gomigurna PPF Backup GaN mannaia k N para earns nie au 3 19 Protocols for Backup Circuits i ore es ees E eee 3 20 Specifying the Authentication Protocol insemeiien E E 3 20 SOREN an Quiggin Phone List sesiis aaan 3 21 Creating the Local Phone List ISDN Only EE A ET Ai AT rere 3 22 Setting Up the Caller Resolution Table seriis a 3 24 eek OM Ri 2 9 ane eens epee
201. as A port in the demand pool transmits the data Los Angeles Et Dial SS device Demand pool Slot 2 Chicago New York E 9 z op device device Back of router Dial device Dallas m l Dial device DS0013A Figure 1 2 Dial on Demand Service 308621 14 00 Rev 00 1 7 Configuring Dial Services Demand Lines and Pools Demand lines provide the physical connections over which the demand circuits transmit and receive data To maximize the number of circuits that can be active simultaneously you establish a demand pool A demand pool is a group of one or more lines that reside in the same slot on the router You identify each demand pool by assigning a demand pool ID Lines in a demand pool can connect to a modem directly to a PSTN using the ARN with the V 34 Modem Adapter Module or directly to an ISDN network using a router with internal ISDN capability You can combine asynchronous synchronous and ISDN interfaces in a single pool The synchronous interfaces can use Raise DTR or V 25bis signaling for modem connections The asynchronous interfaces can use Raise DTR V 25bis or Hayes signaling for modem connections Hayes signaling requires that you use AT modem commands to send dialing instruc
202. as Monitor in a pool that uses only one slot Site Manager automatically enters the slot number You do not have to enter a value 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 2 2 1 56 Maximum Links Dialup gt Bandwidth On Demand Circuits gt Bandwidth On Demand Circuit Definition gt Options gt Bandwidth On Demand Monitor Options 4 1 to 30 Specifies the maximum number of links both leased and dial up lines allowed in the multilink bundle for this circuit at any one time Enter the maximum number of links that you want in the bundle 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 2 2 1 58 A 86 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Site Manager Parameters BOD Recovery Threshold Dialup gt Bandwidth On Demand Circuits gt Bandwidth On Demand Circuit Definition gt Options gt Bandwidth On Demand Monitor Options 50 percent 10 to 400 percent Specifies a percentage of the maximum amount of data that the router transmits and receives The actual flow of data traffic must fall below this percentage before the router returns to the leased line or bundle exclusively Enter a percentage that the router should reach before it returns to the leased line or bundle If you configured the WAN compression protocol WCP on the circuit and it is configured to run below the multilink bundle you may want to configure a
203. as a demand line from Rome to Interlaken Using the Same Line for All Dial Services You can use the same physical line for dial on demand dial backup and bandwidth on demand pools For example if the router is not using a line for a dial on demand connection it can use the line for a dial backup connection If there are several requests for the same line the router uses the line for the service requested first 308621 14 00 Rev 00 1 27 Chapter 2 Starting Dial Services Using Site Manager In this chapter you will create a basic dial service configuration using Site Manager that is a configuration using all available defaults Subsequent chapters explain how to customize the basic configuration to suit your needs This chapter includes the following information Topic Page Before You Begin 2 2 Setting Up a Dial Service 2 2 Configuring Line Pools 2 6 Configuring Circuits 2 14 Creating PPP Dial on Demand Circuits 2l Creating PPP Dial Backup Circuits 2 19 Creating Bandwidth Circuits 2 22 Creating an Outgoing Phone List 2 27 Creating the Local Phone List ISDN Only 2 28 Setting Up the Caller Resolution Table 2 30 What to Do Next 2 31 308621 14 00 Rev 00 2 1 Configuring Dial Services Before You Begin Before you configure a dial service do the following Install the router Install either ISDN or modem lines Order ISDN service if applicable
204. as enough time to recover from any minor failure Using the BCC To set the primary down time parameter navigate to the backup circuit prompt and enter primary down time lt nteger gt integer is any number of minutes The default is 5 minutes 308621 14 00 Rev 00 13 15 Configuring Dial Services For example backup circuit 10 5 1 primary down time 10 Using Site Manager The primary down time is found on the FR Primary Interface window To specify the primary down time complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window The Dialup menu opens choose Dialup 2 Choose Backup Circuits The Backup Circuits menu opens 3 Choose Frame Relay The FR Primary Interface Definition window opens 4 Set the Primary Down Time parameter Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 75 5 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window Enabling Filters for Backup Circuits Frame Relay Only Using Site Manager you can enable the use of filters across the backup circuits to prevent unwanted data from keeping the backup circuit active To enable filters for the backup circuit complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window The Dialup menu opens choose Dialup 2 Choose Backup Circuits The Backup
205. assign the debug message level navigate to the backup circuit prompt and enter debug message level lt severity_level gt severity_level can be low medium high or verbose For example backup circuit 10 5 1 debug message level medium Scheduling Backup Circuit Availability After you complete the backup circuit configuration you can schedule when the backup circuit is available for the primary circuit You can define the following schedules using the BCC or Site Manager Table 13 2 Table 13 2 Scheduling Options Parameter Function days Specifies the days that this circuit should be available The router uses this parameter together with a start time and end time that you specify to create a time period that the circuit can be available The options are sunday monday tuesday wednesday thursday friday saturday weekday or weekend Individual days of the week take precedence over the weekday option start time Specifies the time of day the backup circuit is available The router uses this parameter and the End Time parameter to establish a time period when the circuit is available For the router to activate the circuit at the configured start time ensure that the Availability Mode parameter is set to the default available If you do not want the router to activate the circuit at the start time set the Availability Mode to not available continued 13 18 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Tabl
206. ay authentication that is if each side of the connection will authenticate the other s identity Select disabled to use one way authentication which means that only the router receiving the call performs authentication If you disable this parameter to use one way authentication you must enable the PPP Fallback parameter which is part of the PPP interface configuration You can set this parameter only using Site Manager For information about the PPP Fallback parameter see Configuring PPP Services To specify whether the router performs authentication when it places an outbound call navigate to the ppp circuit prompt and enter outbound authentication lt state gt state is enabled or disabled For example to disable outbound authentication for the demand circuit to phoenix enter ppp to phoenix outbound authentication disabled 308621 14 00 Rev 00 12 17 Configuring Dial Services Using Site Manager To modify the authentication information Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window choose Dialup The Dialup menu opens Choose Demand Circuits The Demand Pools window opens Click on PPP Circuits or FR Circuits The PPP Demand Circuits window or the FR Demand Circuits window opens 4 Select the circuit that you want to modify 5 Set the following parameters CHAP Local Name CHAP Secret PAP Local ID PAP
207. base MIB object ID This process is the same as modifying parameters using Site Manager For more information about using the Technician Interface to access the MIB see Using Technician Interface Software Caution The Technician Interface does not verify that the value you enter for a parameter is valid Entering an invalid value can corrupt your configuration 308621 14 00 Rev 00 A 3 Configuring Dial Services Pool ID Parameter The Pool Configuration window contains the Pool ID parameter Figure A 1 Demand Pool Configuration Pool ID Figure A 1 Demand Pool Configuration Window Parameter Demand Backup Bandwidth Pool ID Path Dialup gt Demand Backup Bandwidth On Demand Pools gt Pools gt Add gt Demand Backup Bandwidth On Demand Pool Configuration Default None Options 1 to 255 Function Identifies the line pool by assigning it a number Instructions Enter a number between 1 and 255 inclusive as the line pool ID MIB Object ID 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 4 5 1 6 Demand Pool ID 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 4 5 1 5 Backup Pool ID 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 4 5 1 35 Bandwidth Pool ID A 4 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Site Manager Parameters WAN Serial Interface Type Parameter The Choose WAN Serial Interface Type window Figure A 2 defines whether the serial interface is synchronous or asynchronous Choose WAN Serial Interface Typ WAN Serial Interface Type Figure A 2 Choose WAN Serial Interface Type
208. bbreviated Site Manager Window Titles cc ceceseeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeneeeeees A 2 SWEN Types Dy COUNTY ornata aAa AA N R A 21 Dial on Demand show Commands ree Oae T sees C 4 Dial Backup Show Commande ioris iiine C 13 Dial show Commands for All Services ccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees C 20 Modem show Commande saece cic vse cace caaweges eseudeniw pts aei C 24 BRI Parameters for the AT amp T 5ESS Switch cccccceeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees D 1 BRI Parameters for the Nortel Networks DMS 100 Switch 200 D 2 Summary of AT Modem Initialization Commands cceeesseeeeeeees E 1 308621 14 00 Rev 00 xxiii Preface This guide describes dial on demand dial backup and bandwidth on demand services and what you do to start and customize these dial services on a Nortel Networks router You can use the Bay Command Console BCC or Site Manager to configure dial on demand and dial backup on a router You use Site Manager to configure bandwidth on demand In this guide you will find instructions for using both the BCC and Site Manager Before You Begin Before using this guide you must complete the following procedures For a new router e Install the router see the installation guide that came with your router e Connect the router to the network and create a pilot configuration file see Quick Starting Routers Configuring BayStack Remote Access or Connecting ASN Rou
209. bered interfaces see Configuring IP ARP RARP RIP and OSPF Services Configuring IPX Services or Configuring Bridging Services Sample Network Using Unnumbered Interfaces Figure 7 1 shows a sample network using unnumbered IP interfaces and dial backup service Router A the remote router connects to router B the regional router via a primary leased line Router B connects to router C the central router via a regular leased line that is a leased line without dial backup service Remote Regional Central router A router B router C El E 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 E C 92 32101 2 192 32 10 2 E E sss Primary Leased aaa n Backup _ 4 __ Demand 1 Primary line between routers A and B 2 Leased line between routers B and C 3 First attempt backup line for router A 4 Second attempt backup line for router A and demand line for router C DS0018A Figure 7 1 Dialing an Alternative Router Using Unnumbered IP Interfaces 308621 14 00 Rev 00 7 3 Configuring Dial Services If the primary connection between routers A and B goes down the backup circuit takes over adopting the configuration of the primary circuit The backup circuit tries to call router B but it cannot establish a connection Because you configured unnumbered IP addresses on
210. blished unless you create a filter To reduce this type of traffic you can configure one of the following e Static routes e Dial optimized routing e RIP triggered updates and broadcast timers for IP e RIP and SAP broadcast timers for IPX e Traffic filters Each method is described in the sections that follow Static Routes You need to configure the demand circuit protocols so that they do not send broadcast messages to the network After you disable broadcast messages the router must determine the destination address using a static route A static route specifies the transmission path that data must follow to another network This path is based on the destination address of the data Protocols that can use static routes include e AURP DECnet e DLSw 6 8 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Dial on Demand Implementation Notes e IP e IPX e XNS Demand circuits require static routes if you disable the circuit s routing update protocols To configure a static route you need to specify in the protocol s routing table the address of the network to which you will be sending data The address must be unique to that circuit For more information about static routes for each of these protocols see the appropriate protocol guide Dial Optimized Routing Dial optimized routing lets you exchange IP RIP and IPX RIP SAP routing updates only when a connection is active By limiting when the router sends updates dial optimized rou
211. by Circuits A standby circuit is a type of demand circuit that gives the router another path to the destination The destination can be a different interface at the primary circuit s original site or an entirely different site Standby circuits can be configured for asynchronous RS 449 synchronous RS 449 V 35 RS 422 and X 21 and ISDN interfaces PPP is the only layer 2 protocol that you can configure over a standby circuit you cannot use frame relay Guidelines for Configuring Standby Circuits A standby circuit must be configured at the central site and at the remote site When setting up a standby circuit follow these guidelines e Configure one side of the connection to initiate calls the hot standby circuit This is the outgoing side of the connection e Configure one side of the connection to receive calls the standby circuit This is the incoming side of the connection If the standby circuit is part of a bandwidth on demand configuration the outgoing side should be the monitor router and the incoming side should be the non monitor router e If you configure routing protocols on the standby circuit the Inactivity Timeout parameter does not work When the router brings up the standby circuit the routing protocols keep the connection active e Configure the time of day schedules and the failback timers only on the hot standby side of the connection e Use CHAP or PAP as the authentication protocol for the circu
212. call to 56 Kb s to match that of the destination device which can handle data only at 56 Kb s To do this you set the adaption rate for the outgoing phone number to 56 Kb s l Switched 56 Kb s ISDN Router connection 56 Kb s Router DS0016A Figure 5 7 Rate Adaption for a Switched 56 Kb s Network X 25 Service over an ISDN D Channel BRI Only For routers used in France and Germany you can send X 25 packets over an ISDN D channel to an X 25 network This feature reduces the cost of X 25 network access because you do not have to use expensive leased lines While the D channel is in use you can use the B channels for other dial service applications This feature is based on ITU T recommendation X 31 which specifies how an X 25 DTE communicates with an ISDN network With the router s ISDN functionality you dial into the ISDN network and send X 25 packets These packets are directed to the packet handling PH function in the ISDN network which processes an X 25 call and acts as a gateway between the ISDN network and the X 25 network X 25 service over the D channel is available only for BRI interfaces on the AN ANH ASN and ARN using the single or quad ISDN BRI module A minimum of 8 Mb of memory is required to use this feature on these routers Recommendation X 31 states that p
213. ce aaa Cancel OK Remove BOD Values Help PPP Circuit Mode DYNAMIC MONITOR BOD Exam Period 10 BOD Full Threshold 70 BOD Periods To Fail 10 Preferred Bandwidth Slot Reserved Bandwidth Slot Maximum Links BOD Recovery Threshold BOD Periods to Recover Figure A 19 BOD Configuration Window The parameter descriptions follow A 82 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Site Manager Parameters Bandwidth on Demand Pool ID Dialup gt Bandwidth On Demand Circuits gt Bandwidth On Demand Circuit Definition gt Options gt Bandwidth On Demand Monitor Options None 1 to 255 Identifies an existing bandwidth pool Enter the ID number of the bandwidth pool you want the circuit to use 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 4 5 1 35 PPP Circuit Mode Dialup gt Bandwidth On Demand Circuits gt Bandwidth On Demand Circuit Definition gt Options gt Bandwidth On Demand Monitor Options Multilink Multilink Multilink Monitor Dynamic Monitor Specifies the type of multilink connection for this interface and the value of the PPP interface parameter PPP Mode Select one of the following Multilink Site Manager supplies this value if the Bandwidth Mode parameter is Non Monitor It enables PPP multilink for this circuit Selecting this value also prevents
214. ce for Backup Service To implement dial backup service you must first configure the leased interface that will use backup service The leased interface is called the primary circuit If the primary circuit fails the router activates the backup connections to carry data To configure the primary circuit specify the type of leased interface and define the data link and network layer protocols For example to create a primary serial interface on slot 2 connector 1 that uses PPP and IP begin at the box prompt and enter the following commands box serial 2 1 serial 2 1 ppp ppp 2 1 ip 192 122 32 1 mask 255 255 255 0 ip 192 122 32 1 255 255 255 0 box box To create a leased MCT1 line with frame relay and IP on slot 4 connector 1 enter the following commands box met 4 1 mct1 4 1 logical line boston logical line boston frame relay service boston pvc 100 back service boston ip 192 122 32 1 mask 255 255 255 0 ip 192 122 32 1 255 255 255 0 box box For more information about configuring WAN line interfaces using the BCC see Configuring WAN Line Services For more information about configuring IP see Configuring IP ARP RARP RIP and OSPF Services 308621 14 00 Rev 00 3 9 Configuring Dial Services Configuring a Modem Interface This section explains how to configure a modem interface To configure a dial service for ISDN interfaces go to Configuring an ISDN Interface on page 3 12 To configure
215. ch Types by Couniry Site Manager Parameters Country BRI Switch Types PRI Switch Types Austria Belgium Denmark France Germany Italy Netherlands Norway Spain Sweden United Kingdom BRI NET3 PRI NET 5 Switzerland United States BRI SWISSNET3 BRI 5ESS BRI NI1 BRI DMS100 PRI NET 5 PRI 4ESS PRI 5ESS PRI DMS 100 Canada BRI NI1 BRI DMS100 PRI DMS100 Japan BRI KDD BRI NTT PRI KDD PRI NTT Australia Finland Greece Iceland lreland Luxembourg Portugal BRI TS013 PRI TS014 PRI NET 5 308621 14 00 Rev 00 A 21 Configuring Dial Services Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Incoming Filter Dialup gt Demand Backup Bandwidth on Demand Pools gt Pools gt Add gt Demand Backup Bandwidth on Demand Pool Configuration gt OK gt Lines Definition gt ISDN MCT1 MCE1 Connector gt ISDN Switch Configuration Disable Enable Disable The incoming filter enables you to use the security feature caller ID It compares the phone number of the calling party with the phone numbers you entered in the incoming phone list described in Chapter 15 You must purchase caller ID service so that the provider includes the calling party s number in the call setup message Enable this parameter if you want the router to fi
216. channel is equivalent to having two B channels of 64 Kb s No call setup occurs with an ISDN switch Instead the switch has a defined point to point connection between two ISDN end points Germany and Japan only Note that when you create a BRI object the BCC automatically creates a channel object For example to configure an interface with two B channels and one D channel enter box bri 3 1 mode 2b d 2 Navigate to the BRI channel prompt by entering channel For example bri 3 1 channel At the channel context you will designate this BRI interface as a dial object 3 Go to Designating an Interface As a Dial Object on page 3 14 308621 14 00 Rev 00 3 13 Configuring Dial Services Configuring PRI Lines PRI lines are available only on the ASN BCN and BLN platforms using the following link modules e Single or Dual Port Multichannel T1 Link Module BLN and BCN e Dual Port Multichannel T1 Net Module ASN e 120 ohm Single Port MCE1 II Link Module BLN and BCN e 120 ohm Single or Dual Port MCE1 II Net Module ASN e QMCTI1 Link Module BLN and BCN To configure PRI lines create the physical interface for the backup PRI interface by entering mct1 lt s ot module connector gt pri or mce1 lt s oi module connector gt pri module is only required for the ASN router For example box met 3 1 pri For more information about MCT1 and MCEL1 parameters see Configuring WAN Line Services
217. channels one dial up modem connection and a leased 64 Kb s line Multilink enables you to e Group lines of different speeds e Distribute traffic more evenly among the lines e Maintain packet sequence e Monitor traffic volume for bandwidth on demand service These features are particularly beneficial for bandwidth on demand configurations where the router activates additional dial up lines to relieve congestion over a single leased line a leased multilink bundle or a demand line 8 2 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Bandwidth on Demand Implementation Notes Multilink lets you combine a set of lines between two routers into a single bundle which can consist of up to 30 links of different speeds The actual number of links in the bundle depends on the hardware platform total bundle speed the speed of each link in the bundle and the type of traffic Each bundle belongs to a separate circuit Multilink distributes traffic over each logical line in a bundle in an amount proportional to the bandwidth of the link The router sending the data divides the outbound traffic among all the lines in the bundle When data reaches the destination router multilink reassembles and resequences packets arriving on different lines Figure 8 1 shows how multilink and bandwidth on demand work together In this figure one router is the congestion monitor This router monitors traffic volume over the bandwidth circuit If the monitor router detects con
218. circuit 8 9 bandwidth on demand circuits activating lines 1 25 configuring 2 22 defining role of the router 8 8 monitoring congestion on the line 14 3 bandwidth on demand lines deleting from a pool 10 20 prioritizing 10 5 11 5 Bandwidth on demand Pool ID parameter A 4 bandwidth on demand pools configuring 2 6 configuring ISDN interfaces BCC 3 12 configuring ISDN interfaces Site Manager 2 8 configuring modem interfaces BCC 3 10 configuring modem interfaces Site Manager 2 6 customizing 9 1 BAP Enable parameter A 88 BAP No Phone Number Needed parameter A 89 BAP See Bandwidth Allocation Protocol basic rate interface BRI configuring lines 2 9 implementation on router 5 11 leased line operation 2 10 5 12 rate adaption 5 17 router as a TE1 device 5 10 signaling support for countries 5 11 subaddresses 5 12 bearer channel See B channel BOD Exam Period parameter A 84 BOD Full Threshold parameter A 84 BOD Periods to Fail parameter A 85 BOD Periods to Recover parameter A 87 BOD Pool ID parameter A 78 BOD Recovery Threshold parameter A 87 Breath of Life BofL messages 1 19 BRI B Channel Loopback parameter A 29 BRI Line Type parameter A 29 BRI subaddresses 5 12 Index 2 BRI T3 Timer parameter A 28 BRI T4 Timer parameter A 28 A 33 BRI See basic rate interface Bridge Enable parameter demand circuit groups A 65 broadcast traffic reduction dial optimized routing 6 9 6 11 IP broadcast timers
219. circuit This is called circuit backup Using the BCC To configure a PPP backup circuit for a frame relay PVC 1 Configure a frame relay leased interface For example to create a frame relay interface on a synchronous interface on slot 5 connector and configure a service record navigate to the serial prompt and enter serial 5 1 frame relay service to Boston pvc 100 To create a frame relay interface on an MCT1 connector navigate to the logical line entry for the MCT1 interface and enter logical line to Boston frame relay service to Boston pvc 100 13 2 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Customizing Backup Circuits 2 Create a dial object to be used by dial backup service For example to make the interface on slot 2 connector a backup interface navigate to the box prompt and enter box serial 2 1 serial 2 1 dial By entering dial PPP automatically becomes the default data link protocol 3 Create a backup pool For example box backup pool 10 4 Add a backup line to the pool then return to the frame relay leased interface prompt For example backup pool 10 backup line serial 2 1 backup line 2 1 box serial 5 1 frame relay service to Boston 5 Create a backup circuit backup circuit pool id lt D_number gt backup mode lt mode gt ID_number is the number of a line pool mode can be initiator instructs the router to initiate dialing The router at the other end must be set to receiver so that it wait
220. circuit as the local click on OK circuit You return to the Caller Resolution Table window 8 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window Local Phone Number Configuration Finally configure each router s phone number by completing the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window choose Dialup The Dialup menu opens 2 Choose Local Phone Numbers The ISDN Local Phone Lines window opens 3 Click on Local Phones The ISDN Local Phone Numbers window opens 4 Click on Add The Phone Number window opens 5 Set the Directory Number parameter as follows e Router 1 4366666 e Router 2 4364444 For router 2 only set the SPID parameter to 5084364440000 continued B 20 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Configuration Examples Site Manager Procedure continued You do this System responds 7 Click on OK You return to the ISDN Local Phone Numbers window 8 Click on Done You return to the ISDN Local Phone Lines window 9 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window Configuring a Hot Standby Circuit for a Frame Relay Network Figure B 4 shows a leased frame relay connection between routers 1 and 2 To ensure that data always has a path to its destination a hot standby circuit is created to back up the leased connection if it fails Fra
221. ckup pool 1 to continue routing traffic to the destination 1 20 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Dial Services Overview 128 32 17 2 128 32 17 0 Backup pool 1 Backup line 1 T _ 128 32 18 2 San Diego 128 32 18 0 San Francisco Configuration of the San Diego router Circuit 1 128 32 17 1 the local interface to Phoenix Circuit 2 128 32 18 1 the local interface to San Francisco DS0029A Figure 1 9 Example of Backup Pools Lines and Circuits You can assign the same backup pool ID to more than one primary circuit If you want only one backup line dedicated to a primary circuit then you should configure only one line in a pool and assign that pool exclusively to that circuit Configuration of the Backup Circuit The configuration of the backup circuit depends on the protocol for the primary circuit If Standard or PPP is running over the primary circuit the backup circuit inherits the primary s network layer address configuration Unlike the network layer address configuration the data link layer configuration can be unique If frame relay is running over the primary circuit the backup circuit can inherit the primary s configuration or it can use its own configuration When the frame relay primary and backup circuit use the same configuration it is called the shared configuration The shared configuration
222. click on OK The Port Parameters window opens Accept the default values for all parameters by clicking on OK The PRI Logical Lines timeslots window opens continued 308621 14 00 Rev 00 B 15 Configuring Dial Services Site Manager Procedure continued You do this 5 Choose Select All then click on OK System responds You return to the PRI Logical Lines window Accept the default MTU size click on Apply then click on OK Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window If you are using selective PRI service that is some B channels are blocked the timeslots that you configure as B channels should be the same channels assigned by the switch provider For example if the provider assigns you channels 1 to 10 configure timeslots 1 to 10 as B channels Demand Pool Configuration After configuring ISDN interfaces these lines can be included in a demand pool To configure a demand pool complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this 1 In the Configuration Manager window choose Dialup System responds The Dialup menu opens 2 Choose Demand Pools The Demand Pools window opens 3 Click on Add The Demand Pool Configuration window opens 4 Set the Pool ID parameter to 1 then click The Demand Lines Definition window on OK opens 5 Click on either the MCT1 2 connector The ISDN Switch
223. client The server using incoming call filtering verifies that the client is an authorized caller by matching the client s phone number with a phone number and circuit number in the incoming phone list If the server finds a matching entry it refuses the call By refusing the call the server eliminates any phone charges for the client The server then returns the call using a phone number in its outgoing phone list for the matching circuit server one charge callid ISDN connections only Designates the router as the callback server using caller ID and indicates that only the server will be charged for the return call to the client The server receives a call from the client The server using incoming call filtering verifies that the client is an authorized caller by matching the client s phone number with a phone number and circuit number in the incoming phone list If the server finds a matching entry it refuses the call By refusing the call the server eliminates any phone charges for the client The server then returns the call using the phone number in the original call s setup message 308621 14 00 Rev 00 12 33 Configuring Dial Services For example to set the callback mode to client enter ppp to dallas callback mode client Configuring Server and Client Delays You can configure the server to delay the return call to allow time for the client s modem to disconnect or for its ISDN connection t
224. congested line falls below the congestion threshold the router again uses only the leased line demand line or bundle For details about the monitor parameters see Monitoring Congestion on the Bandwidth or Demand Circuit on page 14 3 Terminating Secondary Lines The router terminates secondary lines when e The leased circuit is no longer congested e The leased line or multilink bundle fails e The remote router terminates the connection e There is a physical problem with the dial up line Bandwidth on Demand Lines and Pools A bandwidth on demand pool is a collection of dial up lines that a congested leased line demand line or multilink bundle can use Each bandwidth on demand pool is identified by a bandwidth on demand pool ID In a bandwidth on demand pool you can combine asynchronous synchronous or ISDN lines in a single pool Lines in a backup pool can connect to a modem directly to a PSTN using the ARN with the V 34 Modem Adapter Module or directly to an ISDN network using a router with internal ISDN capability 308621 14 00 Rev 00 1 25 Configuring Dial Services How Lines You can combine asynchronous synchronous and ISDN interfaces in a single pool The synchronous interfaces can use Raise DTR or V 25bis signaling for modem connections The asynchronous interfaces can use Raise DTR V 25bis or Hayes signaling for modem connections Hayes signaling requires that you use AT modem commands to send
225. ct Protocols menu opens 3 Choose IP and click on OK The IP Configuration window opens 4 Set the IP Address parameter as follows e Router 1 132 132 132 3 e Router 2 132 132 132 1 5 Set the Subnet Mask parameter to 255 255 255 0 for both routers 6 Click on OK You return to the PPP Demand Circuits window 7 Click on Done You return to the Demand Pools window 8 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window Caller Resolution Table Configuration After configuring the demand circuits configure the caller resolution table by completing the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window choose Dialup The Dialup menu opens Choose Caller Resolution Table The Caller Resolution Table window opens Click on Add The Caller Name and Secret Password window opens continued 308621 14 00 Rev 00 B 19 Configuring Dial Services Site Manager Procedure continued You do this 4 Set the Caller Name parameter as follows Router 1 ASN Router 2 BLN System responds You return to the Caller Resolution Table window 5 Set the CHAP Secret parameter to ISDN for both routers 6 Click on Done The Local Circuit List window opens which lists the demand circuit that you configured 7 Select the demand circuit from the list then Site Manager sets this
226. cuit Options window You return to the Bandwidth on Demand Circuit Definition window 2 24 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Starting Dial Services Using Site Manager Specifying the Authentication Protocol Information For network security the router must identify itself in the call setup message that it sends to the remote router The authentication protocols CHAP and PAP enable the identification process CHAP is the default protocol All lines in a pool must use the same authentication protocol To specify the CHAP information for the local router Site Manager Procedure 1 You do this Scroll down the Bandwidth on Demand Circuit Definition window to the CHAP parameters Set the CHAP Local Name and CHAP Secret parameters The CHAP Local Name must be unique but the CHAP Secret must be the same on both sides of the connection Click on Help or see the parameter descriptions beginning on page A 46 System responds Click on OK You return to the Bandwidth on Demand Circuit Definition window Do one of the following If you added ISDN lines or modem lines V 25bis or Hayes to the pool go to Creating an Outgoing Phone List on page 2 27 If you added only Raise DTR lines to the pool click on Done and go to Setting Up the Caller Resolution Table on page 2 30 308621 14 00 Rev 00 2 25 Configuring Dial Services Adding Bandwidth Service for Demand Lin
227. d it uses the default service record To modify the default service record or add service records Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window choose Dialup The Dialup menu opens Choose Backup Circuits Choose Frame Relay The Backup Circuits menu opens The FR Primary Interface Definition window opens 4 Click on Backup Def The FR Backup Interface window opens 5 Click on Services The Frame Relay Backup Service List window opens The router supplies the service name in the Service Name parameter Modify the Service Name parameter only if you are sure the new name is unique for the router Click on Help or see Configuring Frame Relay Services for the parameter description Optionally click on PVCs to configure PVCs for the service record otherwise go to step 11 The Frame Relay Backup PVC List window opens Click on Add to add a PVC to the service record The Frame Relay PVC Add window opens Set the DLCI Number parameter then click on OK Click on Help or see Configuring Frame Relay Services for the parameter description You return to the Frame Relay Backup PVC List window continued 308621 14 00 Rev 00 13 7 Configuring Dial Services Site Manager Procedure continued You do this 10 Optionally set the following parameters e Circuit State Set e Multicas
228. d enter authentication protocol lt protocol gt protocol can be pap chap or none 308621 14 00 Rev 00 13 11 Configuring Dial Services For example to switch from the default protocol to PAP enter dial serial 1 1 authentication protocol pap Configuring CHAP If you configure CHAP as the authentication protocol you must configure a CHAP name and secret The CHAP name is part of the outbound call and informs remote peer routers of the local router s identity The CHAP secret is for identification and security purposes and must be the same on both sides of the link To configure CHAP navigate to the backup circuit prompt and enter chap name lt text string gt chap secret lt text string gt text string can be any text string up to 20 characters For example for the backup circuit supporting primary line 5 1 enter backup circuit 10 5 1 Chap name bayrs1 chap secret east Note that each circuit must have a unique CHAP name Configuring PAP If you configure PAP as the authentication protocol you must configure a PAP ID and PAP password The PAP ID identifies the calling router to the called router During the authentication phase all password authenticate request messages that the calling router sends to the called router must include the correct PAP ID and password or the connection will not be successful To configure PAP navigate to the backup circuit prompt and enter pap id lt text string gt pap
229. d if you set up bandwidth on demand service for a PPP demand circuit Enter an hour of the day using the 24 hour system of expressing time For example to deactivate the circuit at 10 00 p m enter 2200 For the router to deactivate the circuit at the configured end time ensure that the Availability Mode parameter is set to the default Available If you do not want the router to deactivate the circuit at the end time set the Availability Mode to Not Available 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 4 11 1 6 A 58 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Site Manager Parameters Parameter Inactivity Timeout Path Demand Circuits only Dialup gt Demand Circuits gt Demand Pools gt PPP or FR Circuits gt PPP or FR Demand Circuits gt Schedule gt Circuit Time of Day Schedule or Pool Availability List gt Add gt Circuit Time of Day Schedule Default Disable Options Enable Disable Function Determines whether the router uses the Inactivity Time parameter to control circuit activity during the configured start time and end time The Inactivity Time parameter defines the number of seconds that can elapse without data going across the line before the router disconnects the call Instructions Enter Enable if you want the router to use the Inactivity Time parameter and the Start Time and End Time parameters to determine when the circuit is available If there is no data going across the line the Inactivity Time parameter instructs the router to disconnect
230. d of time This parameter value ensures that the connection is not up longer than necessary For example you may configure the circuit s availability via the Start and End time parameters from 9 00 a m to 5 00 p m Then configure this parameter for 60 minutes If the connection comes up at 10 00 a m the router keeps the circuit active until 11 00 a m Then the router invokes the Max UpTime Termination parameter to deactivate the circuit Instructions Enter the maximum active time for a call during a continuous period of time MIB Object ID 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 4 5 1 10 308621 14 00 Rev 00 A 51 Configuring Dial Services Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Max UpTime Termination Demand Circuits Dialup gt Demand Circuits gt Demand Pools gt PPP or FR Circuits gt PPP or FR Demand Circuits Backup Circuits Dialup gt Backup Circuits gt PPP or Frame Relay gt Primary Circuit Definition or FR Primary Interface Definition Disabled Enabled Disabled Automatically deactivates the circuit if the call reaches the maximum time that you specify in the Maximum Up Time parameter If the router receives data after the circuit is down the router does not establish a demand connection Enter Enable if you want the circuit to terminate upon reaching the maximum time limit for the call 1 3 6
231. d router activates the assigned circuit For more information about authentication see Chapter 5 Implementation Notes for All Dial Services Caller Resolution for Demand Circuit Groups The router also uses the caller resolution table for demand circuit groups Demand circuit groups can only receive calls For a demand circuit group to accept an incoming call you configure the table and assign the demand circuit group to a remote caller After the router authorizes a remote caller it activates a circuit from the assigned demand circuit group Like individual demand circuits demand circuit groups use either PAP or CHAP for authentication You can enable either of these authentication protocols on only one side of the link one way authentication or on both sides of the link two way authentication For information about authentication see PPP Authentication on page 5 1 Depending on a network s security requirements each remote router can have a unique CHAP name or PAP ID or the routers can use the same name For each remote caller using a unique name or ID you assign a demand circuit group in the caller resolution table referred to as the local group in Site Manager The remote callers may use the same local group When the router authenticates an incoming call it receives the caller s name or ID in the CHAP challenge or PAP authenticate request message The router verifies the caller s identity then looks up th
232. d the limitations set out in this license for civilian agencies and subparagraph c 1 ii of the Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause of DFARS 252 227 7013 for agencies of the Department of Defense or their successors whichever is applicable 6 Use of Software in the European Community This provision applies to all Software acquired for use within the European Community If Licensee uses the Software within a country in the European Community the Software Directive enacted by the Council of European Communities Directive dated 14 May 1991 will apply to the examination of the Software to facilitate interoperability Licensee agrees to notify Nortel Networks of any such intended examination of the Software and may procure support and assistance from Nortel Networks 7 Term and termination This license is effective until terminated however all of the restrictions with respect to Nortel Networks copyright in the Software and user manuals will cease being effective at the date of expiration of the Nortel Networks copyright those restrictions relating to use and disclosure of Nortel Networks confidential information shall continue in effect Licensee may terminate this license at any time The license will automatically terminate if Licensee fails to comply with any of the terms and conditions of the license Upon termination for any reason Licensee will immediately destroy or return to Nortel Networks the Software user manua
233. daption rates see Chapter 5 Implementation Notes for All Dial Services Using the BCC To set the adaption rate of a call navigate to the out phone number prompt and enter adaption rate lt rate gt rate can be either rate64K or rateS56K For example to set an adaption rate of 56 Kb s enter out phone number backup 8 1 5085556879 adaption rate rate56K 15 12 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Customizing Phone Lists Using Site Manager To set the adaption rate Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window The Dialup menu opens choose Dialup 2 Choose Demand Backup or Bandwidth For backup and bandwidth circuits the on Demand Circuits appropriate Circuit Definition window opens For demand circuits the Demand Pools window opens Click on PPP Circuits or FR Circuits to open the appropriate Demand Circuits window 3 Choose Phone Out The Outgoing Phone List window opens 4 Set the Adaption Rate parameter Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 100 5 Click on Done You return to the appropriate circuit window 6 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window Changing the Remote Pool Type Using Site Manager you can configure the remote pool type The remote pool type specifies whether the remote router s line associated with the outgoing phone number is in a demand pool bandwidth pool
234. dia Type Default Raise DTR Options Raise DTR V25bis Hayes Function Specifies the signaling method that the router uses to interact with the modem Instructions Choose one of the following Raise DTR A signaling method that enables access to the network by preprogramming the destination phone numbers into the dial device Raise DTR signaling works with any of these interfaces X 21 V 35 RS 232 and RS 422 V 25bis A signaling method that enables access to the network by passing the destination phone numbers from the router to the dial device Using V 25bis the dial device can support dial connections to multiple destinations V 25bis signaling works with any of these interfaces X 21 V 35 RS 232 and RS 422 Hayes A signaling method that enables access to the network by passing the destination phone numbers from the router to the dial device Hayes signaling is for asynchronous PPP and works with RS 422 and V 34 interfaces To use Hayes as the line media type you must also specify a modem initialization string The router sends this string to the modem to initiate a call MIB Object ID 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 5 1 54 Parameter Cable Type Path Dialup gt Demand Backup Bandwidth on Demand Pools gt Pools gt Add gt Demand Backup Bandwidth on Demand Pool Configuration gt OK gt Lines Definition gt COM Connector gt Choose Wan Serial Interface Type gt OK gt Sync Line Media Type Default RS232 Options NU
235. dial up circuits The next section to add ISDN lines to the pool Creating Line Pools with ISDN Lines Before configuring a line pool with ISDN lines you need to select a port and designate it as a BRI or PRI interface See the appropriate section for instructions Configuring BRI Lines on page 2 9 Configuring PRI Lines on page 2 11 2 8 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Starting Dial Services Using Site Manager Configuring BRI Lines ISDN BRI net modules are available only on the Access Node AN Access Stack Node ASN Access Node Hub ANH and Advanced Remote Node ARN hardware platforms You can configure BRI lines as dial up lines or for Germany and Japan only as leased lines Go to the appropriate section for instructions e Configuring BRI Dial Up Lines on page 2 9 e Configuring BRI Leased Lines Germany and Japan Only on page 2 10 Configuring BRI Dial Up Lines To configure BRI lines complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window The Port Application window opens click on an ISDN connector 2 Set the Port Application Mode You return to the Configuration Manager parameter then click on OK The default is window Dialup 2B D Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 19 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 for each BRI line that you want in the pool 4 Go to Adding ISDN Lines to a Pool
236. dialing instructions to the modem The ISDN lines use ISDN signaling for network connections Lines in a bandwidth pool may operate at different speeds PPP multilink the protocol that the router uses for bandwidth on demand circuits can manage lines of varying speed distribute traffic across lines and monitor traffic The router may also use BAP to manage bandwidth allocation When a leased line or bundle becomes congested the router searches for an available dial up line from its associated bandwidth on demand pool Lines in a bandwidth on demand pool can reside on any slot but each secondary circuit can use only three slots To determine the order in which the router searches the slots you designate each slot as preferred or reserved The router uses the preferred slot first If there are no available lines the router uses the reserved slot If there are still no available lines the router automatically uses the local slot which is the slot containing the first leased line that was activated When the router finds a line it dials the destination using a phone number from the user configured outgoing phone list Pools and Circuits Work Together You assign a bandwidth pool ID for each leased circuit or demand circuit If the line or bundle becomes congested the router activates a dial up line from the pool The dial up circuit that runs over this line inherits the configuration and protocol characteristics of the leased circuit
237. difying the synchronous line parameters see Configuring WAN Line Services Testing the Bandwidth on Demand Connection To ensure that the router can activate a secondary line if a leased line becomes congested you can use the Technician Interface to execute the forced dial command The forced dial command tells the router that the leased line or bundle is congested even if it is not This forces the router to activate a secondary line If the router cannot activate a secondary line there is a problem with the line To issue the forced dial command set the value of the forced dial attribute to 1 The command syntax is as follows set wfSwservOptsEntry wfSwservOpisForcedDial lt circuit_no gt 1 commit To deactivate a forced dial connection issue a forced take down command The command syntax is as follows set wfSwservOptsEntry wfSwservOpitsForced Takedown lt circuit_no gt 1 commit You cannot use this test for demand circuits using bandwidth on demand service 308621 14 00 Rev 00 8 9 Chapter 9 Customizing Line Pools This chapter provides instructions on how to modify dial on demand dial backup and bandwidth on demand line pools You should have already created line pools according to the instructions in Chapter 2 Starting Dial Services Using Site Manager or Chapter 3 Starting Dial Services Using the BCC To create additional line pools see those chapters You can use Site Manager to modify all three di
238. dow Configuring Filters for Primary Shared Interfaces To configure filters for primary shared interfaces Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window choose Dialup The Dialup menu opens Choose Backup Circuits The Backup Circuits menu opens 3 Choose Frame Relay The FR Primary Interface Definition window opens Click on Backup Def The FR Backup Interface window opens continued 308621 14 00 Rev 00 13 9 Configuring Dial Services Site Manager Procedure continued You do this 5 Click on Filters System responds The Priority Outbound Filters window opens 6 Create enable and modify traffic filters See Configuring Traffic Filters and Protocol Prioritization for detailed instructions If you do not configure filters for a primary shared interface the interface uses the primary circuit s filters 7 Click on Done You return to the FR Backup Interface window 8 Click on Done You return to the FR Primary Interface Definition window 9 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window Customizing PPP and Frame Relay Backup Circuits You can modify the configuration of the backup circuits Modifying Which Router Initiates a Call For PPP backup circuits you can specify which router can initiate a dial backup connection by configuring
239. ds that data traffic on the bandwidth circuit exceeds the configured congestion threshold thereby concluding that the line or bundle is congested Enter the number of consecutive times the circuit can exceed the threshold before the router activates a secondary line 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 2 2 1 54 Preferred Bandwidth Slot Dialup gt Bandwidth On Demand Circuits gt Bandwidth On Demand Circuit Definition gt Options gt Bandwidth On Demand Monitor Options None Available slots in the bandwidth pool For example if the bandwidth pool has lines from slot 3 and slot 4 you cannot enter a value of 5 Specifies the slot the router chooses first when adding a line to a multilink bundle For BAP configurations the non monitor router uses this parameter to determine which lines are available It then sends the local phone number associated with an available line to the monitor router which then dials the number to activate the line for additional bandwidth Enter the number of the slot you want the router to use first but note the following Site Manager looks for another circuit configured as Monitor in the same pool as the newly created circuit If one exists Site Manager copies the value for the existing circuit s Preferred Bandwidth Slot parameter and enters it for this parameter You do not have to enter a value If this is the first circuit configured as Monitor in a pool that uses only one slot Site Manager automatically enters th
240. e You return to the Demand Pools window 7 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Configuration Examples Caller Resolution Table Configuration After configuring the demand circuits and the outgoing phone lists configure the caller resolution table by completing the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window choose Dialup The Dialup menu opens Choose Caller Resolution Table The Caller Resolution Table window opens Click on Add The Caller Name and Secret Password window opens Set the Caller Name parameter as follows Router 4 BLN2 Router 7 BLN1 You return to the Caller Resolution Table window Set the CHAP Secret parameter to East for both routers Click on Done Select the demand circuit from the list and click on OK The Local Circuit List window opens which lists the demand circuit that you previously configured Site Manager sets this circuit as the local circuit You then return to the Caller Resolution Table window Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window You have now completed a demand circuit configuration using PPP as the demand circuit protocol 308621 14 00 Rev 00 B 9 Configuring Dial Services Dial on Demand Using ISDN Lines in a Frame Relay Network
241. e For dial optimized routing circuits this timer should allow enough time to send all routing updates to the remote nodes in the network 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 4 5 1 45 308621 14 00 Rev 00 A 53 Configuring Dial Services Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Inactivity Mode Demand Circuits Dialup gt Demand Circuits gt Demand Pools gt PPP or FR Circuits gt PPP or FR Demand Circuits Both Directions Both Directions Transmit Only Receive Only Either Direction Measures data inactivity for a specific direction across a line Specifically it lets you decide in which direction the router determines inactivity Together with the Inactivity Time parameter this parameter informs the router to deactivate the connection if there is no data going in the specified direction NOTE The router does not consider the following as data so it does not consider them when determining inactivity PPP s LQR LCP periodic CHAP messages Frame Relay DLCMI and other signaling messages Select the option that best suits your application Both Directions If the router does not receive data and does not transmit data it terminates the connection The inactivity has to be in both directions Transmit Only If there is no data to transmit the router terminates the connection The router disregards data it receives Select this option if you are using dial optimized routing for IPX Recei
242. e For example to navigate to the leased interface on slot 2 connector 1 enter backup pool 8 box serial 2 1 ppp ppp 2 1 From the leased interface prompt create a backup circuit by entering backup circuit pool id lt pool id gt backup mode lt mode gt 308621 14 00 Rev 00 3 19 Configuring Dial Services mode can be initiator Instructs the router to initiate dialing The router at the other end must be set to receiver so that it waits until the initiator router makes the call Only a router on one side of the link can serve as the initiator If both are set to initiator they may try to initiate a call simultaneously resulting in a collision on the network receiver Instructs the router to wait to receive the call from the initiator If you configure the router to be the receiver you must create a caller resolution entry for the circuit that identifies the remote initiator router The local router can then verify the initiator s identity and accept the incoming calls For example the following command creates a backup circuit that uses the lines in pool 8 designates the leased PPP interface 2 1 as a primary interface and sets the backup mode to initiator ppp 2 1 backup circuit pool id 8 backup mode initiator Go to Specifying the Authentication Protocol Information on page 3 20 Protocols for Backup Circuits For dial backup lines the dial command also configures the default data link protocol
243. e Number None Any string up to 25 numeric characters Specifies the telephone number of the remote router Enter the telephone number of the remote router Do not enter space special or alphabetic characters in the telephone number 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 4 7 1 3 308621 14 00 Rev 00 A 105 Configuring Dial Services Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Incoming Phone Ext SubAddr Dialup gt Incoming Phone Numbers gt Incoming Phone List gt Add gt Phone Number None Any string up to 25 numeric characters Specifies a subaddress for a main phone number that further identifies the remote router This subaddress is useful when you have several routers at a destination site but the ISDN provider assigns only one phone number to that destination site An incoming call must specify the number and the subaddress to reach a specific router Enter the extension subaddress Do not enter space special or alphabetic characters in the telephone number 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 4 7 1 4 Callback Demand Circuit Name Dialup gt Incoming Phone Numbers gt Incoming Phone List None Available callback demand circuits This parameter is only for callback service When the Callback Mode parameter value is Server One Charge or Server One Charge Call ID this parameter specifies the circuit that the serve
244. e connection To change how the modem connects to the network Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window click on the COM connector whose configuration you want to change The connector name should have a D B or W next to it The Edit Connector window opens 2 Click on Edit Modem The Sync Modem Interface Async Modem Interface or Async Hayes Modem Interface window opens 3 Optionally set any one of the following parameters e Retry Delay Redial Count Ring Indicator Debug Mode Click on Help or see the parameter descriptions beginning on page A 10 4 Click on OK You return to the Edit Connector window 5 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window 10 12 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Customizing Modem Lines Modifying the ARN Internal Modem Configuration Using the BCC or Site Manager you can modify the configuration of the V 34 Modem Adapter module that can be installed in the ARN Selecting a Modem Type and Specifying an Initialization String To set the modem type for any dial up interface for asynchronous interfaces using Hayes signaling you can specify a particular modem for your network Asynchronous interfaces are on the AN ASN and ANH using the Dual Sync net module ARN using any serial expansion module and BLN and BCN using the Octal Sync link module For more informat
245. e you enable this parameter This parameter is the same as the Enable parameter in the Frame Relay Interface List window See Configuring Frame Relay Services for all the interface parameter descriptions Parameter FR Service Control called Enable in Frame Relay Interface List Path Demand Circuits Dialup gt Demand Circuits gt FR Circuits gt FR Demand Circuits gt Demand Intf gt FR Demand Interface List Backup Circuits Dialup gt Backup Circuits gt Frame Relay gt FR Primary Interface Definition gt Backup Def gt FR Backup Interface Default Enable for dial backup primary shared interfaces Disable for dial backup primary secondary interfaces and dial on demand interfaces Options Enable Disable Function Enables the frame relay interface Instructions For dial backup primary secondary interfaces and dial on demand interfaces MIB Object ID select Enable to activate the frame relay interface after the configuration is complete Otherwise accept the default For dial backup primary shared interfaces select Disable to deactivate the frame relay interface Otherwise accept the default 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 9 1 1 2 Parameter Hangup on DLCMI Failure Path Demand Circuits Dialup gt Demand Circuits gt FR Circuits gt FR Demand Circuits gt Demand Intf gt FR Demand Interface List Backup Circuits Dialup gt Backup Circuits gt Frame Relay gt FR Primary Interface Definition gt Backup Def gt FR B
246. e 13 2 Customizing Backup Circuits Scheduling Options continued Parameter Function end time Specifies the time of day the backup circuit is no longer available The router uses this parameter and the Start Time parameter to establish a time period when the circuit is available For the router to deactivate the circuit at the configured end time ensure that the Availability Mode parameter is set to the default available If you do not want the router to deactivate the circuit at the end time set Availability Mode to not available inactivity timer BCC only availability mode If enabled this timer instructs the router to disconnect the call if there is no data activity Accept the default disabled if you want the router to establish the connection at the start time and remain active until the configured end time regardless of data activity and regardless of the setting of the Availability Mode parameter Only the network can bring down the connection Determines whether the router activates the circuit between the configured time interval specified with the circuit s schedule Using the BCC The following examples show how to set the BCC schedule commands for the backup circuit To configure the object schedule you are required to set the days start time and end time parameters To set these parameters navigate to the backup circuit prompt and enter schedule days lt day gt
247. e ATT iunn bibs POT ane A 15 Port Applicaton Mode ParamelerS scssisisiiesdiiiiaianninisssioi annin A 18 PRI Port Application Mode Parameter cc cccsececeeeseeeeseeeeeeeceeeeaeeseaeeeeeeaneeeaes A 18 BRI Port Application Mode Parameter Te uma rte eee ponga TS A 19 SDN SWO Pare ClOns srida aA AN aia aaa A 20 Pool Channel Count and Priority Parameters cc ccccccesceeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeaeeseessneeeaes A 24 BRI Configuration PAVaING Ole asa a Gases A 27 BRI Leased Line Configuration Parameters cccccscessececeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeseeneeeesaees A 32 Demand Circuit Parameters PPP and Frame Relay 0 cceseeeee Serius ioni A 34 Standby Circuit Parameters PPP Demand Circuits Only essscsssceerernrrrsresn A 41 Callback Parameters PPP Demand Circuits Only cesceeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeetaees A 43 Authentication Protocol Parameters ghaseananiun ens rrr T AT T A 46 Circuit Duration Parameters Demand and Dial Backup ceeeeeseeeeeteeeeeeeeeees A 51 Circuit Schedule Parameters Demand and Dial Backup csceesseeeeteeeeeeeeeees A 55 Demand Circuit Group PARAINGNONS rissin rea Ee eS A 62 Demand Circuit Group Protocol Parameters ccccccccccseceeenceeceeeeeeeaeseeeeeeseaeeeeaaeeees A 63 Caller Resolution Info Parameters Demand Circuit Groups PEET mT E a E PPP Circuit Options Parameters Dial Bak scisiisizssipcncsiiirsicoieri uaimse
248. e Demand Circuits The Demand Pools window opens 3 Click on PPP Circuits or FR Circuits The PPP Demand Circuits window or the FR Demand Circuits window opens Select the circuit that you want to modify Set the Inactivity Time parameter Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 36 Click on Apply then click on Done You return to the Demand Pools window Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window 12 10 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Customizing Demand Circuits Retrying the Connection You can specify the number of attempts that the router makes to establish the demand circuit In addition you can configure how long the router waits between each retry attempt before trying to reestablish the circuit When establishing a connection the router tries all the phone numbers in the outgoing phone list for a given line If no connection is made and there is still data to send the router increments the retry count then retries these numbers using the next line in the pool The following sections provide instructions for setting the number of retries using the BCC or Site Manager Using the BCC To set the number of times that you want the router to try to establish the circuit navigate to the demand circuit prompt and enter redial count lt inieger gt integer is a value from 1 to 10 The default is 2 For example to retry the circuit to Boston three times enter
249. e and secret navigate to the ppp circuit prompt and enter chap name lt text string gt chap secret lt text string gt text string can be any text string up to 20 characters For example to modify CHAP for the demand circuit to phoenix enter ppp to phoenix Chap name bayrs1 chap secret southwest Note that each circuit must have a unique CHAP name Modifying PAP If you configure PAP as the authentication protocol you must configure a PAP ID and PAP password The PAP ID identifies the calling router to the called router During the authentication phase all password authenticate request messages that the calling router sends to the called router must include the correct PAP ID and password or the connection will not succeed 12 16 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Customizing Demand Circuits To specify the PAP ID and password navigate to the ppp circuit prompt and enter pap id lt fext string gt pap password lt text string gt text string can be any text string up to 25 characters For example to modify PAP for the demand circuit to phoenix enter ppp to phoenix pap id bayrs pap password admin Configuring Outbound Authentication Outbound authentication specifies whether the router performs authentication when it places an outbound call Disabling outbound authentication improves interoperability with devices that do not perform two way authentication or support CHAP Accept the default enabled if you want to use two w
250. e assigned local group in the table From this group the router selects an available circuit and activates the unnumbered protocol configuration over that circuit 16 2 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Customizing Caller Resolution To simplify configuration the caller resolution table may contain the same PAP ID or CHAP name for all remote routers in the network In this case the table has only one entry consisting of the caller name and the local group A router configured with demand circuit groups does not initiate connections for the group the remote side of the connection must place the call first Consequently you do not need to configure the CHAP local name and secret or the PAP ID and password for a call request Note The caller resolution table cannot contain individual demand circuits and demand circuit groups for the same caller name For added network security each remote router can have a unique PAP ID or CHAP name but use the same demand circuit group In this case the router verifies the remote router s name in the incoming call setup message If it does not match a name in the caller resolution table the router disconnects the call Adding Entries to the Caller Resolution Table For PPP dial up circuits using CHAP you should have already set up the caller resolution table according to the instructions in Chapter 2 Starting Dial Services Using Site Manager or Chapter 3 Starting Dial Services Using the B
251. e by Nortel Networks technical support or your ISDN provider Using the BCC You enter commands to modify BRI signaling at the bri prompt 308621 14 00 Rev 00 11 15 Configuring Dial Services Modifying LAPD Transmission Units To specify the maximum number of bytes per LAPD transmission unit enter mtu lt integer gt integer is a value from 3 to 1024 bytes For example bri 1 1 mtu 500 Nortel Networks recommends that you accept the default 400 bytes Activating ISDN S T and U Interfaces You can set the BRI T3 timer which indicates the amount of time that the router has to try and activate the ISDN S T or U interface ARN only The router starts this timer when the ISDN interface is deactivated and the router tries to activate it for example when the router wants to send data During this period the router sends INFO 1 frames across the ISDN interface until the network responds with a signal or the timer expires This timer prevents the router from attempting to activate the ISDN interface interminably To modify the T3 timer enter t3 timer lt integer gt integer is a value from 1 to 30 seconds For example bri 1 1 t3 timer 10 The t3 timer parameter should be greater than the time it takes to activate the ISDN interface under normal conditions Ask your ISDN provider for guidelines regarding the subscriber loop transmission which may affect the value you set 11 16 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Customizing I
252. e configuration tree hierarchy to objects that enable you to create dial backup service To navigate through the configuration hierarchy and learn what you can configure at each level enter a question mark or the help tree command at any prompt To learn more about the BCC see Using the Bay Command Console BCC 308621 14 00 Rev 00 7 1 Configuring Dial Services Data Compression You can configure one of two compression protocols over any PPP backup circuit e Nortel Networks proprietary data compression protocol WCP e Hi fn LZS Enabling compression improves bandwidth efficiency by eliminating redundant strings in data streams This in turn improves network response times and yields line cost savings To implement data compression you select either WCP or Hi fn LZS as one of the protocols for the backup circuit Note that WCP does not work with any other vendor s compression protocol For more information about data compression see Configuring Data Compression Services Defining the Role of the Router in the Network When you configure a router for dial backup you must specify whether the router initiates calls or waits to receive calls The router placing the backup call waits until the primary circuit fails The other router then waits for the call without trying to initiate one If you do not specify the role of each router they try to call one another simultaneously and each router receives a busy signal Yo
253. e for the parameter that you want to modify Click on Help or see the parameter descriptions beginning on page A 107 For the Local Circuit and Local Group parameters you must click on Values and select a different circuit from the list then click on OK The Caller Resolution Table window opens Click on Apply and then click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window 16 6 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Customizing Caller Resolution Deleting a Caller Resolution Entry You can delete any caller resolution table entry using the BCC demand and backup only or Site Manager Using the BCC To delete a caller resolution table entry navigate to the caller resolution prompt and enter delete For example caller resolution blncorp delete Using Site Manager To delete a caller resolution table entry Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window The Dialup menu opens choose Dialup 2 Choose Caller Resolution Table The Caller Resolution Table window opens 3 To delete an entry select it and click on Delete 4 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window 308621 14 00 Rev 00 16 7 Appendix A Site Manager Parameters After you configure a dial service you can modify any parameter for your network This appendix describes each of the dial service parameters that you can configure The para
254. e frame relay parameters For example to set the congestion timer to 1 5 seconds enter fram relay to phoenix congestion timer 1 5 From the frame relay demand circuit prompt you can access the following frame relay objects and modify the parameters associated with these objects default service dicmi lapf schedule service signaling 308621 14 00 Rev 00 12 3 Configuring Dial Services For example to modify DLCMI parameters for the demand circuit to phoenix enter fram relay to phoenix dlemi For more information about each frame relay interface parameter and how to modify all aspects of frame relay service such as service records PVCs and SVCs see Configuring Frame Relay Services Using Site Manager To modify a frame relay demand circuit using Site Manager you access the frame relay configuration windows from the Dialup menu To modify the frame relay interface Site Manager Procedure You do this 1 In the Configuration Manager window choose Dialup System responds The Dialup menu opens 2 Choose Demand Circuits The Demand Pools window opens 3 Click on FR Circuits The FR Demand Circuits window opens 4 Click on Demand Intf The FR Demand Interface List window opens 5 Set any frame relay interface parameters Click on Help or see Configuring Frame Relay Services 6 Click on Apply and then click on Done You return to the FR Demand Circuits
255. e groups combine physical devices and functional points in an ISDN network as follows e Terminal equipment 1 TE1 ISDN compatible devices for example the router with an ISDN BRI module e Terminal equipment 2 TE2 Non ISDN compatible devices such as analog phones and PCs e Network terminator 1 NT1 The point where the phone company s wires end at your premises e Network terminator 2 NT2 The point where any switching services occur at your premises e Line terminator LT The point where your network lines terminate at the phone company s central office e Exchange terminator ET Located at the phone company s central office it performs the switching exchange functions e Terminal adapter TA Provides ISDN connectivity to non ISDN devices 308621 14 00 Rev 00 4 5 Configuring Dial Services Reference Points Reference points also called interfaces bring two functions together A reference point may be physical along the ISDN line or merely a conceptual point where functions merge There are four main reference points in an ISDN network e R reference point The point between the non ISDN device and a terminal adapter It is the boundary between your equipment and the ISDN network e S reference point The point between the terminal equipment and the switching device at your premises e T reference point The point between your switching device and the subscriber side of the local
256. e outgoing phone list Frame relay circuits cannot answer incoming calls Consequently Specify the outgoing phone number This is the number of router 1 demand circuit to router1 out phone number 8005552323 out phone number to router1 8005552323 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Configuring Dial Services Dial on Demand for an ISDN Network Figure B 3 illustrates dial on demand service configured for an ISDN network In this configuration e The BLN is using a dual port MCT1 link module port 2 for its PRI interface e The ISDN switch type is PRI 5ESS e The IP static route configurations are not listed for the Ethernet interfaces Typically there would be static routes This example assumes the following e All BRI connections use a National ISDN 1 NI1 switch e There is no incoming call filtering e Sending complete IEs are not used for call setup e The adaption rate is 64 Kb s e CHAP is the PPP authentication protocol e JP is the only LAN protocol configured e The Ethernet segments shown in the network illustration are not configured e Only one phone number and SPID are used BRI lines usually have two phone numbers and SPIDs Router 1 ee MCT1 port 2 Router 2 oe 2 ISDN 1 ASN 4 L IL Local phone no 4366666 Local phone no 4364444 Switch type PRI 5ESS Switch type BRI NI1 CHAP local name
257. e parameters is equal or only the Global Adaption Rate parameter is set the router uses the global value and ignores the outgoing phone number s value If no value is set for either parameter the router uses the default 64 Kb s MIB Object ID 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 4 6 1 10 A 100 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Site Manager Parameters Parameter Remote Pool Type Path Dialup gt Demand Backup Bandwidth On Demand Circuits Demand Circuits PPP or FR Circuits gt PPP or FR Demand Circuits gt Phone Out gt Outgoing Phone List Backup Circuits PPP or Frame Relay gt Primary Circuit Definition or FR Primary Interface Definition gt Phone Out gt Outgoing Phone List Bandwidth Circuits Bandwidth On Demand Circuit Definition gt Phone Out gt Outgoing Phone List Default Dial and Bandwidth on Demand Options Dial on Demand Bandwidth on Demand Dial and Bandwidth on Demand Function Specifies whether the remote router s line associated with the outgoing phone number is in a demand pool bandwidth pool or both The router then uses only the outgoing phone numbers whose values for this parameter match the pool type of the destination connection This parameter is for applications that use bandwidth on demand to aid congested demand circuits By configuring the Remote Pool Type parameter you prevent the local circuit from using a phone number associated the wrong type of remote pool If a demand circuit places a call to a bandwidth
258. e pool Connection Mode Specifies whether the router initiates or receives calls WAN Protocol WAN protocol for the primary circuit Inactivity Timer secs Number of seconds that can elapse without data activity before the router terminates the connection Max Up Time min Maximum duration of a call for a continuous period of time Forced Dial Indicates whether the router is forcing an active connection Forced Take Down Indicates whether the router is forcing the termination of a connection Optimized Routing Indicates whether dial optimized routing is enabled show dial demand circuits advanced The show dial demand circuits advanced command provides information about the standby and callback demand circuits You can use the following filter flags and filter arguments with this command pool lt pool_ia gt shows circuit information about a specified demand pool circuit lt circuit_name gt shows circuit information about a specific demand circuit 308621 14 00 Rev 00 C 7 Configuring Dial Services The output contains the following information Demand Circuit Name Circuit name Pool ID Operational Mode Standby Failback Mode Manual Standby Action Callback Mode ID of the line pool Type of demand circuit that is normal or standby The failback operation from the standby circuit to the primary Indicates whether the operation of the standby circuit is controlled manually The role of the router in
259. e router does not attempt to place the call using this number Choosing the Single option is particularly important if the line is connected to an external device such as a modem If the router places a call to device that is busy it takes a long time before the router determines that the device is unavailable By selecting Single you eliminate this loss of time If you select Multiple the router can use the phone number for many calls For example if you are using PRI service you have many channels that can use the same phone number to place a call Therefore you would select Multiple for this parameter Choose Single if the remote destination can only support a single connection with this outgoing phone number If a circuit on the same slot is already using this phone number the router will use another phone number in the list Otherwise accept the default Multiple 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 4 6 1 12 A 102 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Site Manager Parameters Channel Bandwidth Type Dialup gt Demand Backup Bandwidth On Demand Circuits Demand Circuits PPP or FR Circuits gt PPP or FR Demand Circuits gt Phone Out gt Outgoing Phone List Backup Circuits PPP or Frame Relay gt Primary Circuit Definition or FR Primary Interface Definition gt Phone Out gt Outg
260. e slot number You do not have to enter a value 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 2 2 1 55 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Configuring Dial Services Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Reserved Bandwidth Slot Dialup gt Bandwidth On Demand Circuits gt Bandwidth On Demand Circuit Definition gt Options gt Bandwidth On Demand Monitor Options None Available slots in the bandwidth pool For example if the bandwidth pool has lines from slot 3 and slot 4 you cannot enter a value of 5 Specifies the slot the router chooses when adding a line to a multilink bundle if the preferred slot cannot provide a line For BAP configurations the non monitor router uses this parameter to determine which lines are available It then sends the local phone number associated with an available line to the monitor router which then dials the number to activate the line for additional bandwidth Enter the number of the slot you want the router to use after checking the preferred slot but note the following e Site Manager looks for another circuit configured as Monitor in the same pool as the newly created circuit If one exists Site Manager copies the value for the existing circuit s Reserved Bandwidth Slot parameter and enters it for this parameter You do not have to enter a value e If this is the first circuit configured
261. each dial service 308621 14 00 Rev 00 1 1 Configuring Dial Services How to Use This Guide This guide is organized as follows Overview of each dial service If you are new to Nortel Networks dial services begin with this chapter If not go to one of the starting chapters Starting chapters which explain how to set up a basic configuration using all of the defaults Go to Chapter 2 to start any dial service using Site Manager the graphical user interface network management tool Go to Chapter 3 to start dial on demand or dial backup service using the Bay Command Console BCC the command line interface configuration tool Chapters describing features specific to each dial service Read Chapters 5 6 7 and 8 to learn about the Nortel Networks implementation of dial service features Instructions for modifying the default configuration that you set up based on the instructions in Chapter 2 or 3 To customize a dial service configuration see Chapters 9 through 16 Most of the instructions assume that you created an initial configuration as described in Chapter 2 or 3 Appendixes for Site Manager parameter descriptions configuration examples BCC show commands ISDN ordering information and a list of AT modem initialization commands The names of the dial services are sometimes abbreviated in this guide Table 1 1 lists the full and abbreviated names of each dial service Table 1 1 Dial Service
262. eactivate 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 8 9 1 15 308621 14 00 Rev 00 A 33 Configuring Dial Services Demand Circuit Parameters PPP and Frame Relay The PPP and frame relay demand circuit windows contain the demand circuit parameters Figure A 10 shows the PPP Demand Circuits window The frame relay window is similar Done Add Values Demand Pool ID Force Take Down Force Dial Inactivity Time Retry Max Retry Delay Figure A 10 PPP Demand Circuits Window The parameter descriptions follow A 34 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Site Manager Parameters Demand Pool ID Dialup gt Demand Circuits gt Demand Pools gt PPP or FR Circuits gt PPP or FR Demand Circuits None 1 to 255 Identifies the demand pool associated with the demand circuit Enter the ID number of the configured demand pool that you want this circuit to use 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 4 5 1 6 Force Take Down Dialup gt Demand Circuits gt Demand Pools gt PPP or FR Circuits gt PPP or FR Demand Circuits Disable Enable Disable Forces the router to immediately terminate the demand circuit Accept the default Disable or select Enable to force the router to terminate the demand circuit
263. ebug Mode parameter A 11 demand circuit groups configuring 12 46 configuring caller resolution 16 2 protocols 12 47 relationship with demand pools 6 7 sample application 7 5 demand circuits activating 1 5 adding bandwidth 1 12 circuit duration 1 5 configuring 12 2 configuring as standby circuits 12 26 configuring availability 1 6 customizing 12 8 deleting 12 52 enabling a force dial 12 8 relationship with demand pools 1 8 scheduling availability 12 37 demand lines deleting from a pool 10 20 prioritizing in a pool 10 5 11 5 308621 14 00 Rev 00 demand pools configuring ISDN interfaces BCC 3 12 configuring ISDN interfaces Site Manager 2 8 configuring modem interfaces BCC 3 10 configuring modem interfaces Site Manager 2 6 configuring BCC 3 15 configuring Site Manager 2 6 customizing 9 1 description 1 8 IDs for 1 8 dial backup activating lines and circuits 1 15 circuits See backup circuits configuring BCC 3 1 configuring Site Manager 2 2 implementation notes 7 1 lines for failed primary circuits 1 20 overview 1 14 pools See backup pools Dial Optimized Routing parameter A 39 dial services configuring with Site Manager 2 1 configuring with the BCC 3 1 overview 1 1 dial on demand circuits See demand circuits configuring BCC 3 1 configuring Site Manager 2 2 enabling protocols 12 3 implementation notes 6 1 overview 1 5 pools See demand pools dial optimized routing conf
264. ections Subsequent chapters in this manual describe how to configure each service to connect to an ISDN network 308621 14 00 Rev 00 5 13 Configuring Dial Services B Channel Support In keeping with the PRI standard each port on the MCT1 Link Module provides 23 B channels operating at 64 Kb s for data transmission Each port on the MCE1 Link Module provides 30 B channels operating at 64 Kb s for data transmission D Channel Support The router supports full 64 Kb s D channel signaling and call setup and teardown between the router and ISDN switch The D channel implementation complies with the ITU T 1988 recommendations Q 921 and Q 931 and provides signaling support for the following switches e Net5 for Austria Belgium Denmark France Germany Italy Netherlands Norway Spain Sweden United Kingdom Switzerland Finland Greece Iceland Ireland Luxembourg and Portugal e AT amp T 5ESS and 4ESS Custom and DMS 100 Custom for the United States e DMS 100 Custom for Canada e NTT and KDD for Japan e S014 for Australia Nortel Networks routers do not support data transmission across the D channel Selective PRI Service Your ISDN service provider may offer a service option that provides only a fixed number of PRI B channels out of the full complement of B channels This subset of channels is usually offered at an economical rate The ISDN service provider limits the number of channels by keeping the unavailable channels b
265. ed on asynchronous lines RS 449 synchronous lines RS 449 V 35 RS 422 and X 21 and ISDN interfaces Table 1 2 lists the primary and backup lines that you can configure Table 1 2 Primary and Backup Lines Line Type Primary Any leased line up to T1 E1 rates including multiline Standard and PPP only and multilink connections Frame relay multiline circuits and L2TP circuits cannot be dial backup primaries Frame relay PVCs Backup Any WAN line including ISDN B channels Lines must be in the dial backup pool 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Dial Services Overview Table 1 3 lists the protocols for each type of primary and backup circuit Table 1 3 Primary and Backup Circuit Protocols If the primary circuit s protocol is The backup circuit s protocol can be Standard Async or Sync PPP PPP Frame relay backing up a service record with only one PVC direct mode Async or Sync PPP Async or Sync PPP Frame relay backing up the entire frame relay interface group mode Activating the Backup Line When the router detects a failure on the primary line it selects a line from a Frame relay only backup pool The router activates a backup line when e The primary circuit is not operating e All of the primary circuit s lines have failed e An active backup line has failed If the backup line itself fails an inactive backup line can replace it only if you
266. efix parameter A 104 P PAP IDs 5 4 See also caller resolution table PAP Local ID parameter A 48 PAP Password parameter caller resolution table A 108 circuit A 49 demand circuit group A 66 Index 5 phone lists local phone list creating 15 23 outgoing phone lists creating BCC 3 21 outgoing phone lists creating Site Manager 2 27 outgoing phone lists modifying 15 4 overview 15 1 Phone Number parameter V 34 modem A 16 phone numbers for the local router 2 28 3 22 ping command for ISDN calls 5 20 Point to Point Protocol PPP asynchronous PPP 5 6 10 2 multilink bandwidth on demand 8 2 described 6 14 fragmentation 8 4 requirement for dial services 2 3 5 5 special line record for dial services 16 2 used to identify routers 5 1 Pool Channel Count parameter A 25 Pool Channel Priority parameter A 26 Pool ID parameter demand circuit groups A 62 Port Application Mode parameter BRI A 19 Port Application Mode parameter PRI A 18 PPP Circuit Mode parameter A 83 PPP See Point to Point Protocol PPP Preferred Bandwidth Slot parameter A 85 PRI See primary rate interface primary circuits activating backups 1 15 BofL messages for 1 19 creating 13 2 customizing 14 2 description 1 14 detecting failures 1 19 frame relay 13 5 recovering from failure 1 19 Primary Down Time parameter A 75 primary lines See primary circuits primary rate interface PRI configuring BCC 3 14 confi
267. er Parameters Parameter Pool Channel Count Path Dialup gt Demand Backup Bandwidth on Demand Pools gt Pools gt Add gt Demand Backup Bandwidth on Demand Pool Configuration gt OK gt Lines Definition gt ISDN MCT1 MCE1 Connector gt ISDN Switch Configuration gt OK gt ISDN Logical Lines OR Dialup gt Demand Backup Bandwidth on Demand Pools gt Pools gt select pool gt Edit gt Lines Definition gt ISDN MCT1 MCE1 Connector gt ISDN Logical Lines Default Available B channels Options 1 to 2 BRI 1 to 23 PRI MCT1 1 to 30 PRI MCE1 The channel count range for PRI depends on the number of B channels you selected in the Timeslots window and the number out of this total that you assign to each pool For example if you have a total of 20 B channels and five of those channels are configured for Pool 1 the range of this parameter for Pool 2 is 1 to 15 channels Five of the original 20 channels are not available because they are used by Pool 1 Function Determines the number of B channels in the line pool Instructions Enter the number of B channels that you want in the line pool If you are configuring a multirate call be sure that the value for this parameter is not less than the maximum value that you can set for the Aggregate Bandwidth parameter which you configure when you set up an outgoing phone list For example if the aggregate bandwidth is 256 Kb s the value for this parameter should be 4 MIB Ob
268. er obie ooi PE 12 32 Configuring Server and Client Delays ccsscctccsccsntsccecsticr otesaidasorssioteuscenscciere 12 34 Choosing the Severity Level for Error Messages ccccceeeeteeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeaees 12 35 Adding Bandwidth Service for Demand Lines PPP Only n se R P asas 12 36 Adding Layer 3 Protocols to PPP Demand Circuits 0 cceceeeeeeeseceeeeeeeeseteeeeeeeees 12 36 Scheduling Demand Circuit Availability cccsccescsnnsnscanceradecrsacdaxecanssacescstoansneuhscaanen 12 37 Scheduling PPP Standby OMS opiniii n a a S 12 41 Using Schedules to Manage Standby Circuit Availability 0 cee 12 41 Configuring Multiple Time of Day Schedules aiai ere E 12 41 Deleting aC SINUINGS snertir aaae E e EES 12 45 Configuring Demand Circuit Groupes iia ccecicansiissscsarmessasnensnedasaiiaseaaiseasnadaantearananees 12 46 Protocol Configuration for Demand Circuit Groups T T mere 12 47 Caller Resolution Information for Demand Circuit Group cccceeeeeeetteeeeees 12 47 Modifying the Demand Circuit Group Configuration cecceeeeceeeeeeeeteeeees 12 49 Modifying the Number of Circuits in a Demand Circuit Group eee 12 49 Modifying the Demand Pool That the Demand Circuit Group Uses 12 50 Removing a Demand Circuit Group aikai rere T ieee 12 51 Removing Demand GGUS ssceccassesuicie tines Aedes ate eens 12 52 Deleting Hot Standby Circuits soo ticc s
269. ervice the router divides the outbound data traffic among all links in the bundle The external clock speed of each line determines how much of the total traffic each link receives On the receiving end multilink resequences packets arriving on different links using the sequence number from the multilink header For more information about traffic distribution see Configuring PPP Services 8 8 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Bandwidth on Demand Implementation Notes External Clock Speed Effects on Congestion Thresholds The router uses several congestion threshold parameters to measure congestion on the bandwidth circuit The values of these parameters determine when the router activates additional lines to relieve congestion If you want to change the clock speed of your leased line to a value other than the default 64 Kb s this affects how the router calculates the congestion thresholds To ensure that the router s calculations are accurate you must modify the clock speed using the synchronous line parameter External Clock Speed When you configure this parameter to match the line speed you ensure that the congestion thresholds will be correct The External Clock Speed parameter is part of the synchronous line configuration To access synchronous line parameters begin at the Configuration Manager window and choose Circuits gt Edit Lines From here you can select the circuit that you want to edit For instructions on accessing and mo
270. es If a demand line becomes congested the router can provide 29 additional dial up lines to reduce congestion To do this you enable bandwidth service for the demand line by associating it with a previously configured bandwidth pool To add bandwidth service for a demand line Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window choose Dialup The Dialup menu opens Choose Demand Circuits The Demand Circuits menu opens 3 Choose PPP Circuits The PPP Demand Circuits window opens 4 Click on BW on Demand The Enter a BOD Pool window opens Enter the ID of an existing bandwidth pool for the Bandwidth on Demand Pool ID parameter then click on OK Optionally click on Remove BOD only if you want to remove bandwidth service for the demand circuit otherwise go to the next step The BOD Configuration window opens The parameters in this window determine whether the router acts as the monitor router which means that it monitors congestion on the line and whether the router activates additional lines to relieve congestion Click on OK You return to the PPP Demand Circuits window Do one of the following If you added ISDN lines or modem lines V 25bis or Hayes to the pool go to Creating an Outgoing Phone List on page 2 27 If you added only Raise DTR lines to the pool click on Done and go to Setting Up the C
271. es Definition window 8 Choose File gt Exit You return to the Backup Pools window 9 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window 308621 14 00 Rev 00 B 39 Configuring Dial Services Backup Circuit Configuration After you configure the backup pool configure the backup circuits for each router by completing the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window choose Dialup The Dialup menu opens Choose Backup Circuits The Backup Circuits menu opens 3 Choose PPP The Primary Circuit Definition window opens which lists the leased circuits that you configured Select a leased circuit name and click on Cct Type Set the Circuit Type parameter to Primary for both routers The Circuit Options window opens Set the Pool ID parameter to 1 for both routers then click on OK Set the Backup Mode parameter as follows Router 1 Master default Router 2 Slave You return to the Primary Circuit Definition window For router 1 only set the CHAP Local Name parameter to ASN For router 1 only set the CHAP Secret parameter to ISDN 10 Click on Apply Site Manager saves your changes 11 Keep the Primary Circuit Definition window open and go to the next section Remember that you do not actually configure a backup circuit
272. eserved RC144 F3 Select V 23 line modulation RC144 F4 Select V 22 or Bell 212A 1200 b s line speed RC144 F5 Select V 22bis line modulation RC144 F6 Select V 32bis or V 32 4800 line modulation RC144 F7 Select V 32bis 7200 line modulation RC144 F8 Select V 32bis or V 32 9600 line modulation RC144 continued 308621 14 00 Rev 00 E 1 Configuring Dial Services Table E 1 Summary of AT Modem Initialization Commands continued Command Function F9 Select V 32bis 12000 line modulation RC144 F10 Select V 32bis 14400 line modulation RC144 HO Initiate a hang up sequence H1 If on hook go off hook and enter command mode 10 Report product code l1 Report precomputed checksum 12 Report OK 13 Report firmware revision model and interface type 14 Report response programmed by an OEM I5 Report the country code parameter l6 Report modem data pump model and code revision I7 Report the DAA code W class models only LO Set low speaker volume L1 Set low speaker volume L2 Set medium speaker volume L3 Set high speaker volume MO Turn speaker off M1 Turn speaker on during handshaking and off while receiving carrier M2 Turn speaker on during handshaking and while receiving carrier M3 Turn speaker off during dialing and receiving carrier and turn speaker on during answering NO Turn off automode detection N1 Turn o
273. eters Auto Demand Termination Auto Demand Term Reset Click on Help or see the parameter descriptions on page A 38 6 Click on Apply then click on Done You return to the Demand Pools window 7 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window Modifying PPP Authentication Information To configure PPP authentication you can use CHAP or PAP For instructions on configuring CHAP authentication see Chapter 2 Starting Dial Services Using Site Manager or Chapter 3 Starting Dial Services Using the BCC For detailed information about CHAP and PAP see Chapter 5 Implementation Notes for All Dial Services 308621 14 00 Rev 00 12 15 Configuring Dial Services Using the BCC Changing the Authentication Protocol CHAP is the default authentication protocol To change the authentication protocol navigate to the dial prompt and enter authentication protocol lt protoco gt protocol can be pap chap or none For example to switch from the default protocol to PAP enter dial serial 1 1 authentication protocol pap Modifying CHAP If you configure CHAP as the authentication protocol you must configure a CHAP name and secret The CHAP name is part of the outbound call and informs remote peer routers of the local router s identity The CHAP secret is for identification and security and must be the same on both sides of the link To change the CHAP nam
274. eviously configured as leased lines for the backup pool e The lines in a backup pool can reside across slots and can combine Raise DTR V 25bis Hayes and ISDN lines Go to one of the following sections e Specifying the ISDN Switch Type on page 3 17 e Specifying the Authentication Protocol Information on page 3 20 3 16 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Starting Dial Services Using the BCC Specifying the ISDN Switch Type For ISDN networks you must ensure that the router is configured to communicate with the ISDN switch at the service provider site The BCC configures the isdn switch object automatically when you issue the dial command at a BRI channel prompt or PRI interface prompt The router uses a default switch type of pridess for PRI and brinet3 for BRI You must set the switch type parameter to the correct value for your network or the dial up line will not operate properly To specify the switch type navigate to the isdn switch prompt and enter switch type lt type gt type is the type of switch used in the network and can be any of the following brinet3 brintt prikdd briswissnet3 brits013 printt bri5ess brini1 prinet5 bridms100 pri4ess prits014 brivn3 pri5ess brikdd pridms100 For example isdn switch 3 switch type brini1 Go to one of the following sections Configuring PPP Demand Circuits on page 3 18 e Configuring PPP Backup Circuits on page 3 19 308621 14 00 Rev 00 3 17 Configuring Dial
275. ext section 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Configuring Dial Services Outgoing Phone List Configuration To configure the outgoing phone list complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the PPP Demand Circuits window choose Phone Out The Outgoing Phone List window opens Click on Add The Phone Number window opens 3 Set the Outgoing Phone Number parameter as follows Router 1 4364444 Router 2 4366666 Do not use hyphens or other nonnumeric characters Click on OK Click on Done Keep the PPP Demand Circuits window open and go to the next section You return to the Outgoing Phone List window with the new phone number displayed You return to the PPP Demand Circuits window The ISDN Numbering Plan and ISDN Numbering Type parameters default to the correct settings based on the switch type you configured Do not change these parameters unless you receive explicit instructions from your service provider 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Protocol Configuration Configuration Examples From the PPP Demand Circuits window select the protocol for this configuration by completing the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 Inthe PPP Demand Circuits window click The Protocols menu opens on Protocols in the top left corner 2 Choose on Add Delete The Sele
276. f the factory default modem initialization string is enabled or disabled When enabled the router sends only the default string ATT amp d0 amp k3 amp X0S0 2S2 43 to the modem When disabled the router sends a user specified initialization string set in the Modem Config String parameter after sending the default string Commands in the user specified string take precedence over the factory default command string Enable or disable the exclusive use of the factory default modem initialization string 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 29 1 1 8 Originate Answer Configuration Manager gt COM Connector gt Edit Modem gt Edit V 34 Modem Interface Parameters Originate Originate Answer Determines whether the modem answers or originates calls Set the modem to answer or originate calls Not applicable Phone Number COM Connector gt Edit Modem gt Edit V 34 Modem Interface Parameters None An ASCII text string Specifies the number to dial for calls that the modem originates Enter a complete dial out phone number including applicable country and area codes Valid dial modifiers are the comma exclamation point ampersand amp hyphen and parenthesis 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 29 1 1 18 A 16 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instruct
277. f you do not have enough lines to accommodate the number of circuits you can enable an oversubscription timer This timer determines how often the router retries a connection so that it can send routing updates if the previous attempt failed The router keeps a list of circuits requesting connections and tries to establish these connections when the timer expires To configure the oversubscription timer you must use the Technician Interface you cannot do this using Site Manager The attribute entry is wfSwservOptsEntry wfS wservOptsOverSubRetryTimer The default value is 2 minutes the maximum value is 1440 minutes See Configuring IP ARP RARP RIP and OSPF Services for information about RIP and Configuring IPX Services for information about RIP SAP 308621 14 00 Rev 00 6 11 Configuring Dial Services IP RIP Triggered Updates and Broadcast Timers To prevent broadcast messages from keeping the demand circuit active you can configure the RIP broadcast timer and triggered updates The broadcast timer lets you configure how often the router sends routing updates to the network Unlike the broadcast timer triggered updates are sent immediately after the router detects a routing change in the network If you set the broadcast timer to a high value for example several hours and you enable triggered updates you limit the frequency of broadcast traffic while maintaining the accuracy of the routing tables By limiting broadcast traffic
278. face that will use dial backup service Leased Interface Configuration Configure router 1 with a leased synchronous interface named S131 as follows Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds ile In the Configuration Manager window The Add Circuit window opens select a COM port 2 Inthe Circuit Name field enter S131 then The WAN Protocols menu opens click on OK 3 Choose PPP The Select Protocols menu opens 4 Choose IP and click on OK The IP Configuration window opens continued 308621 14 00 Rev 00 B 37 Configuring Dial Services Site Manager Procedure continued You do this 5 Set the IP Address parameter to 140 1 1 1 System responds Set the Subnet Mask parameter to 255 255 255 0 Click on OK You return to the Configuration Manager window Configure router 2 with a leased synchronous interface named S12 as follows Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window select a COM port In the Circuit Name field enter 12 then click on OK The Add Circuit window opens The WAN Protocols menu opens 3 Choose PPP The Select Protocols menu opens 4 Choose IP and click on OK The IP Configuration window opens 5 Set the IP Address parameter to 140 1 1 2 Set the Subnet Mask parameter to 255 255 255 0 Click on OK
279. fers transmitted without errors Number of octets received without errors Number of frames received without errors Number of bytes received without errors Number of octets transmitted without errors Number of frames transmitted without errors Number of bytes transmitted without errors 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Appendix D Ordering ISDN Lines in the United States This appendix provides information about ordering ISDN lines in the United States Ordering BRI Lines When ordering ISDN BRI lines for use in the United States note the following e Configure the B1 and B2 channels for data only e Configure the D channel for signaling only Table D 1 lists the parameters to set for the AT amp T SESS switch Table D 2 lists the parameters to set for the Nortel Networks DMS 100 switch Your telephone company may ask you to provide this information when you order your BRI lines Table D 1 BRI Parameters for the AT amp T 5ESS Switch Parameter Value Notes Terminal Type A Number of CSD 2 Number of CSV Oori 1 if an ISDN phone was connected to the S T bus Number of Call 1 Appearances Display is Y N No Ringing Idle Call Idle Default for terminal type A Appearances Autohold is Y N No Default for terminal type A Onetouch is Y N No Default for terminal type A 308621 14 00 Rev 00 D 1 Configuring Dial Services Table D 2 BRI Parameters for the Nortel Netw
280. ficult to manage Remote Authentication Dial In User Service RADIUS centralizes security and accounting information improving security and providing a solution that adapts to the changing needs of the remote user and service providers RADIUS operates between a client and a server with the router acting as the RADIUS client The dial service enables the router to activate a dial up connection for RADIUS calls Using the BCC or Site Manager you can configure RADIUS on all router platforms except the System 5000 You can configure RADIUS for the System 5000 using the BCC To learn more about RADIUS see Configuring RADIUS RADIUS Authentication Services Using VSAs RADIUS clients must have a way to authenticate remote callers For RADIUS clients that use a dial service you identify remote callers by configuring vendor specific attributes VSAs on the RADIUS server These attributes identify the remote router and enable you to store customized profiles for that router For more information about VSAs refer to Request for Comments RFC 2138 and RFC 2139 The fields within the VSA attribute identify this router s vendor and set restrictions or enable certain privileges The Nortel Networks ID is 1584 The only required VSA is Annex Local IP Address which specifies the IP address of the local port This VSA must match the IP address of the interface receiving the call When a call comes in that needs authentication the router first
281. fies the time of day any secondary lines are available if you configure bandwidth on demand service for a PPP demand circuit Enter an hour of the day using the 24 hour system of expressing time For example to activate the circuit at 5 00 p m enter 1700 For the router to activate the circuit at the configured start time ensure that the Availability Mode parameter is set to the default Available If you do not want the router to activate the circuit at the start time set the Availability Mode to Not Available 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 4 11 1 5 308621 14 00 Rev 00 A 57 Configuring Dial Services Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID End Time Demand Circuits Dialup gt Demand Circuits gt Demand Pools gt PPP or FR Circuits gt PPP or FR Demand Circuits gt Schedule gt Circuit Time of Day Schedule or Pool Availability List gt Add gt Circuit Time of Day Schedule Backup Circuits Dialup gt Backup Circuits gt PPP or Frame Relay gt Primary Circuit Definition or FR Primary Interface Definition gt Schedule gt Circuit Time of Day Schedule gt Add gt Circuit Time of Day Schedule 2400 0 to 2400 Specifies the time of day the demand or backup circuit is no longer available The router uses this parameter and the Start Time parameter to establish a time period when the circuit is available This value also specifies the time of day that all secondary lines are deactivate
282. figuring Dial Services Using the ping Command for ISDN Connections To check the availability of a remote device in an ISDN network you can use the ping command The ping command sends an Internet Control Message Protocol ICMP echo request to a remote address that you specify You can issue this command by using the Site Manager Administration option Ping from Router by using the Technician Interface or by using the BCC Call setups for dial connections require more time than setups for ISDN connections When you ping a remote device using the default timeout value 5 seconds it may fail because the router does not wait long enough for a response from the remote device Therefore you may want to increase the timeout value so that the router will allow enough time for a response For information about using the ping command see Configuring and Managing Routers with Site Manager or Using Technician Interface Software 5 20 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Chapter 6 Dial on Demand Implementation Notes This chapter contains the following information about dial on demand Topic Page Bay Command Console 6 1 Standby Circuits 6 2 Callback 6 5 Demand Circuit Groups 7 Managing Broadcast Traffic over Demand Circuits 6 8 Data Compression 6 13 PPP Multilink 14 Protocol Prioritization 6 15 Bay Command Console You can configure dial on demand service using the Bay Command Console BCC The BCC is
283. for ISDN and modem calls How ISDN Calls Use Phone Lists For ISDN calls the router uses the outgoing incoming and local phone lists The instructions to configure each phone list begin on page 15 4 Outgoing and Incoming Phone Lists The router uses the outgoing phone list to place calls to remote routers on an ISDN network The router uses the incoming phone list to implement incoming call filtering Incoming call filtering is a security feature that lets you identify a remote caller To operate this feature you must purchase caller ID service from your ISDN provider If you enable incoming call filtering the router matches the caller s phone number with a number in the incoming phone list The list contains the phone numbers of only authorized callers If the number is not in the list the router rejects the call 15 2 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Customizing Phone Lists Features such as callback for demand circuits rely on incoming call filtering for certain callback modes For more information about the callback feature see Callback on page 6 5 Caution To use incoming call filtering you must purchase caller ID service If you enable incoming call filtering without having caller ID service the router rejects all incoming calls Local Phone Lists For BRI connections the router uses the local phone list for the following purposes e To identify itself when it places a call to a remote router The loc
284. from the date Software is first shipped to Licensee Nortel Networks will replace defective media at no charge if it is returned to Nortel Networks during the warranty period along with proof of the date of shipment This warranty does not apply if the media has been damaged as a result of accident misuse or abuse The Licensee assumes all responsibility for selection of the Software to achieve Licensee s intended results and for the installation use and results obtained from the Software Nortel Networks does not warrant a that the functions contained in the software will meet the Licensee s requirements b that the Software will operate in the hardware or software combinations that the Licensee may select c that the operation of the Software will be uninterrupted or error free or d that all defects in the operation of the Software will be corrected Nortel Networks is not obligated to remedy any Software defect that cannot be reproduced with the latest Software release These warranties do not apply to the Software if it has been i altered except by Nortel Networks or in accordance with its instructions ii used in conjunction with another vendor s product resulting in the defect or iii damaged by improper environment abuse misuse accident or negligence THE FOREGOING WARRANTIES AND LIMITATIONS ARE EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES AND ARE IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION ANY WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABIL
285. ger 2 28 creating 15 23 modifying 15 26 Manual Standby Action parameter A 42 Max UpTime Termination parameter A 52 Maximum Links parameter A 86 Maximum Up Time parameter A 51 MCE1 modifying parameters 11 2 MCT1 modifying parameters 11 2 MIB object ID using A 3 Minimum Call Duration parameter A 53 Modem Command String parameter A 12 Modem Config String parameter A 15 modem configuration AT initialization commands 5 8 E 1 customizing 10 7 selecting modems 5 8 modem control character map 9 5 Modem Factory Defaults parameter A 16 Modem Init String parameter A 12 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Modem Type parameter A 11 MTU parameter A 32 multilink fragmentation 8 4 Multilink Fragmentation parameter A 88 multilink See Point to Point Protocol PPP multirate description 5 15 N network terminator NT1 description 4 5 network terminator NT2 description 4 5 No of Rings to Answer parameter A 14 Number of Circuits parameter A 63 O one way authentication 5 2 Originate Answer parameter A 16 OSPF Enable parameter demand circuit groups A 64 Outbound Authentication parameter A 50 outbound traffic filtering 6 12 Outgoing Phone Delimiter parameter A 97 Outgoing Phone Ext SubAddr parameter A 96 outgoing phone lists creating BCC 3 21 creating Site Manager 2 27 modifying 15 4 Outgoing Phone Number parameter A 95 Outgoing Phone Number Type parameter A 98 Outgoing Phone Pr
286. gestion it activates an additional line in this case an ISDN B channel If the volume of traffic is still heavy the monitor router adds more channels until congestion is relieved New York City Boston Leased line 4 7 Nonmonitor router 4 Monitor router ae ce Coe At soe oe 7 z Secondary circuits in a multilink bundle DS0003A Figure 8 1 Multilink and Bandwidth on Demand Operation For more information about PPP multilink see Configuring PPP Services 308621 14 00 Rev 00 8 3 Configuring Dial Services Multilink Fragmentation Multilink fragmentation splits datagrams into smaller packets when necessary and sends these packets across links in a multilink bundle Fragmentation improves the distribution of data across multilink lines and uses buffer resources more efficiently thereby improving communication over bandwidth circuits Nortel Networks routers comply with RFC 1717 which defines PPP multilink Packets sent across links in a multilink bundle have an outer header packet that contains a unique packet sequence number and allows for the following e Fragmentation of the original packets e Assignment of sequence numbers to each fragment e Transmission across links in a multilink bundle e Reassembly of the original sequence and packet size at the destination router For more information about multilink and fragmentation see Configuring PPP Services PPP Bandwidth Alloca
287. gger Size parameter Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 88 The Bandwidth On Demand Monitor Options window opens To disable fragmentation set the Multilink Fragmentation parameter to Prohibited Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 88 Click on OK You return to the Bandwidth On Demand Definition window Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window 308621 14 00 Rev 00 14 7 Configuring Dial Services Enabling BAP for Bandwidth on Demand Service BAP enables you to manage the allocation of bandwidth for links in a multilink bundle that is the dial up circuits that relieve the congested bandwidth circuit Before enabling this protocol you need to configure bandwidth on demand service according to the instructions in Chapter 2 and this chapter For an overview of BAP see Chapter 8 Bandwidth on Demand Implementation Notes To configure BAP Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window The Dialup menu opens choose Dialup 2 Choose Bandwidth on Demand Circuits The Bandwidth On Demand Circuit Definition window opens 3 Click on Options The Bandwidth On Demand Monitor Options window opens 4 Set the following parameters BAP Enable BAP No Phone Number Needed Click on Help or see the parameter descriptions beginning on page A 88 5 Click on OK You return
288. guring Site Manager 2 11 implementation on router 5 13 multirate 5 15 Index 6 rate adaption 5 17 router as a TE device 5 10 signaling support for countries 5 14 using fixed number of channels 5 14 Priority parameter A 8 product support xxx protocol prioritization bandwidth on demand 8 8 dial on demand 6 15 protocols for demand circuits configuring BCC frame relay 12 3 configuring BCC PPP 3 18 configuring Site Manager frame relay 12 4 configuring Site Manager PPP 2 15 public switched telephone network for dial services 1 3 1 4 publications hard copy xxx R R reference point ISDN description 4 6 RADIUS description 5 9 Raise DTR signaling configuring BCC 3 10 configuring Site Manager 2 6 description 1 4 modifying BCC 10 4 modifying Site Manager 10 5 rate adaption for ISDN calls 5 17 Redial Count parameter A 10 Remote Pool Type parameter A 101 Reserved Bandwidth Slot parameter A 86 Retry Delay parameter A 10 A 37 Retry Max parameter A 36 RFC 1661 compliance 5 6 Ring Indicator parameter A 10 RIP Enable parameter demand circuit groups A 64 Routing Information Protocol RIP adding to demand circuits 12 37 broadcast timers 6 12 triggered updates 6 12 Routing Update Hold Time parameter A 40 308621 14 00 Rev 00 S S reference point ISDN description 4 6 S T interface ISDN 5 10 secondary lines activating for bandwidth 1 25 location
289. h on Demand Lines and Pools E ere asgi ETA 1 25 How Lines Pools and Circuits Work Together sssssssseesseessssesssessseesreessressrenssrns 1 26 Sample Bandwidth on Demand Application cccceecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeteeetees 1 27 Using the Same Line for All Dial Services c ss cisccdeccccssccencsictenescceandareessnendeonentie ais 1 27 Chapter 2 Starting Dial Services Using Site Manager Before You Begin aoaaa P PP E dinna PARE E T 2 2 Seimo Upa Dial DUVET ausira aA T E AE 2 2 GP ENING saanane aAa Aaa EE a ASAE 2 6 Creating Line Pools with Modemi LINGS ccs sccctaccccteetsontatatesonac sitet casebindasviatiereacccanees 2 6 Greating Line Fools wiih ISON INES sec sseciscsuvapieiatinedis iiihana arenes 2 8 Configuring BRI Lines na errr EE ere eee 2 9 Contigurmo ERI DiaFUp LINGE ccs asteie sccccanecieanivedetcuestuee dequecneedccedatatiasetasmddincsannes 2 9 Configuring BRI Leased Lines Germany and Japan Only sessen 2 10 Configuring PRI Lines seins E T obieni PEt onin it 2 11 Addmo J SDN Cpes to Pogi raniona N EA 2 13 Congr OVENS si er ontrnT er erorernsd ter tent rmn ie Teter centre renter eearrrr et 2 14 GCi atitig PPP Diakon Demand CPOUINS csucdtasscconcacetnnepadcnanineeaaiomnendactadarentdacantinlacesaaanee 2 15 Specifying the Authentication Protocol Information ccccceesceeeeeeeetteeteneeeeees 2 16 Specifying the Connection Mode Gene rere ET mies T ere errs 2 17 EE FUN
290. hake Authentication Protocol CRC cyclic redundancy check CSU channel service unit DLCI data link connection identifier DLCMI data link control management interface DSL Digital Subscriber Loop DSU data service unit ET exchange terminator HDLC High level Data Link Control ICMP Internet Control Message Protocol IFTF interframe time fill IP Internet Protocol IPX Internetwork Packet Exchange ISDN Integrated Services Digital Network ITU T International Telecommunication Union Telecommunication Standardization Sector formerly CCITT LAN local area network LAPD Link Access Procedure Digital LCP Link Control Protocol xxviii 308621 14 00 Rev 00 LOR LT MIB MRU NCP NT PAP PH PPP PRI PSPDN PSTN PVC RADIUS RIP SAP SAPI SCC SPID SVC TA TE TEI UNI VSA WAN XNS Preface Link Quality Report line terminator management information base maximum receive unit Network Control Protocol network terminator Password Authentication Protocol packet handling Point to Point Protocol primary rate interface packet switched Public Data Network public switched telephone network permanent virtual circuit Remote Authentication Dial In User Service Routing Information Protocol Service Advertising Protocol service access point identifier serial communication controller Service Profile Identifier switched virtual circuit terminal adapter terminal equipment terminal endpoint identifier user to network interf
291. hallenge message Router A looks in its table verifies that router B is an authorized caller and brings up circuit 27 the connection to router B PAP is similar to CHAP but PAP uses a PAP ID and password as part of the identification process The calling router places its PAP ID and password in the authenticate request to the called router The called router first looks in the caller resolution table to find the PAP ID referred to as the Caller Name in the table If the router finds the PAP ID it then checks the table for the password associated with the ID and compares it to the password in the authenticate request If the passwords match the router brings up the circuit To configure the caller resolution table see Chapter 16 Customizing Caller Resolution For more information about CHAP names and PAP IDs see Configuring PPP Services 308621 14 00 Rev 00 5 5 Configuring Dial Services WAN Encryption Protocol You can configure the WAN Encryption Protocol WEP to work with all three dial services Nortel Networks data encryption services enable you to protect sensitive traffic on your network Encryption prevents unauthorized persons from reading changing or replaying data that travels between Nortel Networks routers To configure WEP for a PPP or frame relay circuit leased or dial see Configuring Data Encryption Services Using Encryption with Dial Backup If you configure encryption to work with dial backup se
292. he BRI Interface Configuration window opens 3 Set the X 25 over ISDN D Channel parameter to Enable Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 30 4 Set the following parameters if necessary TEI Type for X 25 over ISDN D TEI Value for X 25 over ISDN D Click on Help or see the parameter descriptions beginning on page A 30 continued 308621 14 00 Rev 00 11 13 Configuring Dial Services Site Manager Procedure continued You do this 5 Click on OK System responds If this is the first BRI line that you are configuring the ISDN Switch Configuration window opens Otherwise you return to the ISDN Dialup window 6 If the ISDN Switch Configuration window is open click on OK Otherwise skip to step 7 The X 25 Packet and Service configuration windows open You must configure certain parameters in each of these windows See Configuring X 25 Services for instructions When you exit from the X 25 windows you return to the ISDN Dialup window 7 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window To disable X 25 over the D channel go to Disabling X 25 over the D Channel on page 11 14 Note Site Manager modifies the ranges that you can set for certain packet and service parameters to accommodate data over the D channel Disabling X 25 over the D Channel You can globally disable X 25 over the D channel using the BC
293. he Demand Backup or Bandwidth on Demand Pools window Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Configuring Dial Services Modifying PPP Dial Interfaces in a Pool Using the BCC you can modify several PPP parameters to customize how PPP lines operate as dial interfaces You can modify these parameters for both modem and ISDN lines The next sections describe how to set these parameters To set the equivalent Site Manager parameters see Configuring PPP Services Setting a Time Limit for Convergence Convergence occurs when the peers have negotiated all the parameters needed to establish a dial connection You can limit the amount of time that PPP attempts to negotiate a dial PPP interface by setting the convergence timer parameter The convergence timer specifies the maximum number of seconds allowed for the completed negotiations It limits the LCP negotiations and requires at least one NCP to negotiate within the configured amount of time The default value is 300 seconds If the timer expires before the negotiation completes the connection is cleared The convergence timer allots the configured number of seconds for the Link Control Protocol LCP to negotiate and allots the same period for one Network Control Protocol NCP to complete negotiations To set the convergence timer navigate to the dial prompt and enter convergence timer lt integer gt integer is a
294. he ISDN S T or U interface ARN only The router starts this timer while the ISDN interface is deactivated and the router tries to activate it for example when the router wants to send data During this period the router sends INFO 1 frames across the ISDN interface until the network responds with a signal or the timer expires This timer prevents the router from attempting to activate the ISDN interface interminably Enter a time limit that is sufficient for the router to activate the ISDN S T or U interface This value should be greater than the time it would take to activate the ISDN interface under normal conditions You may want to ask your ISDN provider for guidelines regarding the subscriber loop transmission which might affect the value you enter 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 8 9 1 14 BRI T4 Timer ISDN Connector gt ISDN Dialup gt Edit D Chan gt BRI Interface Configuration 750 milliseconds 500 to 1000 milliseconds Indicates the amount of time the router waits for the line to recover from a deactivated state This timer prevents brief minor disturbances on a noisy line from forcing the router to deactivate the circuit Instead the router waits to see if the line recovers within the T4 timer period This enables the router to suppress minor line problems from the upper layer protocols Enter a time limit that the router waits for the line to recover before it deactivates the circuit If your line is noisy enter the maximum time fo
295. he ITU T V 110 type of rate adaption You can enable rate adaption for BRI and PRI service For incoming calls the router automatically adapts the data received at 56 Kb s to the 64 Kb s channel based on information in the call setup packet For outgoing calls the router sets the rate to either 64 Kb s or 56 Kb s depending on how you configure the rate adaption parameters To determine which rate to select ask your service provider for information about the network and connecting to the destination device For information about configuring rate adaption see Modifying the Adaption Rate on page 11 9 and Modifying a Call s Adaption Rate on page 15 12 The following two examples describe how rate adaption works Example 1 Between two end nodes there are seven switches One switch uses a 56 Kb s trunk line Figure 5 6 To accommodate this switch the router sends data at 56 Kb s over the 64 Kb s line that connects the switch to the network The router drops one of the eight bits of data from each byte and sends only seven bits of data at a time Router Router DS0015A Figure 5 6 Rate Adaption for a Network with a 56 Kb s Trunk Line 308621 14 00 Rev 00 5 17 Configuring Dial Services Example 2 For a connection between an ISDN and switched 56 Kb s network Figure 5 7 the router adapts the data rate for the outgoing
296. he dial device can use multiple phone numbers to call multiple destinations V 25bis signaling works with these interfaces X 21 V 35 RS 232 and RS 422 For V 25bis you must configure an outgoing phone list see Creating an Outgoing Phone List on page 3 21 hayes A signaling method that enables access to the network by passing the destination phone numbers from the router to the dial device Hayes signaling is for asynchronous PPP and works with RS 422 and V 34 interfaces To use Hayes as the serial media type you must also specify a modem initialization string The router sends this string to the modem to initiate a call If you choose this option specify a modem type ARN only and an initialization string for modem dialing For instructions see Chapter 10 Customizing Modem Lines In addition you need to configure an outgoing phone list see Creating an Outgoing Phone List on page 3 21 Note Select only raise dtr v25bis and hayes for the media type The other media types that the BCC lists apply to leased interfaces only For example navigate to the serial prompt and enter serial 1 1 media type v25bis For the ARN navigate to the modem prompt and enter modem 1 1 media type v25bis 4 Go to one of the following sections e To configure ISDN interfaces go to Configuring an ISDN Interface on page 3 12 e To configure a dial object go to Designating an Interface As a Dial Objec
297. he modem lines MIB Object ID 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 8 11 1 6 A 26 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Site Manager Parameters BRI Configuration Parameters The BRI Interface Configuration window Figure A 9 contains the BRI interface parameters for signaling over the D channel a Cancel Values I E Acceptable LAPD MTUs BRI T3 Timer BRI T4 Timer BRI B Channel Loopback DISABLE BRI Line Type PTP X 25 over ISDN D Channel ENABLE TEI Type for X 25 over ISDN D FIXED TEI Value for X 25 over ISDN D 1 Figure A 9 BRI Interface Configuration Window The parameter descriptions follow Parameter Acceptable LAPD MTUs Path Configuration Manager gt ISDN Connector gt ISDN Dialup gt Edit D Chan gt BRI Interface Configuration Default 400 bytes Options 3 to 1024 bytes Function Specifies the maximum number of bytes per LAPD transmission unit Instructions Enter a value for the maximum MTUs We recommend that you accept the default 400 bytes MIB Object ID 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 8 9 1 12 308621 14 00 Rev 00 A 27 Configuring Dial Services Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID BRI T3 Timer ISDN Connector gt ISDN Dialup gt Edit D Chan gt BRI Interface Configuration 10 seconds 1 to 30 seconds Indicates the amount of time that the router has to try and activate t
298. his System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window choose Dialup 2 Choose Demand Circuits The Dialup menu opens The Demand Pools window opens 3 Click on PPP Circuits or FR Circuits The PPP Demand Circuits window or the FR Demand Circuits window opens 4 Click on Schedule The Circuit Time of Day Schedule window PPP or the Pool Availability window frame relay opens 5 Set the following parameters TimeOfDay Failback Mode Failback Time min Click on Help or see the parameter descriptions beginning on page A 60 6 Click on Apply then click on Done You return to the appropriate demand circuits window 7 Click on Done You return to the Demand Pools window 8 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window 12 44 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Deleting a Schedule Customizing Demand Circuits You can delete a schedule for the router as explained in the following sections Using the BCC To delete a schedule for a specific demand circuit navigate to the ppp or frame relay demand circuit schedule prompt and enter delete For example to delete the schedule for the demand circuit to Boston enter schedule to boston weekend 0900 1700 delete Using Site Manager To delete a circuit s schedule Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window choose Dialup
299. his parameter 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 2 3 1 5 A 108 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Site Manager Parameters Local Circuit Dialup gt Caller Resolution Table None Available demand primary or bandwidth circuit Identifies a previously configured demand primary or bandwidth circuit You assign this circuit to a remote router which you specify in the Caller Name parameter When the local router receives a call from the remote router it matches the remote router s CHAP name or PAP ID with a caller name in the caller resolution table The router then activates the circuit assigned to that remote router If you enter a value for this parameter you cannot enter a value for the Local Group parameter Select a circuit from the Local Circuit List window Site Manager automatically supplies the value for this parameter 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 2 3 1 3 Local Group Dialup gt Caller Resolution Table gt Add gt Caller Name and Secret Password 0 0 to 1000 Identifies a previously configured demand circuit group You assign this demand circuit group to a remote router which you specify in the Caller Name parameter When the local router receives a call from the remote router it matches the remote router s CHAP name or PAP ID with a caller name in the caller re
300. hronous interface named S331 as follows Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window select a COM port The Add Circuit window opens Enter 331 in the Circuit Name field then click on OK The WAN Protocols menu opens 3 Choose PPP or Standard 4 Choose IP and click on OK The Select Protocols menu opens The IP Configuration window opens 5 Set the IP Address parameter to 129 122 3 2 then click on OK You return to the Configuration Manager window Backup Pool Configuration To configure the backup pools for each router complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window The Dialup menu opens choose Dialup 2 Choose Backup Pools The Backup Pools window opens 3 Click on Add The Backup Pool Configuration window opens 4 Set the Pool ID parameter to 1 then click The Backup Lines Definition window on OK opens 5 Choose a COM port to include in the line The Choose WAN Serial Interface Type pool window opens 6 Click on OK to accept the parameter The Sync Line Media Type window default Sync opens 7 Click on OK to accept the parameter You return to the Backup Lines Definition default values window 8 Choose File gt Exit You return to the Backup Pools window 9 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Ma
301. ial object making it an unconfigured serial interface Navigate to the dial prompt and enter delete For example dial bri 2 1 delete The BCC will not let you delete a dial line when the pool is in use by a circuit Using Site Manager To remove B channels from a line pool Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window choose Dialup The Dialup menu opens Choose Demand Backup or Bandwidth on Demand Pools The Demand Backup or Bandwidth on Demand Pools window opens Select a pool containing the ISDN lines that you want to delete 4 Click on Edit The Pool ID for the selected entry appears in the Pool ID field The Lines Definition window opens 5 Click on an ISDN MCT1 or MCE1 The ISDN Logical Lines window opens connector 6 Click on Remove Site Manager removes the B channels from the pool If you remove all the lines in the pool Site Manager removes the pool as well 7 Click on OK You return to the Lines Definition window 8 Choose File The File menu opens 9 Choose Exit You return to the Demand Backup or Bandwidth on Demand Pools window 10 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window 11 24 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Chapter 12 Customizing Demand Circuits For PPP configurations only you should have set up a demand pool according to the instructions i
302. ic characters Specifies the phone number of the router The value of this parameter must match the phone number that your service provider assigns to you when you receive ISDN service Any remote party that calls the router must include this phone number in the Called Party IE field of the call setup message The Called Party IE must match the directory number exactly or the router will not answer the call Enter the phone number your ISDN provider supplied when you received ISDN service For switches in the United States do not include the area code when you enter the phone number 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 8 12 1 4 Ext SubAddr Dialup gt Local Phone Numbers gt ISDN Local Phone Lines gt Local Phones gt ISDN Local Phone Numbers gt Add gt Phone Number None A maximum of 25 numeric characters Specifies a subaddress or an extension line for a main phone number that further identifies the local router The subaddress is useful when you have several routers at a destination site but the ISDN provider assigns only one phone number to the destination site An incoming call has to specify the number and the subaddress to reach a specific router Enter the extension subaddress You may assign this number or your ISDN provider may assign it when you receive ISDN service Do not enter space special or alphabetic characters in the telephone number 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 8 12 1 5 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Configuring Dial Services Parame
303. ick on Help or see the parameter description on page A 106 6 Click on OK You return to the completed Incoming Phone List window 7 Repeat steps 3 through 6 for each phone number that you want to add to the list Be sure to enter the phone number of each remote node from which the router should accept calls 8 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window 15 20 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Customizing Phone Lists Modifying Numbers in the Incoming Phone List You can modify the phone numbers in the incoming phone list Using the BCC To modify the incoming phone list you must delete existing numbers and add new ones To delete a phone number navigate to the in phone number prompt and enter delete To add a phone number see Creating an Incoming Phone List ISDN Only on page 15 19 Using Site Manager To modify the incoming phone list Site Manager Procedure You do this 1 In the Configuration Manager window choose Dialup 2 Choose Incoming Phone List System responds The Dialup menu opens The Incoming Phone List window opens Modify the incoming phone number list To change a phone number click in the field for the parameter that you want to modify Enter a new value then click on Apply The phone number appears with the changes at the top of the window To delete a phone number select the phone number and extension if any and click on Delete
304. ics or there may be a problem with the configuration continued 308621 14 00 Rev 00 C 25 Configuring Dial Services MAC Address MTU WAN Protocol Local Address Remote Address BOFL BOFL TMO Receive Bytes Receive Frames Receive Average Packet Transmit Bytes Transmit Frames Transmit Average Packet Total Errors Receive Total Errors Transmit Number of Buffers Receive Number of Buffers Transmit Media access control MAC address the physical address of the line The line driver fills in this address from the 48 bit address stored in the link module number PROM for this connector Maximum transmission unit MTU size that is the buffer size and the largest frame that can be transmitted or received across the modem interface The range is 3 to 4608 WAN protocol enabled on the interface The 1 byte local HDLC address of the interface The 1 byte remote HDLC address of the interface State enabled or disabled of the transmission of proprietary BofL messages over a point to point connection between the local router and a remote peer BofL Timeout the time between transmissions of BofL messages from this interface Number of octets received without error Number of frames received without error Average number of packets received without error Number of octets transmitted without error Number of frames transmitted without error Average number of packets transmitted without error Total n
305. iguring 12 24 description 6 9 Directory Number parameter local phone A 91 E encryption using with dial services 5 6 End Time parameter A 58 exchange terminator ET description 4 5 Expert Config parameter A 15 Ext SubAddr parameter local phone A 91 Index 3 F Failback Time min parameter A 61 filters for frame relay 13 9 floating B option 5 12 Force Dial parameter A 35 Force Take Down parameter A 35 FR Service Control parameter A 76 Fragmentation Trigger Size parameter A 88 fragmentation multilink 8 4 frame relay dial backup circuit backup description 1 16 configuring 13 5 description 1 16 filters configuring 13 9 frame relay service records configuring 13 7 link backup description 1 18 dial on demand configuring 12 2 description 1 10 G Global Adaption Rate parameter A 23 Global X 25 over ISDN D Channel parameter A 23 H Hangup on DLCMI Failure parameter A 76 Hayes signaling configuring modems 10 7 configuring BCC 3 10 configuring Site Manager 2 6 description 1 4 implementation notes all dial services 5 1 bandwidth on demand 8 1 dial backup 7 1 dial on demand 6 1 ISDN 5 10 Index 4 Inactivity Mode parameter A 54 Inactivity Time parameter A 36 Inactivity Timeout parameter A 59 inbound traffic filtering 6 12 incoming call filtering description 5 16 enabling 11 8 Incoming Filter parameter A 22 Incoming Phone Ext SubAddr parameter A 106 i
306. iguring Dial on Demand Using Site Manager cccccecseeeeeeeeeeeetteeeeeeeees B 6 Demand Pool SIS1A LT OL ec LIS ansing ery Pen pee eeeerrr rer reer A B 6 Demand Circuit Configuration oe eee aaa aeia ere B 7 Outgoing Phone List GUANO is cscs cciccinscasegacdasconieraasnandens seatbeanccataraieniaceanes B 8 Caller Resolution Table Configuration cccceeccceecceeeeceeeeeeaeeeseseceeeseeeseeeaes B 9 Dial on Demand Using ISDN Lines in a Frame Relay Network ssassn pannen DIO Goniguraion ol ROmer T duiiin ana an EAN A B 11 Coniguratoi o ROE Z a iss ciusriancrisrionutrguiees a a a B 12 Diallon Demand for an ISDN NeIWOTK x ccsscdcsscsnacedscanteecisnainnaaSovosdnendileretescedeaniendictonaes B 14 Gonfiguiaton of Routers Tand 2 snanesimseiesisanninidantaiiminsarmeniianietnee B 15 Port Application Mode Configuration E T Gont ee seas re _B 15 Demand Pool Ont Geran sccccsccesacctassths cnr cebiietacendpieecte ue aaa B 16 Demand Circuit Configuration c ccsicicetcsietieenascdssecssieeeo assieieniuasnitnneusinabedense B 17 Outgoing Phone List Configuration a se pipes P PEE B 18 Protocol Coniguralloi vsisi iana Aa B 19 Caller Resolution Table Cantaustion ETIE EE A E clamp hgeadte B 19 Local Phone Number Configuration seccsses cose tects ccseeadecencreudocntetindccaddetnaaieane B 20 Configuring a Hot Standby Circuit for a Frame Relay Network c cccccssseeeeeeeees B 21 Configuration of Router 1
307. ilt in ISDN capability If your router has an ISDN BRI module or an MCT1 or MCE1 link module installed along with ISDN software you can connect to an ISDN network directly DS0005A Figure 1 1 Example of Dial Access to a Switched Telephone Network 308621 14 00 Rev 00 1 3 Configuring Dial Services Network Access Methods and Services The router initiates monitors and terminates dial up connections using a modem or ISDN terminal adapter that supports Raise DTR V 25bis or Hayes signaling or a router with a built in ISDN interface connected directly to an ISDN network If the router has internal ISDN capability you do not need external dial devices Note For Basic Rate Interface BRI service you need a network terminator 1 NT1 to connect to an ISDN network The router s ISDN BRI adapter module does not include an internal NT1 so you or your service provider must supply it For the ARN the ISDN BRI S T adapter module does not have an NT1 so you or your service provider must supply it The ARN ISDN BRI U adapter module has the NT1 built in All three dial services can access a switched network using the following methods e Integrated ISDN capability Provides a BRI or Primary Rate Interface PRI for digital connectivity from the router to the destination device replacing standard analog phone lines Using signals on an ISDN line the router instructs the network to set up a call to a particular destination I
308. ime the client waits for a return call from the server During this time the client will not place an outgoing call to any other destination The delay gives the server time to return the initial call This parameter is available only if the Callback Mode parameter is set to one of the client options Enter the amount of time the client should wait for the server to call This value must be greater than the Callback Server Delay Time If you are dialing through a modem we recommend that you set this value greater than 45 seconds 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 4 5 1 55 308621 14 00 Rev 00 A 45 Configuring Dial Services Authentication Protocol Parameters The authentication parameters are the same for demand backup and bandwidth circuits and they are located in each service s circuit configuration window Parameter CHAP Local Name Path Demand Circuits Dialup gt Demand Circuits gt Demand Pools gt PPP Circuits gt PPP Demand Circuits Backup Circuits Dialup gt Backup Circuits gt PPP gt Primary Circuit Definition Bandwidth Circuits Dialup gt Bandwidth On Demand Circuit gt Bandwidth On Demand Circuit Definition Default None Options Any text string maximum of 20 characters Function This name is part of the outbound call and it informs remote peer routers of the local router s identity For bandwidth on demand circuits this parameter is only available if the Bandwidth Mode parameter is set to Monitor
309. indow opens 4 Click on Add The Phone Number window opens 5 Set the Outgoing Phone Number Type parameter Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 98 6 For Hayes dialing only set the Outgoing Phone Prefix parameter Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 104 7 Click on OK You return to the completed Outgoing Phone List window 8 If the Outgoing Phone Number Type parameter is set to ISDN accept the defaults for the ISDN Numbering Type and ISDN Numbering Plan parameters unless your service provider instructs otherwise For Dial Syne or Async phone numbers ignore the ISDN parameters 9 Accept the defaults for the remaining parameters or modify them according to the descriptions in Appendix A 10 Repeat the procedure for each phone number that you want to add to the list continued 308621 14 00 Rev 00 15 9 Configuring Dial Services Site Manager Procedure continued You do this System responds 11 Click on Done when you finish entering You return to the appropriate circuit outgoing phone list numbers window 12 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window Reordering and Deleting Phone Numbers You can modify existing phone numbers using Site Manager Using the BCC you must delete an existing phone number then add a new number The next two sections describe how to make these modifications
310. ines in a pool navigate to the dial interface prompt and enter line priority lt integer gt integer is a number from 1 to 50 For example dial serial 3 3 line priority 1 This command tells the router to use the line for slot 3 connector 3 first as a backup line Using Site Manager For pools that combine modem and ISDN lines coordinate the priority assignments for this interface with those that you set using the Pool Channel Priority parameter for the ISDN interface To set the priority for modem lines Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window The Edit Connector window opens click on the COM connector whose interface you want to change The connector name should have a D B or W next to it 2 Click on Edit Line The Edit SYNC Parameters window opens 3 Set the Priority parameter Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 8 4 Click on OK You return to the Edit Connector window 5 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window 10 6 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Customizing Modem Lines Modifying External Modem Configurations If your dial application uses external modems you can modify the commands that the router sends to the modem The parameters that you can modify apply to each type of modem signaling Raise DTR V 25bis or Hayes If you are using an ARN V 34 Adapter Modem module see
311. ing phone number for the monitor router and you want the non monitor router to supply phone numbers for dial up connections This option minimizes the task of configuring the outgoing phone list Select Disable only for configurations where the default values of the ISDN Numbering Plan and ISDN Numbering Type parameters located in the outgoing phone list are acceptable to the ISDN switch Note Certain countries have ISDN networks where the default values of the ISDN Numbering Plan and ISDN Numbering Type parameters do not work Ask your sales engineer for details MIB Object ID 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 2 2 1 68 308621 14 00 Rev 00 A 89 Configuring Dial Services Local Phone Number Parameters The ISDN Local Phone Numbers window Figure A 20 contains the local phone list parameters ISDN Local Phone Numbers A lt Apply Delete Values Help Directory Number Ext SubAddr Spid ISDN Numbering Type ISDN Numbering Plan Figure A 20 ISDN Local Phone Numbers Window The parameter descriptions follow A 90 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Site Manager Parameters Directory Number Dialup gt Local Phone Numbers gt ISDN Local Phone Lines gt Local Phones gt ISDN Local Phone Numbers gt Add gt Phone Number None A maximum of 20 numer
312. ing x to 34 to location n 0 to 3 EO Disable line quality monitor and auto retrain E1 Enable line quality monitor and auto retrain E2 Enable line quality monitor and fallback fall forward L Return received line signal level Q Report the line signal quality MS Select modulation HO Disable RPI H1 Enable RPI and set DTE speed to 19200 b s H2 Enable RPI and set DTE speed to 38400 b s H3 Enable RPI and set DTE speed to 57600 b s H11 Enable RPI mode SDR 0 Disable Distinctive Ring SDR 1 Enable Distinctive Ring Type 1 SDR 2 Enable Distinctive Ring Type 2 SDR 3 Enable Distinctive Ring Type 1 and 2 SDR 4 Enable Distinctive Ring Type 3 SDR 5 Enable Distinctive Ring Type 1 and 3 SDR 6 Enable Distinctive Ring Type 2 and 3 SDR 7 Enable Distinctive Ring Type 1 2 and 3 SSE 0 Disable DSVD SSE 1 Enable DSVD Serial interface operation only E 6 308621 14 00 Rev 00 A Acceptable LAPD MTUs parameter A 27 acronyms xxviii activating secondary lines for bandwidth 1 25 Adaption Rate parameter A 100 Aggregate Bandwidth parameter A 103 Associated IP Address parameter demand circuit groups A 63 asynchronous lines bandwidth on demand 1 23 dial backup 1 14 asynchronous modem control characters 9 5 asynchronous PPP configuring 10 2 description 5 6 AT initialization commands configuring 5 8 authentication protocols CHAP 5 1 configuring BCC 3 20 configu
313. ion see Chapter 5 Implementation Notes for All Dial Services When you select a modem from the list the AT initialization string is set automatically as well as the speaker volume speaker control and number of rings to answer You can modify these default settings If your modem is not on the list you can configure a custom modem and AT initialization command The AT initialization command is required for custom modems Appendix E lists the AT initialization commands for the ARN Your modem may use a different set of commands see the manual for your modem Entering an invalid command may disable the modem If the modem does not initialize you may need to change the asynchronous baud rate For more information about modem commands see Configuring WAN Line Services Using the BCC To set the modem type navigate to the modem prompt and enter modem type 0 The value 0 specifies a custom modem For example modem 3 3 modem type 0 After you specify a custom modem you must enter a modem initialization string To configure a modem initialization string configure the init string parameter 308621 14 00 Rev 00 10 13 Configuring Dial Services To set the initialization string navigate to the modem prompt and enter init string lt string gt string is an AT modem command string which is an ASCII text string from 3 to 34 characters For example to send a command to turn off the command echo enter modem 3
314. ions 0 c cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteaeeeeeeeeees 5 20 Chapter 6 Dial on Demand Implementation Notes Bay CoM CNS aiiora kenaii N aTa E AN S kaaa SAEN 6 1 Standby Circuits sassone AN T es aree PT NT T eenig eee 6 2 Comparing Standby Circuits with Dial Backup Circuits ccceeeesseeeeesteeeeeesees 6 2 How Standby CCU WOK iss chs snucewnsy sas usin icor cuir tapsia a tanuiaad waudse 6 3 Balancing Traffic Between a Primary Circuit and a Hot Standby Circuit 0 6 4 eB aii consid iss Las die aNi Lanne ap UaREn Ua A eat IaeNMAIAs 6 5 Configuring Callback n T PT oaeiai ooreis aani 6 6 Demand Creu GrOuDS criai eE a E a rec ee 6 7 Demand Pools and Demand Circuit Groups ccesceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeneeetees 6 7 Using Demand Circuit Groups with Dial Backup Service errs an 6 8 Managing Broadcast Traffic over Demand Circuits eee eee eereeeeeeteeeeeeeteeateene ee 6 8 UALS FRCS AE sender api A E E E N A E E N 6 8 Diao Veit uulba etm AOUN rrine aa 6 9 What Happens When You Enable Dial Optimized Routing ssseesseeesseesseeeee 6 9 Exceptions for Sending Routing Updates PET eines perenne ee eee 6 10 Maintaining the Routing Table s cssnrmirisesanan aerden 6 11 IP RIP Triggered Updates and Broadcast Timers ce cceecceeeeeeteeeeeeeseeeeteeteees 6 12 IPX RIP and SAP Broadcast Timers ereais aiteinaamiadd penal ene aein 6 12 TANC PE E aa a aaa AE 6 12 Da
315. ions MIB Object ID Site Manager Parameters Speaker Volume COM Connector gt Edit Modem gt Edit V 34 Modem Interface Parameters Medium Low Medium High Sets the volume of the modem speaker or disables the speaker Turn the modem speaker off or set the volume to Low Medium or High Not applicable Speaker Control COM Connector gt Edit Modem gt Edit V 34 Modem Interface Parameters On For Call Off On For Call Always On On For Answer Controls the modem speaker Select one of the following Off Turns the speaker off entirely On For Call Turns the speaker on only when a call is established and turns it off when the modem is transmitting data Always On Keeps the modem speaker on at all times On For Answering Turns the speaker on only when the modem is answering a call and turns it off when the modem is transmitting data Not applicable Set Pulse Tone Dial Default COM Connector gt Edit Modem gt Edit V 34 Modem Interface Parameters Tone Pulse Tone Selects pulse or tone signals for the modem Select Pulse only if your telephone line does not support tone dialing Not applicable 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Configuring Dial Services Port Application Mode Parameters The Port Application window contains the Port Application Mode parameter Figure A 6 is the window for BRI interfaces The PRI window is similar Port Application Cancel 0K Rocce Port Application Mode FIALUP 2B
316. ions Q 921 and Q 931 and provides signaling support for the following countries e INS 64 KDD and NTT for Japan e TS013 for Australia e National ISDN 1 AT amp T SESS Custom and NT DMS 100 Custom for the United States and Canada e Swissnet 3 for Switzerland e NETS for Austria Belgium Denmark France Germany Italy Netherlands Norway Spain Sweden Switzerland and the United Kingdom Nortel Networks routers do not support data transmission across the D channel 308621 14 00 Rev 00 5 11 Configuring Dial Services BRI Leased Line Operation for Germany and Japan For BRI service in Germany and Japan you can configure a permanent point to point ISDN connection over a B channel without having to use the D channel to dial the call This connection operates like a leased line and is useful when ISDN service providers do not use the D channel Leased line operation supports PPP Nortel Networks Standard and frame relay You select leased line operation when you configure the application mode that is the type of BRI service for the BRI interface To set the application mode using Site Manager see Configuring BRI Lines on page 2 9 To set the application mode using the BCC see Configuring BRI Lines on page 3 12 To modify the leased line configuration see Modifying the BRI and PRI Modes of Operation on page 11 2 BRI Subaddresses The ITU T specifies that one S T interface can have eight different
317. iption on page A 25 7 Click on OK You return to the Lines Definition window 8 Choose File The File menu opens 9 Choose Exit You return to the Demand Backup or Bandwidth on Demand Pools window 10 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Customizing ISDN Lines Modifying the ISDN Channel Priority You can modify the ISDN pool channel priority to prioritize channels in a pool instructing the router which line to use first second and so on when a dial line is required The lower the number you assign to an interface the higher its priority The channel priority is part of the ISDN logical line configuration because it defines the logical B channels not the physical line Before changing the logical line configuration you must delete all circuits associated with that pool For instructions see the appropriate customizing chapter for circuits For dial backup and bandwidth on demand pools lines can reside across slots but setting the line priority affects only lines on the same slot For example if the backup pool has two lines on slot 3 and two lines on slot 4 the router sets a priority between the lines on slot 3 then between the lines on slot 4 For bandwidth on demand the router prioritizes lines in the preferred slot then the reserved slot and finally the local slot Using the BCC To prioritize ISDN lines in a demand or backup pool naviga
318. ir line that terminates at your premises and provides a total of 144 Kb s bandwidth Figure 4 2 64 Kb s Bchannel Q 144 Kb s 64 Kb s B channel Q 2B D 16 Kb s D channel q DS0008A Figure 4 2 BRI Interface 4 2 308621 14 00 Rev 00 ISDN Overview Primary Rate Interface PRI is the other ISDN service In the United States Canada and Japan PRI transmits data at a rate of 64 Kb s over 23 B channels and sends signaling information at a rate of 64 Kb s over one D channel 23B D In Europe PRI transmits data at the same rates with 30 B channels and one D channel 30B D PRI channels combine in two physical twisted pair lines There are two types of PRI service because the United States Canada and Japan derive the PRI transmission rates from the T1 standard which operates at line speeds of 1 544 Mb s Europe and Australia however use the E1 standard which operates at line speeds of 2 048 Mb s D Channel The D channel is integral to ISDN services It provides out of band signaling which means that the line that carries signaling information is separate from the line that carries data Using out of band signaling call setup information does not interfere with the data you send and the result is more accurate communication The D channel also provides what the ITU T formerly CCITT defines as supplementary services These are extra services that you can purchase from your ISDN pro
319. is serial 2 5 dial dial serial 2 5 box Create a demand pool with ID 2 then create a demand line on the serial interface you just created in step 2 Add this line to the demand pool box demand pool 2 demand pool 2 demand line serial 2 5 demand line 2 serial 2 5 back Configure a demand circuit with a unique name that uses PPP and IP as the layer 2 and layer 3 protocols demand pool 2 demand circuit to router7 demand circuit to router7 Ppp ppp to router7 ip 150 1 1 2 255 255 255 0 ip 150 1 1 2 255 255 255 0 back This circuit will use the demand line in demand pool 2 For this service to work properly you also need to configure the outgoing phone list the CHAP information and the caller resolution table 308621 14 00 Rev 00 B 3 Configuring Dial Services The router on the other end of the connection router 7 will need to configured with the corresponding pieces so either side can activate the circuit Define router 4 s local CHAP name and secret so it can identify itself to the router 7 ppp to router7 Chap name bin chap secret west Set the connection mode for router 4 to collision master to ensure that if both sides of the connection try to activate the circuit router 7 will allow router 4 to initiate the call ppp to router7 connection mode collision master ppp to router7 back Specify the outgoing phone number This is the phone number for router 7 demand circuit to router7 Out phone numbe
320. it e Ifyou want to use unnumbered interfaces configure them on the outgoing hot standby circuit and configure unnumbered demand circuit groups on the incoming standby circuit For more information about standby demand circuits see Chapter 6 Dial on Demand Implementation Notes 12 26 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Customizing Demand Circuits Using the BCC Configuring a Hot Standby Circuit Hot standby circuits act as alternate paths for failed leased circuits A leased circuit that uses a hot standby circuit is referred to as a primary circuit To configure a hot standby circuit you assign a PPP demand circuit to a configured primary circuit using the hot standby command This command designates the demand circuit as a hot standby circuit To configure a hot standby circuit for a primary circuit do the following 1 Configure a primary circuit Hot standby circuits can support the following types of primary circuits e Single leased PPP circuit e Single leased Nortel Networks Standard circuit e PPP multilink circuit Site Manager configurable only e PPP multiline circuit Site Manager configurable only e Frame relay primary circuit with a direct mode PVC 2 Create a PPP demand circuit configuration that includes an IP circuit user authentication information and an outgoing phone number In addition ensure its connection mode is set to the default collision master 3 Navigate to the primary circuit prompt and enter h
321. it This option is available only if the Standby Mode parameter is set to Hot Standby the Standby Failback Mode parameter is set to None and you have selected a primary circuit for the Standby Primary Circuit parameter Instructions Enter the amount of time in minutes that the router should wait before returning to the primary circuit for data transmission Be sure to consider how much time it takes to ensure that the primary circuit is stable MIB Object ID 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 4 11 1 10 308621 14 00 Rev 00 A 61 Configuring Dial Services Demand Circuit Group Parameters The Demand Circuit Groups window Figure A 12 contains the demand circuit group parameters Sj Demand Circuit Groups s eC eC ae Add Group Help fei IP Enable Associated IP address RIP Enable OSPF Enable IPX Enable IPX Routing Protocol Figure A 12 Demand Circuit Groups Window The parameter descriptions follow Parameter Pool ID Path Dialup gt Demand Circuit Groups gt Demand Circuit Groups gt Add Group gt Enter a Demand Pool Default None Options 1 to 255 Function Identifies the demand pool that you want the demand circuit group to use Instructions Enter the ID number of an existing demand pool MIB Object ID 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 4 5 1 6 A 62 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Site Manager Parameters Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Number of Circuits Dia
322. its the router automatically enables protocol prioritization Prioritizing traffic is important for your time sensitive applications For example a user at router A participating in a Telnet session with router B requires a more immediate response than a user at router A performing a file transfer with router B Although protocol prioritization is set automatically you still need to configure priorities and filters For more information about protocol prioritization see Configuring Traffic Filters and Protocol Prioritization Defining the Role of the Router in the Network Leased bandwidth circuits are point to point connections For each circuit you must designate a router at one end of the connection as the congestion monitor The congestion monitor checks the congestion of the lines in a multilink bundle If this router discovers congestion it activates secondary lines The router at the other end of the connection the non monitor router does not have the authority to activate a secondary line Do not set the Bandwidth Mode parameter to the same value for both routers This will prevent the routers from activating a second line simultaneously You define the role of the router using the Bandwidth Mode parameter which is part of the bandwidth circuit configuration see Customizing Bandwidth on Demand Service on page 14 2 Balancing Traffic Between Lines in a Multilink Bundle With multilink enabled for bandwidth on demand s
323. ity mode the router determines how it should monitor inactivity After the router concludes that there is no data activity it disconnects the line Note The router does not consider LQR LCP and periodic CHAP messages as data so they do not reset the inactivity time The following sections tell you how to set the inactivity time 308621 14 00 Rev 00 12 9 Configuring Dial Services Using the BCC To terminate the demand circuit based on inactivity navigate to the demand circuit prompt and enter inactivity time lt nteger gt integer is the number of seconds from 1 to 99 999 999 The value you set is the amount of time that the router waits before deactivating the switched connection For example to set the inactivity time for circuit to Boston enter demand circuit circuit to Boston inactivity time 120 If you want the connection to remain active at all times enter 99 999 999 The connection remains active unless the network deactivates the connection If the connection is deactivated the router redials the same number when the next packet is ready for transmission You can also manually force the router to establish a connection if a line is available using the force dial command Using Site Manager To terminate the demand circuit based on inactivity Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window The Dialup menu opens choose Dialup 2 Choos
324. ject ID 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 8 11 1 5 308621 14 00 Rev 00 A 25 Configuring Dial Services Parameter Pool Channel Priority Path Dialup gt Demand Backup Bandwidth on Demand Pools gt Pools gt Add gt Demand Backup Bandwidth on Demand Pool Configuration gt OK gt Lines Definition gt ISDN MCT1 MCE1 Connector gt ISDN Configured Switches gt OK gt ISDN Logical Lines OR Dialup gt Demand Backup Bandwidth on Demand Pools gt Pools gt select pool gt Edit gt Lines Definition gt ISDN MCT1 MCE1 Connector gt ISDN Logical Lines Default 1 Options 1 to 50 Function Prioritizes a group of lines in a pool For example the router uses a line of priority 1 before it uses a line of priority 2 For dial backup and bandwidth on demand pools lines can reside across slots but when you set this parameter it affects only lines on the same slot For example if the backup pool has two lines in slot 3 and three lines in slot 4 the router sets a priority for the lines in slot 3 then sets a priority for the lines in slot 4 For the bandwidth pool the router prioritizes lines in the preferred slot then the reserved slot and finally the local slot Instructions Assign a number to each line in the pool The lower the number the higher the priority If you have a pool that combines modem and ISDN lines you should coordinate the priority assignments for the ISDN lines with those you set using the Priority parameter for t
325. ks 4401 Great America Parkway PO Box 58185 Santa Clara California 95054 8185 LICENSEE ACKNOWLEDGES THAT LICENSEE HAS READ THIS AGREEMENT UNDERSTANDS IT AND AGREES TO BE BOUND BY ITS TERMS AND CONDITIONS LICENSEE FURTHER AGREES THAT THIS AGREEMENT IS THE ENTIRE AND EXCLUSIVE AGREEMENT BETWEEN NORTEL NETWORKS AND LICENSEE WHICH SUPERSEDES ALL PRIOR ORAL AND WRITTEN AGREEMENTS AND COMMUNICATIONS BETWEEN THE PARTIES PERTAINING TO THE SUBJECT MATTER OF THIS AGREEMENT NO DIFFERENT OR ADDITIONAL TERMS WILL BE ENFORCEABLE AGAINST NORTEL NETWORKS UNLESS NORTEL NETWORKS GIVES ITS EXPRESS WRITTEN CONSENT INCLUDING AN EXPRESS WAIVER OF THE TERMS OF THIS AGREEMENT iv 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Contents Preface PSY RU ace cactasit aac E tt aues nets ua uiad T E E A E E XXV PTO AEA mrna e E xxvi PHC OVNI sacsxerperdastanntissainasensssnapenaans ena tainakensiend cannes eeaeutaa penne meeene tas xxviii Hard Copy Technical Manuals iss casssiicest ad ercrtecieatinradaoosincdanniondaanoddenmsebrenienetisaniisied XXX Fon to Get HEI araona nia a a aai XXX Chapter 1 Dial Services Overview How ta Use This Guide icp cisvasdacetnrinagacersavien onmnertansneis dinna PAR E 1 2 Nortel Networks Dial SQrvites asi cciiscsscascrsassssraediessccnnadied eatetantrasteseanatioianand dem eseaerieiars 1 3 Network Access Methods and Services 0 ccescecceceeeseneeeeeeeeeseaaeseeeeeeeeaeeeeeaeeneaes 1 4 Diallon Demand GVO iiris era 1 5 Aniana Lerni CREUS sinanasi
326. l Backbone Link No MIB Version 11 00 gt HE Unused Description 5280 Quad Sync Bu 5945 Dual Port Multi K k AG2111002 120 ohm Dual MCE1 1 5300 Quad Sync COMI coM2 COM3 COMA System Resource Module CONSOLE Eee a Figure 2 1 Dialup Menu in the Configuration Manager Window 308621 14 00 Rev 00 2 5 Configuring Dial Services Configuring Line Pools A line pool is a group of one or more lines that reside on the router slots You identify each pool by assigning a pool ID The lines are the physical connections over which the circuits transmit and receive data Each line can connect to a modem or directly to an ISDN network using a router with internal ISDN or external terminal adapter A line pool can have a combination of synchronous and asynchronous interface types The steps for creating line pools are the same for all three dial services See the appropriate section for instructions Creating Line Pools with Modem Lines on page 2 6 Creating Line Pools with ISDN Lines on page 2 8 Creating Line Pools with Modem Lines To configure line pools with Raise DTR V 25bis and Hayes interfaces complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this 1 In the Configuration Manager window choose Dialup System responds The Dialup menu opens Choose Demand Pools Backup Pools or Bandwidth On Demand Pools The Demand Pools Backup Pools or Bandwidth On Demand Pools wind
327. l For lines in a demand or backup pool PPP is not configured automatically you must select it PPP routes or bridges datagrams over point to point lines Synchronous asynchronous and ISDN interfaces can all use PPP e JP is the layer 3 protocol e There is no ISDN caller ID service therefore no incoming phone list is required This basic configuration does not address every application There are many other features and functions that you can configure You can make these modifications in the customizing chapters 308621 14 00 Rev 00 2 3 Configuring Dial Services Table 2 1 Setting Up a Default Modem or ISDN Configuration Using Site Manager Task Parameters to Set 1 For dial backup or bandwidth on demand service only configure leased interfaces on a COM MCT1 or MCE1 port You will designate these leased interfaces as dial backup primaries or bandwidth circuits Chapter 1 of this manual lists the types of leased lines that you can select Do not do this for dial on demand service even if you configure demand circuits to use bandwidth on demand service To use ISDN interfaces only as dial connections Select a port ISDN MCT1 or MCE1 that you want to include as an ISDN dial line in a line pool and configure it for BRI or PRI service See Configuring WAN Line Services for instructions on setting up leased interfaces Port Application Mode Create a line pool and assign it an ID Pool ID
328. l Services Site Manager Procedure continued You do this System responds 6 Click on OK You return to the Edit Connector window 7 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window Modifying the Modem Command String You can change the modem initialization command string that the router sends to the modem For example you can enter a command string to change the speed of the modem Also if you are having trouble placing calls you can enter a string to test whether the modem responds Using the BCC To set the modem command string navigate to the dial prompt and enter modem commancd string lt initialization_command gt For example to initiate a hang up sequence enter dial serial 3 3 modem command string HO Using Site Manager To access the window where you specify the modem command string set the WAN Serial Interface Type parameter to Synchronous or Asynchronous and set the Line Media Type to Raise DTR or V 25bis To change the modem initialization command Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window The Edit Connector window opens click on the COM connector for the interface that you want to modify The connector name should have a D B or W next to it continued 10 10 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Customizing Modem Lines Site Manager Procedure continued You do this System responds 2 Click on
329. le configure the circuit s availability from 9 00 a m to 5 00 p m Then configure this parameter for 60 minutes If the connection comes up at 10 00 a m the router keeps the circuit active until 11 00 a m To specify the maximum amount of time that the circuit is active in minutes navigate to the backup circuit prompt and enter max uptime lt integer gt integer is a number from 1 to 999 999 The default is 60 minutes 13 14 308621 14 00 Rev 00 For example Customizing Backup Circuits backup circuit 10 5 1 max uptime 100 Using Site Manager To specify the duration of the backup circuit complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window choose Dialup 2 Choose Backup Circuits The Dialup menu opens The Backup Circuits menu opens 3 Choose PPP or Frame Relay The Primary Circuit Definition window or the FR Primary Interface Definition window opens 4 Set the following parameters Maximum Up Time Max UpTime Termination UpTime Term Reset Click on Help or see the parameter descriptions beginning on page A 51 5 Click on Apply then click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window Modifying the Activation of a Backup Circuit The primary down time determines how long the router waits before activating a backup circuit This delay ensures that the primary h
330. lect Async for this parameter continued 308621 14 00 Rev 00 2 7 Configuring Dial Services Site Manager Procedure continued You do this 7 Set the Line Media Type parameter then click on OK Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 7 If you choose Hayes for this parameter specify a modem type and initialization string for modem dialing see Chapter 9 to modify modem parameters For V 25bis and Hayes options you need to configure an outgoing phone list see Creating an Outgoing Phone List on page 2 27 System responds You return to the Lines Definition window The letter D demand B backup or W bandwidth appears next to the COM port to indicate the type of line it is Note that the router can use the same line for all three types of pools Asynchronous ports have an at sign next to the connector name If several pools use the same line a combination of the letters D B and W appear next to the connector name for example COM1DW These letters appear only next to COM and ISDN connector names Select and configure more lines for the pool if necessary 9 10 Choose Exit Choose File The File menu opens You return to the Pools window which now has three new buttons Edit Apply and Delete that allow you to edit the new pool 11 Go to one of the following e Configuring Circuits on page 2 14 to configure
331. line pools with Raise DTR V 25bis and Hayes interfaces 1 Create the serial interface that will become the dial line For example to create a serial interface on slot 1 connector 1 begin at the box prompt and enter box serial 1 1 For the ARN enter box modem 1 1 Specify the WAN serial type to indicate whether this interface is for synchronous or asynchronous connections Navigate to the interface prompt and enter wan type lt type gt type can be synchronous This is the default Choose this option for synchronous connections asynchronous Choose this option if you are using asynchronous PPP across the backup lines Otherwise accept the default synchronous polled asynchronous Not applicable for dial services For example for a serial interface on a BLN you would enter serial 1 1 wan type synchronous For the ARN navigate to the modem prompt and enter modem 1 1 wan type synchronous Specify the modem signaling by entering media type lt iype gt type can be raise dtr A signaling method that enables access to the network by preprogramming the destination phone numbers into the dial device Raise DTR signaling works with these interfaces X 21 V 35 RS 232 and RS 422 3 10 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Starting Dial Services Using the BCC v25bis A signaling method that enables access to the network by passing the destination phone numbers from the router to the dial device Using V 25bis t
332. lists are unnecessary This chapter includes the following information Topic Page Types of Phone Lists 15 1 How ISDN Calls Use Phone Lists 15 2 How V 25bis and Hayes Calls Use the Outgoing Phone List 15 3 Modifying an Outgoing Phone List 15 4 Creating an Incoming Phone List ISDN Only 15 19 Creating a Local Phone List ISDN Only 15 23 Types of Phone Lists You can configure the following types of phone lists for the router e Outgoing phone list e Incoming phone list for ISDN only e Local phone list for ISDN only 308621 14 00 Rev 00 15 1 Configuring Dial Services The outgoing phone list and incoming phone list contain the phone numbers of remote routers The router places outgoing calls using numbers in the outgoing phone list and verifies incoming calls using numbers in the incoming phone list Each remote router may have one or more phone numbers The router dials the phone numbers in the order in which they occur in the list The local phone list contains the local router s phone numbers It uses these numbers to identify itself when it places an outgoing call Note Outgoing phone lists are associated with a specific circuit not with the line which the router uses for many different circuits Consequently the phone numbers are part of each circuit s configuration not the line s configuration The following sections describe how the router uses phone lists
333. lity window which shows a schedule entry Inactivity Timeout Availability Mode Click on Help or see the parameter descriptions beginning on page A 59 8 Set the following additional parameters 9 Click on Apply then click on Done You return to the appropriate demand circuits window 10 Click on Done You return to the Demand Pools window 11 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window 12 40 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Customizing Demand Circuits Scheduling PPP Standby Circuits There are two scheduling parameters specific to PPP hot standby circuits You can configure these using the BCC or Site Manager Using Schedules to Manage Standby Circuit Availability Part of the standby circuit configuration is to schedule the circuit s availability The time of day schedule defines the interval that the standby circuit is available It also determines how the router uses the primary and standby circuits when they are both active You can configure several time of day schedules for a circuit in a 24 hour period If you do not set up a schedule for the circuit the circuit s availability defaults to 24 hours a day The Failback Time parameter is part of the time of day schedule Depending on how you set this parameter there may be a delay between the time the standby circuit is disconnected and the time traffic returns to the primary circuit Therefore it is impor
334. lls After you enable multirate specify the number of B channels that the router can use for multirate service by entering aggregate bandwidth lt integer gt integer is the number of B channels from 2 to 23 For example out phone number backup 8 1 5085556879 Cchannel bandwidth type multirate aggregate bandwidth 10 Using Site Manager To enable PRI multirate Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window The Dialup menu opens choose Dialup 2 Choose Demand Backup or Bandwidth For backup and bandwidth circuits the on Demand Circuits appropriate Circuit Definition window opens For demand circuits the Demand Pools window opens Click on PPP Circuits or FR Circuits to open the appropriate Demand Circuits window 3 Choose Phone Out The Outgoing Phone List window opens continued 308621 14 00 Rev 00 15 17 Configuring Dial Services Site Manager Procedure continued You do this System responds 4 Set the following parameters Channel Bandwidth Type Aggregate Bandwidth Click on Help or see the parameter descriptions beginning on page A 103 5 Click on Done You return to the appropriate circuit window 6 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window Changing the AT Command String Hayes Only For asynchronous PPP connections only you can specify a prefix that the route
335. losure by the United States Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in subparagraph c 1 ii of the Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause at DFARS 252 227 7013 Notwithstanding any other license agreement that may pertain to or accompany the delivery of this computer software the rights of the United States Government regarding its use reproduction and disclosure are as set forth in the Commercial Computer Software Restricted Rights clause at FAR 52 227 19 Statement of Conditions In the interest of improving internal design operational function and or reliability Nortel Networks NA Inc reserves the right to make changes to the products described in this document without notice Nortel Networks NA Inc does not assume any liability that may occur due to the use or application of the product s or circuit layout s described herein Portions of the code in this software product may be Copyright 1988 Regents of the University of California All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms of such portions are permitted provided that the above copyright notice and this paragraph are duplicated in all such forms and that any documentation advertising materials and other materials related to such distribution and use acknowledge that such portions of the software were developed by the University of California Berkeley The name of the University may not be used to endorse or promote produc
336. ls and all copies Nortel Networks is not liable to Licensee for damages in any form solely by reason of the termination of this license 8 Export and Re export Licensee agrees not to export directly or indirectly the Software or related technical data or information without first obtaining any required export licenses or other governmental approvals Without limiting the foregoing Licensee on behalf of itself and its subsidiaries and affiliates agrees that it will not without first obtaining all export licenses and approvals required by the U S Government i export re export transfer or divert any such Software or technical data or any direct product thereof to any country to which such exports or re exports are restricted or embargoed under United States export control laws and regulations or to any national or resident of such restricted or embargoed countries or ii provide the Software or related technical data or information to any military end user or for any military end use including the design development or production of any chemical nuclear or biological weapons 9 General If any provision of this Agreement is held to be invalid or unenforceable by a court of competent jurisdiction the remainder of the provisions of this Agreement shall remain in full force and effect This Agreement will be governed by the laws of the state of California Should you have any questions concerning this Agreement contact Nortel Networ
337. lter all incoming calls based on the calling party s number Disable this parameter if the router should not screen calls or if the switch does not include the calling party s number in the incoming call 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 8 6 1 5 Sending Complete IE Dialup gt Demand Backup Bandwidth on Demand Pools gt Pools gt Add gt Demand Backup Bandwidth on Demand Pool Configuration gt OK gt Lines Definition gt ISDN MCT1 MCE1 Connector gt ISDN Switch Configuration Disable Enable Disable Instructs the router to include the sending complete information element IE in the outgoing call setup message to the switch The sending complete IE is included in the call setup message to indicate that the setup is complete and no other setup information will follow There are some switches that rely on this information during call setup Select Enable if you want to include this IE in the call setup message and if your ISDN switch supports this IE By including the IE in the call setup message call setup times may be faster If your ISDN switch does not support this IE accept the default Disable 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 8 6 1 8 A 22 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Site Manager Parameters Global Adaption Rate Dialup gt Demand Backup Bandwidth on Demand Pools gt
338. lup gt Demand Circuit Groups gt Demand Circuit Groups gt Add Group gt Enter a Demand Pool None Maximum number of lines in the line pool Indicates how many unnumbered circuits are in the demand circuit group Enter a number that is less than or equal to the number of lines in the demand pool associated with this circuit group 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 4 12 1 4 Demand Circuit Group Protocol Parameters Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID IP Enable Dialup gt Demand Circuit Groups gt Demand Circuit Groups Disable Enable Disable Enables or disables IP for this interface Select Enable to enable IP for this interface 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 4 12 1 5 Associated IP Address Dialup gt Demand Circuit Groups gt Demand Circuit Groups None Any valid IP address Specifies an address that IP uses when sending a packet All circuits in the demand circuit group use this address which specifies a numbered interface on the router IP routing protocols use the numbered address to advertise the local router to remote routers For more information see Configuring IP ARP RARP RIP and OSPF Services Enter the address of any numbered interface on the router If you are running RIP over the unnumbered interface and are using a subnet address as the associated address the local and remote associated add
339. ly Terminating the Backup Connection The router terminates the backup circuit after it restores the primary circuit the backup circuit fails or the configured time period for the backup circuit has expired After the router restores the primary circuit it verifies that the backup circuit is no longer active If the backup is still active the router terminates it Backup Circuit Protocols When you select PPP or frame relay as the protocol for the backup circuit you determine whether the router performs circuit backup or link backup Circuit backup is a point to point backup connection One circuit is backed up at a time instead of an entire interface When you back up a point to point primary circuit Standard PPP or a single frame relay PVC the protocol for the backup circuit is PPP Figures 1 6 and 1 7 show examples of circuit backup Figure 1 6 shows a Standard primary circuit aided by a PPP backup circuit Figure 1 7 shows a PPP primary circuit aided by a PPP backup circuit Note For circuit backup of a single frame relay PVC the backup line passes through the PSTN network only bypassing the frame relay network 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Dial Services Overview Note If either primary line fails the modem at Central site A can connect to Router B or C via a backup circuit Central site A Remote site B L o X E L ae eke os io
340. m directly to a PSTN using the ARN with the V 34 Modem Adapter Module or directly to an ISDN network using a router with internal ISDN capability You can combine asynchronous synchronous and ISDN interfaces in a single pool The synchronous interfaces can use Raise DTR or V 25bis signaling for modem connections The asynchronous interfaces can use Raise DTR V 25bis or Hayes signaling for modem connections Hayes signaling requires that you use AT modem commands to send dialing instructions to the modem The ISDN lines use ISDN signaling for network connections How Backup Lines Pools and Circuits Work Together For each leased circuit that needs a backup circuit you designate that circuit as a primary circuit and assign it a backup pool ID If the primary circuit fails the router activates the backup line to carry the backup circuit If your network uses a multiline or multilink primary the backup line is activated when the last line in the multiline or multilink bundle fails You must first configure a leased circuit and a backup pool before you can configure backup circuits Figure 1 9 shows how backup lines pools and circuits work together The router in San Diego has two leased lines one going to a router in Phoenix and the other to a router in San Francisco The circuits for each of these destinations are associated with backup pool 1 If either of these leased lines fails the San Diego router activates backup line 1 from ba
341. m and ISDN lines coordinate the priority assignments for this interface with those you set using the Pool Channel Priority parameter for the ISDN interface 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 5 1 97 A 8 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Site Manager Parameters External Modem Parameters The Sync Async and Async Hayes Modem interface windows contain the modem configuration parameters Figure A 5 shows an example Cancel OK Reset Modem Values Help Redial Count 3 Debug Mode DISABLE Modem Type CUSTOM Modem Init String AT amp F Speaker Volume Speaker Control No of Rings to Answer Figure A 5 Async Hayes Modem Interface Window The parameter descriptions follow 308621 14 00 Rev 00 A 9 Configuring Dial Services Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Retry Delay COM Connector gt Edit Modem gt Sync Async Modem Interface or Async Hayes Modem Interface 3 seconds 0 to infinity Specifies the number of seconds the router waits between attempts to reestablish the connection Enter the number of seconds you want the router to wait between retry attempts 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 8 1 1 10 Redial Count COM Connector gt Edit Modem gt Sync Async Modem Interface or Async Hayes Modem Interface 3
342. mand circuit to phoenix debug message level medium 308621 14 00 Rev 00 12 35 Configuring Dial Services Adding Bandwidth Service for Demand Lines PPP Only If the demand line becomes congested the router can provide an additional 29 dial up lines to reduce the congestion by using lines from a bandwidth on demand pool This feature is only available using Site Manager In Chapter 2 Starting Dial Services Using Site Manager you could enable bandwidth on demand service for a demand circuit See that chapter for instructions To modify the bandwidth on demand parameters see Chapter 14 Customizing Bandwidth on Demand Circuits Adding Layer 3 Protocols to PPP Demand Circuits In Chapters 2 and 3 you added IP to a PPP demand circuit To add other protocols go to one of the next sections Using the BCC To add layer 3 protocols to a PPP demand circuit navigate to the ppp circuit prompt and enter the BCC protocol object name For example to add IPX to the demand circuit enter ppp circuit to boston ipx lt network_address gt network_adoress can be any valid IPX 32 bit address For complete instructions on configuring IPX see Configuring IPX Services 12 36 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Using Site Manager Customizing Demand Circuits To add layer 3 protocols to a PPP demand circuit Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window choose Dialup
343. me Speaker Control Set Pulse Tone Dial Default Click on Help or see the parameter descriptions beginning on page A 15 4 Click on OK You return to the Edit Connector window 5 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window 308621 14 00 Rev 00 10 19 Configuring Dial Services Deleting Modem Lines from a Pool You can delete modem lines from a pool using the BCC or Site Manager Caution If you modify a modem line carrying an active circuit the router terminates the circuit Using the BCC To remove a modem line from a demand or backup pool 1 Remove the line from the line pool by navigating to the demand line or backup line prompt and entering delete For example backup line 4 serial 3 1 delete 2 Remove the line as a dial object making it an unconfigured serial interface Navigate to the dial prompt and enter delete For example dial serial 3 1 delete If a circuit is using the line pool with the line that you want to delete the BCC will not let you delete the line 10 20 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Using Site Manager To remove a modem line from a line pool Customizing Modem Lines Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window choose Dialup The Dialup menu opens Choose Demand Backup or Bandwidth on Demand Pools The Demand Backup or Bandwidth on Demand Pools window ope
344. me relay is the protocol for the leased primary circuit PPP is the protocol for the hot standby circuit 192 123 3 1 PVC 100 192 123 3 2 PVC 200 Router 1 a Ng Router 2 trunk to la 192 32 16 1 192 32 16 2 PRI PRI Hot Standby Standby dial to la ISDN Local CHAP name baycentral Caller name baycentral CHAP secret corpbln CHAP secret corpbln DS0039A Figure B 4 Hot Standby Connections in a Frame Relay Network 308621 14 00 Rev 00 B 21 Configuring Dial Services Configuration of Router 1 To configure the network in Figure B 4 configure router 1 as follows 1 Configure the frame relay leased primary circuit box serial 2 1 serial 2 1 frame relay frame relay 2 1 service trunk to la service trunk to la pve 100 pvc 2 1 100 back service trunk to la ip 192 123 3 1 255 255 255 0 ip 192 123 3 1 255 255 255 0 box Configure a PPP demand circuit box met1 5 1 pri pri 5 1 dial dial pri 5 1 box box demand pool 7 demand pool 7 demand line pri 5 1 demand line 7 pri 5 1 back demand pool 7 demand circuit dial to la demand circuit dial to la ppp ppp dial to la ip 192 32 16 1 255 255 255 0 ip 192 32 16 1 255 255 255 0 back For the demand circuit to operate as a hot standby circuit the connection mode must be collision master Also set the outgoing phone number for router 2 ppp dial to
345. meout parameter to dynamically deactivate the connection The router does not accept incoming calls or activate frame relay demand circuits if there is an incoming call from the frame relay network The router answers an incoming call only over a PPP circuit 308621 14 00 Rev 00 1 5 Configuring Dial Services The frame relay switch does not activate PVCs and configured DLCIs until the router receives data from the demand circuit and exchanges data link control management interface DLCMD status messages with the switch For more information about frame relay see Configuring Frame Relay Services Terminating Demand Circuits The router deactivates the demand circuit when You enable the Force Take Down parameter which instructs the router to force the termination of a connection To deactivate a force dial connection you configure the Force Take Down parameter which instructs the router to clear the connection To learn how to configure this parameter refer to Chapter 12 You schedule the circuit to come down Using the Schedule option you can schedule the circuit s availability for a specific day and time The schedule parameters are part of the circuit s configuration refer to Chapter 12 The Schedule option also allows you to configure whether the router uses the Inactivity Time parameter to dynamically deactivate the connection The inactivity timer expires To deactivate the connection you can configure the In
346. meter descriptions beginning on page A 98 Repeat the procedure for each phone number that you want to add continued 308621 14 00 Rev 00 2 27 Configuring Dial Services Site Manager Procedure continued You do this 8 Click on Done System responds You return to the appropriate Circuit window 9 For ISDN configurations go to the next section otherwise go to Setting Up the Caller Resolution Table on page 2 30 Creating the Local Phone List ISDN Only A router uses its local phone number for the following purposes e To identify itself when it places a call to a remote router The local router includes its own phone number in the ISDN outgoing call setup message e To identify itself to the ISDN switch so that the switch can activate the circuit In the United States and Canada the Service Profile ID SPID is also required e To ensure that an incoming call was received at the intended destination When the local router receives a call it checks that the phone number in the incoming call setup message is the same as its own local phone number Your ISDN service provider assigns this number You can optionally configure a local phone list for all three dial services using ISDN connections However if you use the Bandwidth Allocation Protocol BAP with bandwidth service across ISDN connections configuring a local phone list is required The router de
347. meters complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window The Dialup menu opens choose Dialup 2 Choose Backup Circuits The Backup Circuits menu opens 3 Choose PPP The Primary Circuit Definition window opens 4 Select the circuit that you want to modify continued 308621 14 00 Rev 00 13 13 Configuring Dial Services Site Manager Procedure continued You do this System responds 5 Set the following parameters CHAP Local Name CHAP Secret PAP Local ID PAP Password Outbound Authentication Click on Help or see the parameter descriptions beginning on page A 46 6 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window To change the authentication protocol from the default CHAP to PAP you need to access a PPP configuration window To select PAP you must open the PPP Interface List window select the line record for dial lines and specify PAP for the Local Authentication Protocol parameter For more information about PPP and configuring authentication protocols see Configuring PPP Services Customizing the Duration of the Circuit You can specify how long the connection is active Using the BCC The max uptime parameter specifies the maximum duration of a call for a continuous period of time This ensures that the connection is not up longer than necessary For examp
348. meters are grouped by function and do not always follow the order in which they appear in the Site Manager windows Table A 1 shows how the parameters are organized in this appendix Table A 1 Organization of Parameters Parameter Section Page Pool ID Parameter A 4 WAN Serial Interface Type Parameter A 5 Sync and Async Line Media Type Parameters A 6 External Modem Parameters A 9 V 34 Modem Parameters A 15 Port Application Mode Parameters A 1 ISDN Switch Parameters A 20 Pool Channel Count and Priority Parameters A 24 BRI Configuration Parameters A 27 BRI Leased Line Configuration Parameters A 32 Demand Circuit Parameters PPP and Frame Relay A 34 Standby Circuit Parameters PPP Demand Circuits Only A 41 Callback Parameters PPP Demand Circuits Only A 43 Authentication Protocol Parameters A 46 Circuit Duration Parameters Demand and Dial Backup A 51 Circuit Schedule Parameters Demand and Dial Backup A 55 continued 308621 14 00 Rev 00 A 1 Configuring Dial Services Table A 1 Organization of Parameters continued Parameter Section Page Demand Circuit Group Parameters A 62 Demand Circuit Group Protocol Parameters A 63 Caller Resolution Info Parameters Demand Circuit Groups A 63 PPP Circuit Options Parameters Dial Backup A 67 PPP Primary Ci
349. mit Rejects T1 Timeouts Memory Errors show modem sample BCC show Commands The slot and the connector number where the modem module resides Number of reject frames received Number of reject frames transmitted Number of T1 timeouts detected The T1 timer is the link retransmission timer Link control frames are retransmitted when the T1 expires This timer tracks the number of timeouts Number of memory errors detected A memory error occurs when the DMA cycle expires without obtaining the bus within 26 ms Memory errors may indicate faulty hardware If this count exceeds 5 call your customer service representative The show modem sample command displays data sampled over a period of 10 seconds across modem lines You can use the following filter flags and filter arguments for this command slot lt s o amp shows information for a specified router slot period lt period_in_seconds gt shows the data sampled for a specified number of seconds Use this argument to change the length of time data is sampled The output contains the following information Slot Conn Input Rate bytes sec Input Rate pkts sec The slot and the connector number where the modem module resides Number of octets received without error Number of packets received without error Output Rate bytes sec Number of octets transmitted without error Output Rate pkts sec Number of packets transmitted without error Input Lack
350. n Chapter 2 Starting Dial Services Using Site Manager or Chapter 3 Starting Dial Services Using the BCC and added PPP demand circuits This chapter includes the following information Topic Page Adding Frame Relay Demand Circuits 122 Modifying the Frame Relay Interface 12 3 Customizing Demand Circuit Operation 12 8 Adding Bandwidth Service for Demand Lines PPP Only 12 Adding Layer 3 Protocols to PPP Demand Circuits 12 36 Scheduling Demand Circuit Availability 12 37 Configuring Demand Circuit Groups 12 4 Removing Demand Circuits 12 52 For information about PPP and frame relay see Configuring PPP Services and Configuring Frame Relay Services 308621 14 00 Rev 00 12 1 Configuring Dial Services Adding Frame Relay Demand Circuits You can configure frame relay demand circuits as part of a dial interface using the BCC or Site Manager Using the BCC To add a frame relay demand circuit to an interface navigate to the demand circuit prompt and enter frame relay For example to add frame relay to the demand circuit named to phoenix enter demand circuit to phoenix frame relay The BCC returns the following prompt frame relay to phoenix You are now in the frame relay context where you can access frame relay interface parameters When you configure frame relay over a demand circuit the BCC automatically deletes the default protocol object PPP f
351. n Notes for All Dial Services e Line availability Analog lines are available in most locations enabling you to dial in from any remote location e Throughput With the V 34 standard throughput for asynchronous modems is 28 8 Kb s Using the V 42bis compression standard throughput can be higher Figure 5 4 shows a network that uses asynchronous PPP over modem lines DS0028A Figure 5 4 Using Asynchronous PPP over Modem Lines Using low cost asynchronous modems makes asynchronous PPP ideal for customers with small networks who are trying to lower expenses All dial services can use asynchronous PPP for connections between two routers Only demand and backup service can use asynchronous PPP for connections between a router and a terminal server All protocols that can operate with PPP CHAP and PAP can operate with asynchronous PPP Asynchronous connections also support software and hardware data compression To configure asynchronous PPP see Modifying the WAN Interface Type on page 10 2 308621 14 00 Rev 00 5 7 Configuring Dial Services Configuring Modems for Asynchronous PPP Interfaces Using Site Manager configuring modems is simplified for asynchronous dial up connections that use Hayes signaling The router provides the following list of commonly used modems that you can choose for y
352. n automode detection O00 Go online O1 Go online and initiate a retrain sequence P Force pulse dialing Qo Allow result codes to DTE Q1 Inhibit result codes to DTE Sn Select S Register as default Sn Return the value of S Register n continued 308621 14 00 Rev 00 AT Initialization Commands for the ARN Table E 1 Summary of AT Modem Initialization Commands continued Command Function V Set default S Register to value v Return the value of default S Register T Force DTMF dialing Vo Report short form terse result codes V1 Report long form verbose result codes Wo Report DTE speed in EC mode W1 Report line speed EC protocol and DTE speed W2 Report DCE speed in EC mode X0 Report basic call progress result codes For example OK CONNECT RING NO CARRIER also for busy if enabled and dial tone not detected NO ANSWER and ERROR X1 Report basic call progress result codes and connection speeds For example OK CONNECT RING NO CARRIER also for busy if enabled and dial tone not detected NO ANSWER CONNECT XXXX and ERROR X2 Report basic call progress result codes and connection speeds For example OK CONNECT RING NO CARRIER also for busy if enabled and dial tone not detected NO ANSWER CONNECT XXXX and ERROR X3 Report basic call progress result codes and connection rate For example OK CON
353. n switch 1 switch type brini1 isdn switch 1 box 6 Create a backup pool with pool ID 24 then create a backup line on the ISDN interface you created in step 1 Add this line to the pool box backup pool 24 backup pool 24 backup line bri 1 1 7 Configure a backup circuit for the leased circuit on ppp 1 2 Also set the backup mode parameter to receiver backup line 24 bri 1 1 box serial 1 2 ppp ppp 1 2 backup circuit pool id 24 backup mode receiver B 36 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Configuration Examples This circuit uses backup lines configured in backup pool 24 The backup mode is set to receiver so the other router s backup mode parameter must be set to initiator for proper operation Configure a caller resolution table entry so that when this router receives a call from router 1 it can verify router 1 s identity backup circuit 24 1 2 caller resolution caller name asn secret isdn caller resolution asn Configuring Dial Backup Using Site Manager The following sections show how to configure dial backup over an ISDN network using Site Manager Port Application Mode Configuration on B 39 Backup Pool Configuration on page B 29 Backup Circuit Configuration on page B 40 Outgoing Phone List Configuration on page B 41 Caller Resolution Table Configuration on page B 41 Local Phone Number Configuration on page B 43 To create the dial backup configuration in Figure B 6 on page B 33 first configure the leased inter
354. nager window 308621 14 00 Rev 00 B 29 Configuring Dial Services Backup Circuit Configuration After you configure the backup pool configure the backup circuits on each router by completing the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window choose Dialup The Dialup menu opens Choose Backup Circuits The Backup Circuits menu opens 3 Choose PPP The Primary Circuit Definition window opens which lists the leased circuits that you configured Select a leased circuit name and click on Cct Type Set the Circuit Type parameter to Primary for both routers The Circuit Options window opens Set the Backup Pool ID parameter to 1 for both routers then click on OK Set the Backup Mode parameter as follows Router 1 Master default Router 2 Slave You return to the Primary Circuit Definition window For router 1 only set the CHAP Local Name parameter to BLN For router 1 only set the CHAP Secret parameter to West 10 Click on Apply Site Manager saves your changes 11 Keep the Primary Circuit Definition window open and go to the next section Remember that you do not actually configure a backup circuit designate a leased circuit as a primary circuit If this circuit fails the router provides a backup circuit that adopts the configuration of the primary circui
355. ncoming phone lists modifying 15 21 Incoming Phone Number parameter A 105 Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN creating phone lists 15 1 description 4 1 functional groups 4 5 implementation notes 5 10 incoming call filtering enabling 11 8 leased line operation 2 10 5 12 reference material 4 8 reference points 4 6 removing a B channel 11 23 service for dial services 1 4 standards 4 2 switch type modifying 11 7 using the ping command 5 20 Inter Frame Time Fill parameter A 32 Interface Type parameter A 72 IP Enable parameter demand circuit groups A 63 IPX Enable parameter demand circuit groups A 64 IPX Routing Protocol parameter demand circuit groups A 64 IPXWAN Enable parameter demand circuit groups A 65 ISDN Numbering Plan parameter local phone A 93 outgoing phone A 99 ISDN Numbering Type parameter local phone A 92 outgoing phone A 99 308621 14 00 Rev 00 L LAPD See link access procedure D leased line operation for ISDN BRI 5 12 Line Media Type parameter A 7 line pools bandwidth on demand description 1 25 configuring BCC 3 15 configuring Site Manager 2 6 dial backup description 1 20 using one line for different pools 1 27 line terminator LT description 4 5 link access procedure D LAPD description 4 3 modifying transmission units 11 16 Local Circuit parameter A 109 Local Group parameter A 109 local phone list configuring BCC 3 22 configuring Site Mana
356. nday Weekday Weekend Specifies the days that this circuit should be available The router uses this parameter together with the Start Time and End Time parameters to create a time period that the circuit can be available Enter a specific day of the week enter Weekday for the entire week enter Weekend for the Saturday and Sunday Note that individual days of the week take precedence over the Weekday option For example the router will provide a circuit scheduled for Monday between 9 a m and 11 a m before it provides a circuit scheduled for a weekday between 8 a m and noon 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 4 11 1 4 A 56 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Site Manager Parameters Start Time Demand Circuits Dialup gt Demand Circuits gt Demand Pools gt PPP or FR Circuits gt PPP or FR Demand Circuits gt Schedule gt Circuit Time of Day Schedule or Pool Availability List gt Add gt Circuit Time of Day Schedule Backup Circuits Dialup gt Backup Circuits gt PPP or Frame Relay gt Primary Circuit Definition or FR Primary Interface Definition gt Schedule gt Circuit Time of Day Schedule gt Add gt Circuit Time of Day Schedule 0 0 to 2400 Specifies the time of day the demand or backup circuit is available The router uses this parameter and the End Time parameter to establish a time period when the circuit is available This parameter also speci
357. ne You return to the Demand Pools window NISJA Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window 12 52 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Customizing Demand Circuits Deleting Hot Standby Circuits To delete a hot standby circuit first delete the hot standby object associated with the primary circuit then delete the demand circuit To delete the hot standby object navigate to the hot standby prompt which is one level under the primary circuit context and enter delete For example hot standby to dallas delete Next navigate to the demand circuit prompt and delete the demand circuit For example demand circuit to dallas delete 308621 14 00 Rev 00 12 53 Chapter 13 Customizing Backup Circuits The router activates a backup circuit when a leased circuit fails To configure backup service you designate a leased circuit as a primary circuit This designation tells the router to activate a backup circuit if the leased circuit fails If you have not configured a leased circuit you cannot configure a backup circuit For PPP configurations only you should have set up a backup pool according to the instructions in Chapter 2 Starting Dial Services Using Site Manager or Chapter 3 Starting Dial Services Using the BCC and added PPP backup circuits This chapter includes the following information Topic Page Creating a PPP Backup Circuit for a Direct
358. needed Example If the command syntax is ethernet 2 1 lt parameter gt lt value gt you enter ethernet 2 1 and as many parameter value pairs as needed Xxvi 308621 14 00 Rev 00 italic text screen text separator gt vertical line Preface Indicates file and directory names new terms book titles and variables in command syntax descriptions Where a variable is two or more words the words are connected by an underscore Example If the command syntax is show at lt valid_route gt valid_route is one variable and you substitute one value for it Indicates system output for example prompts and system messages Example set Trap Monitor Filters Shows menu paths Example Protocols gt IP identifies the IP option on the Protocols menu Separates choices for command keywords and arguments Enter only one of the choices Do not type the vertical line when entering the command Example If the command syntax is show ip alerts routes you enter either show ip alerts or show ip routes but not both 308621 14 00 Rev 00 xxvii Configuring Dial Services Acronyms This guide uses the following acronyms ANI Automatic Number Identification ARP Address Resolution Protocol AURP AppleTalk Update based Routing Protocol BACP Bandwidth Allocation Control Protocol BAP Bandwidth Allocation Protocol BofL Breath of Life BRI basic rate interface CHAP Challenge Hands
359. network interface and PVCs than the primary connection After the primary line recovers and the frame relay switch responds to router R1 s DLCMI status requests router R1 terminates the backup connection Note A primary circuit cannot use link and circuit backup simultaneously 1 18 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Dial Services Overview Knowing When the Primary Line Fails Depending on the protocol for the primary and backup circuit the router determines that the primary circuit failed in one of the following ways e No Breath of Life BofL messages in the BofL time period Standard and PPP For Standard and PPP the router automatically enables BofL messages on each primary line and disables them on each backup line BofL messages verify that the line is operational The router determines that the primary line has failed when it stops receiving packets within the BofL time period You can customize the BofL timer For instructions see Configuring WAN Line Services e No DLCMI messages frame relay primary frame relay backup When frame relay is the protocol for the backup circuit the router performs link backup For link backup the router knows that the primary failed when it no longer receives DLCMI messages from the switch These messages communicate information about the interface and the status of each PVC The router may also rely on modem signals to determine whether the primary circuit failed If you rely on modem sign
360. nfiguration enter line type lt type gt type can be ptp or mtp For example bri 1i 1 line type ptp Enter the value for the type of line supplied by your ISDN provider If you have a PTP line connected to a SESS switch you do not need to configure SPIDs Using Site Manager The BRI Interface Configuration window defines the signaling over the D channel To modify BRI signaling over the D channel Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window click on a configured ISDN connector The ISDN Dialup window opens Click on Edit D Chan The BRI Interface Configuration window opens In the BRI Interface Configuration window set the following parameters Acceptable LAPD MTUs BRIT3 Timer BRI T4 Timer BRI B Channel Loopback BRI Line Type Click on Help or see the parameter descriptions beginning on page A 27 4 Click on OK You return to the ISDN Dialup window 5 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window 11 18 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Customizing ISDN Lines Another way to modify the BRI line is to select a configured ISDN interface and click on Edit Line instead of Edit D Chan as described in the previous table The BRI Interface Configuration window opens and you can modify the BRI signaling parameters Modifying the X 25 Circuit for Service over the D Channel Using Site
361. nfigure a CHAP name and secret for the backup circuit enter backup circuit 8 1 1 Chap name bayrs1 chap secret east After configuring the authentication protocol information do one of the following e If the line pool includes ISDN lines or modem lines that use Hayes or V 25bis signalling go to Creating an Outgoing Phone List on page 3 21 e Tf the line pool has only modem lines that use Raise DTR signaling go to Setting Up the Caller Resolution Table on page 3 24 Creating an Outgoing Phone List For ISDN V 25bis and Hayes connections the router uses the outgoing phone list to place a call to a remote router Outgoing phone lists are associated with a specific circuit not with the physical line Because the lines in the pool can be used by many circuits the telephone numbers are part of each circuit s configuration and not the line s configuration To create an outgoing phone list navigate to the demand circuit or backup circuit prompt and enter out phone number lt string gt string is a numeric string up to 25 characters Do not enter space special or alphabetic characters in the telephone number 308621 14 00 Rev 00 3 21 Configuring Dial Services For example to create an outgoing phone number for a demand or backup circuit enter demand circuit circuit to boston out phone number 9786665432 backup circuit 8 1 1 out phone number 9786665432 You can also include a subaddress extension to f
362. ng Dial Services Site Manager Procedure continued You do this System responds 11 Repeat steps 3 through 10 to add more lines to the pool For backup and bandwidth services you can select lines across slots 12 Go to the next section Configuring Circuits to configure dial up circuits Configuring Circuits To configure dial up circuits go to the appropriate section for instructions e Creating PPP Dial on Demand Circuits on page 2 15 e Creating PPP Dial Backup Circuits on page 2 19 e Creating Bandwidth Circuits on page 2 22 When you create a PPP dial up circuit Site Manager creates a special PPP record for the circuit which identifies who is calling the router This record is listed in the PPP Interface Lists window as follows Interface for Dialup Lines For more information about PPP see Configuring PPP Services 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Starting Dial Services Using Site Manager Creating PPP Dial on Demand Circuits To configure frame relay demand circuits skip this section and go to Adding Frame Relay Demand Circuits on page 12 2 To configure PPP demand circuits Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window The Dialup menu opens choose Dialup 2 Choose Demand Circuits The Demand Pools window opens listing the configured pools 3 Select the pool that you want the circuit to The PPP Demand Circuit
363. ng Up a Dial Service Each dial service has many configurable parameters but for a basic configuration you change only a subset of these parameters Setting up a dial service involves the following main tasks 1 2 3 4 Creating the leased interface that will use backup service dial backup only Configuring the dial up physical interface Creating line pools Configuring circuits that use the configured line pools Each task involves several steps which are described later in this chapter Table 3 1 lists the basic tasks required to set up a dial service These tasks apply to modem and ISDN configurations This basic configuration assumes the following PPP is the layer 2 protocol IP is the layer 3 protocol There is no ISDN caller ID service therefore no incoming phone list is required This basic configuration does not address every application There are many other features and functions that you can configure For instructions on customizing the basic configuration see Chapters 9 through 16 308621 14 00 Rev 00 3 5 Configuring Dial Services Table 3 1 Setting Up a Default Modem or ISDN Configuration Using the BCC Task BCC Command 1 For dial backup service define the leased interfaces including the layer 2 and layer 3 protocols These interfaces become primary circuits after you assign a backup circuit to the interface See Configuring WAN Line Services for instructions on creati
364. ng leased interfaces 2 Configure the modem and ISDN physical interfaces that will serial become dial on demand or dial backup lines mct1 mce1 modem bri pri channel 3 Specify whether the connections are synchronous or wan type asynchronous modules that support asynchronous PPP only Define the modem signaling modem lines only media type Designate the interface as a dial object to be used in line pools dial Create a line pool and assign an ID to the pool backup pool or demand pool Add lines to the backup or demand pool backup line or demand line SINIS nje Designate the primary interface by adding a backup circuit to the interface backup only backup circuit 9 Specify the ISDN switch type ISDN only switch type 10 Create a demand circuit demand circuit 11 Specify the circuit connection mode backup mode or connection mode 12 Specify authentication protocol information CHAP is the default protocol chap name chap secret 13 Create an outgoing phone list out phone number phone number subaddress extension 14 Create a local phone list ISDN only local phone number phone number subaddress extension spid United States and Canada only 15 Set up the caller resolution table caller resolution caller name secret Not all of these interface types are shown in this chapter 3 6 3086
365. ng on page A 41 6 Click on Apply then click on Done You return to the Demand Pools window 7 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window 12 30 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Customizing Demand Circuits Enabling Callback Callback is a feature for use between two peer routers such as a central router and a remote router over a PPP circuit It lets you configure a router to call back an incoming caller You cannot use callback with frame relay demand circuits or demand circuit groups Note the following guidelines If the router is set to Server Client or Server Call ID the router performs CHAP or PAP authentication when it receives a call The one charge modes ensure that only the server side of the callback connection incurs phone charges When you choose any of these options the server refuses the call from the client eliminating charges for the client s initial call but charging the server for its return calls to the client To use any of the one charge modes each remote site must have a unique phone number The server must be able to identify a single circuit for each phone number that it calls back If you want to reduce your configuration work and you can purchase caller ID service select the modes that use Call ID These modes do not require an outgoing phone list to place a call they rely only on the phone number in the call setup message If you cannot use caller ID or
366. nil set the isdn number plan parameter to unknown For all other switches use the default value telephony unless instructed otherwise by your service provider If your service provider instructs you to change the isdn number type parameter and isdn number plan parameter set the values by navigating to the out phone number prompt and entering isdn number type lt type gt isdn number plan lt plan gt type can be one of the following unknown specific international subscriber national abbreviated plan can be one of the following unknown telex telephony standard x121 private For example to set the ISDN number plan and type for a backup circuit enter out phone number backup 8 1 9786665432 isdn number type unknown isdn number plan standard 15 8 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Customizing Phone Lists Using Site Manager To specify the phone number type complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window The Dialup menu opens choose Dialup 2 Choose Demand Backup or Bandwidth For backup and bandwidth circuits the on Demand Circuits appropriate Circuit Definition window opens For demand circuits the Demand Pools window opens Click on PPP Circuits or FR Circuits to open the appropriate Demand Circuits window 3 Select a circuit and click on Phone Out The Outgoing Phone List w
367. ns Select a pool entry at the top of the window The Pool ID for the selected entry appears in the Pool ID field 4 Click on Edit 5 Click on the COM connector The Lines Definition window opens Site Manager removes the D B or W next to the connector name If this is the only line in the pool Site Manager also deletes the pool 6 Choose File The File menu opens 7 Choose Exit You return to the Demand Backup or Bandwidth on Demand Pools window Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window 308621 14 00 Rev 00 10 21 Chapter 11 Customizing ISDN Lines This chapter provides instructions on how to modify ISDN lines in a line pool You should have already created line pools according to the instructions in Chapter 2 Starting Dial Services Using Site Manager or Chapter 3 Starting Dial Services Using the BCC You can use Site Manager to configure all three dial services you can use the BCC to modify ISDN lines for dial on demand and dial backup This chapter includes the following information Topic Page Modifying the MCT1 and MCE1 Port Configurations E Modifying the BRI and PRI Modes of Operation 11 2 Configuring Selective PRI Service 11 2 Modifying the ISDN Pool Channel Count 1 Modifying the ISDN Channel Priority 115 Modifying the ISDN Switch Type
368. nteacicccnerasdiceddecsecttnseadcledeneraccteierdaaiatans 11 2 Modifying the ISDN Paol Channel Count sersnisiiminininininimnn aa 18 Modifying the ISDN Channel Priority Siete r Sts tee T T ean a115 Modiiying Ihe SDN Swie h TDS sisanne eaaa raS 11 6 Enabling Incoming Call FINNIE umirousrisoroainiasi naai ea 11 8 Modifying the Adaption Rate O ERE E P P Re 11 9 Informing the Switch That Call Setup Is ee SMES BLEED Configuring X 25 over a D Channel BRI Oniy sessccccccssscicsciaseasseieetaieeeten enn cnans 11 11 Coniguimmg he TEI OE siiis a a Eea 11 12 RTE De TE YANE aknanka aa aa eS Disabling X 25 over the D Channel re permanent PI DN anes 11 14 308621 14 00 Rev 00 xi Modifying BRI Signaling over the D Channel cccceseeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeee 11 15 Modifying LAPD Transmission Units T T E rate ee mana Pete AciValing ISDN S T and U InMerates oriista 11 16 Moding ihe BRI TA TIMET iscsi carsionsianya tunis nga ain cans oats a ai a 11 17 Customizing Conformance Testing PT ere rere ere Enia 11 17 Modifying the BRI Line Configuration seiccccccicsssccccsisenssecssaaesirieevairieasaene 1 18 Modifying the X 25 Circuit for Service over the D Channel 2 ceseceeeeeeeeeees 11 19 Modifying BRI Leased Line Service Germany and Japan Only eceeeeeeeeeees 11 20 Ghenda he Greu Name sraya iania eaaa N ern renee er Frenne 11 20 Modifying the MTU
369. nteger is a number from 1 to 999999 The default is 60 minutes For example to specify a max uptime of 100 for the circuit to phoenix enter demand circuit to phoenix max uptime 100 The minimum call duration parameter specifies the minimum amount of time that the connection remains active regardless of whether there is data traffic To configure the minimum amount of time the connection should remain active navigate to the demand circuit prompt and enter minimum call duration lt integer gt integer is a number from 10 to 2 147 483 647 seconds The default is 60 seconds For dial optimized routing circuits this timer should allow enough time to send all routing updates to the remote nodes in the network For example to specify a minimum duration of 80 seconds enter demand circuit to phoenix minimum call duration 80 308621 14 00 Rev 00 12 19 Configuring Dial Services Terminating and Resetting the Circuit The max uptime termination parameter automatically deactivates the circuit if the call reaches the maximum time that you specify using the max uptime parameter If the router receives data after the circuit is down the router does not establish a demand connection To enable the max uptime termination parameter navigate to the demand circuit prompt and enter max uptime termination enabled The default is disabled For example to ensure the demand circuit to phoenix is disconnected after the maximum amount of
370. ntication protocol specify the CHAP secret If not ignore this parameter MIB Object ID 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 4 5 1 32 308621 14 00 Rev 00 A 47 Configuring Dial Services Parameter PAP Local ID Path Demand Circuits Dialup gt Demand Circuits gt Demand Pools gt PPP Circuits gt PPP Demand Circuits Backup Circuits Dialup gt Backup Circuits gt PPP gt Primary Circuit Definition Bandwidth Circuits Dialup gt Bandwidth On Demand Circuit gt Bandwidth On Demand Circuit Definition Default None Options Any text string maximum of 25 characters Function Specifies the PAP ID that you assign to this interface It identifies the calling router to the called router During the authentication phase all Password Authenticate Request messages that the calling router sends to the called router must include the correct PAP ID or the called router sends an Authenticate Negative Acknowledgment Authenticate NAK and does not bring up the connection For bandwidth on demand circuits this parameter is only configurable if the Bandwidth Mode parameter is set to Monitor Instructions If you are using PAP as the authentication protocol specify a unique PAP ID for this circuit If not ignore this parameter MIB Object ID 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 4 5 1 37 A 48 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Site Manager Parameters Parameter PAP Password Path Demand Circuits Dialup gt Demand Circuits gt Demand Pools gt PPP Circuits
371. o allocation conflicts The Bandwidth Allocation Control Protocol BACP is the control protocol It negotiates the use of BAP enabling BAP data to be exchanged between the peer routers If BACP negotiation fails the router will not use BAP for bandwidth on demand service How BAP Works Figure 8 2 shows BAP negotiation between two routers Router A Router B CE Monitor Call request _ gt lt Call response which includes 5085551234 Router dials __ gt 5085551234 Local Phone List 5085551234 5085554365 5085551298 5085559854 DS0034A Figure 8 2 BAP Negotiation Between Two Routers 308621 14 00 Rev 00 8 5 Configuring Dial Services In this example two Nortel Networks routers are connected Router A has only one phone number in its outgoing phone list for the destination router B Router A calls router B While they are communicating router A the monitor router determines that it needs more bandwidth based on the user defined congestion thresholds BAP negotiation then begins as follows 1 Router A sends a call request asking for more bandwidth 2 Router B the non monitor router checks the router slots to find an available line It uses the Preferred and Reserved Bandwidth Slot parameters to determine which slots to check first You can set these parameters for a non monitor router if the Bandwidth Mode parameter is set to Dynamic Monitor
372. o authentication protocols CHAP or PAP Note RADIUS clients that use dial services identify remote callers using vendor specific attributes VSAs not a caller resolution table In this case do not configure a caller resolution table CHAP is the default authentication protocol To configure PAP you must modify the PPP interface configuration and either modify the Site Manager parameter Local Authentication Protocol or the BCC parameter authentication protocol before setting up the caller resolution table For instructions on how to set the Site Manager parameter see Configuring PPP Services For instructions on how to set the BCC parameter see Changing the Authentication Protocol on page 12 16 308621 14 00 Rev 00 16 1 Configuring Dial Services Note that when you configure a PPP connection using Site Manager it creates a generic PPP line record that all pools use for identification To identify remote callers you enter the caller name and CHAP secret or PAP password of each remote caller in the caller resolution table Then assign a local demand primary or bandwidth circuit to each caller The authentication process starts during link negotiation The remote caller includes its CHAP name or PAP ID in the CHAP challenge or PAP authenticate request to the called router When the called router receives the call it checks its caller resolution table for a matching entry If the remote caller is authorized the calle
373. o stop retrying the original call This option is available only if the callback mode parameter is set to one of the server options To specify how long the server waits before calling back the client navigate to the ppp circuit prompt and enter callback server delay lt integer gt integer is a number from 0 to 1800 seconds The default is 0 If you are using a modem enter a value greater than 6 seconds For example to ensure that the server waits 15 seconds before calling the client back enter ppp to dallas callback server delay 15 You can configure the client to wait for a call from the server During this time the client will not place an outgoing call to any other destination The delay gives the server time to return the initial call This option is available only if the callback mode parameter is set to one of the client options To specify how long the client waits for a return call from the server navigate to the ppp circuit prompt and enter callback client delay lt integer gt integer is a number from 0 to 1800 seconds The default value is 5 This value must be greater than the callback server delay setting If you are dialing through a modem enter a value greater than 45 seconds For example to ensure that the router waits 50 seconds for the server to return the call enter ppp to dallas callback client delay 50 12 34 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Using Site Manager To enable the callback feature C
374. o this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window choose Dialup The Dialup menu opens Choose Demand Circuit Groups The Demand Circuit Groups window opens Click on Edit Pools The Demand Circuit Group window opens Select the demand circuit group that you want to remove Click on Delete Site Manager removes the demand circuit group Click on Done You return to the Demand Circuit Groups window Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window 308621 14 00 Rev 00 12 51 Configuring Dial Services Removing Demand Circuits You can delete any demand circuit using either the BCC or Site Manager Using the BCC To delete a PPP or frame relay demand circuit navigate to the demand circuit prompt and enter delete For example demand circuit to boston delete When you delete a demand circuit you delete all related objects Using Site Manager To remove a demand circuit Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window choose Dialup Choose Demand Circuits The Dialup menu opens The Demand Pools window opens o Click on PPP Circuits or FR Circuits The PPP Demand Circuits window or the FR Demand Circuits window opens Select the circuit that you want to remove Click on Delete Site Manager removes the circuit Click on Do
375. oing Phone List Bandwidth Circuits Bandwidth On Demand Circuit Definition gt Phone Out gt Outgoing Phone List BChannel BChannel Multirate Determines whether this call uses multirate service This parameter is only applicable for PRI on an MCT1 or QMCTI Link Module If you purchased multirate service from your service provider select Multirate Otherwise accept the default BChannel 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 4 6 1 13 Aggregate Bandwidth Dialup gt Demand Backup Bandwidth On Demand Circuits Demand Circuits PPP or FR Circuits gt PPP or FR Demand Circuits gt Phone Out gt Outgoing Phone List Backup Circuits PPP or Frame Relay gt Primary Circuit Definition or FR Primary Interface Definition gt Phone Out gt Outgoing Phone List Bandwidth Circuits Bandwidth On Demand Circuit Definition gt Phone Out gt Outgoing Phone List 128K 2 64K 128K 2 64K to 1472K 23 64K Determines the total bandwidth that is the number of B channels in use for this PRI multirate call Select the number of B channels the router should use for calls to this remote destination Remember that the call will fail if there are not enough channels available in the bandwidth pool 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 4 6 1 14 308621 14 00 Rev 00 A 103 Configuring Dial Services Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Outgoing Phone Prefix Dialup gt Demand Backup Bandwidth On Demand Circuits
376. on 308621 14 00 Rev 00 4 1 Configuring Dial Services In addition to offering integrated services ISDN provides a number of standard universal interfaces to access ISDN services With a defined set of interfaces you can purchase ISDN equipment and services from different providers and all the parts of your network will have the same interfaces to connect to one another as well as to the ISDN network ISDN is primarily a dial service that uses switched connections as circuits This means that you can use channels and services on an as needed basis instead of having a connection up all the time regardless of need This choice ensures a cost effective use of phone lines as well as bandwidth efficiency ISDN Standards The ITU T formerly CCITT has defined a set of standards to ensure universal implementation of ISDN technology The following sections describe some of these standards Basic Rate Interface BRI transmits data at a rate of 64 Kb s over each of two bearer channels also called B channels which are dedicated to data transmission Along with the two B channels BRI uses one data channel called the D channel The D channel handles all signaling information such as call setup requests It transmits this information at a rate of 16 Kb s The networking industry also refers to BRI service as 2B D to denote the combination of the two B channels and one D channel These three channels are combined in one physical twisted pa
377. on Although Site Manager provides default values for the monitor parameters edit them for your network applications If the network is critical to your operations and you want to ensure expedient data transmission customize your threshold values so that even with moderate congestion the router activates additional lines Remember to account for data compression which will also relieve congestion over a line Also the cost of additional lines may determine how often you want the router to activate the lines 308621 14 00 Rev 00 14 3 Configuring Dial Services Bandwidth on Demand Congestion Monitor Parameters For BayRS 12 10 or later when WCP is negotiated above the multilink bundle and the router sends or receives data it calculates the congestion thresholds based on compressed data If WCP is negotiated below the multilink bundle the router calculates these thresholds based on uncompressed data If a router using BayRS Version 12 10 software is communicating with a router using software prior to Version 12 10 the routers must negotiate WCP below the bundle so the thresholds will be based on uncompressed data Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window choose Dialup The Dialup menu opens Choose Bandwidth on Demand Circuits The Bandwidth On Demand Circuit Definition window opens Click on Options The Bandwidth On Demand Monitor Options windo
378. on The backup circuit does not adopt the primary circuit s configuration MIB Object ID 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 9 1 1 33 A 72 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Site Manager Parameters Pool ID Dialup gt Backup Circuits gt Frame Relay gt FR Primary Interface Definition gt Intf Type gt FR Interface Slot lt n gt lt port gt None 1 to 255 Identifies the backup pool that the primary circuit uses If you selected primary shared or primary secondary as the interface type enter an existing backup pool for the primary circuit If you selected Normal as the interface type do not enter a pool ID 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 4 5 1 5 308621 14 00 Rev 00 A 73 Configuring Dial Services Frame Relay Primary Interface Definition Parameters Dial Backup The FR Primary Interface Definition window Figure A 16 contains the interface definition parameters for the frame relay backup circuit FR Primary Interface Definition FR Slot 4 Mod 4 COM1 Done Intf Type Apply Values Help Backup Pool ID Maximum Up Time Max UpTime Termination UpTime Term Reset Primary Down Time Use Backup Interface Filters Figure A 16 FR Primary Interface Definition Window The parameter descriptions follow A 74 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Defa
379. on Table 308621 14 00 Rev 00 3 23 Configuring Dial Services Setting Up the Caller Resolution Table To identify an incoming remote caller you enter the name and CHAP secret of each remote caller in a caller resolution table and associate each name with a local demand primary or bandwidth circuit When a router receives an incoming call it checks the caller resolution table for an entry that identifies the caller If the caller is authorized the local router activates a circuit Note If you are configuring RADIUS with a dial service the router uses vendor specific attributes for authentication In this case do not configure a caller resolution table CHAP is the default authentication protocol so you must enter the remote router s CHAP name and CHAP secret in the caller resolution table To configure the caller resolution table navigate to the protocol demand circuit prompt for dial on demand or the backup circuit prompt for dial backup and enter caller resolution caller name lt string gt secret lt string gt string is any text string up to 20 characters This name is part of the incoming call and informs the local router of the remote router s identity You do not need to enter the keyword caller name you can simply provide the name string The CHAP secret must be the same on both sides of the connection For example to configure caller resolution for a backup circuit enter backup circuit 8
380. on Trigger Size Dialup gt Bandwidth On Demand Circuits gt Bandwidth On Demand Circuit Definition gt Options gt Bandwidth On Demand Monitor Options 256 64 to 4000 Specifies the minimum packet size that the router will fragment into smaller packets Enter the packet size that will cause the router to fragment the packet 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 2 2 1 57 BAP Enable Dialup gt Bandwidth On Demand Circuits gt Bandwidth On Demand Circuit Definition gt Options gt Bandwidth On Demand Monitor Options Disable Enable Disable Enables or disables BAP service to manage the allocation of bandwidth across a multilink bundle BAP is available only for ISDN lines To enable BAP choose Enable otherwise accept the default Disable 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 2 2 1 66 A 88 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Site Manager Parameters Parameter BAP No Phone Number Needed Path Dialup gt Bandwidth On Demand Circuits gt Bandwidth On Demand Circuit Definition gt Options gt Bandwidth On Demand Monitor Options Default Enable Options Enable Disable Function Instructs the non monitor router whether to send its local phone number to the monitor router during BAP negotiations for more bandwidth Instructions Accept the default Enable if all the numbers that the monitor router requires are in the outgoing phone list This value tells the non monitor router not to supply phone numbers Select Disable if you configured only one outgo
381. onfigured schedule For example for the router to automatically transfer from the hot standby circuit to the primary enter ppp to dallas standby failback mode automatic Controlling the Standby Circuit Manually To manually activate or deactivate a standby circuit navigate to the ppp circuit prompt and enter manual standby action lt action gt action can be no action indicates that you do not want to manually activate a a normal or hot standby circuit activate tells the router to activate a normal or hot standby circuit deactivate tells the router to terminate a normal or hot standby circuit For example to set the manual standby action parameter to active for the circuit to dallas enter ppp to dallas manual standby action activate 308621 14 00 Rev 00 12 29 Configuring Dial Services Using Site Manager To configure standby circuits Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window choose Dialup The Dialup menu opens Choose Demand Circuits The Demand Pools window opens Click on PPP Circuits or FR Circuits The PPP Demand Circuits window or the FR Demand Circuits window opens 4 Select the circuit that you want to modify 5 Set the following parameters Standby Mode Standby Failback Mode Manual Standby Action Standby Primary Circuit Click on Help or see the parameter descriptions beginni
382. onnected via a demand line The demand line uses PPP and V 25bis signaling l Router 7 IP address R6 ee Sync line S23 150 1 1 1 Group mode PVCs Frame relay non fully meshed Demand line V 25bis Fa 25 Direct mode PVC Router 4 IP address Sync line S25 150 1 1 2 DS0023A Figure B 1 Dial on Demand Configuration with PPP 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Configuration Examples You can configure the routers for this network using the BCC or Site Manager Go to one of the following sections Configuring Dial on Demand Using the BCC on page B 3 Configuring Dial on Demand Using Site Manager on page B 6 Configuring Dial on Demand Using the BCC To create the dial on demand configuration in Figure B 1 on page B 2 configure routers 4 and 7 as follows Configuration of Router 4 To create the dial on demand configuration in Figure B 1 on page B 2 configure router 4 as follows 1 Start the BCC and enter configuration mode bcec gt config Create a dial object for serial interface on the octal sync module slot 2 connector 5 PPP is the datalink protocol box serial 2 5 serial 2 5 media type v25b
383. onnections are infrequent Reducing the value of the broadcast timer or update interval defeats the purpose of dial optimized routing If a connection is made because there is data to send the router uses this opportunity to send routing updates Consequently these timers reset instead of expiring This further reduces the frequency of connections made by a protocol request 6 10 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Dial on Demand Implementation Notes Maintaining the Routing Table Although dial optimized routing limits the amount of routing information sent across the network you can maintain the accuracy of the routing tables using the following methods e Set the Hold Down Timer parameter to a higher value than the Broadcast Timer or Update Interval parameter The Hold Down Timer parameter specifies how long unusable routes are advertised after the route is invalid This ensures that unreachable routes remain in the routing table long enough to be broadcast over an active connection e Synchronize protocol requests for a connection When a connection is active the router sends status messages to IP or IPX alerting the protocol that it can send routing updates If IP or IPX does not receive this connection message it makes a separate request for a connection This request resets the Minimum Duration Time parameter and the connection then remains active for the specified time e Configure the router to handle oversubscription of lines I
384. onous interface for the primary link to the backbone network e One ISDN B channel for the dial backup link If you use 2B D service without configuring floating B the AN provides only one synchronous interface so you cannot integrate the dial service with other network applications However by configuring floating B you can configure two synchronous interfaces one Ethernet link and one B channel The router software maps whichever B channel is in use to a single SCC To implement the floating B option configure the port application mode for that option see Chapter 2 Starting Dial Services Using Site Manager or Chapter 3 Starting Dial Services Using the BCC The router makes the necessary adjustments so that only one B channel is available PRI Service on the ASN BLN and BCN The ASN BLN and BCN provide PRI service on the following modules e Single or Dual Port Multichannel T1 Link Module BLN and BCN e Dual Port Multichannel T1 Net Module ASN e 120 ohm Single Port MCE1 II Link Module BLN and BCN e 120 ohm Single or Dual Port MCE1 II Net Module ASN e QMCT1 Link Module BLN and BCN PRI allows you to connect directly to the ISDN network instead of connecting via a terminal adapter PRI is a cost effective solution when the number of BRI channels required for an application exceeds the cost of a single PRI line The cost savings depend on each country s tariffs All three dial services can use PRI conn
385. ools show dial pap chap information The show dial pap chap information command displays the authentication configuration You can use the following filter flags and filter arguments for this command backup shows PAP and CHAP information for dial backup service demand shows PAP and CHAP information for dial on demand service circuit lt circuit_name gt shows PAP and CHAP information for a specified caller C 22 308621 14 00 Rev 00 BCC show Commands The output contains the following information Circuit Name Name of the dial circuit CHAP Local Name The local routers CHAP name CHAP Secret The local router s CHAP secret PAP ID The local router s PAP ID PAP Password The local router s PAP password Configd Pool IDs ID of the line pool show dial local phone numbers The show dial local phone numbers command displays the local phone numbers list configured for ISDN calls The output contains the following information Slot Module Conn The slot module number and connector number where the dial interface resides Local Phone Number The local router s phone number associated with the interface Extension The extension of the local phone number Directory Number The phone number type Type Directory Number The phone number plan Plan Service Profile ID Service Profile Identifier SPID assigned by the ISDN service provider For service from a switch conforming to national ISDN standards SPID
386. or the demand circuit in this case PPP you can configure the connection mode The connection mode determines the role of each router when two routers try to establish a demand circuit with each other at the same time resulting in a collision If a collision occurs each router refers to the connection mode to determine whether to initiate subsequent calls or whether to wait and receive calls The default connection mode is collision master To set the connection mode navigate to the PPP demand circuit prompt and enter connection mode lt mode gt mode can be no dial collision master or collision slave To avoid continual collisions configure one router as collision master and the other as collision slave To ensure that a router receives calls but never initiates calls enter no dial Calls are then made only in one direction For example to configure a router as the collision slave enter ppp circuit to Boston connection mode collision slave After the connection mode is set go to Specifying the Authentication Protocol Information on page 3 20 Configuring PPP Backup Circuits After you create the backup pool and add lines to it you add backup circuits and the backup mode for these circuits The backup mode determines which router initiates dialing to establish a backup connection if the primary circuit fails To create a backup circuit navigate to the leased interface prompt for which you are configuring backup servic
387. ore about any show command options and its syntax use the question mark command as follows bcc gt show dial show dial lt option gt Where lt option gt is one of backup Calls local phone numbers caller resolution demand pap chap information bcc gt show dial demand show dial demand lt option gt Where lt option gt is one of caller resolution lines pools circuits out phone numbers schedules in phone numbers pap chap information summary bcc gt show dial demand caller resolution show dial demand caller resolution caller lt arg gt 308621 14 00 Rev 00 C 3 Configuring Dial Services Commands for Dial on Demand The most general representation of BCC show syntax is as follows show once lt container gt lt container gt lt keyword gt lt argument gt lt filter_flag gt lt filter_argument gt The keyword once will cause the statistical information screen to be displayed once and is the default if not specified Table C 1 lists the show commands for dial on demand Table C 1 Dial on Demand show Commands lt container 1 gt lt container 2 gt lt keyword gt lt filter_flags gt lt filter_arguments gt demand lt none gt summary pool lt pool_id gt pools pool lt pool_id gt circuits general pool lt pool_id gt advanced circuit lt circuit_name gt lt none gt lines pool lt pool_id gt schedules pool lt pool_id gt circuit lt circuit_name gt
388. orks DMS 100 Switch Parameter Value Notes Signaling Functional Protocol Version 1or2 1 is NT1 Custom 2 is NI 1 National ISDN 1 TEI Assignment Dynamic Maximum of Keys 3 ripe any number greater than or equal to Release Key is N or a Key No Not relevant for proper operation Number Ring Indicator is Y N No Not relevant for proper operation EKTS is Y N No Ordering PRI Lines When ordering ISDN PRI lines for use in the United States note the following e The switch must be a DMS 100 AT amp T 5ESS or AT amp T 4ESS switch e Configure all 23 B channels for Circuit Switched Data CSD e Configure the D channel for signaling only e You cannot run the National ISDN 2 NI 2 protocol D 2 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Appendix E AT Initialization Commands for the ARN Table E 1 lists the AT commands used by the ARN with the internal modem adapter module Because your modem may use a different set of commands consult the manual for your modem Table E 1 Summary of AT Modem Initialization Commands Command Function A Reexecute command A Go off hook and attempt to answer a call BO Select V 22 connection at 1200 b s B1 Select Bell 212A connection at 1200 b s C1 Return OK message Dn Dial modifier E0 Turn off command echo E1 Turn on command echo FO Select auto detect mode equivalent to N1 RC144 F1 Select V 21 or Bell 103 RC144 F2 R
389. orks with the Adaption Rate parameter in the outgoing phone list see Chapter 15 Customizing Phone Lists Informing the Switch That Call Setup Is Complete Some switches require that the router send a packet in the call setup that includes all the information elements needed to complete the call setup This makes call setup more efficient This packet is called the sending complete information element Using the BCC To enable the sending complete information element navigate to the isdn switch prompt and enter sending complete lt siate gt state is enabled or disabled For example to send an information element enter isdn switch 2 sending complete enabled The default is disabled 11 10 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Customizing ISDN Lines Using Site Manager To enable the use of an information element Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window The Dialup menu opens choose Dialup 2 Choose Edit Switch Parameters The ISDN Configured Switches window opens 3 Set the Sending Complete IE parameter to Enable Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 22 4 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window Configuring X 25 over a D Channel BRI Only Using the BCC or Site Manager you can configure X 25 over a D channel This feature is only for NET3 switch types in Germany and France To reduce
390. ose Dialup The Dialup menu opens 2 Choose Demand Pools The Demand Pools window opens 3 Click on Add The Demand Pool Configuration window opens 4 Set the Pool ID parameter to 1 then click The Demand Lines Definition window on OK opens 5 Select an unconfigured COM connector The Choose WAN Serial Interface Type window opens 6 Accept the default Sync and click on OK The Sync Line Media Type window opens 7 Set the Line Media Type parameter to You return to the Demand Lines Definition V 25bis and click on OK window 8 Choose File gt Exit You return to the Demand Pools window 9 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Demand Circuit Configuration Configuration Examples After you create a demand pool configure a demand circuit for routers 4 and 7 by completing the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window choose Dialup The Dialup menu opens Choose Demand Circuits The Demand Pools window opens 3 Click on PPP Circuits The PPP Demand Circuits window opens 4 Click on Add Site Manager adds a demand circuit In the top left corner of the window choose Protocols The Protocols menu opens 6 Choose Add Delete The Select Protocols menu opens 7 Choose IP and click on OK The I
391. ot on the list you can configure a custom modem and AT initialization command The AT initialization command is required for custom modems Appendix E lists the AT initialization commands for the ARN Because your modem may use a different set of commands consult the manual for your modem Entering an invalid command can disable the modem If the modem does not initialize you may need to change the asynchronous baud rate To access the window where you choose a modem you must set the WAN Serial Interface Type parameter to Async and the Line Media Type set to Hayes To select a Hayes compatible modem Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window The Edit Connector window opens click on the COM connector for the interface that requires a modem The connector name should have a D B or W next to it 2 Click on Edit Modem The Async Hayes Modem Interface window opens 3 Set the Modem Type parameter Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 11 4 If you selected Custom for the modem type set the Modem Init String parameter Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 12 5 Optionally set the following parameters Speaker Volume Speaker Control No of Rings to Answer Click on Help or see the parameter descriptions beginning on page A 13 continued 308621 14 00 Rev 00 10 9 Configuring Dia
392. ot standby lt demand_circuit_name gt demand _circuit_name is the name of the configured demand circuit For example to make the demand circuit to dallas a hot standby circuit for the frame relay primary circuit centralbln enter service centralblin hot standby to dallas The demand circuit to dallas is now a hot standby circuit If the primary frame relay connection fails the router activates the circuit to dallas to continue the transmission of data 4 Go to the next section Configuring a Normal Standby Circuit to configure the other side of the standby connection 308621 14 00 Rev 00 12 27 Configuring Dial Services Configuring a Normal Standby Circuit For a router at the other end of a hot standby circuit to receive a call you must configure the router with a normal standby demand circuit configuration that includes an IP circuit and caller resolution table To do this navigate to the ppp demand circuit prompt and enter standby mode lt mode gt mode can be demand normal The circuit operates as a standard demand circuit This is the default setting standby normal The circuit is a standby circuit for incoming calls The router activates this type of standby circuit manually or by an incoming call standby hot The circuit will back up a failed primary circuit to continue the transmission of data This is a read only option you cannot set it manually The BCC automatically sets this value when you
393. ou can configure the phone numbers in your outgoing phone list for a single call or multiple calls This feature is for applications that use bandwidth on demand to aid congested demand circuits Using the BCC To set the connection type navigate to the demand circuit or backup circuit prompt and enter connection type lt type gt type can be single Choose single if the remote destination can only support a single connection with this outgoing phone number If a circuit on the same slot is already using this phone number the router will use another phone number in the list Choosing the single option is particularly important if the line is connected to an external device such as a modem If the router places a call to device that is busy it takes a long time before the router determines that the device is unavailable By selecting single you eliminate this loss of time multiple The default option instructs the router to use the phone number for multiple calls For example if you are using PRI service you have many channels that can use the same phone number to place a call Therefore you would select multiple for this parameter For example to specify a connection type parameter for a backup circuit enter out phone number backup 8 1 5085556879 Connection type single 308621 14 00 Rev 00 15 15 Configuring Dial Services Using Site Manager To set the connection type Site Manager Procedure You do
394. ounting down from 60 minutes Data is still traveling over the standby circuit 11 00 a m Since 10 30 a m 30 minutes of failback time have elapsed for time of day schedule 1 but time of day schedule 2 is now active This new schedule has a failback time of 10 minutes which supersedes the previous failback time of 60 minutes Because 10 minutes have passed data traffic returns to the primary circuit If you schedule the standby circuit to terminate before the failback time expires the router still terminates the standby circuit The router does not wait for the primary circuit to recover There is no circuit available until the primary circuit reactivates or the standby circuit is available again see Example 2 Failback Time Results in No Available Circuit 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Customizing Demand Circuits Example 2 Failback Time Results in No Available Circuit 3 00 p m The primary circuit fails and a standby circuit is activated as specified in time of day Schedule 2 4 55 p m The primary circuit recovers The failback timer starts counting down from 10 minutes 5 00 p m After 5 minutes time of day schedule 3 is active The standby circuit is brought down and will not be available until 7 00 p m For 5 minutes there is no circuit available to transmit data 5 05 p m Data traffic transfers back to the primary circuit Using the BCC If the standby failback mode is set to none you can control when the
395. our network e US Robotics Courier V Everything e Hayes Optima 288 e Cardinal MVP 288XF e Supra 288 Fax Modem e Zoom V 34X e Microcom DeskPorte Fast e BayStack ARN V 34 Modem Adapter Module e MultiTech Multimodem II MT1432 e Paradyne Comsphere 3820 e Motorola Codex 3261 e Boca V 34 Modem MV 34E When you select a modem from the list the AT initialization string is set automatically as well as the speaker volume speaker control and number of rings to answer You can modify these default settings If your modem is not on the list you can configure a custom modem and AT initialization command The AT initialization command is required for custom modems Appendix E lists the AT initialization commands for the ARN Because your modem may use a different set of commands consult the manual for your modem For the BCC the modem type default is custom We recommend that you accept the default value and then specify a modem initialization string The BayStack ARN router has an optional V 34 Modem Adapter Module that requires you to configure an AT initialization command whether the interface is synchronous or asynchronous For instructions on modifying your modem configuration see Chapter 10 Customizing Modem Lines 5 8 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Implementation Notes for All Dial Services RADIUS As networks grow to accommodate more remote dial in users network security network use and billing become more dif
396. out phone number backup 8 1 9786665432 subaddress extension 456 For V 25bis calls only you can also specify a delimiter as part of the phone number The delimiter separates the phone number from the extension if the remote device requires one Use a character or set of characters that the remote device accepts To specify a delimiter navigate to the out phone number prompt and enter phone delimiter lt string gt string can be any number of characters up to a maximum of five characters For example to use a slash as the delimiter character for a demand circuit enter out phone number to phoenix 8 1 9786665432 phone delimiter To list all the phone list entries for a particular demand or backup circuit navigate to the demand or backup circuit prompt and enter Iso You can also use the relevant show command to display a complete or partial list of out phone number entries See Appendix C BCC show Commands 308621 14 00 Rev 00 15 5 Configuring Dial Services Using Site Manager To create an outgoing phone list Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window choose Dialup The Dialup menu opens Choose Demand Backup or Bandwidth on Demand Circuits For backup and bandwidth circuits the appropriate Circuit Definition window opens For demand circuits the Demand Pools window opens Click on PPP Circuits or FR Circuits to open the a
397. out phone numbers pool lt pool_id gt circuit lt circuit_name gt caller resolution caller lt caller_name gt pap chap information circuit lt circuit_name gt There are no arguments for dial on demand Show commands C 4 308621 14 00 Rev 00 BCC show Commands show dial demand summary The show dial demand summary command displays general information about dial on demand including demand pool IDs demand lines and demand circuits You can specify the following filter flag with this command pool lt poo l_id gt displays general information for the specified demand pool only The output contains the following information Pool ID The ID of the pool that data is describing Demand Circuits Demand circuit names that are using the pool ID Demand lines Types of lines in the pool and each lines s interface slot on the router show dial demand pools The show dial demand pools command displays information about all demand pools The following filter flag and filter argument can be used with this command pool lt poo l_id gt displays information about the specified demand pool only The output contains the following information Dial Service Information Pool ID The ID of the demand pool 308621 14 00 Rev 00 C 5 Configuring Dial Services Demand Circuit Information Demand Circuit Name Circuit name Connection Mode WAN Protocol Operational Mode Callback Mode Indicates
398. outers try to establish a demand circuit with one another at the same time you need to define the connection mode of each router Both routers in a demand configuration can initiate a call If a collision occurs each router refers to the value of the connection mode parameter to determine whether to initiate subsequent calls or whether to wait and receive calls The following sections explain how to set the connection mode 12 12 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Customizing Demand Circuits Using the BCC To specify which router places a call first navigate to the PPP circuit prompt and enter connection mode lt mode gt mode can be no dial collision master or collision slave The default is collision master To avoid continual collisions configure one router as collision master and the other as collision slave After an initial collision each router will then follow the role assigned by this parameter To ensure that a router receives calls but never initiates calls enter no dial For example ppp circuit to Boston connection mode collision master Using Site Manager To specify which router places a call first Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window The Dialup menu opens choose Dialup 2 Choose Demand Circuits The Demand Pools window opens 3 Click on PPP Circuits The PPP Demand Circuits window opens 4 Select the circuit that you want to modify
399. ow opens Click on Add The appropriate Pool Configuration window opens continued 2 6 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Starting Dial Services Using Site Manager Site Manager Procedure continued You do this System responds 4 Enter a number for the Demand Backup The Lines Definition window opens Bandwidth Pool ID parameter then click on OK You can use the same ID for a demand backup or bandwidth pool but you cannot use the same ID for two pools of the same type Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 4 5 Click on an available COM connector to The Choose WAN Serial Interface Type assign a line to the pool but consider the window Sync Line Media Type window following or Async Line Media Type window opens Do not select any COM lines that you previously configured as leased lines On the BLN and BCN the Choose WAN The lines that you select for a demand Serial Interface Type window opens only pool must reside on the same slot for ports on an Octal Sync Link Module e The lines that you select for a backup For all other modules the Sync Line or bandwidth pool can reside across Media Type window opens slots 6 If applicable set the WAN Serial Interface Type parameter then click on OK Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 5 Otherwise go to step 7 If you plan to use Asynchronous PPP for your dial connections you need to se
400. ox prompt and enter demand pool lt pool id gt or backup pool lt pool id gt pool id can be a number from 1 to 255 For example to create a demand pool with an ID of 8 enter box demand pool 8 demand pool 8 308621 14 00 Rev 00 3 15 Configuring Dial Services Adding Lines to the Pool To add a backup line to a pool navigate to the backup pool prompt and enter backup line lt ine type gt lt slot module connector gt To add a demand line to a pool navigate to the demand pool prompt and enter demand line lt ine type gt lt slot module connector gt line type indicates the interface type of the associated dial object The value can be serial bri or pri For the ARN use serial as the line type slot module connector identifies the physical interface You specify a module number only for ASN and System 5000 routers For example to add the backup line serial interface 1 1 to backup pool 8 enter backup pool 8 backup line serial 1 1 backup line 8 serial 1 1 The pool ID becomes part of the backup line and demand line prompts automatically If you defined multiple dial interfaces you could add multiple lines to the same pool for example backup pool 8 backup line serial 1 1 backup line bri 3 1 Be aware of the following when selecting lines for a pool e All the lines in a demand pool must reside on the same slot and can combine Raise DTR V 25bis Hayes and ISDN lines e Do notuse any lines pr
401. p bandwidth on demand service you can configure BAP For configuration instructions see Enabling BAP for Bandwidth on Demand Service on page 14 8 You also need to set up a local phone list if your router is responsible for passing phone numbers to its peer router to activate additional lines To set up a local phone list see Creating a Local Phone List ISDN Only on page 15 23 If you do not configure BAP for your bandwidth connections the monitor router adds bandwidth without negotiating with the non monitor router Data Compression You can configure one of two compression protocols over any PPP bandwidth on demand circuit e Nortel Networks proprietary data compression protocol WCP e Hi fn LZS Enabling compression improves bandwidth efficiency by eliminating redundant strings in data streams This in turn improves network response times and yields line cost savings To implement data compression you select either WCP or Hi fn LZS as one of the protocols for the bandwidth circuit Note that WCP does not work with any other vendor s compression protocol For more information about data compression see Configuring Data Compression Services 308621 14 00 Rev 00 8 7 Configuring Dial Services Protocol Prioritization When you configure a router you can prioritize the different types of traffic sent across a line This process is called protocol prioritization When you configure leased bandwidth circu
402. parameter appears only for switches in the United States and Canada continued 15 26 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Customizing Phone Lists Site Manager Procedure continued You do this System responds 4 Modify the local phone list as follows Changing numbers To change a phone number click in the field for the parameter that you want to modify Enter a new value then click on Apply The phone number appears with the changes at the top of the window Deleting numbers To delete a phone number select the phone number and extension if any and click on Delete Site Manager deletes the number 5 Click on OK You return to the ISDN Local Phone Numbers window 6 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window 308621 14 00 Rev 00 15 27 Chapter 16 Customizing Caller Resolution This chapter explains how to modify your caller resolution information using the BCC dial on demand and dial backup only and Site Manager It contains the following topics Topic Page Caller Resolution for Demand Circuit Groups 16 2 Adding Entries to the Caller Resolution Table 16 3 Modifying Entries in the Caller Resolution Table 16 Deleting a Caller Resolution Entry 16 7 For security purposes all three dial services use a PPP identification mechanism to determine who is calling the router PPP performs this identification process using one of tw
403. ppropriate Demand Circuits window 3 Select a circuit and click on Phone Out The Outgoing Phone List window opens 4 Click on Add The Phone Number window opens The router dials the phone numbers in the order in which they occur in the list 5 Set the Outgoing Phone Number parameter Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 95 Set the following parameters if applicable Outgoing Phone Ext SubAddr Outgoing Phone Delimiter Click on Help or see the parameter descriptions beginning on page A 96 Click on OK You return to the completed Outgoing Phone List window Accept the defaults for the remaining parameters or modify them according to the descriptions in Appendix A Repeat the procedure for each phone number that you want to add to the list 10 Click on Done You return to the appropriate circuit window 11 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window 15 6 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Customizing Phone Lists Modifying the Phone Number Type You can specify whether the phone number is for a V 25bis Hayes or direct ISDN network connection by specifying the phone number type If you have a line pool that combines ISDN V 25bis and Hayes signaling the destination phone number for some lines may be the same If this is the case you need to enter the destination phone number twice once as type ISDN and once as type
404. r Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID X 25 over ISDN D Channel ISDN Connector gt ISDN Dialup gt Edit D Chan gt BRI Interface Configuration Disable Enable Disable Enables or disables X 25 service over the D channel for each BRI line Select Enable to enable this feature Otherwise accept the default CAUTION If you enable or disable this feature dynamically the router disconnects all existing calls over the B channels as the ISDN software makes changes for the feature Once the changes are complete the software restarts and you can make calls again 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 8 9 1 39 TEI Type for X 25 over ISDN D ISDN Connector gt ISDN Dialup gt Edit D Chan gt BRI Interface Configuration Fixed Fixed Auto Specifies how you choose to configure the TEI value for the DTE You can preassign the identifier value at the time you order ISDN service or the router can learn the value from the switch dynamically when you place a call and the line becomes active Either way the switch assigns this value This parameter is available only if you enable X 25 over the D channel Select Fixed to enter the identifier assigned by the switch before placing any calls Select Auto so the router learns the identifier dynamically once the line is active 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 8 9 1 40 A 30 308621 14 00
405. r Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 4 5 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window Deleting Pools You can use Site Manager to delete any type of line pool You can use the BCC to delete demand and backup pools Before you can delete a pool you must first delete all circuits associated with that pool Deleting a demand pool removes all the lines in the pool For instructions on how to delete circuits see the appropriate chapter for customizing circuits 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Using the BCC Customizing Line Pools You can delete a line pool in one of two ways Navigate to the demand or backup pool prompt and enter delete For example demand pool 2 delete backup pool 4 delete Go to the box stack or modem prompt and enter delete lt object_instance_ID gt For example box delete demand pool 2 Using Site Manager To delete a line pool Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds il In the Configuration Manager window choose Dialup The Dialup menu opens Choose Demand Backup or Bandwidth on Demand Pools The Demand Backup or Bandwidth on Demand Pools window opens Select a pool entry at the top of the window The Pool ID for the selected entry appears in the Pool ID field Click on Delete Site Manager asks if you are sure you want to delete the pool Click on OK You return to t
406. r sends to the modem to initiate dialing Accept the default ATDT or enter a valid AT initialization command See Appendix E for a list of AT initialization commands for the ARN Because your modem may use a different set of commands consult the manual for that modem Using the BCC To set a phone number prefix navigate to the out phone number prompt and enter phone number prefix lt string gt string is any valid AT command string For example to set the prefix for the backup circuit enter out phone number backup 8 1 5085556879 phone number prefix M3 15 18 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Customizing Phone Lists Using Site Manager To set the phone number prefix Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window The Dialup menu opens choose Dialup 2 Choose Demand Backup or Bandwidth For backup and bandwidth circuits the on Demand Circuits appropriate Circuit Definition window opens For demand circuits the Demand Pools window opens Click on PPP Circuits or FR Circuits to open the appropriate Demand Circuits window 3 Choose Phone Out The Outgoing Phone List window opens 4 Set the Outgoing Phone Prefix parameter Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 104 5 Click on Done You return to the appropriate circuit window 6 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window Creating an
407. r 4368989 out phone number to router7 4368989 back Create a caller resolution entry so router 4 can identify router 7 and ensure router 7 is an authorized caller ppp to router7 Caller resolution remote7 caller resolution remote 7 secret west caller resolution remote 7 Configuration of Router 7 To create the dial on demand configuration in Figure B 1 on page B 2 configure router 7 as follows 1 Start the BCC and enter configuration mode bec gt config Create a dial object for serial interface slot 2 connector 3 PPP is the data link protocol box serial 2 3 serial 2 3 media type v25bis serial 2 3 dial dial serial 2 3 box B 4 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Configuration Examples Create a demand pool with ID 2 then create a demand line on the serial interface you just created in step 2 Add this line to the demand pool box demand pool 2 demand pool 2 demand line serial 2 3 demand line 2 serial 2 3 back Configure a demand circuit with a unique name that uses PPP and IP as the layer 2 and layer 3 protocols demand pool 2 demand circuit to router4 demand circuit to router4 Ppp ppp to router4 ip 150 1 1 1 255 255 255 0 ip 150 1 1 1 255 255 255 0 back This circuit will use the demand line in demand pool 2 For this service to work properly you also need to configure the outgoing phone list the CHAP information and the caller resolution table Define router 7 s local CHAP name and secret
408. r information about RIP and OSPF e Standby Failback Mode parameter This parameter specifies the method that the router uses to deactivate the standby circuit and return to the primary circuit Using this parameter you can control the failback to the primary circuit automatically or manually e Failback Time parameter This parameter specifies the delay before returning to the recovered primary circuit The routing level configuration takes precedence over the value of this parameter If the primary circuit has a better cost route traffic returns to the primary circuit regardless of the delay specified by this parameter If the hot standby circuit has a better cost route the router uses this circuit until the failback timer expires Callback Callback is a dial on demand feature for use between two peer routers such as a central router and a remote router over a PPP circuit You cannot use callback with frame relay demand circuits or demand circuit groups With this feature you can configure a router to call back an incoming caller You can configure callback across any demand circuit including those configured for bandwidth on demand service Callback offers the following advantages e Reduces tariffs because you can place calls using the lowest cost path e Secures access for authorized callers only e Consolidates accounting of phone charges Figure 6 1 shows how callback works 308621 14 00 Rev 00 6 5 Configuring Dial
409. r is a modem serial or asynchronous or ISDN call ISDN number type of the phone number ISDN number plan of the phone number ID of the backup pool show dial backup caller resolution The show dial backup caller resolution command displays information about caller resolution table entries configured for dial backup You can use the following filter flag and filter argument with this command caller lt caller_name gt displays information about caller resolution table entries for a specified caller The output contains the following information Caller Name CHAP Secret PAP Password Circuit Name Backup Pool ID Name of the remote caller Remote router s CHAP secret Remote router s PAP password Local circuit that the router activates when receiving a call from the remote router ID of the backup pool 308621 14 00 Rev 00 BCC show Commands show dial backup pap chap information The show dial backup pap chap information command displays the PAP and CHAP information configured for primary circuits You can use the following filter flag and filter argument with this command circuit lt circuit_name gt shows the CHAP and PAP information for a specified primary circuit The output contains the following information Circuit Name Name of the primary circuit CHAP Local Name The local router s CHAP name CHAP Secret The local router s CHAP secret PAP ID The local router s PAP ID PAP Passwo
410. r the router to wait for the line to reactivate 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 8 9 1 15 A 28 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Site Manager Parameters BRI B Channel Loopback ISDN Connector gt ISDN Dialup gt Edit D Chan gt BRI Interface Configuration Disable Enable Disable This parameter is for Layer 1 ISDN BRI conformance testing It allows the external equipment to send data to the router over the B channels and loop it right back out the S T or U interface ARN only The external equipment can verify its physical connection to the router Select Enable if you want to run a loopback test between the network and the S T or U interface on the router Do not enable this parameter when the router is in normal operational mode 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 8 9 1 13 BRI Line Type ISDN Connector gt ISDN Dialup gt Edit D Chan gt BRI Interface Configuration PTP PTP MTP Indicates whether you have a point to point PTP or multipoint MTP configuration on the BRI line Enter the value of the type of line supplied by your ISDN provider If you have a PTP line connected to a SESS switch you do not have to configure SPIDs Refer to the SPID parameter on page A 92 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 8 9 1 33 308621 14 00 Rev 00 A 29 Configuring Dial Services Paramete
411. r the BRI interface channel 3 2 1 local phone number 8005552323 local phone number 3 2 1 8005552323 Spid 2323 local phone number 3 2 1 8005552323 stack Modify the ISDN switch type from the default to BRI NI1 stack isdn switch 3 isdn switch 3 switch type brini1 isdn switch 3 stack Create a demand pool with ID 3 then create a demand line on the BRI interface you just created in step 2 Add this line to the demand pool stack demand pool 3 demand pool 3 demand line bri 3 2 1 demand line 3 bri 3 2 1 back Configure a demand circuit with a unique name that uses frame relay with a service record containing one PVC Configure IP for that PVC demand pool 3 demand circuit to router2 demand circuit to router2 frame relay frame relay to router2 service service to asn service service to asn pve 300 pvc to router2 300 back service service to asn ip 192 100 100 2 255 255 255 0 ip 192 100 100 2 255 255 255 0 back 3 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Configuring Dial Services This circuit will use the demand line in demand pool 3 For this service to work properly you also need to configure the outgoing phone list Frame relay circuits cannot answer incoming calls Specify the outgoing phone number This is the number for router 2 demand circuit to router2 out phone number 8005559876 out phone number to router2 8005559876 Configuration of Router 2 To create the dial on demand configuration in Figure B 2 on page
412. r this serial interface and configure a B channel stack bri 3 2 1 mode 2b d bri 3 2 1 channel 4 Create a dial object for the B channel channel 3 2 1 dial dial bri 3 2 1 back 5 Specify the local phone number that this router will include when placing a call In addition specify the SPID because the switch conforms to the National standard channel 3 2 1 local phone number phone number 4364444 local phone number 3 2 1 4364444 spid 50843644440000 local phone number 3 2 1 4364444 stack B 34 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Configuration Examples 6 Specify the ISDN switch type stack isdn switch 3 isdn switch 3 switch type brini1 isdn switch 3 stack 7 Create a backup pool with pool ID 22 then create a backup line on the serial interface you created in step 2 Add this line to the pool stack backup pool 22 backup pool 22 backup line bri 3 2 1 8 Configure a backup circuit for the leased circuit ppp 1 3 1 Also set the backup mode parameter to initiator backup line 22 bri 3 2 1 stack serial 1 3 1 ppp ppp 1 3 1 backup circuit pool id 22 backup mode initiator This circuit uses backup lines configured in backup pool 22 The backup mode is set to initiator so the other router s backup mode parameter must be set to receiver for proper operation 9 Define the router s local CHAP name and secret so it can identify itself to the remote router backup circuit 22 1 3 1 Chap name asn chap secret isdn This router
413. r uses to call back the client Click on the Values button Site Manager displays a list of available callback circuits Select the circuit you want and click on OK 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 4 7 1 9 A 106 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Site Manager Parameters Caller Resolution Table Parameters The Caller Resolution Table window Figure A 23 contains the caller resolution parameters Caller Resolution Table a al Add Help Local Circuit CHAP Secret PAP Password Local Group Figure A 23 Caller Resolution Table Window The parameter descriptions follow Parameter Caller Name Path Dialup gt Caller Resolution Table gt Add gt Caller Name and Secret Password Default None Options Any text string maximum of 20 characters Function This name is part of the incoming call and informs the local router of the remote router s identity Instructions Enter a text string no longer than 20 characters that identifies a remote router If you configure CHAP as the authentication protocol you must enter the remote router s CHAP name If you configure PAP you must enter the remote router s PAP ID MIB Object ID 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 2 3 1 2 308621 14 00 Rev 00 A 107 Configuring Dial Services Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID CHAP Secret Dialup gt Caller Resol
414. rameters which define the behavior of the backup circuit To modify the frame relay backup interface Site Manager Procedure You do this 1 In the Configuration Manager window choose Dialup System responds The Dialup menu opens 2 Choose Backup Circuits The Backup Circuits menu opens 3 Choose Frame Relay The FR Primary Interface Definition window opens 4 Click on Backup Def 5 Optionally set the following parameters Mgmnt Type Address Type Address Length Polling Interval Full Enquiry Interval Error Threshold e Monitored Events e Multicast Congestion Control Congestion Timer Congestion Counter Hangup on DLCMI Failure Click on Help or see Configuring Frame Relay Services for parameter descriptions The FR Backup Interface window opens 6 Click on Done You return to the FR Primary Interface Definition window 7 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window 13 6 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Modifying Frame Relay Service Records Customizing Backup Circuits A frame relay service record is a data structure that allows flexible grouping and characterization of PVCs Each record can contain one or more PVCs The router creates the first service record automatically when you select frame relay as the WAN protocol This is the default service record If a PVC is not included in a configured service recor
415. rcuit the router monitors the hot standby circuit for congestion If the circuit becomes congested the router activates lines from the bandwidth on demand pool until congestion is relieved For maximum flexibility and control when setting up alternative connections and for quick responses to failed primary circuits standby circuits are the best choice However for more straightforward applications where you do not need to configure an alternative site for the backup connection dial backup circuits are more suitable Either option ensures that critical data reaches its destination How Standby Circuits Work There are two types of standby circuits e Hot standby A hot standby circuit backs up a failed primary circuit When the primary circuit fails the router activates the hot standby circuit to provide another route to the destination A hot standby circuit can connect to another standby circuit a demand circuit or a demand circuit group Hot standby circuits can support the following types of primary circuits e Single leased PPP circuit e Single leased Nortel Networks Standard circuit e PPP multilink circuit Site Manager configurable only e PPP multiline circuit Site Manager configurable only e Frame relay primary circuit with a direct mode PVC Hot standby circuits can back up primary circuits on any slot not just the slot on which the hot standby circuit resides For example if a primary line on Slot 4 fails the rou
416. rcuit Definition Parameters Dial Backup A 69 Frame Relay Interface Parameters Dial Backup A 71 Frame Relay Primary Interface Definition Parameters Dial Backup A 74 Frame Relay Service Control Parameter Demand and Dial Backup A 76 Frame Relay PVC and Service Parameters Demand and Dial A 77 Backup Bandwidth on Demand Circuit Options Parameters A 77 Bandwidth on Demand Circuit Definition Parameters A 80 Bandwidth on Demand Congestion Monitor and BAP Parameters A 82 Local Phone Number Parameters A 90 Outgoing Phone List Parameters A 94 Incoming Phone List Parameters A 105 Caller Resolution Table Parameters A 107 Each parameter description begins with the Site Manager path that leads to the parameter Each path assumes that you begin at the Configuration Manager window Two of the windows apply to all three dial services the names of these windows have been shortened to make the paths easier to follow Table A 2 Table A 2 Abbreviated Site Manager Window Titles Full Name Abbreviated Name Demand Pools Backup Pools Pools Bandwidth On Demand Pools Bandwidth On Demand Lines Definition Demand Lines Definition Backup Lines Definition Lines Definition 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Site Manager Parameters You can use Site Manager to edit all dial service parameters You can also use the Technician Interface to modify parameters by issuing set and commit commands with the management information
417. rd The local routers PAP password Backup Pool ID ID of the backup pool 308621 14 00 Rev 00 C 19 Configuring Dial Services Commands for All Dial Services The show commands in the next sections are available for dial on demand and dial backup To indicate which service you want output for you specify that service as a filter flag in the command syntax Table C 3 lists the show commands for all dial services The filter flags and filter arguments are options that you can use with each keyword also called subcommand If you do not specify any filter flags the router will show information for all applicable entries Table C 3 Dial show Commands for All Services lt container gt lt keyword gt lt filter_flags gt lt filter_arguments gt calls lt none gt backup demand caller resolution lt none gt backup demand caller lt caller_name gt pap chap information lt none gt backup demand circuit lt circuit_name gt local phone numbers lt none gt lt none gt lt none gt C 20 308621 14 00 Rev 00 BCC show Commands show dial calls The show dial calls command displays information about active calls You can use the following filter flags with this command backup displays information for dial backup service demand displays information for dial on demand service The output contains the following information Dial Services Calls ISDN Slot The slo
418. re You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window choose Dialup The Dialup menu opens Choose Demand Circuits The Demand Pools window opens 3 Click on PPP Circuits or FR Circuits The PPP Demand Circuits window or the FR Demand Circuits window opens continued 308621 14 00 Rev 00 12 23 Configuring Dial Services Site Manager Procedure continued You do this System responds 4 Select the circuit that you want to modify 5 Set the Circuit Name parameter Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 39 6 Click on Apply then click on Done You return to the Demand Pools window 7 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window Enabling Dial Optimized Routing Dial optimized routing lets you exchange IP RIP and IPX RIP SAP routing updates only when a connection is active You can enable dial optimized routing using only Site Manager this feature is not configurable using the BCC When you enable dial optimized routing for frame relay demand circuits you must also set the Routing Update Hold Time parameter This parameter instructs the router to wait for an active connection to the destination device before sending RIP or SAP routing updates This timer is necessary if the UNI between the router and the switch is a dynamic UNI which means that the router learns the PVCs when it calls the frame
419. ree erent pr retreat A NANAS 1 5 Terminating Damand Credle suomiiistiianamiii n mexexeats meieoiee 1 6 Demand Lines and FOOI cies ccinsscgictetnncssatecamnctatesancgietatansictesemmpdbcmenmisdetarantecnncateve 1 8 How Demand Lines Pools and Circuits Work Together cccccccsseceeseeesseeeeees 1 8 Demand Circuit Protocols EAT rrr ree ieee 1 10 Configuring Frame Relay to Work Optimally with Dial on Demanid 1 11 Adding Bandwidth Service for Congested Demand Lines cccceeereeeteees 1 12 Dial Backup Gerig aiina aa a ea aaa aa Ra E aaa 1 14 Acia the Backup LINE sorsak daa E A NRA 1 15 Reestablishing the Backup Connection ere rere errr ais E 1 15 Terminating he Backup COMMACUOM sosirii ecesna naha 1 16 Backup Cikovit FP ETN Sry ccs cheats asuni aa ia a ai rai 1 16 Knowing When the Primary Line Falls sci cccacccessssscstenncsaertoessecestosdicennnnnsiectnsedsccctienes 1 19 Bo KUDE S aa POO ee eee eee een ee ere ee ae ere et ery errr err 1 20 How Backup Lines Pools and Circuits Work Together sceeeceeeeteeeeeeeeees 1 20 Configuration OT THE Backup CNEUit smitii canescens annaia 1 21 308621 14 00 Rev 00 V Bandwidth 0n Demand Service sssrin 1 22 Enabling Bandwidth on Demand Service 06 ieee oaia PRA A 1 23 Activating Dial Up Lines to Relieve Congestion ccccsccccesseesceseeeseteeeeeesseeeees 1 25 Terminating Secondary WINGS raisdan 1 25 Bandwidt
420. resses should have the same network number 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 4 12 1 6 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Configuring Dial Services Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID RIP Enable Dialup gt Demand Circuit Groups gt Demand Circuit Groups Disable Enable Disable Enables or disables RIP for this interface Select Enable to enable RIP for this interface 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 4 12 1 7 OSPF Enable Dialup gt Demand Circuit Groups gt Demand Circuit Groups Disable Enable Disable Enables or disables OSPF for this interface Select Enable to enable OSPF for this interface 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 4 12 1 8 IPX Enable Dialup gt Demand Circuit Groups gt Demand Circuit Groups Disable Enable Disable Enables or disables IPX for this interface Select Enable to enable IPX for this interface 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 4 12 1 9 IPX Routing Protocol Dialup gt Demand Circuit Groups gt Demand Circuit Groups RIP SAP RIP SAP NLSP Specifies an IPX routing protocol for the IPX interface Select an IPX routing protocol for this interface 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 4 12 1 12 A 64 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Site Manager Parameters Parameter Pa
421. rial 5 2 wan type asynchronous 10 2 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Using Site Manager To modify the WAN serial interface type Customizing Modem Lines Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window click on the COM connector whose interface you want to change The connector name should include a D B or W The Edit Connector window opens 2 Click on Edit Line The Edit SYNC Parameters window opens 3 Set the WAN Serial Interface Type Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 5 4 Click on OK You return to the Edit Connector window 5 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window Modifying the Line Media Type and Cable Type You can define the media type and cable type for serial interfaces only The media type specifies the signaling method that the router uses to interact with the modem The cable type indicates the physical interface type supported by the attached dial device You already set the media type in Chapter 2 Starting Dial Services Using Site Manager or Chapter 3 Starting Dial Services Using the BCC You can modify the media type and cable type using the BCC or Site Manager as described in the following sections 308621 14 00 Rev 00 10 3 Configuring Dial Services Using the BCC To modify the media type navigate to the serial prompt and enter media type lt type
422. ring Site Manager 2 16 modifying backup circuits 13 11 demand circuits 12 15 PAP 5 1 authentication types description 5 2 Auto Demand Term Reset parameter A 38 Auto Demand Termination parameter A 38 Availability Mode parameter A 60 B channel function 4 2 removing from line pool 11 23 transmission rates 4 2 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Index backup circuits activating 1 15 for failed primary lines 1 15 frame relay filters 13 9 frame relay service records 13 7 frame relay creating 13 2 13 5 initiating calls 7 2 protocol configuration 1 21 terminating 1 16 backup lines deleting from a pool 10 20 description 1 20 prioritizing in a pool 10 5 11 5 Backup Mode parameter A 70 Backup Pool ID parameter A 4 backup pools backup lines in 1 20 configuring ISDN interfaces BCC 3 12 configuring ISDN interfaces Site Manager 2 8 configuring modem interfaces BCC 3 10 configuring modem interfaces Site Manager 2 6 configuring BCC 3 15 configuring Site Manager 2 6 customizing 9 1 description 1 20 IDs for 1 21 Bandwidth Allocation Protocol BAP configuring 8 7 14 8 description 8 4 Bandwidth Mode parameter A 79 bandwidth on demand circuits See bandwidth on demand circuits customizing 14 1 for demand circuits 1 12 IDs for 1 25 implementation notes 8 1 Index 1 bandwidth on demand continued overview 1 22 pools See bandwidth on demand pools PPP multilink 8 2 testing the
423. ring Dial Services show dial demand pap chap information The show dial demand pap chap information command displays the PAP and CHAP information configured for demand circuits You can use the following filter flags and filter arguments with this command circuit lt circuit_name gt shows the CHAP and PAP information for a specified demand circuit The output contains the following information Demand Circuit Name Name of the demand circuit CHAP Local Name The local router s CHAP name CHAP Secret The local routers CHAP secret PAP ID The local router s PAP ID PAP Password The local router s PAP password Demand Pool ID ID of the demand pool C 12 308621 14 00 Rev 00 BCC show Commands Commands for Dial Backup Table C 2 lists all the dial backup show commands The filter flags and filter arguments are options that you can use with each keyword also called subcommand If you do not specify any filter flags the router will show information for all applicable entries Table C 2 Dial Backup show Commands lt container gt backup show dial backup summary lt keyword gt lt argumentss gt lt filter_flags gt lt filter_arguments gt summary lt none gt pool lt pool_id gt pools lt none gt pool lt pool_id gt circuits lt none gt pool lt pool_id gt circuit lt circuit_name gt lines lt none gt pool lt pool_id gt schedules lt none gt pool lt pool
424. rmine whether the connection to the regional router fails and if so invoke the dial backup connection The circuits on router 5 the recovery router are configured as a demand circuit group consisting of three circuits Router 5 uses an existing demand pool for the demand circuit group These circuits accept calls from the remote routers configured for dial backup The Connection Mode parameter for the circuits in the demand circuit group is set to No Dial because the recovery router does not initiate connections The remote router must establish the connection first Router 5 s caller resolution table contains entries for routers 2 3 and 4 Each entry specifies the same demand circuit group In the example if one of the branch offices detects a failure of the regional router s primary line it attempts to activate a dial backup connection by placing a call to the recovery router The number of branch offices that successfully connect to the recovery router depends on the number of circuits in the demand circuit group After the connection is made data can continue across the network Note Demand circuit groups work only with PPP You cannot use them in a network where the dial backup circuits use frame relay 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Chapter 8 Bandwidth on Demand Implementation Notes This chapter includes the following information about the Nortel Networks implementation of bandwidth on demand service
425. rom that demand circuit Using Site Manager To configure frame relay demand circuits Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window The Dialup menu opens choose Dialup 2 Choose Demand Circuits The Demand Pools window opens 3 Select a demand pool and click on FR The FR Demand Circuits window opens Circuits 4 Click on Add Site Manager displays the new circuit along with its defaults The circuit uses the demand pool that you previously selected continued 12 2 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Customizing Demand Circuits Site Manager Procedure continued 5 You do this Repeat step 4 for each demand circuit that you want to add System responds To modify the circuit defaults see Customizing Demand Circuit Operation on page 12 8 7 Click on Done You return to the Demand Pools window Modifying the Frame Relay Interface 8 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window After you add a frame relay demand circuit you can modify the frame relay interface The interface parameters define the frame relay characteristics of the circuit not the operation of the demand circuit itself Using the BCC Modifying a frame relay demand circuit is the same as modifying any frame relay circuit that is you navigate to the frame relay circuit prompt and then modify the values of th
426. rompt and enter circuit name lt string gt string can be any text string representing a circuit name For example enter leased line 1 1 1 circuit name corp1 Modifying the MTU The maximum transmission unit MTU specifies the largest frame that the router can transmit on this line The default is 1600 To modify the line s MTU value navigate to the leased line prompt and enter mtu lt integer gt integer is a number from 3 to 4608 For example leased line 1 1 1 mtu 2000 11 20 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Customizing ISDN Lines Disabling the Leased Line If you want to temporarily disable the leased line interface you can change the state of the line from enabled which is the default to disabled To do this navigate to the leased line prompt and enter state lt state gt state is enabled or disabled For example leased line 1 1 1 disabled Modifying the BRI T4 Timer Using Site Manager you can edit a timer for the BRI leased line Although call setup is not performed on the D channel the ISDN switch uses the D channel to send and receive bits that activate and deactivate the ISDN interface You may want to edit the D channel for your leased line configuration If noise or other minor problems on the network cause the router to deactivate the line frequently you can modify the BRI T4 timer to prevent this from happening To modify the BRI T4 timer Site Manager Procedure You do this
427. router 2 s identity In contrast router 1 must have a CHAP name and secret that it places in the call setup message to identify itself to router 2 Router 2 the slave router requires a caller resolution table entry Router 2 receives calls from router 1 and must identify the incoming caller After configuring the backup circuits you must configure the caller resolution table on router 2 308621 14 00 Rev 00 B 41 Configuring Dial Services To configure router 2 s caller resolution table complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window choose Dialup The Dialup menu opens 2 Choose Caller Resolution Table The Caller Resolution Table window opens 3 Click on Add The Caller Name and Secret Password window opens 4 For router 2 only set the Caller Name parameter to ASN 5 For router 2 only set the CHAP Secret parameter to ISDN 6 Click on OK The Local Circuit List window opens which lists the primary circuits that you configured 7 Select a circuit from the list Site Manager sets this circuit as the local circuit 8 Click on OK You return to the Caller Resolution Table window 9 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window B 42 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Local Phone Number Configuration Configuration Examples Finally configure each router s phone n
428. rvice For most networks you configure all of the available B channels for PRI service If you purchase selective PRI service from your ISDN provider you can modify the number of individual B channels for the interface Using the BCC When configuring selective PRI service select only the timeslots that the service provider assigns to you For example if your provider assigns you timeslots 1 through 4 select only slots 1 through 4 To select individual timeslots navigate to the pri prompt and enter channels lt channel_n channel_n gt dial 308621 14 00 Rev 00 For example pri 2 1 channels 1 2 3 4 pri 2 1 dial Using Site Manager To modify individual PRI timeslots Customizing ISDN Lines Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window click on an MCT1 or MCE1 connector 2 Click on a B channel The PRI Logical Lines window opens The Timeslots window opens 3 Select additional B channels or deselect existing B channels Site Manager does not let you remove B channels if the number of channels will be less than the number of timeslots used by the line pool Click on OK You return to the PRI Logical Lines window Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window Modifying the ISDN Pool Channel Count You can modify the ISDN pool channel count to modify the number of available
429. rvice encrypted data travels over the backup circuit if the primary line fails You do not have to configure WEP over the backup circuit because the backup circuit takes the configuration of the primary circuit Encryption works with any PPP or frame relay primary and backup circuit combination See Dial Backup Service on page 1 14 for a list of these combinations If PPP is the protocol for the backup circuit ensure that the parameter RFC1661 Compliance Site Manager or mru compliance BCC is set to the default Enable for encryption to work successfully To configure RFC 1661 compliance with Site Manager see Configuring PPP Services To configure RFC 1661 compliance with the BCC see Disabling MRU Compliance on page 9 7 Asynchronous PPP Asynchronous PPP provides communication for asynchronous interfaces on the AN ASN and ANH using the Dual Sync Net Module ARN using any Serial Expansion Module and BLN and BCN using the Octal Sync Link Module There are several advantages to asynchronous communications e Low cost Analog lines are less expensive than high speed digital lines Asynchronous modems are less expensive than synchronous modems You can also dial directly into the router without using a terminal server or other port concentration devices e Effective use of router hardware You can use an available serial port on the router for a dial up application 5 6 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Implementatio
430. s Note You cannot use the BCC to configure bandwidth on demand service This chapter includes the following information Topic Page Before You Begin 3 2 Using the BCC 3 2 Setting Up a Dial Service 3 5 Creating a Leased Interface for Backup Service 3 9 Configuring a Modem Interface 3 10 Configuring an ISDN Interface 3 12 Designating an Interface As a Dial Object 3 14 Creating a Line Pool 3 15 Adding Lines to the Pool 3 16 Specifying the ISDN Switch Type 3 17 Configuring PPP Demand Circuits 3 18 Configuring PPP Backup Circuits 3 19 continued 308621 14 00 Rev 00 3 1 Configuring Dial Services Topic Page Specifying the Authentication Protocol Information 3 20 Creating an Outgoing Phone List 3 21 Creating the Local Phone List ISDN Only 3 22 Setting Up the Caller Resolution Table 3 24 What to Do Next 3 24 Before You Begin Before you configure a dial service you must do the following Install the router Install either ISDN or modem lines Order ISDN service if applicable and receive the information for setting up ISDN configurations for example switch type and phone numbers For information about ordering ISDN lines in the United States see Appendix D Ordering ISDN Lines in the United States Order and configure external modems if applicable Determine the Challenge Handshake Au
431. s 1 In the Configuration Manager window The Edit Connector window opens click on the COM connector whose interface you want to change The connector name should have a D B or W next to it 2 Click on Edit Line The Edit SYNC Parameters window opens 3 Set the following parameters Line Media Type Cable Type Click on Help or see the parameter descriptions beginning on page A 5 4 Click on OK You return to the Edit Connector window 5 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window Modifying the Line Priority For serial interfaces you can prioritize lines in a pool instructing the router which line to use first second and so on when a dial line is required The lower the number you assign to an interface the higher its priority For dial backup and bandwidth on demand pools lines can reside across slots but when you set the line priority it affects only lines on the same slot For example if the backup pool has two lines on slot 3 and two lines on slot 4 the router sets a priority between the lines in slot 3 then between the lines in slot 4 For bandwidth on demand the router prioritizes lines in the preferred slot then the reserved slot and finally the local slot You can modify the line priority using the BCC or Site Manager as described in the following sections 308621 14 00 Rev 00 10 5 Configuring Dial Services Using the BCC To prioritize l
432. s MIB Object ID Site Manager Parameters ISDN Numbering Type Dialup gt Demand Backup Bandwidth On Demand Circuits Demand Circuits PPP or FR Circuits gt PPP or FR Demand Circuits gt Phone Out gt Outgoing Phone List Backup Circuits PPP or Frame Relay gt Primary Circuit Definition or FR Primary Interface Definition gt Phone Out gt Outgoing Phone List Bandwidth Circuits Bandwidth On Demand Circuit Definition gt Phone Out gt Outgoing Phone List Unknown Unknown International National Specific Subscriber Abbreviated This parameter indicates the standard that the phone number follows The router passes this information to the ISDN switch Accept the default value Unknown unless your service provider explicitly instructs you to use another value 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 4 6 1 8 ISDN Numbering Plan Dialup gt Demand Backup Bandwidth On Demand Circuits Demand Circuits PPP or FR Circuits gt PPP or FR Demand Circuits gt Phone Out gt Outgoing Phone List Backup Circuits PPP or Frame Relay gt Primary Circuit Definition or FR Primary Interface Definition gt Phone Out gt Outgoing Phone List Bandwidth Circuits Bandwidth On Demand Circuit Definition gt Phone Out gt Outgoing Phone List Telephony Unknown Telephony X121 Telex Standard Private This parameter indicates the standard that the phone number plan follows The router passes this information to the ISDN switch If you
433. s outgoing phone number information for demand circuits using a specified backup pool circuit lt circuit_name gt shows outgoing phone number information for a specified demand circuit C 10 308621 14 00 Rev 00 BCC show Commands The output contains the following information Demand Circuit Name Circuit name Outgoing Phone Number Extension Phone Number Type ISDN Number Type ISDN Number Plan Pool ID Outgoing phone number the router dials The extension of the outgoing phone number Specifies whether the phone number is a modem serial or asynchronous or ISDN call ISDN number type that is dialsync isdn or dialasync ISDN number plan for this circuit ID of the demand pool show dial demand caller resolution The show dial demand caller resolution command displays information about caller resolution table entries configured for demand circuits You can use the following filter flag and filter argument with this command caller lt caller_name gt displays information about caller resolution table entries for a specified caller name The output contains the following information Caller Name CHAP Secret PAP Password Demand Circuit Name Demand Pool ID Name of the remote caller Remote router s CHAP secret Remote router s PAP password Local circuit that the router activates when receiving a call from the remote router ID of the demand pool 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Configu
434. s until the initiator router makes the call Only one router on the link can serve as the initiator If both are set to initiator they may try to initiate a call simultaneously resulting in a collision receiver instructs the router to wait to receive the call from the initiator If you configure the router to be the receiver you need to make a caller resolution entry for the circuit By requiring an entry the local router can then verify the initiator s identity and accept the incoming calls For example to provide dial backup service for a frame relay primary circuit on slot 5 connector 1 using line pool 10 enter service to Boston backup circuit pool id 10 backup mode initiator Adding a backup circuit for this interface makes the frame relay leased interface a primary interface and enables dial backup service 308621 14 00 Rev 00 13 3 Configuring Dial Services For more information about using the BCC to configure frame relay see Configuring Frame Relay Services Using Site Manager To configure a PPP backup circuit for a frame relay PVC Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 Configure a frame relay leased interface with a service record containing one PVC You need to add a new service record to the frame relay interface When you add a service record it automatically has only one PVC which requires a DLCI number For instructions see Configuring Frame Relay Services
435. s window use and click on PPP Circuits opens 4 Click on Add The PPP Demand Circuits window now shows the new circuit with the defaults for each parameter Site Manager also adds the following buttons Apply Schedule Phone Out Delete and BW on Demand 5 Repeat step 4 for each demand circuit that you want to add 6 Keep the PPP Demand Circuits window open and go to the next section Specifying the Authentication Protocol Information 308621 14 00 Rev 00 2 15 Configuring Dial Services Specifying the Authentication Protocol Information For network security the router must identify itself in the call setup message that it sends to the remote router The authentication protocols CHAP and PAP enable the identification process CHAP is the default protocol All lines in a pool must use the same authentication protocol To specify the CHAP information that the router uses when it calls a remote site Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the PPP Demand Circuits window scroll down to the CHAP parameters Set the CHAP Local Name and CHAP Secret parameters Each CHAP Local Name must be unique but the CHAP Secret must be the same for both sides of the connection Click on Help or see the parameter descriptions beginning on page A 46 Keep the PPP Demand Circuits window open and go to the next section Specifying the Connection Mode
436. saicd scce cbineedsarntionatadantegasdventene aee aa aR Ea EAr D 1 Sl ealas Mei WE A E E eden aie A E A A A E sansiacalne D 2 Appendix E AT Initialization Commands for the ARN Index 308621 14 00 Rev 00 xix Figures Figure 1 1 Example of Dial Access to a Switched Telephone Network 0068 1 3 Figure 1 2 Dial on Demand Service cccceeccceeeceeeceeceeeaeeeeeceaeecaaeeeaeeseeeeeaeeeeneees 1 7 Figure 1 3 Example of Demand Lines Pools and Circuits cccseccceceesteeeeeenees 1 9 Figure 1 4 Dial on Demand Connection over a Frame Relay Network 0 0 1 10 Figure 1 5 Additional Lines for a Dial on Demand Connection a oea a113 Fige 1 6 PPP Backup oveta POTNI sicnscictanainiiiiternielantead 1 17 Figure 1 7 PPP Backup over an ISDN Network c cccesceeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeaees 1 17 Figure 1 8 Link Backup for a Frame Relay Network cceeseeeeeeeeeeees P S 1 18 Figure 1 9 Example of Backup Pools Lines and Circuits eeens 1 21 Figure 1 10 Example of Bandwidth on Demand Service ccccceeceeseeeeeeeeeetees 1 24 Figure 1 11 Sample Bandwidth on Demand Network ccccecesteeeseceeesteeeeeeeeees 1 27 Figure 2 1 Dialup Menu in the Configuration Manager Window sesse 2 5 Figure 3 1 Dial on Demand Configuration Hierarchy EEEE A Ame 3 7 Figure 3 2 Dial Backup Configuration Hierarchy cciscciccsscssceccisceenasetneniieced
437. scriptions follow 308621 14 00 Rev 00 A 71 Configuring Dial Services Parameter Interface Type Path Dialup gt Backup Circuits gt Frame Relay gt FR Primary Interface Definition gt Intf Type gt FR Interface Slot lt n gt lt port gt Default Normal Options Normal Primary Shared Primary Secondary Function Specifies whether this leased circuit uses dial backup service For a standard leased circuit the router does not provide a backup circuit if it fails For a primary circuit the router provides a backup circuit Instructions Select one of the following options Normal Indicates that there is no backup service for this circuit Primary Shared Enables backup service and instructs the router that the backup circuit should inherit the primary circuit s configuration If you select this option Site Manager displays a dialog box asking if you want the primary circuit s PVCs duplicated on the backup circuit Select Yes to create a duplicate set of PVCs with the same DLCI numbers as the primary circuit This is useful if you want the same DLCI numbers going to the same destination Select No to configure unique PVCs for the backup circuit This option is useful if you do not want to back up all of the primary s PVCs By limiting the number of backup PVCs you can reduce line costs Primary Secondary Enables backup service and instructs the router that the backup circuit should use its own configurati
438. se Response match Two Way Authentication PAP Router A or B can initiate authentication Router A EES Router B Authenticate request gt lt 1 Authenticate response DS0030A Figure 5 1 Two Way Authentication 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Implementation Notes for All Dial Services For CHAP Router A initiates a CHAP challenge and Router B responds Router A responds with a response match and the connection is activated Router B can also initiate a CHAP challenge For PAP Router A sends an authenticate request to Router B Router B sends an authenticate response and then activates the connection Router B can also initiate an authenticate request Both Routers A and B can use PAP and CHAP in a single line pool If Router B rejects the CHAP challenge and Router A has the PAP Fallback parameter enabled Router A switches to PAP and retries the authentication One Way Authentication Figure 5 2 illustrates one way authentication For CHAP or PAP the calling router does not try to authenticate the called router but it does recognize and respond to CHAP challenges or PAP authentication requests from the called router The called router does authenticate the calling router Using one way authentication the router can communicate with other devices that may not support two way authentication One Way Authentication CHAP Mm EJ Mm
439. se all Password Authenticate Request messages that the calling router sends to the called router must include the correct password If the password is not correct the called router sends an Authenticate Negative Acknowledgment Authenticate NAK message and the router does not activate the connection If you configured PAP as the authentication protocol specify a unique PAP password If not ignore this parameter 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 2 3 1 5 A 66 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Site Manager Parameters PPP Circuit Options Parameters Dial Backup Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID The PPP Circuit Options window Figure A 13 contains the backup circuit options parameters Circuit Options Cancel OK Values Help Circuit Type Backup Pool ID Figure A 13 Circuit Options Window The parameter descriptions follow Circuit Type Dialup gt Backup Circuits gt PPP gt Primary Circuit Definition gt Cct Type gt Circuit Options Normal Primary Normal Specifies whether the circuit over the selected leased line uses dial backup service This line is not part of the backup pool For a standard leased circuit the router does not provide a backup if the original circuit fails For a primary circuit the router provides a backup to carry the data Accept the default Normal if you do not want a backup circuit for the data Select Primary if you want
440. se Dialup The Dialup menu opens Choose Demand Circuits The Demand Pools window opens 3 Click on FR Circuits The FR Demand Circuits window opens Configuration Manager window 4 Click on Demand Intt The FR Demand Interface List window opens 5 Click on Services The Frame Relay Demand Service List window opens Site Manager supplies the service name 6 Click on PVCs to configure PVCs for the The FR PVC List for Demand Service service record window opens 7 Click on Add to add a PVC to the service The Frame Relay PVC Add window record opens 8 Enter a value for the DLC Number You return to the FR PVC List for Demand parameter and then click on OK Service window 9 Set the PVC parameters For information about these parameters frame relay service records and PVCs see Configuring Frame Relay Services 10 Click on Done until you return to the 12 6 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Customizing Demand Circuits Adding Layer 3 Protocols to Frame Relay Demand Circuits Using Site Manager you can add layer 3 protocols to the frame relay demand circuit To add protocols Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window choose Dialup The Dialup menu opens Choose Demand Circuits 3 Click on FR Circuits The Demand Pools window opens The FR Demand Circuits window opens Select a circuit then
441. set Click on Help or see the parameter descriptions beginning on page A 51 6 Click on Apply then click on Done You return to the Demand Pools window 7 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window 308621 14 00 Rev 00 12 21 Configuring Dial Services Setting the Inactivity Mode The inactivity mode measures data inactivity for a specific direction across a line Specifically it lets you decide in which direction the router determines inactivity Together with the inactivity time parameter this parameter informs the router to deactivate the connection if there is no data going in the specified direction Note The router does not consider the following as data so it does not consider them when determining inactivity PPP LQR LCP and periodic CHAP messages frame relay DLCMI and other signaling messages You can set the inactivity mode using the BCC or Site Manager Using the BCC To configure the inactivity mode parameter navigate to the demand circuit prompt and enter inactivity mode lt mode gt mode can be both direction If the router does not receive data and does not transmit data it terminates the connection The inactivity has to be in both directions This is the default value transmit only If there is no data to transmit the router terminates the connection The router disregards data it receives Select this option if you are using dial optimized ro
442. set the Switch Type parameter to BRI NTT BRI KDD or BRI NII select the value Unknown For all other switch types Site Manager uses the default Telephony Accept Telephony unless your service provider explicitly instructs you to use another value 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 4 6 1 9 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Configuring Dial Services Parameter Adaption Rate Path Dialup gt Demand Backup Bandwidth On Demand Circuits Demand Circuits PPP or FR Circuits gt PPP or FR Demand Circuits gt Phone Out gt Outgoing Phone List Backup Circuits PPP or Frame Relay gt Primary Circuit Definition or FR Primary Interface Definition gt Phone Out gt Outgoing Phone List Bandwidth Circuits Bandwidth On Demand Circuit Definition gt Phone Out gt Outgoing Phone List Default 64K Options 64K 56K Function For ISDN calls only specifies the rate at which the local router wants to send data to the remote destination Instructions Enter a value of 56K if the connections to the destination device only support this rate otherwise accept the default 64K If you are unsure of your network connections ask your network provider If the value of this parameter is less than the value of the Global Adaption Rate parameter then this value overrides the Global Adaption Rate value For example if this parameter is set to 56 Kb s and the Global Adaption Rate is set to 64 Kb s the router uses the rate of 56 Kb s for the outgoing call If the value of th
443. sh a network connection only when the router has data to send across the network or when you dynamically configure the router to establish a connection By using dial up lines you significantly reduce the high costs associated with leased lines which connect remote locations even if there is no data to transmit or receive Activating Demand Circuits To implement dial on demand the router establishes a demand circuit The router activates a demand circuit when e The router has data to send across the circuit When the router has data to transmit it automatically selects one of the demand lines from the circuit s associated demand pool As long as data is going across the line the end to end connection remains active e You enable the Force Dial parameter which instructs the router to force a connection To activate a line immediately you configure the Force Dial parameter to force the router to initiate a connection regardless of whether there is data activity To configure this parameter see Forcing the Circuit to Activate or Deactivate on page 12 8 e You specify a time of day to activate the circuit Using the Schedule option you can schedule the circuit s availability for a specific day and time The schedule parameters are part of the circuit s configuration see Scheduling Demand Circuit Availability on page 12 37 The Schedule option also allows you to specify whether the router uses the Inactivity Ti
444. shows the backup circuit schedule information for primary circuits using a specified backup pool circuit lt circuit_name gt shows the backup circuit schedule information for a specified primary circuit The output contains the following information Primary Circuit Circuit name Backup Pool ID ID of the line pool Days Days that the backup circuit can be active Start Time Time that the backup circuit activates End Time Time when the backup circuit deactivates Availability Mode Specifies whether the backup circuit is available within the start and end time or outside that specified interval show dial backup out phone numbers The show dial backup out phone numbers command contains information about the outgoing phone numbers that you configure You can use the following filter flags and filter arguments with this command pool lt pool_ia gt shows outgoing phone number information for primary circuits using a specified backup pool circuit lt circuit_name gt shows outgoing phone number information for a specified primary circuit 308621 14 00 Rev 00 C 17 Configuring Dial Services The output contains the following information Primary Circuit Name Outgoing Phone Number Extension Phone Number Type ISDN Number Type ISDN Number Plan Backup Pool ID Circuit name Outgoing phone number the router dials The extension if any of the outgoing phone number Specifies whether the phone numbe
445. signated as the non monitor uses the local phone number to identify additional lines to the peer 2 28 308621 14 00 Rev 00 To create a local phone list Starting Dial Services Using Site Manager You do this Site Manager Procedure System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window choose Dialup The Dialup menu opens 2 Choose Local Phone Numbers The ISDN Local Phone Lines window opens 3 Click on Local Phones The ISDN Local Phone Numbers window opens The SPID parameter appears only for switches used in the United States and Canada 4 Click on Add The Phone Number window opens 5 Set the following parameters Directory Number Ext SubAddr SPID US and Canada only Click on Help or see the parameter descriptions beginning on page A 91 6 Click on OK You return to the ISDN Local Phone Numbers window which shows the new phone entry 7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 to add more phone numbers 8 Click on Done You return to the ISDN Local Phone Lines window 9 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window 10 Go to the next section Setting Up the Caller Resolution Table 308621 14 00 Rev 00 2 29 Configuring Dial Services Setting Up the Caller Resolution Table For network security all three dial services use a PPP identification mechanism to determine who is calling the router
446. solution table The router then activates a circuit from the demand circuit group assigned to that remote router Enter the ID number of the demand circuit group that the router should use when it receives an incoming call You assign this group to the remote router specified in the Caller Name parameter Accept the default 0 if you configure a individual local circuit If you enter a value for this parameter you cannot enter a value for the Local Circuit parameter 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 2 3 1 6 308621 14 00 Rev 00 A 109 Appendix B Configuration Examples This appendix provides examples of the following configurations Topic Page Dial on Demand with PPP B 2 Dial on Demand Using ISDN Lines in a Frame Relay Network B 1 Dial on Demand for an ISDN Network B 14 Configuring a Hot Standby Circuit for a Frame Relay Network B 21 Dial Backup with PPP or Standard on the Primary Line B 24 Dial Backup over an ISDN Network B 33 These examples include e A network illustration of the sample dial configuration e Instructions for accessing and modifying parameters for proper configuration This chapter assumes that you are familiar with the configuration procedures for dial services For information about setting up WAN interfaces see Configuring WAN Line Services 308621 14 00 Rev 00 B 1 Configuring Dial Services Dial on Demand with PPP In Figure B 1 routers 4 and 7 are c
447. ssrrssrerssrrssrrssrrrsens 13 15 Enabling Filters for Backup Circuits Frame Relay Only sses 13 16 pec iivilg ihe Redial COUNT eissaia narnia 13 17 Specifying the Time Between Calls c cccececceeeceeeeeeeeseeeseaeeseteeetttaeeeseeeeeeee FOOT TZ Choosing the Severity Level for Error Messages TOT T e peu 13 18 Scheduling Backup Circuit Availability scisrrsruisei iiciin 13 18 Deleting a Backup Circuit Schedule ecceeeeceeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeees 13 21 Removing PPP or Frame Relay Backup Service EET P P ee 13 22 Chapter 14 Customizing Bandwidth on Demand Circuits Customizing Bandwidth on Demand Service re P E E bebe 14 2 Changing the Authentication Prologol ssiicrisiar agiriren sa 14 3 Monitoring Congestion on the Bandwidth or Demand Circuit ccesceeeeeeeereees 14 3 Bandwidth on Demand Congestion Monitor Parameters errr eee 14 4 Setting the Preferred and Reserved Slots 0 csccccesecceeeeeeeeeeeeeteaeesseneeetstereseeees 14 6 Setting the Preferred and Reserved Slots for BAP c cccsccccsseeeeeneeeesteeeeeaeees 14 6 Modifying Multilink Fragmentation ccccisscdsecedsssirendoni eonesttindercrntieieersnaianirmmnnnenrtns 14 7 Enabling BAP for Bandwidth on Demand Service sssssssssesessesssrresseesrnersnrsrsessressre 14 8 Removing Bandwidth on Demand Service mieten EREE TERT PT MeO 14 9 xiv 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Chapter 15
448. st provide the phone number of the remote router that the router will call You can add phone numbers to the outgoing phone list using either the BCC dial on demand and dial backup only or Site Manager Using the BCC This section assumes that you already configured one outgoing phone number in Chapter 2 Starting Dial Services Using Site Manager or Chapter 3 Starting Dial Services Using the BCC To add phone numbers to the outgoing phone list navigate to the demand circuit or backup circuit prompt and enter out phone number lt siring gt string is a numeric string up to 25 characters Do not enter space special or alphabetic characters in the telephone number For example backup circuit 8 5 1 out phone number 9786665432 or demand circuit to phoenix out phone number 8765432 You can also include a subaddress extension to further identify the remote router For ISDN calls this subaddress is useful when there are several routers at a destination site but the ISDN provider only assigns the destination one phone number An incoming call must specify the number and subaddress to reach a specific router 15 4 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Customizing Phone Lists To configure an extension navigate to the out phone number prompt and enter subaddress extension lt string gt string is a numeric string up to 25 characters Do not enter space special or alphabetic characters in the subaddress For example
449. structions MIB Object ID Circuit Type Dialup gt Bandwidth On Demand Circuits gt Bandwidth On Demand Circuit Definition gt Cet Type gt Circuit Options Normal Normal Bandwidth on Demand Specifies whether the leased circuit uses bandwidth on demand service For a normal synchronous circuit the router does not provide bandwidth on demand service For a bandwidth circuit the router provides up to 29 additional lines to carry traffic when the bandwidth circuit is congested Accept the default Normal if you do not want secondary circuits available for leased circuits Select Bandwidth on Demand to provide bandwidth on demand service for a congested single circuit or multilink circuit Site Manager lists the circuit type next to the circuit name If you select Non Monitor for the Bandwidth Mode parameter Site Manager will not allow you to enter values for the CHAP Local Name CHAP Secret PAP Local ID and PAP Password parameters These parameters are part of configuring the router as congestion monitor 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 4 5 1 3 Bandwidth On Demand Pool ID Dialup gt Bandwidth On Demand Circuits gt Bandwidth On Demand Circuit Definition gt Cet Type gt Circuit Options None 1 to 255 Identifies the bandwidth pool associated with the bandwidth circuit If you select Bandwidth on Demand for the Circuit Type parameter enter the ID of the bandwidth pool that this circuit should use If you select Normal for the Circ
450. switches in the United States and Canada Click on Add The Phone Number window opens Set the following parameters Directory Number Ext SubAddr ISDN Numbering Type ISDN Numbering Plan Click on Help or see the parameter descriptions beginning on page A 91 If necessary set the SPID parameter otherwise go to step 7 Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 92 continued 308621 14 00 Rev 00 15 25 Configuring Dial Services Site Manager Procedure continued You do this System responds 7 Click on OK You return to the completed ISDN Local Phone Numbers window 8 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window Modifying the Local Phone List You can delete local phone numbers using the BCC You can change or delete numbers in the local phone list using Site Manager Using the BCC To delete local phone numbers from the local phone number list navigate to the local phone number prompt and enter delete For example local phone number 2 1 5553427 delete Using Site Manager To change or delete a local phone number Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window The Dialup menu opens choose Dialup 2 Choose Local Phone Numbers The ISDN Local Phone Lines window opens 3 Click on Local Phones The ISDN Local Phone Numbers window opens The SPID
451. t B 30 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Outgoing Phone List Configuration Configuration Examples From the Primary Circuit Definition window configure the outgoing phone list on each router by completing the following tasks You do this Site Manager Procedure System responds 1 Inthe Primary Circuit Definition window select a circuit 2 Click on Phone Out The Outgoing Phone List window opens 3 Click on Add The Phone Number window opens 4 Set the Outgoing Phone Number parameter as follows e Router 1 4362222 e Router 2 4368888 5 Click on OK You return to the Outgoing Phone List window 6 Click on Done 7 Click on Done You return to the Primary Circuit Definition window You return to the Configuration Manager window Caller Resolution Table Configuration Router 1 the master router does not require a caller resolution table Router 1 initiates calls to router 2 it does not receive them therefore router 1 does not need to verify router 2 s identity In contrast router 1 must have a CHAP name and secret that it places in the call setup message to identify itself to router 2 Router 2 the slave router does require a caller resolution table entry Router 2 receives calls from router 1 and must identify the incoming caller After configuring the primary and backup circuits you must configure the caller resolution table on router 2 308621 14 00 Rev 0
452. t Hybrid Mode Congestion Control Congestion Timer Congestion Counter Compression Control For parameter descriptions and more information about frame relay service records and PVCs see Configuring Frame Relay Services System responds 11 Click on Done You return to the Frame Relay Backup Service List window 12 Click on Done You return to the FR Backup Interface window 13 Click on Done You return to the FR Primary Interface Definition window 14 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window 13 8 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Customizing Backup Circuits Configuring Filters for Backup Configurations To prevent unwanted traffic across a frame relay interface you can define protocol priorities to ensure the arrival of critical data and set up outbound filters to handle unwanted data Configuring Filters for Primary Secondary Interfaces To configure filters for primary secondary interfaces Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window choose Protocols The Protocols menu opens Choose Edit Protocol Priority Create enable and modify traffic filters See Configuring Traffic Filters and Protocol Prioritization for detailed instructions The Priority Outbound Filters window opens Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager win
453. t on page 3 14 308621 14 00 Rev 00 3 11 Configuring Dial Services Configuring an ISDN Interface Before creating a pool with ISDN lines you need to select a port and designate it as a BRI or PRI interface Refer to the appropriate section for instructions e Configuring BRI Lines on page 3 12 e Configuring PRI Lines on page 3 14 Configuring BRI Lines ISDN BRI net modules are available only on the Access Node AN Access Stack Node ASN Access Node Hub ANH Advanced Remote Node ARN and System 5000 platforms To configure BRI interfaces you specify the interface for BRI service and the type of service for example whether one or two B channels are available To configure a BRI object 1 Create the BRI interface by entering bri lt s ot connector gt mode lt mode_type gt mode_type specifies whether the BRI line is operating as a dial up line or as a leased line Table 3 2 lists the modes When choosing a mode follow these guidelines e Ifyou have a dial up application choose one of the dial up modes e For networks in Germany and Japan you can configure a permanent point to point ISDN connection over a B channel without having to use the D channel to dial the call This connection operates like a leased line To configure leased BRI connections select one of the leased modes Note that for leased BRI applications your ISDN switch must be able to support these connections 3 12 308621 14
454. t A 85 activate additional lines for BAP and Reserved Bandwidth Slot A 86 non BAP bandwidth on demand service Specify the maximum number of links in a Maximum Links A 86 multilink bundle Specify a percentage that the data traffic BOD Recovery Threshold A 87 must be reduced before the line is no longer considered congested Specify the number of consecutive times BOD Periods to Recover A 87 308621 14 00 Rev 00 14 5 Configuring Dial Services Setting the Preferred and Reserved Slots Table 14 3 explains how to change the monitor parameters from the Bandwidth On Demand Monitor Options window You can also edit these parameters from the Bandwidth On Demand Pools window as follows Site Manager Procedure You do this 1 In the Configuration Manager window choose Dialup System responds The Dialup menu opens Choose Bandwidth on Demand Pools The Bandwidth On Demand Pools window opens Click on Priority The Preferred Reserved Slots for BOD Pool window opens Set the following parameters Preferred Bandwidth Slot Reserved Bandwidth Slot Click on Help or see the parameter descriptions beginning on page A 85 The slot parameters that you specify affect all circuits in the pool Also Site Manager applies these values to the same parameter in the Bandwidth On Demand Monitor Options window If you change the lines in a bandwidth pool and the Bandwidth Mode par
455. t configure protocol prioritization for demand circuits running PPP multilink Protocol prioritization modifies the order in which packets are sent over the line which could change the multilink assigned order of packets and cause problems with the data For more information about compression see Configuring Data Compression Services Caller Resolution Information for Demand Circuit Groups After you specify the demand pool ID and the number of circuits for a demand circuit group Site Manager displays the Caller Resolution Info window You use this window to enter the CHAP name or PAP ID of the remote routers associated with this demand circuit group When a remote call comes in the router activates a circuit from the specified circuit group 308621 14 00 Rev 00 12 47 Configuring Dial Services Site Manager prompts you for this information because demand circuit groups cannot initiate calls Site Manager ensures that you make an entry for the remote router in the caller resolution table so that the local router configured with the demand circuit group can accept incoming calls To complete the Caller Resolution Info window Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 Set the following parameters Caller Name CHAP Secret PAP Password Click on Help or see the parameter descriptions beginning on page A 65 You can make additional entries in the caller resolution table See Chapter 16 Cus
456. t enter space special or alphabetic characters in the telephone number MIB Object ID 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 4 6 1 5 A 96 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Site Manager Parameters Outgoing Phone Delimiter Dialup gt Demand Backup Bandwidth On Demand Circuits Demand Circuits PPP or FR Circuits gt PPP or FR Demand Circuits gt Phone Out gt Outgoing Phone List gt Add gt Phone Number Backup Circuits PPP or Frame Relay gt Primary Circuit Definition or FR Primary Interface Definition gt Phone Out gt Outgoing Phone List gt Add gt Phone Number Bandwidth Circuits Bandwidth On Demand Circuit Definition gt Phone Out gt Outgoing Phone List gt Add gt Phone Number None Any string of up to five characters An example of a single character delimiter is a backslash For V 25bis calls only this delimiter separates the phone number from the extension Enter a delimiter if the remote device requires one between the phone number and the extension Use a character or set of characters that the remote device accepts 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 4 6 1 6 308621 14 00 Rev 00 A 97 Configuring Dial Services Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Outgoing Phone Number Type Dialup gt Demand Backup Bandwidth On Demand Circuits Demand Circuits PPP or FR Circuits gt PPP or FR Demand Circ
457. t on the router where the dial interface resides Logical Line Number Number of the line interface for the dial circuit Circuit Name Name of the dial circuit Called Phone No Phone number the router dialed for the remote destination Calling Phone No Phone number of the local router placing the call Duration minutes Length of the call Configured Pool IDs ID of the configured pools Dial Services Calls non ISDN Slot Mod Conn The slot on the router where the dial interface resides Circuit Name Name of the dial circuit Configured Pool IDs ID of the configured pools 308621 14 00 Rev 00 C 21 Configuring Dial Services show dial caller resolution The show dial caller resolution command displays information about caller name table entries You can use the following filter flags and filter arguments with this command backup shows caller resolution information for dial backup service demand shows caller resolution information for dial on demand service caller lt caller_name gt shows caller resolution information for a specified caller The output contains the following information Caller Name Name of the remote caller CHAP secret Remote router s CHAP secret PAP Password Remote router s PAP password Circuit Name Local circuit that the router activates when receiving a call from the remote router Cct Grp No Circuit group number dial on demand only Configd Pool IDs IDs of the configured line p
458. t the Inactivity Timeout parameter to Enable for this parameter to have any effect The Inactivity Timeout parameter is not applicable for backup circuits 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 4 11 1 8 TimeOfDay Failback Mode Demand Circuits only Dialup gt Demand Circuits gt Demand Pools gt PPP or FR Circuits gt PPP or FR Demand Circuits gt Schedule gt Circuit Time of Day Schedule or Pool Availability List gt Add gt Circuit Time of Day Schedule Automatic Automatic Manual For PPP standby circuits only this parameter controls the failback to the primary circuit if the Standby Failback Mode parameter is set to None Select Automatic to automatically deactivate the hot standby circuit and return to the primary circuit The Failback Time parameter for this circuit determines the failback delay Select Manual to manually deactivate the hot standby circuit 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 4 11 1 9 A 60 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Site Manager Parameters Parameter Failback Time min Path Demand Circuits only Dialup gt Demand Circuits gt Demand Pools gt PPP or FR Circuits gt PPP or FR Demand Circuits gt Schedule gt Circuit Time of Day Schedule or Pool Availability List gt Add gt Circuit Time of Day Schedule Default 0 Options 0 to 1439 minutes Function For PPP standby circuits only this parameter indicates the amount of time the router waits before deactivating the standby circuit and returning to a recovered primary circu
459. t time Specifies the days that this circuit should be available The router uses this parameter with a start time and end time that you specify to create a time period that the circuit can be available The options are sunday monday tuesday wednesday thursday friday saturday weekday and weekend Individual days of the week take precedence over the weekday option Specifies the time of day the demand circuit is available The router uses a start time and end time to establish a time period when the circuit is available This parameter also specifies the time of day any secondary lines are available if you configure bandwidth on demand service for a PPP demand circuit For the router to activate the circuit at the configured start time ensure that the Availability Mode parameter is set to the default available If you do not want the router to activate the circuit at the start time set the Availability Mode to not available end time Specifies the time of day the demand circuit is no longer available The router uses this value with the start time to establish a time period when the circuit is available This value also specifies the time of day that all secondary lines are deactivated if you set up bandwidth on demand service for a PPP demand circuit For the router to deactivate the circuit at the configured end time ensure that the Availability Mode parameter is set to the default available If you do not want the router
460. t use Raise DTR and V 25bis signaling see Modifying the Modem Command String on page 10 10 To configure a custom initialization string you have to configure the init string parameter This parameter is valid only if the wan type parameter is set to asynchronous and the media type parameter is set to hayes To set the initialization string navigate to the serial prompt and enter init string lt string gt string is an AT modem command string which is an ASCII text string from 3 to 34 characters For example to send a command to turn off the command echo enter serial 3 1 init string E0 Note You must set the init string parameter for external Hayes compatible modems Consult the manual for your modem for valid initialization strings Using Site Manager Using Site Manager you can specify a particular modem for asynchronous interfaces that use Hayes signaling Asynchronous interfaces are available for the AN ASN and ANH using the Dual Sync Net module ARN using any serial expansion module and BLN and BCN using the Octal Sync Link module For more information see Chapter 5 Implementation Notes for All Dial Services 10 8 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Customizing Modem Lines When you select a modem from the list the AT initialization string is set automatically as well as the speaker volume speaker control and number of rings to answer You can modify these default settings If your modem is n
461. ta going across a channel If you set this parameter to Default the pattern that the router transmits depends on the setting of the synchronous line parameter Sync Media Type If the Sync Media Type parameter is set to ISDNLEASED the IFTF will be an idle signal For all other Sync Media Type values the IFTF will be HDLC flags If you select FORCEHDLCFLAGS or FORCEIDLES for this parameter then the IFTF will be HDLC flags or idle signals respectively regardless of the Sync Media Type Select the IFTF pattern that the router should send when there is no data to transmit 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 5 1 96 A 32 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Site Manager Parameters BRI T4 Timer ISDN Connector gt ISDN Dialup gt Edit D Chan gt BRI Interface Configuration 750 milliseconds 500 to 1000 milliseconds Indicates the amount of time the router waits for the line to recover from a deactivated state This timer prevents brief minor disturbances on a noisy line from forcing the router to deactivate the circuit Instead the router waits to see if the line recovers within the T4 timer period This enables the router to suppress minor line problems from the upper layer protocols Enter a time limit that the router waits for the line to recover before it deactivates the circuit If your line is noisy enter the maximum time for the router to wait for the line to r
462. tant to balance the use of the primary and standby circuits to ensure that data reaches the remote destination Be aware that the router monitors the primary circuit during the failback time If the primary circuit fails the router continues to use the standby circuit Configuring Multiple Time of Day Schedules Configuring multiple time of day schedules for a circuit can cause schedule conflicts This section provides two examples of when this happens If the failback time for the active time of day schedule overlaps the failback time of the next schedule the router uses the failback time of the latter schedule The router deducts the amount of failback time already elapsed from the latter schedule see Example 1 Failback Times That Overlap 308621 14 00 Rev 00 12 41 Configuring Dial Services Table 12 3 shows the time of day schedules for standby circuit 1 Table 12 3 Time of Day Schedules for Standby Circuit 1 Time of Day Schedule 1 Time of Day Schedule 2 Time of Day Schedule 3 Start Time 8 a m End Time 11 a m Start Time 11 a m End Time 5 p m Start Time 7 p m End Time 11 p m Failback Time 60 minutes Failback Time 10 minutes Failback Time 10 minutes Example 1 Failback Times That Overlap 7 00 a m 8 00 a m 10 30 a m The primary circuit fails The standby circuit becomes available The primary circuit recovers and the failback timer starts c
463. tdauasancidaacee did ua tndeoaeselnantenads 5 6 Asynchionous PPP sesisccsescccesentcadses sae tba E E eae 5 6 Configuring Modems for Asynchronous PPP Interfaces s es 5 8 PN cscs dss E ius wk sori Sona ean nah lsc Sin Faas andi dass AEN T 5 9 RADIUS Authentication Services Using VSAs T ee sei obier 5 9 Ee Re SENERS Meee res ee ere R trent ren eer en rr eer rre Teer re nr reer create 5 10 BRI Service on the AN ANH ASN and ARN u ccccccssseseseseeeeeseececeeeeeeeeeeeeeens 5 11 Be SAFIN UIE oi E EE Ea 5 11 EP ariel SUR OPT siira aA E E R SE 5 11 BRI Leased Line Operation for Germany and Japan dorian AT Souk 5 12 BRI SUNOCO SSeS acer ctean anda need eee atte ee eevee 5 12 Floating B Option for the AN and ANH ecccceccceeeeeneeeeeceeeeeeeseeeeeeseaeeseaes 5 12 PRI Service on the ASN BLN and BCN eer AEE EEEE asec eee etnies 5 13 viii 308621 14 00 Rev 00 B Ohanmel SUPPONE ccsieniesnt nanan pianist ene Iaanee A RIS ely Eee eieh sass A E E E E A E 5 14 elece PRESOVE aeiia ai a a i 5 14 PRE VOITAT ino a A 5 15 Placing Multirate Calls Serer ree Serer eRe PT A aa meshes 5 15 camine Call FMEN sirmione ia 5 16 E EAE ETa oy EEA T E E E cago ET E OE ale eth E bamnn Ga 5 17 X 25 Service over an ISDN D Channel BRI Only mines r ee gate een 18 Configuring X 25 Service over the D Channel ccceeseeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 5 19 Using the ping Command for ISDN Connect
464. te eeectiasuty enotin niaaa aaia daa 12 53 Chapter 13 Customizing Backup Circuits Creating a PPP Backup Circuit for a Direct Mode PVC ccccssececeeesseeeeeestteeeseeaees 13 2 Creating Frame Relay Backup Circuits for Group Mode PVCs P aa 13 5 308621 14 00 Rev 00 xiii Modifying the Frame Relay Backup Interface 0 0 ccccccstesssessesssecasasestesesn snes TOPO Modifying Frame Relay Service Records 0 008 TT oi T PEA ine LOO Configuring Filters for Backup Configurations ccccccscseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeneees 13 9 Configuring Filters for Primary Secondary Interfaces cccceseeeeeeeeteeeeees 13 9 Configuring Filters for Primary Shared Interfaces 06 PE A 13 9 Customizing PPP and Frame Relay Backup Circuits cscceeeseeetteeeeteeeeeteeeeeeee 13 10 Modifying Which Router Initiates a Call 0 ceecceceececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeaeeeeeeeeeeeeees 13 10 Modifying PPP Authentication Information sccccccccscissccssircccniereerssmtendermnnncen 13 11 Changing the Authentication Protocol sonissiirisisisirniinnisniiniinsnes 13 11 Configuring CHAP PE E E EE R 13 12 Contgurmo PAP sionismen EN Ea E NEEESE 13 12 Configuring Outbound Authentication ssisrrisisresssisreninnnninnnunii innnan 13 13 Customizing the Duration of the Circuit deasa ee salen anaia oain ini 13 14 Modifying the Activation of a Backup Circuit eeeseeseeesseessee
465. te to the demand line or backup line prompt and enter isdn pool priority lt integer gt integer is a number from 1 to 50 For example demand line 1 bri 1 1 2 isdn pool priority 1 This command tells the router to use the line for slot 3 connector 3 first for a backup line This parameter works with the line priority parameter for serial lines For example if a pool has a serial line and an ISDN line you can set the serial line to a line priority of 1 and the ISDN line to an isdn pool priority of 2 308621 14 00 Rev 00 11 5 Configuring Dial Services Using Site Manager To modify the pool channel priority for demand backup and bandwidth pools Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window choose Dialup The Dialup menu opens Choose Demand Backup or Bandwidth on Demand Pools The Demand Backup or Bandwidth on Demand Pools window opens Select the pool that contains the ISDN lines that you want to modify The Pool ID for the selected entry appears in the Pool ID field 4 Click on Edit 5 Click on an ISDN MCT1 or MCE1 connector The Lines Definition window opens The ISDN Logical Lines window opens Set the Pool Channel Priority parameter Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 26 7 Click on OK You return to the Lines Definition window 8 Choose File The File menu opens
466. ter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID SPID Dialup gt Local Phone Numbers gt ISDN Local Phone Lines gt Local Phones gt ISDN Local Phone Numbers gt Add gt Phone Number None A maximum of 20 numeric characters For switches in the United States and Canada the Service Profile Identifier SPID identifies an ISDN device to the switch so it knows which services to provide Enter the SPID that your ISDN provider supplied when you received ISDN service Ignore this parameter if you have a SESS switch on a point to point line 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 8 12 1 6 ISDN Numbering Type Dialup gt Local Phone Numbers gt ISDN Local Phone Lines gt Local Phones gt ISDN Local Phone Numbers Unknown Unknown International National Specific Subscriber Abbreviated Indicates the standard that the phone number follows The router passes this information to the ISDN switch Accept the default value Unknown unless your service provider explicitly instructs you to use another value 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 8 12 1 9 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Site Manager Parameters Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID ISDN Numbering Plan Dialup gt Local Phone Numbers gt ISDN Local Phone Lines gt Local Phones gt ISDN Local Phone Numbers Telephony Unknown Telephon
467. ter can activate a standby connection from Slot 3 e Standby A standby circuit has no relationship with the primary circuit It does not back up a primary circuit if that circuit fails Instead a standby circuit answers incoming calls destined for it A standby circuit can also carry data when you activate it manually 308621 14 00 Rev 00 6 3 Configuring Dial Services The router activates a standby circuit when e A primary circuit fails The router activates a hot standby circuit when the primary circuit fails The hot standby takes over data transmission To determine whether a primary circuit failed the router relies on Breath of Life BofL messages for PPP primary circuits and A bit notification for frame relay primary circuits When you associate a PPP primary circuit with a hot standby circuit the router automatically enables BofL for the primary circuit so be sure to enable BofL on the other side of the PPP primary circuit This does not apply to frame relay primary circuits e Acallis designated for the standby circuit The router activates a standby circuit only when the remote router calls the host router over a standby circuit e You activate a standby circuit manually Typically circuits at the remote site will be hot standby circuits while at the central site they will be regular standby circuits Configuring hot standby circuits for the remote router means that the remote router monitors the status of its
468. termine the corresponding bit for each character by converting the hexadecimal value of the control character to decimal For example Ox1f 31 decimal to escape that character set the leftmost bit in the map Do the same thing for each control character After you decide what bits in the map to set you can enter either the hex character equivalent to the bit string or the decimal equivalent To escape all control characters in the packet set the map to Oxffffffff For a description of how PPP encodes escaped control characters in the data stream see Configuring PPP Services PPP displays the decimal number equivalent to the string and uses that value in its link negotiations To set the async control character map navigate to the dial prompt and enter accm seed lt integer gt integer is a number from 0 to 4 294 967 295 0x00 through OxXFFFFFFFF For example dial bri 1 1 accm seed 755300 308621 14 00 Rev 00 9 5 Configuring Dial Services Setting the Maximum Receive Unit MRU The mru parameter specifies maximum receive unit MRU size in bytes for the line This parameter works with the mru compliance parameter to ensure the correct MRU size The mru parameter default value for PPP dial lines is 1500 bytes To ensure this value the mru compliance parameter is enabled by default For leased lines the default is 1590 In most cases you can accept the default value of 1500 bytes However if you want to change the
469. ters Technical Solutions Center Telephone Number Billerica MA 800 2LANWAN 800 252 6926 Santa Clara CA 800 2LANWAN 800 252 6926 Valbonne France 33 4 92 96 69 68 Sydney Australia 61 2 9927 8800 Tokyo Japan 81 3 5402 7041 XXX 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Chapter 1 Dial Services Overview A dial service connects remote users through a central switched network to other destinations on the network using dial up lines also called switched lines Dial up lines are temporary connections that a router activates when there is data to send across the network when a failed connection needs a backup connection or when a congested leased line needs an additional connection for more bandwidth For remote users such as people in branch offices telecommuters and sales people in the field dial up lines can be a cost effective alternative to leased lines and packet networks which are permanent connections that are available regardless of network traffic Nortel Networks offers three dial services dial on demand dial backup and bandwidth on demand This chapter includes the following information Topic Page How to Use This Guide 1 2 Nortel Networks Dial Services 1 3 Dial on Demand Service 1 5 Dial Backup Service 1 14 Bandwidth on Demand Service 1 22 Using the Same Line for All Dial Services 1 27 Chapters 5 through 8 describe the Nortel Networks implementation of
470. ters to a Network Make sure that you are running the latest version of Nortel Networks BayRS and Site Manager software For information about upgrading BayRS and Site Manager see the upgrading guide for your version of BayRS 308621 14 00 Rev 00 XXV Configuring Dial Services Text Conventions This guide uses the following text conventions angle brackets lt gt bold text braces brackets ellipsis points Indicate that you choose the text to enter based on the description inside the brackets Do not type the brackets when entering the command Example If the command syntax is ping lt p_address gt you enter ping 192 32 10 12 Indicates command names and options and text that you need to enter Example Enter show ip alerts routes Example Use the dinfo command Indicate required elements in syntax descriptions where there is more than one option You must choose only one of the options Do not type the braces when entering the command Example If the command syntax is show ip alerts routes you must enter either show ip alerts or show ip routes but not both Indicate optional elements in syntax descriptions Do not type the brackets when entering the command Example If the command syntax is show ip interfaces alerts you can enter either show ip interfaces or show ip interfaces alerts Indicate that you repeat the last element of the command as
471. th Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID IPXWAN Enable Dialup gt Demand Circuit Groups gt Demand Circuit Groups Disable Enable Disable Enables or disables IPX WAN for this interface Select Enable to enable IPXWAN for this interface 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 4 12 1 13 Bridge Enable Dialup gt Demand Circuit Groups gt Demand Circuit Groups Disable Enable Disable Enables or disables bridging for this interface Select Enable to enable bridging for this interface 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 4 12 1 10 Caller Resolution Info Parameters Demand Circuit Groups Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID The caller resolution parameters for demand circuit groups contain the parameters for the router to identify the remote router who is trying to make a connection Caller Name Dialup gt Demand Circuit Groups gt Demand Circuit Groups gt Add Group gt Enter a Demand Pool gt OK gt Caller Resolution Info None Any text string maximum 20 characters This name is part of the incoming call and informs the local router of the remote router s identity Enter a text string no longer than 20 characters that identifies a remote router If you configure CHAP as the authentication protocol enter the remote router s CHAP name If you configure PAP enter the remote router s P
472. th on demand service the router determines that the demand line is congested when the traffic over the line exceeds a certain user configured threshold The router that is configured as the congestion monitor then searches for an available line from the bandwidth pool that you associate with this demand circuit Lines in a bandwidth on demand pool can reside across slots so you need to designate each slot as either preferred or reserved This determines the order in which the router searches the slots for available lines the preferred slot is first and the reserved slot is second If these slots have no available lines the router automatically uses the local slot The local slot is the slot containing the first demand line that was activated When the router activates additional lines they adopt the configuration of the congested demand circuit PPP multilink is the protocol that enables the router to use multiple lines simultaneously to transmit data Multilink enables the router to use lines at different speeds and to evenly distribute data across those lines When you enable multilink you can configure a set of links between two peers into a single bundle The actual number of lines in a multilink bundle depends on hardware platform constraints total bundle speed the speed of each link in the bundle and the type of traffic you are sending 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Dial Services Overview For PPP demand connections across ISDN lines you
473. the Software or user manuals in whole or in part The Software and user manuals embody Nortel Networks and its licensors confidential and proprietary intellectual property Licensee shall not sublicense assign or otherwise disclose to any third party the Software or any information about the operation design performance or implementation of the Software and user manuals that is confidential to Nortel Networks and its licensors however Licensee may grant permission to its consultants subcontractors and agents to use the Software at Licensee s facility provided they have agreed to use the Software only in accordance with the terms of this license 3 Limited warranty Nortel Networks warrants each item of Software as delivered by Nortel Networks and properly installed and operated on Nortel Networks hardware or other equipment it is originally licensed for to function substantially as described in its accompanying user manual during its warranty period which begins on the date Software is first shipped to Licensee If any item of Software fails to so function during its warranty period as the sole remedy Nortel Networks will at its discretion provide a suitable fix patch or workaround for the problem that may be included in a future Software release Nortel Networks further warrants to Licensee that the media on which the Software is provided will be free from defects in materials and workmanship under normal use for a period of 90 days
474. the call Accept the default Disable if you want the router to establish the connection at the start time and remain active until the configured end time regardless of data activity and regardless of the setting of the Availability Mode parameter Only the network can bring down the connection MIB Object ID 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 4 11 1 7 308621 14 00 Rev 00 A 59 Configuring Dial Services Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Availability Mode Demand Circuits Dialup gt Demand Circuits gt Demand Pools gt PPP or FR Circuits gt PPP or FR Demand Circuits gt Schedule gt Circuit Time of Day Schedule or Pool Availability List Backup Circuits Dialup gt Backup Circuits gt PPP or Frame Relay gt Primary Circuit Definition or FR Primary Interface Definition gt Schedule gt Circuit Time of Day Schedule Available Available Not Available Determines whether the router activates the circuit between the configured time interval specified with the Days Start Time and End Time parameters Accept the default Available to allow the router to establish the circuit between the time interval you specified in the Days Start Time and End Time parameters Select Not Available to prevent the router from establishing the circuit during this time interval For demand circuits only you must se
475. the cost of connecting to an X 25 network you can send X 25 packets over an ISDN D channel instead of sending them over leased lines To use the D channel for X 25 packet transmission the baud rate must be a maximum of 9600 b s so that data is not lost For more information about this feature see X 25 Service over an ISDN D Channel BRI Only on page 5 18 Caution If you enable or disable this feature dynamically the router disconnects all existing calls across the B channels while the ISDN software makes the necessary changes After the changes are complete the software restarts and you can make calls again You should have already created BRI service according to the instructions in Chapter 2 Starting Dial Services Using Site Manager or Chapter 3 Starting Dial Services Using the BCC To enable this feature go to one of the following sections 308621 14 00 Rev 00 11 11 Configuring Dial Services Using the BCC You can enable or disable X 25 service over the D channel for each BRI line To do so navigate to the bri prompt and enter x25 isdn dchannel lt siate gt state is enabled or disabled The default is disabled For example bri 1 1 x25 isdn dchannel enabled If you enable X 25 service over the D channel you must configure the TEI type and value to communicate with the ISDN switch Configuring the TEI Type The x25 tei type parameter specifies how you choose to configure the TEI
476. the descriptions in Appendix A 4 Click on Apply and then click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window 14 2 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Customizing Bandwidth on Demand Circuits Table 14 2 lists ways to modify your bandwidth on demand configuration Table 14 2 Customizing Bandwidth on Demand Service Task Site Manager Parameter Page Add bandwidth circuits Circuit Type A 78 Bandwidth On Demand Pool ID A 78 Determine which router monitors Bandwidth Mode A 79 congestion Modify the authentication information CHAP Local Name A 46 CHAP Secret A 47 PAP Local ID A 48 PAP Password A 49 Outbound Authentication A 50 Changing the Authentication Protocol CHAP is the default authentication protocol To select PAP you must specify PAP for the Local Authentication Protocol parameter For instructions see Configuring PPP Services Monitoring Congestion on the Bandwidth or Demand Circuit To relieve congestion across the leased bandwidth or demand circuit a router on one side of the connection must monitor the traffic level on the circuit The Bandwidth Mode parameter in the Circuit Options window specifies which router monitors congestion The default for this parameter is Non Monitor Changing the value to Monitor makes your router the congestion monitor You can then modify the congestion monitor parameters which determine when the router activates additional lines to relieve congesti
477. the initiator router does not require a caller resolution table router 1 initiates calls to router 2 it does not receive them therefore router 1 does not need to verify router 2 s identity In contrast router 1 must have a CHAP name and secret configured which it then places in the call setup message to identify itself to router 2 10 Specify the outgoing phone number for the remote router backup circuit 22 1 3 1 Oout phone number phone number 4363333 out phone number backup 22 1 3 1 4363333 308621 14 00 Rev 00 B 35 Configuring Dial Services Configuration of Router 2 To create the dial backup configuration in Figure B 6 on page B 33 configure router 2 as follows 1 Configure a leased synchronous interface on an AN with PPP on serial interface slot 1 connector 2 box serial 1 2 serial 1 2 ppp ppp 3 3 14 ip 140 1 1 2 255 255 255 0 ip 140 1 1 2 255 255 255 0 box 2 Configure a BRI object for this ISDN interface and configure a B channel box bri 1 1 mode 2b d bri 1 1 channel 3 Create a dial object for the B channel channel 1 1 dial dial bri 1 1 back 4 Specify the local phone number that this router will include when placing a call In addition specify the SPID because the switch conforms to the National standard channel 1 1 local phone number 4363333 local phone number 1 1 4363333 spid 50843633330000 local phone number 1 1 4363333 box 5 Specify the ISDN switch type box isdn switch 1 isd
478. the monitor router to activate secondary lines This router is not responsible for monitoring the congestion and it cannot initiate a connection Dynamic Monitor Select this option for configurations that use BAP to allocate bandwidth It enables the router to function as the monitor or non monitor router based on the direction of the call With this value set the router who initiates the call is the monitor and the router who receives the call is the non monitor If your router is communicating with a remote Nortel Networks router the remote router must be set to Dynamic Monitor unless it uses software prior to Version 11 01 in which case do not select this option If your router is communicating with a non Nortel Networks router select this option MIB Object ID 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 4 5 1 36 308621 14 00 Rev 00 A 79 Configuring Dial Services Bandwidth on Demand Circuit Definition Parameters The Bandwidth on Demand Circuit Definition window Figure A 18 contains the circuit definition parameters for the bandwidth circuit Bandwidth On Demand Circuit Definition Done Cct Type Help ei z BOD Pool ID Bandwidth Mode CHAP Local Name CHAP Secret PAP Local ID PAP Password Figure A 18 Bandwidth on Demand Circuit Definition Window The parameter descriptions follow A 80 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter
479. the remote destination For example to ensure that data reaches the Boston office enter demand circuit to Boston auto demand termination enabled To instruct the router when to reestablish the demand connection after an autodemand termination navigate to the demand circuit prompt and enter auto demand termination reset lt infeger gt integer is a number from 1 to 999 999 minutes The default is 60 minutes Specify the amount of time in minutes that the router waits before reestablishing the demand circuit after an autodemand termination Enter an amount of time that allows the network to recover or that allows your network administrator to resolve the problem After the router reestablishes the demand circuit the protocols readvertise the static routes for this demand circuit You must enter a value for this parameter if you enabled the auto demand termination parameter 12 14 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Using Site Manager Customizing Demand Circuits To terminate a failed connection and send data across another path Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window choose Dialup The Dialup menu opens Choose Demand Circuits The Demand Pools window opens Click on PPP Circuits or FR Circuits The PPP Demand Circuits window or the FR Demand Circuits window opens 4 Select the circuit that you want to modify 5 Set the following param
480. thentication Protocol CHAP names and secrets for routers making connections with the Point to Point Protocol PPP Open the configuration file that you want to configure for dial services Using the BCC BCC Help For complete information about the BCC see Using the Bay Command Console BCC For descriptions of all the parameters for a specific object enter help lt object_name gt For example to see the parameters for the backup circuit context enter backup circuit 8 1 1 help backup circuit 3 2 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Starting Dial Services Using the BCC If the object exists in several locations within the BCC configuration hierarchy the BCC displays a list of objects To display the legal current and default values for a parameter navigate to the object prompt from where you configure the parameter and enter lt parameter gt For example ppp to boston callback client delay Current value 5 Legal values RANGE 0 1800 Default value 5 To see what subcontext you can navigate to from the present context at the current context prompt enter For example to see what subcontexts you can navigate to from the backup circuit context enter backup circuit 1 1 1 Sub Contexts caller resolution out phone number schedule Specifying a Physical Interface for the ASN If you are configuring a physical interface on the ASN using the BCC you must specify the slot module and connec
481. ther on a single computer or if applicable on a single authorized device identified by host ID for which it was originally acquired b to copy the Software solely for backup purposes in support of authorized use of the Software and c to use and copy the associated user manual solely in support of authorized use of the Software by Licensee This license applies to the Software only and does not extend to Nortel Networks Agent software or other Nortel Networks software products Nortel Networks Agent software or other Nortel Networks software products are licensed for use under the terms of the applicable Nortel Networks NA Inc Software License Agreement that accompanies such software and upon payment by the end user of the applicable license fees for such software 2 Restrictions on use reservation of rights The Software and user manuals are protected under copyright laws Nortel Networks and or its licensors retain all title and ownership in both the Software and user manuals including any revisions made by Nortel Networks or its licensors The copyright notice must be reproduced and included with any copy of any portion of the Software or user manuals Licensee may not modify translate decompile disassemble use for any competitive analysis reverse engineer distribute or create derivative works from the Software or user manuals or any copy in whole or in part Except as expressly provided in this Agreement Licensee may not copy or transfer
482. this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window choose Dialup The Dialup menu opens Choose Demand Backup or Bandwidth on Demand Circuits For backup and bandwidth circuits the appropriate Circuit Definition window opens For demand circuits the Demand Pools window opens Click on PPP Circuits or FR Circuits to open the appropriate Demand Circuits window 3 Choose Phone Out The Outgoing Phone List window opens 4 Set the Connection Type parameter Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 102 Click on Done You return to the appropriate circuit window Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window Enabling PRI Multirate PRI multirate lets you group B channels in multiples of 64 Kb s to dynamically allocate bandwidth on a call by call basis Both ends of the connection need to support multirate for it to work If you enable multirate you must also specify the number of B channels that the router groups together for a call For more information about PRI multirate see PRI Multirate on page 5 15 15 16 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Customizing Phone Lists Using the BCC To enable PRI multirate navigate to the out phone number prompt and change the channel bandwidth type parameter by entering channel bandwidth type multirate The default for this parameter is bchannel Accept this value for nonmultirate ca
483. this is an ISDN switched line providing two B channels the software makes the necessary adjustments if only one channel is in use Use this option if you can purchase only 2B D service but only want to use one B channel or your application requires two synchronous ports and only one B channel Leased 2X64K Specifies that this line provides two B channels that are always available No call setup occurs with an ISDN switch Instead the switch has a defined point to point connection between two ISDN end points Germany and Japan only Leased 1X64K Specifies that this line provides one B channel that is always available No call setup occurs with an ISDN switch Instead the switch has a defined point to point connection between two ISDN end points Germany and Japan only Leased 128K Specifies that this line provides one B channel that is always available The extra bandwidth of the 128 Kb s channel is equivalent to having two B channels of 64 Kb s No call setup occurs with an ISDN switch Instead the switch has a defined point to point connection between two ISDN end points Germany and Japan only Instructions If you have a dial up application choose one of the dial up options For networks in Germany and Japan if you want to have the dial up line up at all times and your ISDN switch can support permanent connections select one of the leased options MIB Object ID 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 8 9 1 34 308621 14 00 Rev 00
484. threshold greater than 100 percent 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 2 2 1 59 BOD Periods to Recover Dialup gt Bandwidth On Demand Circuits gt Bandwidth On Demand Circuit Definition gt Options gt Bandwidth On Demand Monitor Options 10 1 to 100 Specifies the number of consecutive times the router checks the bandwidth circuit and determines that data traffic is below the configured congestion threshold Once the router concludes that the circuit is no longer congested it returns to the leased line or bundle exclusively Enter the number of times the router should check if there is no longer a congestion condition before bringing down the secondary line 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 2 2 1 60 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Configuring Dial Services Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Multilink Fragmentation Dialup gt Bandwidth On Demand Circuits gt Bandwidth On Demand Circuit Definition gt Options gt Bandwidth On Demand Monitor Options Permitted Permitted Prohibited Enables the router to split up the data packet into smaller segments for more efficient transfer across the multilink circuit Accept the default Permitted to enable fragmentation otherwise select Prohibited 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 2 2 1 51 Fragmentati
485. time you specify in the Minimum Duration Time parameter This timer specifies the minimum amount of time the connection is active The timer must be set long enough to send complete routing updates to the remote routers The inactivity time which starts at the same time as the minimum duration timer determines how long the connection remains active by monitoring data inactivity When there is no more data transmitting the inactivity time expires and the router deactivates the connection If you enable or disable dial optimized routing dynamically while your demand connection is active the router deactivates the connection If there is still data to send after the call is cleared the router places another call using the new configuration for the dial optimized routing feature Exceptions for Sending Routing Updates Routing updates are sent independent of data transmission when e An IP or IPX interface becomes active for the first time When an IP or IPX interface first initializes it sends routing updates to every node in the network If there is no data to send the connection expires in the time you specify in the Minimum Duration Time parameter e The RIP broadcast timer IP or RIP SAP update interval IPX expires Each time the broadcast timer or update interval expires the protocol can request to send updates over an active connection If you enable dial optimized routing the value of the timer defaults to a high value so that c
486. ting reduces the number of connections as well as line costs For each dial on demand circuit you have the choice of enabling dial optimized routing If you enable dial optimized routing the router establishes a demand connection only for outbound data packets or if it receives a request from the protocol The presence of IP RIP and IPX RIP SAP packets alone will not trigger a dial connection If you disable dial optimized routing any packet can initiate demand connections To configure dial optimized routing see Enabling Dial Optimized Routing on page 12 24 Dial optimized routing is supported for IP and IPX only For all other protocols the router activates a demand connection for any type of routing packet regardless of whether you enable dial optimized routing To avoid this problem you can configure traffic filters to prevent specific types of packets from activating a connection See Configuring Traffic Filters and Protocol Prioritization for information about configuring filters What Happens When You Enable Dial Optimized Routing With dial optimized routing enabled the router activates a demand connection when there is data to send The router then alerts IP and IPX that a connection is active and that they can broadcast routing updates IP and IPX can also send triggered updates if any occur while the connection is active 308621 14 00 Rev 00 6 9 Configuring Dial Services The connection remains active for the
487. tion Protocol The PPP Bandwidth Allocation Protocol BAP defined in RFC 2125 manages the dynamic allocation of bandwidth across links in a multilink bundle It provides a flexible yet powerful method of managing bandwidth between two routers BAP is only available for bandwidth on demand service across ISDN lines BAP does the following e Coordinates the addition and removal of links from a bundle e Enables a router to pass information to its peer so the peer knows which phone number to dial to activate a connection e Defines call control packets that enable the router to add or remove bandwidth effectively BAP has the following advantages e Ensures effective use of bandwidth e Allows Nortel Networks routers to work together or with other vendors routers 8 4 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Bandwidth on Demand Implementation Notes e Minimizes the configuration of outgoing phone numbers because only one number is required The peer passes other phone numbers to the router which the router then uses to make calls e Uses call requests to determine whether bandwidth is available which saves the cost of placing a call to find out this information Call requests are BAP protocol messages and are unrelated to ISDN call requests When the router sends a BAP call request it uses active lines so there is no call attempt and no phone charge e Ensures that both routers agree to activate and deactivate the lines so there are n
488. tions beginning on page A 46 Do one of the following If you added ISDN lines or modem lines V 25bis or Hayes to the pool go to Creating an Outgoing Phone List on page 2 27 If you added only Raise DTR lines to the pool click on Done and go to Setting Up the Caller Resolution Table on page 2 30 308621 14 00 Rev 00 2 21 Configuring Dial Services Creating Bandwidth Circuits You can provide bandwidth on demand service for either leased or dial on demand connections To enable bandwidth on demand service you can either e Designate a single leased circuit or a leased multilink circuit as a bandwidth on demand circuit This designation indicates that these leased circuits are configured to use bandwidth on demand service e Assign a bandwidth on demand pool to a demand circuit If these circuits become congested the router provides up to 29 dial up lines to relieve the congestion for a total of 30 dial up lines for communication For configuration instructions go to the next section for leased circuits or to Adding Bandwidth Service for Demand Lines on page 2 26 Configuring Leased Circuits As Bandwidth Circuits You should have already configured PPP multilink for the leased circuits that you will designate as bandwidth circuits To configure leased circuits as bandwidth circuits You do this Site Manager Procedure System responds 1 In the
489. tions to the modem The ISDN lines use ISDN signaling for network connections How Demand Lines Pools and Circuits Work Together When you create demand circuits you assign a demand pool ID to each circuit Note that many demand circuits can use the same demand pool and therefore can use the same lines in that pool The line itself does not have a specific network address it is the circuit that has the associated network address When the router has data to send across a demand circuit the circuit searches for an available demand line from its associated demand pool When it finds an available line the router establishes a dial up connection to the remote router The router terminates the connection when there is no more data to send or receive when you manually take down the connection or when the scheduled time for an active connection expires Figure 1 3 shows the relationship between demand lines pools and circuits using PPP as the data link layer protocol 1 8 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Dial Services Overview Circuit 1 192 32 14 2 ord Dial Revs device Line 1 Demand pool Los Angeles Dial device El L 192 32 15 0 ae lt gt Circuit 2 192 32 15 2 n Dial E
490. tirate service e AT amp T 5ESS e AT amp T 4ESS e DMS 100 For these switches you can group from 2 to 23 B channels supplying bandwidth from 128 Kb s to 1472 Kb s Placing Multirate Calls Both ends of a connection must support multirate for it to work You enable multirate and specify the transmission rate of each multirate call when you configure an outgoing phone number for a circuit For specific instructions see Enabling PRI Multirate on page 15 16 Each multirate call can operate at a different transmission rate You determine the transmission rate by specifying the number of B channels the circuit can use for a phone number The greater the number of B channels the faster the transmission rate because the circuit has more bandwidth 308621 14 00 Rev 00 5 15 Configuring Dial Services You can place several multirate calls over the same PRI connection however the total number of B channels for each call cannot exceed the number of lines in the pool or the number of lines supported by the network switch If there are no available B channels in the line pool the call fails Call setup across the D channel is simple You set up a call only once regardless of how many B channels are in use Note If you enable multirate calls across a bandwidth on demand circuit you must configure each line s external clock speed Line speed is critical to balancing traffic across a multilink bundle which is a group of dial up
491. to the called router The identification process takes place during PPP link negotiation which occurs before the routers establish a connection to send protocol data The identification mechanism relies on one of two PPP authentication protocols Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol CHAP or Password Authentication Protocol PAP CHAP and PAP implement a security feature that identifies peer routers to one another CHAP is the default authentication protocol 308621 14 00 Rev 00 5 1 Configuring Dial Services Enabling the called router to dynamically identify the calling router lets a single dial interface ISDN or modem at a remote router be the connection point to multiple routers To set up authentication you must configure the router s caller resolution table see Chapter 16 Customizing Caller Resolution For more information about CHAP and PAP see Configuring PPP Services Types of Authentication You can configure one way authentication or two way authentication Two way authentication enables both routers to authenticate each other One way authentication enables only the called router to authenticate the remote peer Two Way Authentication Figure 5 1 shows an example of two way authentication Two Way Authentication CHAP Router A or B can initiate authentication EET Router A Router B Challenge lt _ Respon
492. to use dial backup service 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 4 1 1 31 308621 14 00 Rev 00 A 67 Configuring Dial Services Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Backup Pool ID Dialup gt Backup Circuits gt PPP gt Primary Circuit Definition gt Cet Type gt Circuit Options None 1 to 255 Identifies the backup pool for the primary circuit If you select Primary for the Circuit Type parameter enter the ID of the backup pool that this circuit should use If you accept the default Normal for the Circuit Type parameter do not enter a value for this parameter 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 4 5 1 5 A 68 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Site Manager Parameters PPP Primary Circuit Definition Parameters Dial Backup The PPP Primary Circuit Definition window Figure A 14 contains the primary circuit definition parameters Primary Circuit Definition Backup Pool ID Backup Mode CHAP Local Name CHAP Secret Figure A 14 Primary Circuit Definition Window The parameter descriptions follow Parameter Backup Pool ID Path Dialup gt Backup Circuits gt PPP gt Primary Circuit Definition Default None Options 1 to 255 Function Identifies the backup pool for the primary circuit Instructions Enter the ID number of the backup pool this circuit should use MIB Object ID 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 4 5 1 5 308621 14 00 Rev 00 A 69 Configuring Dial Services Parameter Backup Mode
493. tomizing Caller Resolution for instructions Click on OK Enable the unnumbered protocols that you want for this demand circuit group See the parameter descriptions beginning on page A 63 You return to the Demand Circuit Groups window which shows the new demand circuit group and its demand pool Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window 12 48 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Customizing Demand Circuits Modifying the Demand Circuit Group Configuration To modify the demand circuit group configuration Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window choose Dialup The Dialup menu opens Choose Demand Circuit Groups The Demand Circuit Groups window opens 3 Select a demand circuit group to modify To change the protocol that the circuit group uses disable the current protocol and enable another one then click on Apply For parameter descriptions for each protocol see page A 63 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window Modifying the Number of Circuits in a Demand Circuit Group To modify the number of circuits in a demand circuit group Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window choose Dialup The Dialup menu opens Choose Demand Circuit Groups The Demand Circuit Groups windo
494. tor for the interface For example if you are configuring BRI on the ASN you would enter stack bri 3 2 1 mode 2b d In this example you configure the interface on slot 3 module 2 connector 1 308621 14 00 Rev 00 3 3 Configuring Dial Services Specifying a Physical Interface for the ARN Using the BCC the ARN physical layer is defined by the modem object To configure a physical interface for the ARN navigate to the box prompt and enter modem lt slot connector gt For example to configure a modem interface on slot 1 connector 1 navigate to the box prompt and enter box modem 1 1 Demand Circuit Naming Conventions If you use a demand circuit name that has spaces in it for example PPP Demand 1 the name will be enclosed by braces when you see the output of the show config command and when you issue an Iso command for example demand pool 255 show config r demand pool pool id 255 demand line line type serial slot 1 module 1 connector 4 demand circuit circuit name PPP Demand 1 In addition when you need to navigate to a circuit whose name has spaces you will need to use curly braces as part of your navigation command entry For example to navigate from the demand pool prompt to the demand circuit prompt for the circuit named PPP Demand 1 enter demand pool 255 demand circuit PPP Demand 1 demand circuit PPP Demand 1 3 4 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Starting Dial Services Using the BCC Setti
495. ts derived from such portions of the software without specific prior written permission SUCH PORTIONS OF THE SOFTWARE ARE PROVIDED AS IS AND WITHOUT ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE In addition the program and information contained herein are licensed only pursuant to a license agreement that contains restrictions on use and disclosure that may incorporate by reference certain limitations and notices imposed by third parties ji 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Nortel Networks NA Inc Software License Agreement NOTICE Please carefully read this license agreement before copying or using the accompanying software or installing the hardware unit with pre enabled software each of which is referred to as Software in this Agreement BY COPYING OR USING THE SOFTWARE YOU ACCEPT ALL OF THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT THE TERMS EXPRESSED IN THIS AGREEMENT ARE THE ONLY TERMS UNDER WHICH NORTEL NETWORKS WILL PERMIT YOU TO USE THE SOFTWARE If you do not accept these terms and conditions return the product unused and in the original shipping container within 30 days of purchase to obtain a credit for the full purchase price 1 License Grant Nortel Networks NA Inc Nortel Networks grants the end user of the Software Licensee a personal nonexclusive nontransferable license a to use the Software ei
496. ty IE field of the call setup message The Called Party IE must match the directory number exactly or the router will not answer the call For switches in the United States and Canada you may also have to configure the Service Profile Identifier SPID The SPID identifies an ISDN device to the switch so that it knows which services to provide Using the BCC To configure phone numbers for a local phone list navigate to the pri or channel for bri prompt and enter local phone number phone number lt number gt number is a numeric string up to 20 characters For example pri 2 1 local phone number phone number 5553427 308621 14 00 Rev 00 15 23 Configuring Dial Services If necessary you can enter a subaddress for the main phone number The subaddress is useful when you have several routers at a destination site but the ISDN provider assigns only one phone number to the destination site To reach a specific router an incoming call has to specify both the number and the subaddress After a phone number is configured you can specify a subaddress Navigate to the local phone number prompt and enter subaddress extension lt number gt number is a numeric string up to 25 characters For example to set an extension for the local phone number 5553427 enter local phone number 2 1 5553427 subaddress extension 897 If necessary enter the SPID supplied by your ISDN provider when you ordered service Ignore this parameter
497. u Dial y 79 Line 2 32 7 Chicago amp 0 Configuration of the New York router Circuit 3 192 32 16 2 Circuit 1 192 32 14 1 El the local interface to Los Angeles Dial device Circuit 2 192 32 15 1 Dallas the local interface to Chicago Circuit 3 192 32 16 1 the local interface to Dallas DS0014A Figure 1 3 Example of Demand Lines Pools and Circuits In Figure 1 3 three circuits share two physical lines that make up demand pool 1 Note that only two of the circuits using demand pool 1 can be active simultaneously because only two modems are available The IP addresses are associated with each circuit not with the physical line In addition to assigning a demand pool ID to each circuit you can assign protocol interfaces and configure phone lists for use with V 25bis Hayes and ISDN signaling For more information see Chapter 15 Customizing Phone Lists 308621 14 00 Rev 00 1 9 Configuring Dial Services Demand Circuit Protocols The protocol for a demand circuit can be either PPP or frame relay A frame relay demand circuit can have any number of service records and PVCs Typically frame relay connections are used with ISDN lines PPP and frame relay circuits can use the same demand pool Figure 1 3 on page 1 9 shows an example of a PPP demand circuit over modem lines Figure 1 4 shows a frame relay demand circuit over ISDN lines Frame relay network Router D 7 BRI Frame TI
498. u define the role of a router by defining the backup mode of the circuit Do not specify the same value for both sides of the circuit To modify the backup mode see Modifying Which Router Initiates a Call on page 13 10 Bandwidth for Backup Circuits Time sensitive protocols or interactive protocols for example Telnet may not function correctly over a backup circuit that has less bandwidth than the primary circuit When user response time is critical backup circuits require the same bandwidth as the primary circuits 7 2 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Dial Backup Implementation Notes Using Unnumbered Interfaces to Dial an Alternative Site IP unnumbered interfaces define a point to point connection for which you do not configure a specific IP address for example 128 185 35 70 Instead you configure an address of 0 0 0 0 Unnumbered interfaces are useful because the router is no longer restricted to a specific IP destination address This gives the router the flexibility to dial another site if it cannot reach the original destination If you configure unnumbered IP over a PPP primary circuit and the connection to the destination router fails the local router automatically dials each phone number in the outgoing phone list until it successfully connects to another router You can also configure unnumbered interfaces for IPX and bridging however the sample network that follows describes only IP For more information about unnum
499. ual Controls the primary and hot standby circuits by operator intervention To return traffic to the primary circuit you manually deactivate the standby circuit This option overrides the Time of Day schedule None Instructs the router to rely exclusively on the Time of Day schedule for primary and standby circuit operation and to ignore this parameter 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 4 5 1 51 308621 14 00 Rev 00 A 41 Configuring Dial Services Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Manual Standby Action Dialup gt Demand Circuits gt Demand Pools gt PPP Circuits gt PPP Demand Circuits No Action No Action Activate Deactivate Allows you to manually control the standby circuit Select Activate to activate a standby or hot standby circuit Select Deactivate to bring down a standby circuit Accept the default No Action if you do not want to manually activate a standby circuit 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 4 5 1 52 Standby Primary Circuit Dialup gt Demand Circuits gt Demand Pools gt PPP Circuits gt PPP Demand Circuits None Circuit number of a leased line Specifies the primary circuit that the hot standby circuit backs up This option is available only if the Standby Mode parameter is Hot Standby Click on the Values button Site Manager displays a list of primary and bandwidth on dem
500. uit Type parameter Site Manager does not allow you to enter a pool ID You must create a pool before you can specify a circuit as a bandwidth circuit The router first creates the circuit as a normal circuit 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 4 5 1 35 A 78 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Site Manager Parameters Parameter Bandwidth Mode Path Dialup gt Bandwidth On Demand Circuits gt Bandwidth On Demand Circuit Definition gt Cet Type gt Circuit Options Default Non Monitor for leased circuits Dynamic Monitor for demand circuits Options Non Monitor Monitor Dynamic Monitor demand circuits only Function Determines whether the router serves as the monitor router The level of congestion determines when the router provides an additional circuit to carry data across the network Instructions Select one of the following options Monitor Instructs the router to watch the congestion on the line or bundle Only one router on the link can serve as the monitor router and activate a secondary line The other router must be set to Non Monitor If both are set to Monitor they may try to activate a secondary line simultaneously resulting in a collision on the network If you configure bandwidth on demand service to aid a demand circuit and this parameter is set to Monitor ensure that the demand circuit s Connection Mode parameter is set to Collision Master or Collision Slave Non Monitor Instructs the non monitor router to wait for
501. uits gt Phone Out gt Outgoing Phone List gt Add gt Phone Number Backup Circuits PPP or Frame Relay gt Primary Circuit Definition or FR Primary Interface Definition gt Phone Out gt Outgoing Phone List gt Add gt Phone Number Bandwidth Circuits Bandwidth On Demand Circuit Definition gt Phone Out gt Outgoing Phone List gt Add gt Phone Number ISDN or Dial Sync Dial Sync Dial Async ISDN Distinguishes whether the phone number is for a V 25bis or Hayes connection or a direct ISDN network connection Additionally it indicates whether the V 25bis number is for a synchronous or asynchronous interface Choose an option as follows Dial Sync or Dial Async if the router is using V 25bis signaling Dial Async if the router is using Hayes signaling ISDN if the router establishes the connection over an ISDN line You must also supply values for the ISDN Numbering Type and Numbering Plan parameters If you have a line pool that combines ISDN V 25bis and Hayes signaling the destination phone number for some lines may be the same If this is the case you need to enter the destination phone number twice once as type ISDN and once as type Dial Sync or Dial Async The router then has two lines to dial the call 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 4 6 1 7 A 98 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instruction
502. uits in a demand circuit group also become available The router does not bring up the circuits until it receives an incoming call Demand circuit groups can only receive calls A circuit group can use more than one demand pool This enables the router to use one configuration for circuits across the router s slots because demand pools cannot use lines from different slots Each demand circuit group has its own ID This number is distinct from the demand pool ID that identifies the line pool Both individual demand circuits and demand circuit groups can use the same demand pool 308621 14 00 Rev 00 6 7 Configuring Dial Services Using Demand Circuit Groups with Dial Backup Service You can use demand circuit groups with dial backup service to dial an alternative site if the original destination cannot be reached For information about using demand circuit groups and dial backup see Simplifying Unnumbered Configurations with Demand Circuit Groups on page 7 4 Managing Broadcast Traffic over Demand Circuits Many of the routing protocols that you can select for a demand circuit send update packets out to the network Update packets maintain routing tables and gather information about network resources For dial on demand the frequency of these update packets forces the dial up connection to remain activated unless you configure a time of day to deactivate it When routers exchange update packets the physical connection is esta
503. ult Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Site Manager Parameters Backup Pool ID Dialup gt Backup Circuits gt Frame Relay gt FR Primary Interface Definition None 1 to 255 Identifies the backup pool for the primary circuit Enter the ID number of the backup pool this circuit should use 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 4 5 1 5 Primary Down Time Dialup gt Backup Circuits gt Frame Relay gt FR Primary Interface Definition 5 minutes 1 to 999 999 minutes Specifies the amount of time the router waits after it boots before activating a backup connection This timer ensures that the primary connection is not operating before the router activates a backup connection Enter the amount of time the router should wait before activating a backup connection 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 4 5 1 17 Use Backup Interface Filters Dialup gt Backup Circuits gt Frame Relay gt FR Primary Interface Definition Disabled Enabled Disabled Enables the routers to filter unwanted data from going across the backup circuit This parameter is configurable only if the interface type is primary shared Select Enable to use filters otherwise accept the default 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 9 1 1 34 308621 14 00 Rev 00 A 75 Configuring Dial Services Frame Relay Service Control Parameter Demand and Dial Backup To enable frame relay for an interfac
504. ultiline circuit or leased multilink circuit as a primary circuit If the primary circuit fails the router activates a backup circuit to continue transmitting data To configure frame relay backup circuits skip this section and go to Creating Frame Relay Backup Circuits for Group Mode PVCs on page 13 5 To configure PPP backup circuits Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window choose Dialup The Dialup menu opens Choose Backup Circuits The Backup Circuits menu opens Choose PPP The Primary Circuit Definition window opens which lists the leased circuits that you have configured Select a leased circuit name and click on Cct Type The Circuit Options window opens Set the Circuit Type parameter to Primary Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 67 Set the Backup Pool ID parameter to the ID of the backup pool that you want this circuit to use then click on OK Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 68 You return to the Primary Circuit Definition window which displays the defaults for each parameter Site Manager also adds the buttons Apply Schedule and Phone Out Repeat steps 4 through 6 to configure more primary circuits Keep the Primary Circuit Definition window open and go to the next section Specifying the Backup Mode 308621 14 00 Rev 00
505. umber by completing the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window choose Dialup The Dialup menu opens 5 Set the Directory Number parameter as follows e Router 1 4364444 e Router 2 4363333 2 Choose Local Phone Numbers The ISDN Local Phone Lines window opens 3 Click on Local Phones The ISDN Local Phone Numbers window opens 4 Click on Add The Phone Number window opens Set the SPID parameter as follows e Router 1 50843644440000 e Router 2 50843633330000 Click on OK You return to the ISDN Local Phone Numbers window Click on Done Click on Done You return to the ISDN Local Phone Lines window You return to the Configuration Manager window 308621 14 00 Rev 00 B 43 Appendix C BCC show Commands Use the BCC show command to display configuration and statistical information about dial on demand and dial backup service See Using the Bay Command Console BCC for information about show command syntax This appendix contains information about the following show commands Command Page show dial demand summary C 5 show dial demand pools CS show dial demand circuits general Fi show dial demand circuits advanced C show dial demand lines C 8 show dial demand schedules
506. umber of errors received Total number of errors transmitted Number of packets received without error Number of packets transmitted without error 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Receive Errors Bad Frames Runt Frames Frame Rejects Frames Too Long Overflow Frames Transmit Errors Underflow frames System Errors Receive Rejects Transmit Rejects T1 Timeouts Memory Errors BCC show Commands Number of bad receive frames caused by frame check sequence FCS errors or nonoctet aligned errors Number of runt frames that is frames shorter than the normal size received on this line Number of frame reject errors received on this line Number of frames received on this line that exceeded the MTU Number of overflow frames received on this line in which the device s FIFO buffer overflowed before obtaining the next DMA cycle No buffer resources are available Number of retransmission underflow errors These errors occur when the device s FIFO buffer empties before the device obtains the next DMA request Number of reject frames received Number of reject frames transmitted Number of T1 timeouts detected The T1 timer is the link retransmission timer Link control frames are retransmitted when the T1 expires This timer tracks the number of timeouts Number of memory errors detected A memory error occurs when the DMA cycle expires without obtaining the bus within 26 ms Memory errors may indicate faulty hard
507. uring WAN Lines Services Using Modem Factory Defaults For the ARN using the V 34 Modem Adapter module you can specify whether exclusive use of the factory default modem initialization string is enabled or disabled When the factory default string is enabled the router sends only the default string AT amp d0 amp k3 amp XOSO0 2S2 43 to the modem When disabled the router sends a user specified initialization string after sending the default string Set the user specified string in the Modem Config String parameter Site Manager or in the modem init string BCC Commands in the user specified string take precedence over the factory default command string 308621 14 00 Rev 00 10 15 Configuring Dial Services Using the BCC To enable or disable the factory default settings for the modem configuration navigate to the modem prompt and enter factory defaults load lt state gt state is enabled or disabled For example modem 2 1 factory defaults load enabled Using Site Manager To enable or disable the factory default settings for the modem configuration Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window click on the COM connector whose configuration you want to change The connector name should have a D B or W next to it The Edit Connector window opens 2 Click on Edit Modem The V 34 Modem Interface Parameters window opens 3 Set the
508. urther identify the remote router For ISDN calls this subaddress is useful when there are several routers at a destination site but the ISDN provider assigns only one phone number to the destination An incoming call must specify the number and subaddress to reach a specific router To configure an extension navigate to the out phone number prompt and enter subaddress extension lt string gt string is a numeric string up to 25 characters Do not enter space special or alphabetic characters in the extension For example to configure an extension for the outgoing phone number 9786665432 enter out phone number backup 8 1 1 9786665432 subaddress extension 456 For ISDN configurations go to the next section otherwise go to Setting Up the Caller Resolution Table on page 3 24 Creating the Local Phone List ISDN Only A router uses its local phone number for the following purposes e To identify itself when it places a call to a remote router The local router includes its own phone number in the ISDN outgoing call setup message e To identify itself to the ISDN switch so that the switch can activate the circuit In the United States and Canada the Service Provider ID SPID is also required e To ensure that an incoming call was received at the intended destination When the local router receives a call it checks that the phone number in the incoming call setup message is the same as its own local phone number
509. ustomizing Demand Circuits Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window choose Dialup The Dialup menu opens Choose Demand Circuits The Demand Pools window opens Click on PPP Circuits or FR Circuits The PPP Demand Circuits window or the FR Demand Circuits window opens 4 Select the circuit that you want to modify 5 Set the following parameters Callback Mode Callback Server Delay Time sec e Callback Client Delay Time sec Click on Help or see the parameter descriptions beginning on page A 43 6 Click on Apply and then click on Done You return to the Demand Pools window 7 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window Choosing the Severity Level for Error Messages Using the BCC you can specify the severity level of debug messages that the router will collect in the event log Debug messages contain information about demand circuit activity The router collects these messages in an event log which you can view to evaluate how the router is operating To assign the severity level navigate to the demand circuit prompt and enter debug message level lt severity_level gt severity_level can be low medium high or verbose You may want to try each setting to see which messages are entered in the log For example to set the debug message severity level to medium enter de
510. usy Consequently the router can use only what is available If you select this option you must select only those channels available for communication For example if the provider offers channels B1 through B6 you configure only channels 1 through 6 You should not select all the B channels your configuration should match your service 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Implementation Notes for All Dial Services PRI Multirate PRI multirate enables you to group B channels in multiples of 64 Kb s to dynamically allocate bandwidth on a call by call basis Depending on how many B channels you combine the bandwidth can range from 128 Kb s to 1472 Kb s This allows you to choose the most suitable bandwidth for an application Applications such as dial backup and video conferences benefit from the flexibility of multirate service These applications require more than one B channel but not the full complement of B channels for PRI Also ISDN service providers offer multirate service at lower tariffs than other ISDN services Multirate is especially useful when frame relay is used across an ISDN line You can group multirate dial lines to provide backup connections if the primary connection fails Multirate service is available for all three dial services on the ASN using only the Dual MCT1 Net Module and on the BLN and BCN using only the Dual or Single Port MCT1 and QMCT1 Link Modules The following switches for North America and Canada support mul
511. uting for IPX receive only If the router does not receive data it terminates the connection either direction If the router does not receive or transmit data it terminates the connection The inactivity can be in either direction For example to set the inactivity mode for the circuit to phoenix enter demand circuit to phoenix inactivity mode receive only 12 22 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Using Site Manager To set the inactivity mode Customizing Demand Circuits Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window choose Dialup The Dialup menu opens Choose Demand Circuits The Demand Pools window opens Click on PPP Circuits or FR Circuits The PPP Demand Circuits window or the FR Demand Circuits window opens 4 Select the circuit that you want to modify 5 Set the Inactivity Mode parameter Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 54 6 Click on Apply then click on Done You return to the Demand Pools window 7 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window Changing the Demand Circuit Name Each demand circuit has a unique circuit name Using Site Manager you can modify the circuit name When you add a demand circuit to an interface Site Manager automatically assigns a circuit name for example Demand 1 To modify the circuit name Site Manager Procedu
512. ution Table gt Add gt Caller Name and Secret Password Unsecured Any text string maximum of 20 characters Specifies the CHAP secret you assign to this interface The CHAP secret is for identification and security purposes and it must be the same on both sides of the connection When one router places a call to another router an authentication process takes place During this phase the routers exchange challenge packets that include the CHAP secret Both routers on a link must have the same secret to correctly calculate responses to the challenges If you configure CHAP as the authentication protocol specify the CHAP secret If not ignore this parameter 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 2 3 1 4 PAP Password Dialup gt Caller Resolution Table gt Add gt Caller Name and Secret Password None Any text string maximum of 25 characters Specifies the PAP password you assign to this interface The PAP password is for identification and security purposes and must be the same on both sides of the connection During the authentication phase all Password Authenticate Request messages that the calling router sends to the called router must include the correct password If the password is not correct the called router sends an Authenticate Negative Acknowledgment Authenticate NAK message and the calling router does not activate the connection If you configured PAP as the authentication protocol specify a unique PAP password If not ignore t
513. value for the DTE You can preassign the identifier value at the time you order ISDN service or the router can learn the value from the switch dynamically when you place a call and the line becomes active Either way the switch assigns this value To specify the TEI type enter x25 tei type lt type gt type can be fixed Tells the router that you will enter the identifier assigned by the switch before placing any calls auto Tells the router that it learns the identifier dynamically when the line is active 11 12 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Customizing ISDN Lines Configuring the TEI Value The x25 tei value parameter assigns a number to the X 25 DTE to identify it to the ISDN switch This parameter is available only if you enable X 25 over the D channel for a fixed TEI type To configure the value enter x25 tei value lt integer gt integer is a value from 0 to 63 Enter the TEI value that the switch provider assigned when you ordered ISDN service If the TEI type is set to auto ignore this parameter For example bri 1 1 x25 tei type fixed x25 tei value 7 To disable X 25 over the D channel go to Disabling X 25 over the D Channel on page 11 14 Using Site Manager To configure X 25 over the D channel for a BRI line Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window The ISDN Dialup window opens click on an ISDN connector 2 Click on Edit D Chan T
514. value from 1 to 5000 seconds For example dial bri 1 1 convergence timer 350 9 4 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Customizing Line Pools Specifying the Asynchronous Modem Control Character Map If you are using asynchronous PPP and asychronous modems you may want to set up asynchronous modem control characters During LCP negotiations the peers negotiate the characters that they will recognize as asynchronous modem control characters PPP creates a 32 bit map that represents the negotiated control characters Both routers use this map in sending and receiving data packets Although the default value serves for almost all modems you can configure the map for other modem control characters if necessary The async control character map specifies a value representing one or more asynchronous modem control characters for the peer to recognize escape and that may occur in the data packet Each bit in the map corresponds to one control character 0x00 the right end of the map through Ox1f the left end of the map that is 0 through 31 decimal The actual map is a value used essentially as a mask For example the default map value 0xa0000 655360 decimal allows the escaping of the control characters 0x11 XON and 0x13 XOFF if they occur in the data stream The values 0x7d and 0x7e are always escaped If you have a modem that requires control characters different from the default you can build your own async control character map De
515. ve Only If the router does not receive data it terminates the connection The router disregards data it transmits Either Direction If the router does not receive or transmit data it terminates the connection The inactivity can be in either direction 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 4 5 1 46 A 54 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Site Manager Parameters Circuit Schedule Parameters Demand and Dial Backup The circuit schedule parameters determine the dial circuit s availability These parameters are located in each service s Circuit Time of Day Schedule window Figure A 11 shows an example of this window Done Add Apply Delete Values Help Days Start Time End Time Inactivity Timeout Availability Mode Figure A 11 Circuit Time of Day Schedule Window The parameter descriptions follow 308621 14 00 Rev 00 A 55 Configuring Dial Services Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Days Demand Circuits Dialup gt Demand Circuits gt Demand Pools gt PPP or FR Circuits gt PPP or FR Demand Circuits gt Schedule gt Circuit Time of Day Schedule or Pool Availability List gt Add gt Circuit Time of Day Schedule Backup Circuits Dialup gt Backup Circuits gt PPP or Frame Relay gt Primary Circuit Definition or FR Primary Interface Definition gt Schedule gt Circuit Time of Day Schedule gt Add gt Circuit Time of Day Schedule Weekday Monday through Su
516. vider for example calling line ID which enables you to determine the phone number of the incoming call Link Access Procedure D To perform call setup and signaling functions between your equipment and the ISDN network the ITU T defined recommendation Q 921 which outlines Link Access Procedure D LAPD the data link layer protocol for the D channel ISDN uses LAPD to establish a switched connection on a particular B channel The B channel then allows data to travel between the two end points of that connection LAPD transmits information in frames The fields in a LAPD frame contain addresses control and frame check sequence information The address and control information comprise the LAPD header which sequences the packets and keeps them in the right order The frame check sequence allows the receiver of a frame to detect any errors that may have occurred during transmission Unlike other data link layer protocols LAPD can handle multiple users on the same multiaccess interface Figure 4 3 shows a LAPD frame 308621 14 00 Rev 00 4 3 Configuring Dial Services Opening flag Frame check sequence Closing flag DSO009A Figure 4 3 LAPD Frame The fields in the LAPD frame are as follows The opening flag and closing flag fields are High level Data Link Control HDLC flags that separate one frame from the next The address field contains two kinds of information It provides a data link layer entity more specificall
517. w opens Click on Edit Pools The Demand Circuit Group window opens Set the Number of Circuits parameter Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 63 continued 308621 14 00 Rev 00 12 49 Configuring Dial Services Site Manager Procedure continued You do this 5 Click on Done System responds You return to the Demand Circuit Groups window 6 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window Modifying the Demand Pool That the Demand Circuit Group Uses To modify the demand pool used by the demand circuit group Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window choose Dialup The Dialup menu opens 2 Choose Demand Circuit Groups The Demand Circuit Groups window opens 3 Click on Edit Pools The Demand Circuit Group window opens 4 Click on Add Group The Enter a Demand Pool window opens 5 Set the following parameters Pool ID Number of Circuits Click on Help or see the parameter descriptions beginning on page A 62 6 Click on OK You return to the Demand Circuit Group window 7 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Removing a Demand Circuit Group To remove a demand circuit group Customizing Demand Circuits Site Manager Procedure You d
518. w opens Set the Bandwidth on Demand Pool ID parameter Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 83 Verify that the PPP Circuit Mode parameter is set to Multilink Monitor Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 83 If you selected Monitor for the bandwidth mode when you configured a bandwidth circuit in Chapter 2 Site Manager sets the PPP Circuit Mode parameter accordingly For the remaining parameters in the window accept the defaults or modify the parameters according to the descriptions in Appendix A Click on OK You return to the Bandwidth On Demand Circuit Definition window Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window 14 4 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Customizing Bandwidth on Demand Circuits Table 14 3 explains how to change the monitor parameters Table 14 3 Changing the Monitor Parameters the line falls below the BOD Recovery Threshold and is not considered congested Task Site Manager Parameter Page Specify how often the router checks for BOD Exam Period A 84 congestion Specify a percentage of the maximum BOD Full Threshold A 84 amount of data that can be transmitted across the line Indicate the number of consecutive times BOD Periods to Fail A 85 the line exceeds the BOD Full Threshold and is considered congested Instruct the router which slots to use to Preferred Bandwidth Slo
519. want to modify Enter a new value then click on Apply The phone number appears with the changes at the top of the window Deleting numbers If you want to delete a phone number select the phone number and extension if any and click on Delete Site Manager deletes the number 5 Click on Done You return to appropriate circuits window 6 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window 308621 14 00 Rev 00 15 11 Configuring Dial Services Modifying a Call s Adaption Rate For ISDN calls only the adaption rate specifies the rate at which the local router wants to send data to the remote destination Enter a value of 56 Kb s if the connections to the destination device only support this rate otherwise accept the default 64 Kb s If you are unsure of your network connections ask your network provider If the value of this parameter is less than the value of the Global Adaption Rate parameter then this value overrides the global adaption rate value For example if this parameter is set to 56 Kb s and the global adaption rate is set to 64 Kb s the router uses the rate of 56 Kb s for the outgoing call If the value of the parameters is equal or if you set only the global adaption rate the router uses the global value and ignores the outgoing phone number s value If no value is set for either parameter the router uses the default 64 Kb s For more information about a
520. ware If this count exceeds 5 call your customer service representative 308621 14 00 Rev 00 C 27 Configuring Dial Services show modem errors The show modem errors command displays receive transmit and system errors for the interface You can use the following filter flag and filter argument for this command slot lt s o amp shows information for a specified router slot The output contains the following information Receive Errors Slot Conn Bad Frames Runt Frames Frame Rejects Frames Too Long Overflow Frames Transmit Errors Slot Conn Underflow Frames The slot and the connector number where the modem module resides Number of bad receive frames caused by frame check sequence FCS errors or nonoctet aligned errors Number of runt frames that is frames shorter than the normal size received on this line Number of frame reject errors received on this line Number of frames received on this line that exceeded the MTU Number of overflow frames received on this line in which the device s FIFO buffer overflowed before obtaining the next DMA cycle No buffer resources are available The slot and the connector number where the modem module resides Number of retransmission underflow errors These errors occur when the router s FIFO buffer empties before the router obtains the next DMA request C 28 308621 14 00 Rev 00 System Errors Slot Conn Receive Rejects Trans
521. whether this router initiates or receives calls WAN protocol for the demand circuit Type of demand circuit that is normal or standby Role of the router in relation to its peer for callback operation Demand Line Information Serial Lines Slot Module Conn Link State Media Type Async Baud Rate Active Circuit Name The slot module number and the connector number where the dial interface resides Indicates whether the link is initialized or inactive Signaling type for the modem interface Baud rate for the interface Circuit name Demand Line Information ISDN Lines Slot Module Conn Link State Channel Count Channels in use Priority The slot module number and the connector number where the dial interface resides Indicates whether the link is initialized or inactive Number of B channels in the pool Number of active B channels Priority value assigned to the channel C 6 308621 14 00 Rev 00 BCC show Commands show dial demand circuits general The show dial demand circuits general command provides information about all demand circuits You can use the following filter flags and filter arguments with this command pool lt pool_ia gt shows circuit information about a specific demand pool circuit lt circuit_name gt shows circuit information about a specific demand circuit The output contains the following information Demand Circuit Name Circuit name Pool ID ID of the lin
522. which lines are configured for backup pools You can use the following filter flag and filter argument with this command pool lt pool_id gt shows the line information for a specified backup pool The output contains the following information Line Information Serial Pool ID ID of the line pool Slot Module Conn The slot module number and the connector number where the dial interface resides Link WAN Type Specifies the link type synchronous or asynchronous for the line Link State Indicates whether the link is initialized or inactive Media Type Signaling type for the modem interface Async Baud Rate Baud rate for the interface Active Circuit Name Circuit name of the primary circuit that uses this line If the line is not in use the value None is displayed Line Priority The priority assignment of the line in the pool Line Information ISDN Lines Pool ID ID of the line pool Slot Module Conn The slot module number and the connector number where the dial interface resides Channel Count Number of B channels in the pool Channels in use Number of active B channels Priority Priority value assigned to the channel C 16 308621 14 00 Rev 00 BCC show Commands show dial backup schedules The show dial backup schedules command provides information about the availability schedules of backup circuits You can use the following filter flags and filter arguments with this command pool lt pool_ia gt
523. width On Demand Circuit Definition gt Phone Out gt Outgoing Phone List gt Add gt Phone Number None Up to 25 numeric characters Specifies the telephone number of the remote router Enter the telephone number of the remote router Do not enter space special or alphabetic characters in the telephone number 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 4 6 1 4 308621 14 00 Rev 00 A 95 Configuring Dial Services Parameter Outgoing Phone Ext SubAddr Path Dialup gt Demand Backup Bandwidth On Demand Circuits Demand Circuits PPP or FR Circuits gt PPP or FR Demand Circuits gt Phone Out gt Outgoing Phone List gt Add gt Phone Number Backup Circuits PPP or Frame Relay gt Primary Circuit Definition or FR Primary Interface Definition gt Phone Out gt Outgoing Phone List gt Add gt Phone Number Bandwidth Circuits Bandwidth On Demand Circuit Definition gt Phone Out gt Outgoing Phone List gt Add gt Phone Number Default None Options Any string up to 25 numeric characters Function For V 25bis Hayes and ISDN calls specifies a subaddress or extension for a phone number further identifying the remote router For ISDN calls this subaddress is useful when there are several routers at a destination site but the ISDN provider only assigns the destination one phone number An incoming call must specify the number and subaddress to reach a specific router Instructions Enter an extension subaddress of up to 25 characters Do no
524. window 7 Click on Done You return to the Demand Pools window 8 Click on Done You return to the Configuration Manager window 12 4 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Adding a Service Record To add a service record Customizing Demand Circuits Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window choose Dialup The Dialup menu opens Choose Demand Circuits The Demand Pools window opens 3 Click on FR Circuits The FR Demand Circuits window opens Click on Demand Intf The FR Demand Interface List window opens Click on Services Modify the Service Name parameter only if you are sure that the new name is unique for the router Click on Help or see Configuring Frame Relay Services The Frame Relay Demand Service List window opens Site Manager supplies the service name Click on Add to create a service record The Frame Relay Service Add window opens Set the DLCI Number then click on OK Click on Help or see Configuring Frame Relay Services You return to the Frame Relay Demand Service List window Click on Done until you return to the Configuration Manager window 308621 14 00 Rev 00 12 5 Configuring Dial Services Adding or Modifying PVCs To add or modify PVCs Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window choo
525. ws schedule information for the demand circuit using a specified demand pool circuit lt circuit_name gt shows the schedule information for a specified demand circuit The output contains the following information Demand Circuit Name Circuit name Demand Pool ID Day s Start Time End Time Availability Mode ID of the line pool Days that the demand circuit can be active Time that the demand circuit activates Time when the demand circuit deactivates Specifies whether the demand circuit is available within the start and end time or outside that specified interval 308621 14 00 Rev 00 C 9 Configuring Dial Services show dial demand in phone numbers The show dial demand in phone numbers command displays the incoming phone list numbers You can use the following filter flag and filter argument with this command circuit lt circuit_name gt displays the incoming phone list for the specified demand circuit only The output contains the following information Incoming Phone Numbers Incoming phone number listed in the incoming phone list Phone Extension Extension of the incoming phone number Demand Circuit Name Name of the demand circuit show dial demand out phone numbers The show dial demand out phone numbers command provides information about the outgoing phone numbers that you configure You can use the following filter flags and filter arguments with this command pool lt pool_id gt show
526. y X121 Telex Standard Private Indicates the standard that the phone number plan follows The router passes this information to the ISDN switch If you set the Switch Type parameter to BRI NTT BRI KDD or BRI NI select the value Unknown For all other switches Site Manager uses the default value Telephony Accept Telephony unless your service provider instructs otherwise 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 8 12 1 10 308621 14 00 Rev 00 A 93 Configuring Dial Services Outgoing Phone List Parameters The Outgoing Phone List window Figure A 21 contains the outgoing phone list parameters a tgoing Phone List s N Tons Add Add After Apply Delete Values Help Outgoing Phone Number Outgoing Phone Ext SubAddr Outgoing Phone Delimiter Phone Number Type ISDN Numbering Type ISDN Numbering Plan Figure A 21 Outgoing Phone List Window The parameter descriptions follow A 94 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Site Manager Parameters Outgoing Phone Number Dialup gt Demand Backup Bandwidth On Demand Circuits Demand Circuits PPP or FR Circuits gt PPP or FR Demand Circuits gt Phone Out gt Outgoing Phone List gt Add gt Phone Number Backup Circuits PPP or Frame Relay gt Primary Circuit Definition or FR Primary Interface Definition gt Phone Out gt Outgoing Phone List gt Add gt Phone Number Bandwidth Circuits Band
527. y a logical point that defines the data link between the user and the network This portion of the address is the service access point identifier SAPI The address field also contains a number to identify the terminal equipment connected to the ISDN network This is the terminal endpoint identifier TEI Either the network assigns a unique number to each device or you set this number at the device The control field identifies the type of frame This field also contains sequence numbering The information field contains data to set up the link The frame check sequence is a cyclic redundancy check CRC 4 4 308621 14 00 Rev 00 ISDN Overview Call Control on the D Channel ITU T recommendation Q 931 outlines standards for out of band call control at the network layer for ISDN communication The primary function of call control is to set up and take down ISDN calls on the B channels ISDN Interfaces One of the key concepts in ISDN is a set of universal interfaces that allow you to purchase equipment and services from any ISDN provider All providers can therefore implement ISDN similarly ITU T created a set of physical and logical interfaces to accomplish this goal ITU T divides ISDN interfaces into two categories functional groups and reference points The following sections describe these two groups Functional Groups Functional groups perform specific tasks that are necessary for you to access an ISDN network Thes
528. ynamically e Choose a network layer protocol that can retransmit data between the PVC and the network if the data is lost Although the router makes a dial connection and starts sending data the PVCs do not always activate immediately Consequently you might lose data during the first part of the transmission Therefore it is important to use protocols that can account for this situation and ensure that any lost data can be sent again We strongly recommend using the Internet Protocol IP or the Internetwork Packet Exchange IPX 308621 14 00 Rev 00 1 11 Configuring Dial Services e Ifthe remote routers in your network are using IP ensure that they also use the Address Resolution Protocol ARP and not Inverse ARP This enables the local router to learn address information Adding Bandwidth Service for Congested Demand Lines To relieve congestion across a demand line you can use up to 29 additional lines from an existing bandwidth on demand pool providing a total of 30 lines for communication This feature is only for demand configurations that use PPP as the data link layer protocol Adding bandwidth to a congested demand line benefits time critical applications that require data to reach its destination efficiently To provide more bandwidth for a demand circuit you associate the demand circuit with a bandwidth on demand pool then you configure parameters that monitor congestion across the line After you enable bandwid
529. you from configuring the other monitor parameters Multilink Monitor Site Manager supplies this value if the Bandwidth Mode is Monitor It enables PPP multilink and tells the router to monitor congestion If you configure bandwidth on demand service to aid a demand circuit and this parameter is set to Monitor ensure that the demand circuit s Connection Mode parameter is set to Collision Master or Collision Slave Dynamic Monitor Select this option for BAP connections to allocate bandwidth This option lets the router function as the monitor or non monitor router based on the direction of the call The router who initiates the call is the monitor and the router who receives the call is the non monitor If your router is communicating with a non Nortel Networks router select this option If your router is communicating with a Nortel Networks router that uses software prior to Version 11 01 do not select this option 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 9 2 2 1 50 308621 14 00 Rev 00 Configuring Dial Services Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID BOD Exam Period Dialup gt Bandwidth On Demand Circuits gt Bandwidth On Demand Circuit Definition gt Options gt Bandwidth On Demand Monitor Options 10 0 10 second intervals 5 to 200 in 0 10 second intervals Indicates how often the router checks the b
530. zsssincconssluidvdontiinendosiudid e aai aa EE E Eaa EE aae C 13 show dial Dackip OOS ace wiresraaeccemcseacoeomnsai anand eenehonsiaenenaneides E ES C 14 show Ciel backup CWE sanaa aa PT Shov dial Backup IES sisaan ausis nE aE Eaa C 16 show dial Dackup schedules anne nee eer cee merrren rerrr ec rent serrce mere rere ee C 17 show dial backup out phone NUMDETS sscciccicascatvnsts wudecivis meteaierd wtusuad vader aaiaeNe Oates C 17 show dial backup caller resolution 0 ee ere E rte erect rere earner rer C 18 show dial backup pap chapinformation scncacecicnnetiscsahcndsanaannescntninmencscannedenaaneeetsnens C 19 Commands Rar AL Dial SPICES asosini adaa dan isis eta Soetlsean vada C 20 show dial calls elute aons ra P T A Arada oei T T C 21 xviii 308621 14 00 Rev 00 show dial callartesolution sgeccdecivssescesschnsssaseisandedas iescurdetespecvacsiwasssvadzaaarsdsderasteeseeyaennces C 22 show dial PARAS h AOI MAO caossu aannaaien aAa ai C 22 show dial locahphone TNS a ass cece ceeded scarann ania naa decadent anual C 23 Modom Commando soriana ere re Per rrr en reerr Tee ererr emer eet rn orererrrrrreerr rere rer tre tr C 24 show modem alerts sonsaina ee A E E E E C 24 eee Au E E E E E A A E EEE C 25 ca BAM FY EOE E T eta AE IRTA E AE OEE S A E A E C 28 show modem sample boeide T T A E T ET brai eyes C 29 shon Modom BLAIS aaa C 30 Appendix D Ordering ISDN Lines in the United States crdenng BRILLES ssc

Avaya Configuring Dial Services User's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents